Archive for category: Anycerti.com – BLOG

EUROCODE Introduction

09 Apr 2014 Comments
Off

1. EUROCODE 소개

유로 코드는 건물 및 토목 공학 작품에 대한 유럽의 구조물 설계 규정으로써 유럽 연합 (EU)의 회원국의 전문 지식을 통합하여  지난 30 년 동안 개발된 가장 진보 규정 중의 하나 입니다.
유로 코드는 유럽의 공공 및 민간 부문에 대해 의무적으로 적용되는 사실상의 가장 근본적인 표준이며,  유럽 및 전세계에서 통용되는 구조물의  평가의 표준적 프레임 워크를 제공하며 나아가  CE Marking의은 근본적 규정이 됩니다

유로코드의 분류는 다음과 같습니다.

0 – Basis

Eurocode 0: Basis of structural design

1 – Actions

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-1: General actions – Densities, self-weight and imposed loads

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-2: General actions – Actions on structures exposed to fire

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-3: General actions – Snow loads

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-4: General actions – Wind actions

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-5: General actions – Thermal actions

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-6: General actions – Actions during execution

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 1-7: General actions – Accidental actions

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 2: Traffic loads on bridges

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 3: Actions induced by cranes and machinery

Eurocode 1: Actions on structures – Part 4: Silos and tanks

2 – Concrete

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules for building and civil engineering structures

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 2: Bridges

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 3: Liquid retaining and containment structures

Eurocode 2 packages

2/1 Design of concrete building and civil engineering structures (excluding bridges and liquid retaining and containment structures)

2/2 Design of concrete bridges

2/3 Design of concrete liquid-retaining and containment structures

3 – Steel

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-3: General – Cold formed thin gauge members and sheeting

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-4: General – Structures in stainless steel

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-5: General – Strength and stability of planar plated structures without transverse loading

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-6: General – Strength and stability of shell structures

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-7: General – Design values for plated structures subjected to out of plane loading

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-8: General – Design of joints

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-9: General – Fatigue strength

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-10: General – Material toughness and through thickness assessment

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-11: General – Design of structures with tension components

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 1-12: General – Supplementary rules for high strength steels

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 2-1: Bridges

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 3-1 Towers, masts and chimneys – Towers and masts

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 3-2: Towers, masts and chimneys – Chimneys

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 4-1: Silos, tanks and pipelines – Silos

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 4-2: Silos, tanks and pipelines – Tanks

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 4-3: Silos, tanks and pipelines – Pipelines

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 5: Piling

Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures – Part 6: Crane supporting structures

Eurocode 3 packages

3/1 Design of steel building and civil engineering structures (excluding bridges, silos, tanks and pipelines, steel piling, crane supporting structures, and towers and masts)

3/2 Design of steel bridges

3/3 Design of steel silos, tanks and pipelines

3/4 Design of steel piling

3/5 Design of steel crane-supporting structures

3/6 Design of steel towers and masts

4 – Composite

Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules and rules for buildings

Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete structures – Part 2: Bridges

Eurocode 4 packages

4/1 Design of composite steel and concrete building and civil engineering structures (excluding bridges)

4/2 Design of composite steel and concrete bridges

5 – Timber

Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules and rules for buildings

Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures – Part 2: Bridges

Eurocode 5 packages

5/1 Design of timber buildings and civil engineering structures (excluding bridges)

5/2 Design of timber bridges

6 – Masonry

Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures – Part 1-1: General – Rules for reinforced and unreinforced masonry, including lateral loading

Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures – Part 2: Selection and execution of masonry

Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures – Part 3: Simplified calculation methods for masonry structures

Eurocode 6 packages

6 Design of masonry building and civil engineering structures (excluding bridges)

7 – Geo​-​technical

Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design – Part 1: General rules

Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design – Part 2: Ground investigation and testing

8 – Earthquake

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 1: General rules seismic actions and rules for buildings

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 2: Bridges

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 3: Strengthening and repair of buildings

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 4: Silos, tanks and pipelines

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 5: Foundations, retaining structures and geotechnical aspects

Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance – Part 6: Towers, masts and chimneys

9 – Aluminium​

Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-1: General – Common rules

Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-2: General – Structural fire design

Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-3: Additional rules for structures susceptible to fatigue

Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-4: Supplementary rules for trapezoidal sheeting

Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures – Part 1-5: Supplementary rules for shell structures

Eurocode 9 packages

9 Design of all aluminium structures

 

NIJ – National Institute of Justice Testing

08 Apr 2014 Comments
Off

National Institute of Justice(NIJ)는 미국 법무성(United States Department of Justice) 산하조직으로써 수사관련 연구 개발 및 평가국입니다. 이 기관에서는 범죄예방, 마약범죄,과학수사, 교정 등에 관하여 다양한 연구 및 개발이 이루어지고 있고 관련규격 등이 제정되기도 합니다.

아래는 적합성대상 장비류 목록입니다.

  • 방탄류
  • 방검류
  • 자동권총류
  • 수갑류

Personal Body Armor Testing

- 방탄, 방검 관련

제도 개요 :

2006년 미국 DOJ ( the U. S. Department of Justice )의 National Institute of Justice (NIJ) Office of Science and Technology 가  발의하여 제정된 인정제도

인정 시험대상 :

- Testing  ballistic- and stab-resistant personal body armor

- To support the voluntary minimum performance standards developed

대상 :

NIJ by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Office of Law Enforcement Standards (OLES).

STD :  

 NIJ 0101.06, July 2008, Sec. 5 Ballistic Resistance of Body Armor, Section 5, Flexible Armor Conditioning Protocol

 NIJ 0101.06, July 2008, Sec. 6 Ballistic Resistance of Body Armor, Section 6, Hard Armor Conditioning Protocol

NIJ 0101.06, July 2008, Sec. 6 Ballistic Resistance of Body Armor, Section 7, Ballistic Test Methods

 NIJ 0101.04, Rev. 2001 Ballistic Resistance of Personal Body Armor

 NIJ 0115.00 Stab Resistance of Personal Body Armor

EN 45545 Railway applications-Fire protection on railway vehicles

21 Mar 2014 Comments
Off

Test according to DIN EN 45545

열차 방화관련 유럽규격  EN 45545 은 7개 부문의 하부규격으로 구성되어 있습니다.
Part 1 (EN 45545-1)

It contains the principal terms and definitions and general regulations governing the classification of rail vehicles in operational and design categories, as well as fire safety objectives.

Operation Categories and Design Categories

Operation Categories

Design Categories

Classified

A

automatic train and having no emergency trained staff on board

D

double decked vehicles

S

sleeping / couchette vehicles

N

all other vehicles (standard vehicles)

1
not designed or equipped to run on underground sections, tunnels and/or elevated structures

HL 1

HL 1

HL 1

HL 1

2
designed or equipped to run on underground sections, tunnels and/or elevated structures

HL 2

HL 2

HL 2

HL 2

3
designed or equipped to run on underground sections

HL 3

HL 3

HL 3

HL 3

4
designed or equipped to run on underground sections

HL 4

HL 4

HL 4

HL 4

Part 2 (EN 45545-2)

It describes the requirements for the fire behavior of materials and components.

Part 3 (EN 45545-3)

It covers the fire resistance of fire doors.

Part 4 (EN 45545-4)

It contains fire protection requirements for the constructive design of rail vehicles.

Part 5 (EN 45545-5)

It specified for the fire protection requirements of electrical equipment, including that of trolleybuses, track-guided buses and magnetic levitation vehicles.

Part 6 (EN 45545-6)

It describes the required fire detection and alarm systems, fire-fighting equipment and accompanying fire protection measures.

Part 7 (EN 45545-7)

It deals with the fire protection requirements for plants and equipment for flammable liquids and gases.

 

EN 13501-1 : Fire classification of construction products and building elements

20 Mar 2014 Comments
Off

Part : Classification Using Date From Reaction To Fire Tests.
이시험은 건축자재에 대한 화재관련 시험입니다.

Orange115

Test Report Sample[ SBI Method (=Single Burning Item) according to EN 13501-1]

Most construction products sold in Europe will shortly need to be tested and classified using SBI Method (=Single Burning Item).

Orange115

EN 13501-1 Test report sample

 EN13501-1_Test Report Sample Download

IPC TM-650 Test Methods Manual

28 Feb 2014 Comments
Off

아래는 IPC TM-650 Test Methods Manual 목록입니다.

[IPC Association Connecting Electronics Industries]

Test Methods Approved

SECTION 1.0 - Reporting and Measurement Analysis Methods
TM 1.1C Introduction – 1/03
TM 1.2A Calibration – 1/03
TM 1.3A Ambient Conditions – 1/03
TM 1.4A Reporting, General – 1/03
TM 1.5A Reporting, Format – 1/03
TM 1.6A Numerical Reporting – 1/03
TM 1.7A Reporting, Invalid Test Results – 1/03
TM 1.8A Measurement Precision Estimation for Binary Data – 1/03
Includes Calculator and User Guide
TM 1.9A Measurement Precision Estimation for Variables Data – 1/03
Includes Calculator and User Guide
SECTION 2.1 - Visual Test Methods
TM 2.1.1.1 Microsectioning, Ceramic Substrate – 12/87
TM 2.1.1.2A Microsectioning—Semi or Automatic Technique Microsection Equipment (Alternate) – 5/04
TM 2.1.2A Pinhole Evaluation, Dye Penetration Method – 3/76
TM 2.1.3A Plated-Through Hole Structure Evaluation – 8/76
TM 2.1.5A Surface Examination, Unclad and Metal-Clad Material – 12/82
TM 2.1.6B Thickness of Glass Fabric – 12/94
TM 2.1.6.1 Weight of Fabric Reinforcements – 12/94
renumbered from 2.3.12
TM 2.1.7C Thread Count of Glass Fabric – 12/94
TM 2.1.7.1 Thread Count, Organic Fibers – 12/87
TM 2.1.8B Workmanship – 12/94
TM 2.1.9 Surface Scratch Examination Metal-Clad Foil – 5/86
TM 2.1.1E Microsectioning, Manual Method – 5/04
TM 2.1.10A Visual Inspection for Undissolved Dicyandiamide – 12/94
TM 2.1.13B Inspection for Voids in Flexible Printed Board Materials – 5/12
SECTION 2.2 - Dimensional Test Methods
TM 2.2.1A Mechanical Dimensional Verification – 8/97
TM 2.2.2B Optical Dimensional Verification – 8/97
TM 2.2.4C Dimensional Stability, Flexible Dielectric Materials – 5/98
TM 2.2.5A Dimensional Inspections Using Mircosections – 8/97
TM 2.2.6A Hole Size Measurement, Drilled – 8/97
TM 2.2.7A Hole Size Measurement, Plated – 5/86
TM 2.2.8 Location of Holes – 4/73
TM 2.2.10A Hole Location and Conductor Location – 12/83
TM 2.2.12A Thickness of Copper by Weight – 3/76
TM 2.2.12.1 Overall Thickness and Profile Factor of Copper Foils Treated and Untreated – 9/87
TM 2.2.12.2 Weight and Thickness of Copper Foils with Releasable Carriers – 7/89
TM 2.2.12.3 Weight and Thickness Determination of Copper Foils With Etchable Carriers – 7/89
TM 2.2.13.1A Thickness, Plating in Holes, Microhm Method – 1/83
TM 2.2.14 Solder Powder Particle Size Distribution – Screen Method for Types 1-4 – 1/95
TM 2.2.14.1 Solder Powder Particle Size Distribution – Measuring Microscope Method – 1/95
TM 2.2.14.2 Solder Powder Particle Size Distribution – Optical Image Analyzer Method – 1/95
TM 2.2.14.3 Determination of Maximum Solder Powder Particle Size – 1/95
TM 2.2.15 Cable Dimensions (Flat Cable) – 6/79
TM 2.2.16 Artwork Master Evaluation by Use of a Drilled Panel – 12/87
TM 2.2.16.1 Artwork Master Evaluation by Overlay – 12/87
TM 2.2.17A Surface Roughness and Profile of Metallic Foils (Contacting Stylus Technique) – 2/01
TM 2.2.18 Determination of Thickness of Laminates by Mechanical Measurement – 12/94
TM 2.2.18.1 Determination of Thickness of Metallic Clad Laminates, Cross-sectional – 12/94
TM 2.2.19 Measuring Hole Pattern Location – 12/87
TM 2.2.19.1 Length, Width and Perpendicularity of Laminate and Prepreg Panels – 12/94
TM 2.2.20 Solder Paste Metal Content by Weight – 1/95
TM 2.2.21 Planarity of Dielectrics for High Density Interconnection (HDI)/Microvia Technology – 11/98
SECTION 2.3 - Chemical Test Methods
TM 2.3.1 Chemical Processing, Suitable Processing Material – 4/73
TM 2.3.1.1B Chemical Cleaning of Metal-Clad Laminate – 5/86
TM 2.3.2G Chemical Resistance of Flexible Printed Board Materials – 12/07
TM 2.3.3A Chemical Resistance of Insulating Materials – 2/78
TM 2.3.4B Chemical Resistance, Marking Paints and Inks – 8/87
TM 2.3.4.2A Chemical Resistance of Laminates, Prepreg, and Coated Foil Products, by Solvent Exposure – 12/94
TM 2.3.4.3 Chemical Resistance of Core Materials to Methylene Chloride – 5/86
TM 2.3.6A Etching Ammonium Persulfate Method – 7/75
TM 2.3.7A Etching, Ferric Chloride Method – 7/75
TM 2.3.7.1A Cupric Chloride Etching Method – 12/94
TM 2.3.7.2A Alkaline Etching Method – 12/94
TM 2.3.8A Flammability, Flexible Insulating Materials – 12/82
TM 2.3.8.1 Flammability of Flexible Printed Wiring – 12/88
TM 2.3.9D Flammability of Prepreg and Thin Laminate – 8/97
TM 2.3.10B Flammability of Laminate – 12/94
TM 2.3.10.1 Flammability of Soldermask on Printed Wiring Laminate – 8/98
TM 2.3.11 Glass Fabric Construction – 4/73
TM 2.3.13A Determination of Acid Value of Liquid Solder Flux- Potentiometric and Visual Titration Methods – 6/04
TM 2.3.14 Print, Etch, and Plate Test – 4/73
TM 2.3.15D Purity, Copper Foil or Plating – 5/04
TM 2.3.16B Resin Content of Prepreg, by Burn-off – 12/94
TM 2.3.16.1C Resin Content of Prepeg, by Treated Weight – 12/94
TM 2.3.16.2 Treated Weight of Prepreg – 12/94
TM 2.3.17D Resin Flow Percent of Prepreg – 8/97
TM 2.3.17.2B Resin Flow of “No Flow” Prepreg – 8/97
TM 2.3.18A Gel Time, Prepreg Materials – 4/86
TM 2.3.19C Volatile Content of Prepreg – 12/94
TM 2.3.21 Plating Quality Hull Cell Method – 8/97
TM 2.3.22 Copper Protective Coating Quality – 2/78
TM 2.3.23B Cure (Permanency) Thermally Cured Solder Mask – 2/88
TM 2.3.23.1A Cure (Permanency) UV Initiated Dry Film Solder Mask – 2/88
TM 2.3.24 Porosity of Gold Plating – 2/78
TM 2.3.24.1 Porosity Testing of Gold Electrodeposited on a Nickel Plated Copper Substrate Electrographic Method – 10/85
TM 2.3.24.2A Porosity of Metallic Coatings on Copper-Based Alloys and Nickel (Nitric Acid Vapor Test) – 8/97
TM 2.3.25D Detection and Measurement of Ionizable Surface Contaminations by Resistivity of Solvent Extract (ROSE) – 11/12
TM 2.3.25.1 Ionic Cleanliness Testing of Bare PWBs – 10/00
TM 2.3.27 Cleanliness Test – Residual Rosin – 1/95
TM 2.3.27.1 Rosin Flux Residue Analysis-HPLC Method – 1/95
TM 2.3.28B Ionic Analysis of Circuit Boards, Ion Chromatography Method – 11/12
TM 2.3.28.1 Halide Content of Soldering Fluxes and Pastes – 6/04
TM 2.3.28.2 Bare Printed Board Cleanliness by Ion Chromatography – 12/09
TM 2.3.29 Flammability, Flexible Flat Cable – 11/88
TM 2.3.30A Solvent pH Determination in Anhydrous Flourocarbon Solvents – 11/81
TM 2.3.31 Relative Degree of Cure of U.V. Curable Material – 2/88
Reaffirmed
TM 2.3.32D Flux Induced Corrosion (Copper Mirror Method) – 6/04
TM 2.3.33D Presence of Halides in Flux, Silver Chromate Method – 6/04
TM 2.3.34C Solids Content, Flux – 6/04
TM 2.3.34.1B Percentage of Flux on/in Flux-Coated and/or Flux-Cored Solder – 1/95
TM 2.3.35C Halide Content, Quantitative (Chloride and Bromide) – 6/04
TM 2.3.35.1A Fluorides by Spot Test, Fluxes – Qualitative – 6/04
TM 2.3.35.2A Flouride Concentration, Fluxes – Quantitative – 6/04
TM 2.3.36 Acid Acceptance of Chlorinated Solvents – 10/85
TM 2.3.37B Volatile Content of Adhesive Coated Dielectric Films – 5/98
TM 2.3.38C Surface Organic Contaminant Detection Test – 5/04
TM 2.3.39C Surface Organic Contaminant Identification Test (Infrared Analytical Method) – 5/04
TM 2.3.40 Thermal Stability – 7/95
TM 2.3.41 Test Method for Total Halogen Content in Base Materials – 4/06
TM 2.3.42 Solder Mask – Resistance to Solvents and Cleaning Agents – 3/07
SECTION 2.4 - Mechanical Test Methods
TM 2.4.1E Adhesion, Tape Testing – 5/04
TM 2.4.1.2 Adhesion of Conductors on Hybrid Substrates – 12/87
TM 2.4.1.3 Adhesion, Resistors (Hybrid Circuits) – 12/87
TM 2.4.1.4 Adhesion, Overglaze (Hybrid Circuits) – 12/87
TM 2.4.1.5A Determination of Treatment Transfer – 5/95
TM 2.4.1.6 Adhesion, Polymer Coating – 7/95
TM 2.4.2A Ductility of Copper Foil – 3/76
TM 2.4.2.1D Flexural Fatigue and Ductility, Foil – 3/91
TM 2.4.3E Flexural Fatigue, Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 6/11
TM 2.4.3.1C Flexural Fatigue and Ductility, Flexible Printed Wiring – 3/91
TM 2.4.3.2C Flexural Fatigue and Ductility, Flexible Metal-Clad Dielectrics – 3/91
TM 2.4.4B Flexural Strength of Laminates (at Ambient Temperature) – 12/94
TM 2.4.4.1A Flexural Strength of Laminates (at Elevated Temperature) – 12/94
TM 2.4.5 Folding Endurance, Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 4/73
TM 2.4.5.1 Flexibility – Conformal Coating – 7/00
TM 2.4.6 Hot Oil – 4/73
TM 2.4.7A Machinability, Printed Wiring Materials – 7/75
TM 2.4.7.1 Solder Mask – Determination of Machineability – 3/07
TM 2.4.8C Peel Strength of Metallic Clad Laminates – 12/94
TM 2.4.8.1 Peel Strength, Metal Foil (Keyhole Method for Thin Laminates) – 1/86
TM 2.4.8.2A Peel Strength of Metallic Clad Laminates at Elevated Temperature (Hot Fluid Method) – 12/94
TM 2.4.8.3A Peel Strength of Metallic Clad Laminates at Elevated Temperature (Hot Air Method) – 12/94
TM 2.4.8.4 Carrier Release, Thin Copper – 1/90
TM 2.4.9D Peel Strength, Flexible Dielectric Materials – 10/88
TM 2.4.9.1 Peel Strength of Flexible Circuits – 11/98
TM 2.4.9.2 Bonding Process – 11/98
TM 2.4.11 Shear Strength Flexible Dielectric Materials – 4/73
TM 2.4.12A Solderability, Edge Dip Method – 6/91
TM 2.4.13F Solder Float Resistance Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 5/98
TM 2.4.13.1 Thermal Stress of Laminates – 12/94
TM 2.4.14 Solderability of Metallic Surfaces – 4/73
TM 2.4.14.1 Solderability, Wave Solder Method – 3/79
TM 2.4.14.2A Liquid Flux Activity, Wetting Balance Method – 6/04
TM 2.4.15A Surface Finish, Metal Foil – 3/76
TM 2.4.16A Initiation Tear Strength, Flexible Insulating Materials – 12/82
TM 2.4.17 Tear Strength (Propagation) – 4/73
TM 2.4.17.1B Propagation Tear Strength, Flexible Insulating Material – 2/13
TM 2.4.18B Tensile Strength and Elongation, Copper Foil – 8/80
TM 2.4.18.1A Tensile Strength and Elongation, In-House Plating – 5/04
TM 2.4.18.2 Hot Rupture Strength, Foil – 7/89
TM 2.4.18.3 Tensile Strength, Elongation, and Modulus – 7/95
TM 2.4.19C Tensile Strength and Elongation, Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 5/98
TM 2.4.20 Terminal Bond Strength, Flexible Printed Wiring – 4/73
TM 2.4.21E Land Bond Strength, Unsupported Component Hole – 5/04
TM 2.4.22C Bow and Twist (Percentage) – 6/99
TM 2.4.22.1C Bow and Twist-Laminate – 5/93
TM 2.4.22.2 Substrate Curvature: Silicon Wafers with Deposited Dielectrics – 7/95
TM 2.4.23 Soldering Resistance of Laminate Materials – 3/79
TM 2.4.24C Glass Transition Temperature and Z-Axis Thermal Expansion by TMA – 12/94
TM 2.4.24.1 Time to Delamination (TMA Method) – 12/94
TM 2.4.24.2 Glass Transition Temperature of Organic Films – DMA Method – 7/95
TM 2.4.24.3 Glass Transition Temperature of Organic Films – TMA Method – 7/95
TM 2.4.24.4 Glass Transition and Modulus of Materials Used in High Density Interconnection (HDI) and Microvias -DMA Method – 11/98
TM 2.4.24.5 Glass Transition Temperature and Thermal Expansion of Materials Used In High Density Interconnection (HDI) and Microvias -TMA Method – 11/98
TM 2.4.24.6 Decomposition Temperature (Td) of Laminate Material Using TGA – 4/06
TM 2.4.25C Glass Transition Temperature and Cure Factor by DSC – 12/94
TM 2.4.26 Tape Test for Additive Printed Boards – 3/79
TM 2.4.27.1B Abrasion (Taber Method) Solder Mask and Conformal Coating – 1/95
TM 2.4.27.2A Solder Mask Abrasion (Pencil Method) – 2/88
Reaffirmed
TM 2.4.28B Adhesion, Solder Mask (Non-Melting Metals) – 8/97
TM 2.4.28.1F Solder Mask Adhesion – Tape Test Method – 3/07
TM 2.4.29C Adhesion, Solder Mask, Flexible Circuit – 3/07
TM 2.4.30 Impact Resistance, Polymer Film – 10/86
TM 2.4.31A Folding, Flexible Flat Cable – 4/86
TM 2.4.32A Fold Temperature Testing, Flexible Flat Cable – 4/86
TM 2.4.33C Flexural Fatigue and Ductility, Flat Cable – 3/91
TM 2.4.34 Solder Paste Viscosity – T-Bar Spin Spindle Method (Applicable for 300,000 to 1,600,000 Centipose) – 1/95
TM 2.4.34.1 Solder Paste Viscosity – T-Bar Spindle Method (Applicable at Less Than 300,000 Centipose) – 1/95
TM 2.4.34.2 Solder Paste Viscosity – Spiral Pump Method (Applicable for 300,000 to 1,600,000 Centipose) – 1/95
TM 2.4.34.3 Solder Paste Viscosity – Spiral Pump Method (Applicable at Less Than 300,000 Centipose) – 1/95
TM 2.4.34.4 Paste Flux Viscosity – T-Bar Spindle Method – 1/95
TM 2.4.35 Solder Paste – Slump Test – 1/95
TM 2.4.36C Rework Simulation, Plated-Through Holes for Leaded Components – 5/04
TM 2.4.37A Evaluation of Hand Soldering Tools for Terminal Connections – 7/91
TM 2.4.37.1A Evaluation of Hand Soldering Tools for Printed Wiring Board Applications – 7/91
TM 2.4.37.2 Evaluation of Hand Soldering Tools on Heavy Thermal Loads – 7/93
TM 2.4.38A Prepeg Scaled Flow Testing – 6/91
TM 2.4.39A Dimensional Stability, Glass Reinforced Thin Laminates – 2/86
TM 2.4.40 Inner Layer Bond Strength of Multilayer Printed Circuit Boards – 10/87
TM 2.4.41 Coefficient of Lintear Thermal Expansion of Electrical Insulating Boards – 3/86
TM 2.4.41.1A Coefficient of Thermal Expansion by the Vitreous Silica (Quartz) Dilatometer Method – 8/97
TM 2.4.41.2A Coefficient of Thermal Expansion – Strain Gage Method – 5/04
TM 2.4.41.3 In-Plane Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, Organic Films – 7/95
TM 2.4.41.4 Volumetric Thermal Expansion Polymer Coatings on Inorganic Substrates – 7/95
TM 2.4.42 Torsional Strength of Chip Adhesives – 2/88
TM 2.4.42.1 High Tempreature Mechanical Strength Retention of Adhesives – 3/88
TM 2.4.42.2 Die Shear Strength – 2/98
TM 2.4.42.3 Wire Bond Pull Strength – 2/98
TM 2.4.43 Solder Paste – Solder Ball Test – 1/95
TM 2.4.45 Solder Paste – Wetting Test – 1/95
TM 2.4.46A Spread Test, Liquid or Extracted Solder Flux, Solder Paste and Extracted Cored Wires or Preforms – 6/04
TM 2.4.47 Flux Residue Dryness – 1/95
TM 2.4.48 Spitting of Flux-Cored Wire Solder – 1/95
TM 2.4.49 Solder Pool Test – 1/95
TM 2.4.50 Thermal Conductivity, Polymer Films – 7/95
TM 2.4.51 Self Shimming Thermally Conductive Adhesives – 1/95
TM 2.4.52 Fracture Toughness of Resin Systems for Base Materials – 10/13
SECTION 2.5 - Electrical Test Methods
TM 2.5.1B Arc Resistance of Printed Wiring Material – 5/86
TM 2.5.2A Capacitance of Insulating Materials – 7/75
TM 2.5.3B Current Breakdown, Plated Through-Holes – 8/97
TM 2.5.4 Current Carrying Capacity, Multilayer Printed Wring – 4/73
TM 2.5.4.1A Conductor Temperature Rise Due to Current Changes in Conductors – 8/97
TM 2.5.5A Dielectric Constant of Printed Wiring Materials – 7/75
TM 2.5.5.1B Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) and Loss Tangent (Dissipation Factor) of Insulating Material at 1MHz (Contacting Electrode Systems) – 5/86
TM 2.5.5.2A Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor of Printed Wiring Board Material–Clip Method – 12/87
TM 2.5.5.3C Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) and Loss Tangent (Dissipation Factor) of Materials (Two Fluid Cell Method) – 12/87
TM 2.5.5.4 Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor of Printed Wiring Board Material–Micrometer Method – 10/85
TM 2.5.5.5C Stripline Test for Permittivity and Loss Tangent (Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor) at X-Band – 3/98
TM 2.5.5.5.1 Stripline Test for Complex Relative Permittivity of Circuit Board Materials to 14 GHZ – 3/98
TM 2.5.5.6 Non-Destructive Full Sheet Resonance Test for Permittivity of Clad Laminates – 5/89
TM 2.5.5.7A Characteristic Impedance Lines on Printed Boards by TDR – 3/04
TM 2.5.5.8 Low Frequency Dielectric Constant and Loss Tangent, Polymer Films – 7/95
TM 2.5.5.9 Permittivity and Loss Tangent, Parallel Plate, 1MHz to 1.5 GHz – 11/98
TM 2.5.5.10 High Frequency Testing to Determine Permittivity and Loss Tangent of Embedded Passive Materials – 7/05
TM 2.5.5.11 Propagation Delay of Lines on Printed Boards by TDR – 4/09
TM 2.5.5.12A Test Methods to Determine the Amount of Signal Loss on Printed Boards – 7/12
TM 2.5.5.13 Relative Permittivity and Loss Tangent Using a Split-Cylinder Resonator – 1/07
TM 2.5.6B Dielectric Breakdown of Rigid Printed Wiring Material – 5/86
TM 2.5.6.1B Solder Mask – Dielectric Strength – 3/07
TM 2.5.6.2A Electric Strength of Printed Wiring Material – 8/97
TM 2.5.6.3 Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength – 10/86
TM 2.5.7D Dielectric Withstanding Voltage, PWB – 5/04
TM 2.5.7.1 Dielectric Withstanding Voltage – Polymeric Conformal Coating – 7/00
TM 2.5.7.2A Dielectric Withstanding Voltage (HiPot Method) – Thin Dielectric Layers for Printed Boards – 11/09
TM 2.5.8A Dissipation Factor of Flexible Printed Wiring Material – 7/75
TM 2.5.10.1 Insulation Resistivity for Adhesive Interconnection Bonds – 11/98
TM 2.5.12 Interconnection Resistance, Multilayer Printed Wiring – 4/73
TM 2.5.13A Resistance of Copper Foil – 3/76
TM 2.5.14A Resistivity of Copper Foil – 8/76
TM 2.5.15A Guidelines and Test Methods for RFI-EMI Shielding of Flat Cable – 10/86
TM 2.5.16A Shorts, Internal on Multilayer Printed Wiring – 11/88
TM 2.5.17E Volume Resistivity and Surface Resistance of Printed Wiring Materials – 5/98
TM 2.5.17.1A Volume and Surface Resistivity of Dielectric Materials – 12/94
TM 2.5.17.2 Volume Resistivity of Conductive Materials Used in High Dentisty Interconnection (HDI) and Microvias, Two-Wire Method – 11/98
TM 2.5.18B Characteristic Impedance Flat Cables (Unbalanced) – 7/84
TM 2.5.19A Propagation Delay of Flat Cables Using Time Domain Reflectometer – 7/84
TM 2.5.19.1A Propagation Delay of Flat Cables Using Dual Trace Oscilloscope – 7/84
TM 2.5.21A Digital Unbalanced Crosstalk, Flat Cable – 3/84
TM 2.5.24 Conductor Resistance, Flexible Flat Cable – 6/79
TM 2.5.25A Dielectric Withstand Voltage Flexible Fat Cable – 11/85
TM 2.5.26A Insulation Resistance Flexible Flat Cable – 11/85
TM 2.5.27 Surface Insulation Resistance of Raw Printed Wiring Board Material – 3/79
TM 2.5.28A Q Resonance, Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 4/88
TM 2.5.30 Balanced and Unbalanced Cable Attenuation Measurements – 12/87
TM 2.5.31 Current Leakage (Through Overglaze Films) – 12/87
TM 2.5.32 Resistance Test, Plated Through-Holes – 12/87
TM 2.5.33 Measurement of Electrical Overstress from Soldering Hand Tools – 11/98
TM 2.5.33.1 Measurement of Electrical Overstress from Soldering Hand Tools – Ground Measurements – 11/98
TM 2.5.33.2 Measurement of Electrical Overstress from Soldering Hand Tools – Transient Measurements – 11/98
TM 2.5.33.3 Measurement of Electrical Overstress from Soldering Hand Tools – Current Leakage Measurements – 11/98
TM 2.5.33.4 Measurement of Electrical Overstress from Soldering Hand Tools – Shielded Enclosure – 11/98
TM 2.5.34 Power Density Rating for Embedded Resistors – 7/12
SECTION 2.6 - Environmental Test Methods
TM 2.6.1G Fungus Resistance Printed Wiring Materials – 3/07
TM 2.6.1.1 Fungus Resistance – Conformal Coating – 7/00
TM 2.6.2D Moisture Absorption, Flexible Printed Wiring – 2/12
TM 2.6.2.1A Water Absorption, Metal Clad Plastic Laminates – 5/86
TM 2.6.3F Moisture and Insulation Resistance, Printed Boards – 5/04
TM 2.6.3.1E Solder Mask – Moisture and Insulation Resistance – 3/07
TM 2.6.3.2B Insulation and Moisture Resistance, Flexible Base Dielectric – 5/88
TM 2.6.3.3B Surface Insulation Resistance, Fluxes – 6/04
TM 2.6.3.4A Moisture and Insulation Resistance – Conformal Coating – 7/03
Supersedes 2.6.3.4 and 2.6.3.1C for Conformal Coating Test
TM 2.6.3.5 Bare Board Cleanliness by Surface Insulation Resistance – 1/04
TM 2.6.3.6 Surface Insulation Resistance – Fluxes – Telecommunications – 1/04
TM 2.6.3.7 Surface Insulation Resistance – 3/07
TM 2.6.4B Outgassing, Printed Boards – 5/04
TM 2.6.5D Physical Shock, Multilayer Printed Wiring – 5/04
TM 2.6.6B Temperature Cycling, Printed Wiring Board – 12/87
TM 2.6.7A Thermal Shock and Continuity, Printed Board – 8/97
TM 2.6.7.1A Thermal Shock – Conformal Coating – 7/00
Supersedes 2.6.7.1 for Conformal Coating Tests
TM 2.6.7.2B Thermal Shock, Continuity and Microsection, Printed Board – 5/04
TM 2.6.7.3 Thermal Shock – Solder Mask – 7/00
Supersedes 2.6.7.1 for Solder Mask Test
TM 2.6.8E Thermal Stress, Plated-Through Holes – 5/04
TM 2.6.8.1 Thermal Stress, Laminate – 9/91
TM 2.6.9B Vibration, Rigid Printed Wiring – 5/04
TM 2.6.9.1 Test to Determine Sensitivity of Electronic Assemblies to Ultrasonic Energy – 1/95
TM 2.6.9.2 Test to Determine Sensitivity of Electronic Components to Ultrasonic Energy – 1/95
TM 2.6.10A X-Ray (Radiography), Multilayer Printed Wiring Board Test Methods – 8/97
TM 2.6.11B Hydrolytic Stability Solder Mask and/or Conformal Coating – 8/98
TM 2.6.11D Solder Mask – Hydrolytic Stability – 3/07
TM 2.6.11.1 Hydrolytic Stability – Conformal Coating – 7/00
Supersedes 2.6.11B for Conformal Coating Test
TM 2.6.12 Temperature Testing, Flexible Flat Cable – 6/79
TM 2.6.13 Assessment of Susceptibility to Metallic Dendritic Growth: Uncoated Printed Wiring – 10/85
TM 2.6.14D Solder Mask – Resistance to Electrochemical Migration – 3/07
TM 2.6.14.1 Electrochemical Migration Resistance Test – 9/00
TM 2.6.15C Corrosion, Flux – 6/04
TM 2.6.16 Pressure Vessel Method for Glass Epoxy Laminate Integrity – 7/85
TM 2.6.16.1 Moisture Resistance of High Density Interconnection (HDI) Materials Under High Temperature and Pressure (Pressure Vessel) – 8/98
TM 2.6.17 Hydrolitic Stability, Flexible Printed Wiring Material – 12/82
TM 2.6.18A Low Temperature Flexibility, Flexible Printed Wiring Materials – 7/85
TM 2.6.19 Environmental and Insulation Resistance Test of Hybrid Ceramic Multilayer Substrate Boards – 12/87
TM 2.6.21B Service Temperature of Metal-Clad Flexible Laminate, Cover Material and Adhesive Bonding Films – 6/11
TM 2.6.23 Test Procedure for Steam Ager Temperature Repeatability – 7/93
TM 2.6.24 Junction Stability Under Environmental Conditions – 11/98
TM 2.6.25A Conductive Anodic Filament (CAF) Resistance Test: X-Y Axis – 5/12
TM 2.6.26 DC Current Induced Thermal Cycling Test – 5/01
TM 2.6.27 Thermal Stress, Convection Reflow Assembly Simulation – 5/09
TM 2.6.28 Moisture Content and/or Moisture Absorption Rate, (Bulk) Printed Board – 8/10

Old

SECTION 3.0 - Connector Test Methods
TM 3.1A Contact Resistance, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.2A Contact Retention, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.3A Crimp Tensil Strength, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.4B Durability, Connectors – 1/83
TM 3.5A Humidity, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.6A Insulation Resistance, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.7A Low Level Circuit Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.8A Mechanical Shock, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.9A Salt Spray, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.10A Solderability, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.11A Thermal Shock, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.12A Vibration, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.13A Withstanding Voltage, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.14 High Temperature Life, Connectors – 7/75
TM 3.15 Fungus Resistance, Connectors – 7/79
TM 3.16 Fretting Corrosion, Connectors – 2/78
TM 3.17 Industrial Gas Test (Battelle Method), Connectors – 2/78
TM 3.18 Mating and Unmating Force, Connectors – 1/83

Cancelled

SECTION 2.2 - Dimensional Test Methods
TM 2.2.17 Surface Roughness and Profile of Metallic Foils (Contacting Stylus Technique) – 3/90
SECTION 2.3 - Chemical Test Methods
TM 2.3.5B Density, Insulating Material – 8/97
TM 2.3.25B Detection and Measurement of Ionizable Surface Contaminants – 8/97
Supersedes 2.3.26 and 2.3.26.1
TM 2.3.26A Superseded by Test Method 2.3.25 – 2/88
Superseded by Test Method 2.3.25
TM 2.3.26.1 Superseded by Test Method 2.3.25 – 2/88
Superseded by Test Method 2.3.25
TM 2.3.26.2 Mobile Ion Content of Polymer Films – 7/95
SECTION 2.4 - Mechanical Test Methods
TM 2.4.1.1B Adhesion, Marking Paints and Inks – 11/88
TM 2.4.10 Plating Adhesion – 4/73
SECTION 2.5 - Electrical Test Methods
TM 2.5.7.2 Dielectric Withstanding Voltage (HiPot Method) – Thin Dielectric Layers for Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) – 12/07
TM 2.5.11 Insulation Resistance, Multilayer Printed Wiring (Within a Layer) – 4/73
SECTION 2.6 - Environmental Test Methods
TM 2.6.7.1 Thermal Shock – Conformal Coating – 7/00
Supersedes 2.6.7.1 for Conformal Coating Tests
TM 2.6.20A 2.6.20A – 1/95
Superseded by J-STD-020A
TM 2.6.22 2.6.22 – 1/95
Superseded by J-STD-035

출처 : www.ipc.org

SAE International

07 Feb 2014 Comments
Off

아래는  SAE관련 정보입니다.

Main : http://www.sae.org/

SAE 시험 : http://topics.sae.org/tests-testing/

SAE 규격 : http://papers.sae.org/

주제별 분류 : Standards by Topic

API 인증 연락처

26 Jan 2014 Comments
Off

American Petroleum Institute (API) 인증 관련 안내

아래 내용을 참조하여 직접 연락하고 인증 절차를 안내 받으면 됩니다.  
직접 인증 받는 것은 비용 및 시간을 절약할 수 있는 지름길입니다. 
* 나 홀로 인증을 받는 것이 어려운 경우 언제든 연락 바랍니다.

 

API 인증 절차

API 인증 절차 바로가기
위 사이트로 직접 방문하여 인증절차를 상의하시기 바랍니다.

API 표준 및 규격

API 표준 담당자 바로가기
위 사이트로 직접 방문하여 API 표준 및 규격에 대해 상의하시기 바랍니다.

SNIP 3.05.04-85

26 Jan 2014 Comments
Off

[영문번역판]

SNIP 3.05.04-85. External water supply and sewerage.

 

SNIP 3.05.04-85 *

 

External networks and facilities
WATER AND SANITATION

 

SNIP 3.05.04-85 * SNIP 3.05.04-85 a reissue with a change number 1,

 

Sections, paragraphs, tables, which amended an asterisk.

 

When using the standard document should be considered approved changes to building regulations and government standards, published in the journal “Bulletin of construction equipment” USSR State Committee for Information and sign “State standards USSR” State Standard.

 

 

* These rules apply to new construction, expansion and renovation of the existing external networks 1 and water supply and sanitation settlements economy.

 

 

 

 

CONTENTS

1. General Provisions

2. Earthwork

3. Installation of pipelines

General Provisions

Steel pipelines

Cast iron pipes

Asbestos cement pipes

Concrete and concrete pipes

Pipelines of ceramic pipes

Pipelines from plastic pipes *

4. Pipeline crossings over natural and artificial barriers

5. Water and sanitation facilities

Facilities for collection of surface water

Water wells

Tank facilities

6. Additional requirements for the construction of pipelines and water supply and sanitation in the special natural and climatic conditions

7. Testing of pipelines and facilities

Penstock

Non-pressure pipes

Tank facilities

Additional requirements for pressure testing of pipelines and water supply and sanitation, built in the special natural and climatic conditions

Appendix 1. Required. act on acceptance tests of hydraulic pressure pipe Leak and

Appendix 2. Recommended. Conduct hydrostatic test pressure pipe Leak and

Appendix 3. Required. Act on the pneumatic test pressure pipe Leak and

Appendix 4. Required. Act on Acceptance Test unconfined hydraulic piping for leaks

Appendix 5. Recommended. Procedure for cleaning and disinfection of pipelines and facilities of drinking water supply

Annex 6. Required. act on cleaning and disinfection of pipelines (structures) of drinking water supply

 

 

 

  

 

 

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1. When building new, expansion and modernization of existing pipelines and water supply and sanitation projects in addition requirements (draft) 2 and these rules must be followed and requirements SNIP 3.01.01-85 * SNIP 3.01.03-84, SNIP III-4-80 * and other regulations, standards and departmental regulations, approved in accordance with SNIP 1.01.01-83.

1.2. Completed construction of pipelines and water supply and sanitation facilities should be commissioned in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.01.04-87.

 

* Reprinted with amendments on July 1, 1990

1 external networks – in the following text “pipeline.”

2 Projects (draft) – in the following text, “projects”.

2. EXCAVATION

2.1. Earthwork and work on the device bases the construction of pipelines and water supply and sanitation must be performed in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.02.01-87.

3. Installation of pipelines

GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.1. When you move the pipes and assembled sections with anti-corrosion coatings, should be used tongs soft, flexible towels and other means to exclude damage to these coatings.

3.2. When layout pipes for potable water supply should not be allowed to enter these surface water or sewage. Pipes and fittings, valves and components ready before installation should be inspected and cleaned inside and out of mud, snow, ice, oil and foreign objects.

3.3. Installation of piping shall be made in accordance with the design and production work, including maps after checking conformity to the project size trench, fixing walls, marks the bottom and above-ground pad – supporting structures. The verification results shall be recorded in the journal of the works.

3.4. Pipe spigot type unpressurized pipelines should tend to flare stack up the ramp.

3.5. Provided project straightness unpressurized pipe sections between adjacent wells should monitor viewing “born” with a mirror before and after backfilling the trench. When viewing a pipe of circular cross section in the visible range of the mirror must have the correct form.

Permissible deviation from the horizontal circle shape should be no more than 1/4 of the diameter of the pipeline, but not more than 50 mm in each direction. Deviations from the right circle shape vertically are not allowed.

3.6. The maximum deviation from the design position axes pressure pipelines should not exceed ± 100 mm in plan, elevations trays unpressurized pipelines -
± 100 mm in plan, elevations trays unpressurized pipelines -
5 mm, and top marks of pressure pipelines – ± 30 mm, unless other rules are not bankable projects. 100 mm in plan, elevations trays unpressurized pipelines -

3.7. Gasket pressure pipelines to flatter curve without fittings allowed for socket pipes with butt joints in rubber seals with a rotation angle in each junction of no more than 2 ° for pipes with nominal diameter up to 600 mm and not more than 1 ° for pipes with nominal diameter more than 600 mm.

3.8. When installing water and sewer pipes in the mountains except the requirements of these rules should be followed and requirements section. SNP 9 III-42-80.

3.9. When laying pipes on the straight section of the path connecting the ends of adjacent pipes shall be centered so that the width of the gap was the same socket over the entire circumference.

3.10. The ends of the tubes, as well as holes in the flanges and other fittings stop during breaks laying should be closed with wooden plugs or caps.

3.11. Rubber seals for pipeline installation at low ambient temperatures must not be used in promorozhennaya condition.

3.12. For sealing (seal) piping joints should be applied sealing and “locking” materials and sealants according to the draft.

3.13. Flanged joints fittings and valves must be installed in compliance with the following requirements:

- Flanged joints should be installed perpendicular to the tube axis;

- Plane joined flanges must be smooth, Nuts and bolts must be located on one side of the connection; bolts should be done crosswise;

- Elimination of distortions installing beveled flange gasket or tightening bolts is not permitted;

- Welding joints adjacent to the flange should be performed only after the uniform tightening all the bolts on the flanges.

3.14. When using the ground for the construction of retaining wall of the pit stop must be undisturbed soil.

3.15. The gap between the pipe and the team part of concrete or brick abutments must be densely filled with concrete mix or mortar.

3.16. Protection of steel and concrete pipeline corrosion should be carried out in accordance with the project and the requirements of SNIP SNIP 3.04.03-85 and 2.03.11-85.

3.17. Constructed on pipelines subject to acceptance with the preparation of survey report of the hidden works in the format shown in SNIP 3.01.01-85 * the following steps and elements of the hidden works: surface preparation for pipelines, the device stops, the value of clearances and perform seal joints, shafts and chambers device , pipeline corrosion protection, sealing locations pipelines pass through the walls of shafts and chambers, filling pipes with seal, etc.

 

 

STEEL PIPE

3.18. Welding methods and types, design elements and dimensions of welded joints of steel pipes must comply with the requirements of GOST 16037-80.

3.19. Before assembling and welding of pipes should be cleaned from dirt, check the geometric dimensions of cutting edges, cleaned to bright metal edges and the adjacent inner and outer surfaces of the tubes to a minimum width of 10 mm.

3.20 . After welding the outer insulation of pipe welds must be restored in accordance with the project.

3.21. When assembling the pipe joints without backing rings offset edges shall not exceed 20% of the wall thickness, but not more than 3 mm. For butt joints, welded and assembled on the remaining cylindrical ring, offset edges inside of the pipe shall not exceed 1 mm.

3.22. Pipe assembly diameter above 100 mm, made with the longitudinal weld seam or a spiral, must be carried out with an offset of adjacent pipe joints is not less than 100 mm. During assembly of a pipe joint in which a longitudinal or spiral factory welded seam on both sides of the offset can not produce seams.

3.23. Transverse welds must be located at a distance of not less than:

0.2 m from the edge of the support structure of the pipeline;

0.3 m from the outer and inner surfaces of the chamber or the surface of the enclosing structure through which the conduit passes, and edge of the box.

3.24. Connect the ends of abutting pipes and pipe sections with a gap size between them should be permitted to perform more inset “coil” of not less than 200 mm.

3.25. The distance between the annular weld seam welded pipe and conduit pipes to be at least 100 mm.

3.26. Build pipes for welding must be done with the center of Directors; allowed smooth straightening dents on the ends of the pipes to a depth of 3.5% of the pipe diameter and match the edges using jacks, roller bearings and other means. Lots of pipes with dents more than
3.5% of the diameter of the pipe or having tears should be cut. Pipe ends with Nick bullies or chamfers depth of more than 5 mm should be cut.

When applying the stringer bead potholders should be fully digested. Used for tack welding electrodes or welding wire must be the same brand as the core for welding seam.

3.27. By welding joints of steel pipelines allowed the welders in the presence of documents for production welding in accordance with the Rules of certification of welders approved Gostgortechnadzor USSR.

3.28. Before admission to work on welding joints of pipelines, each welder must weld qualification welds in a production environment (at the construction site) in the following cases:

- When he first started to pipe welding or had a break in the work of more than
6 months;

- If carried out welding of pipes of new steel grades with new grades of welding consumables (electrodes, welding wire, flux) or using the new types of welding equipment.

On pipes with diameter 529 mm and above are allowed to weld half qualification welds. Qualification welds exposed:

- Visual inspection, at which the weld must meet the requirements of this section and GOST 16037-80;

- Radiographic inspection in accordance with the requirements of GOST 7512-82;

- Mechanical testing tensile and bending in accordance with GOST 6996-66.

In case of unsatisfactory test results, the qualification weld joint and repeated control of two other qualification welds. In the case of control by repeated unsatisfactory results in at least one of the joints welder recognized not pass the test and may be permitted to weld pipe only after additional training and re-testing.

3.29. Each welder must be assigned to brand him. Welder shall emboss or stamp overlay at a distance of 30 – 50 mm from the joint side, available for inspection.

3.30. Tack welding and pipe joints are allowed to produce at an outside temperature of -50 ° C. While welding welded joints unheated allowed to perform:

- At an ambient temperature to minus 20 ° C – during application of pipes of carbon steel with carbon content not exceeding 0.24% (regardless of the thickness of the pipe wall) as well as low-alloyed steel pipes with wall thickness of 10 mm;

- At an ambient temperature to minus 10 ° C – during application of pipes of carbon steel with a carbon content exceeding 0,24% and a low-alloyed steel pipes with wall thickness above 10 mm. When the outdoor temperature is below the above limits welding work should be done by heating in special booths in which the air temperature should be maintained no lower than the above, display or perform outdoors all

- Welded pipes for a minimum length of 200 mm to a temperature not lower than 200 ° C.

After welding is necessary to ensure a gradual lowering of the temperature of joints and adjacent zones pipes by covering them with a towel after welding asbestos or other means.

3.31. When each layer of the multilayer welding seam before applying the next stitch should be cleared from slag and spatter. Portions of the weld metal with pores and cracks shells should be cut down to the base metal and welded joints craters.

3.32. When manual arc welding seam individual layers must be imposed so that their trailing portions of adjacent layers do not coincide with one another.

3.33. When welding outdoors during the precipitation of the weld must be protected from moisture and wind.

3.34. The quality control of welded joints of steel pipelines should be carried out:

- Operational control during assembly and welding pipe in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.01.01-85 *;

- Integrity tests of welded joints with the identification of internal defects of a non-destructive (physical) control methods – radiographic (X-ray or gammagraficheskim) GOST 7512-82 and GOST 14782-86 ultrasound.

Application of ultrasonic method is permitted only in conjunction with radiographic, which must be verified by at least 10% of the total number of joints to be controlled.

3.35. When operational control of welded joints of steel pipelines should check compliance with the structural elements and sizes of welded joints, welding process, welding quality materials, edge preparation, the gaps, the number of tacks, as well as welding equipment serviceability.

3.36. Visual inspection is required for all welded joints. Pipeline diameter
of 1020 mm and a diameter bolboprovodah
its welded joints welded without backing rings are subjected to a visual inspection and measurement of the size of the outside and inside of the pipe, in other cases – only outside. Before inspecting the weld and the adjacent surfaces of the tubes at a minimum width of 20 mm (on both sides of the joint) should be cleaned of slag, spatter, scale and other zagryazneniy.boprovodah diameter

Weld quality of the external inspection shall be considered satisfactory if not found: cracks in the weld and the Contiguous Zone, permitted deviations from size and shape of the weld; undercuts ceasing between the rollers, sagging, burn-through, nezavarennyh craters and onto the surface of the pores, lack of fusion or sags in the weld root (when viewed from inside the pipe joint);

displacements of tubes exceeding allowable dimensions.

Joints that do not meet these requirements are subject to amend or delete and re-inspection of their quality.

3.37. Checking the quality of welds physical control methods exposed water and sewer pipes with a design pressure up to 1 MPa (10 kgf / cm 2 ) in an amount not less than 2% (but not less than one interface for each welder) 1 – 2 MPa
(10 – 20 kgf / cm 2 1 – 2 MPa
) 1 – 2 MPa
- in the amount not less than 5% (but not the 1 – 2 MPa and
less than two joints at each welder) 1 – 2 MPa
above 2 MPa (20 kgf / cm 2 1 – 2 MPa
) 1 – 2 MPa
- in the amount not less than 10% (but not more than two joints at each welder). 1 – 2 MPa

3.38. Weld joints to control physical methods selected in the presence of the customer, who writes in the Journal of works information about selected for control joints (location, brand welder, etc.).

3.39. Physical control methods should be subjected to 100% of welded joints of pipelines, built on plots of transitions under and over the railway and tramway, water obstacles, under highways, urban collectors to communicate with combined with other routing utilities. Length controlled sections of pipelines in the areas of transitions should be no less than the following sizes:

- For railways – the distance between the axes of the extreme ways, and 40 m from them in each direction;

- For roads – the width of the embankment along the bottom or recess on the top and 25 m away in each direction;

- For water barriers – within the boundaries of underwater passage defined by Sec. 6
SNIP 2.05.06-85;

- For other utilities – width intersected facilities, including water taking device plus at least 4 m in each direction from the outer boundaries intersected structures.

3.40. Welds should reject if the verification of physical control methods have cracks, nezavarennye craters, burned, fistulas, as well as lack of fusion at the root of the weld made on the backing ring.

When checking welds radiographically acceptable defects are:

- Pores and inclusions, the dimensions of which do not exceed the maximum permitted by
GOST 23055-78 for 7th grade welds – pores and inclusions, the dimensions of which do not exceed the maximum allowable for

- Lack of fusion, and the excess melted the concavity at the root of the weld made arc welding without backing rings, height (depth) does not exceed 10% of the nominal wall thickness, and the total length – 1/3 of the inner perimeter of the compound.

3.41. In identifying the physical control methods unacceptable defects in welds these defects must be removed and repeated quality produce twice the number of stitches than specified in paragraph 3.37. In case of unacceptable defects with repeated control should be monitored all joints made according to a welder.

3.42. Land weld unacceptable defects to be corrected by local sampling and subsequent podvarki (usually without overcooking the entire weld joint), if the total length of the sample after the removal of defective areas shall not exceed a total length specified in GOST 23055-78 for 7th grade.

Defect in the joints should be done by arc welding.

Undercuts should be corrected by welding rolls of thread height no more than 2 – 3 mm. Crack length less than 50 mm zasverlivayutsya at the ends are cut, carefully smoothed out and welded into several layers.

3.43. The results of quality control of welded joints of steel pipes physical control methods should be made act (protocol).

 

 

CAST IRON PIPE

3.44. Installation of cast iron pipes manufactured in accordance with GOST 9583-75, should be carried out with the seal pipe connection hemp resin or bituminized strand asbestos and device lock, or just sealant and tubes manufactured in accordance with TU 03.14.12 47-83, elasticated cuffs, supplied complete with pipes without the device lock.

Asbestos-cement mixture composition for the device lock and sealant defined by the project.

3.45. The distance between the abutment surface and the socket end of the pipe (regardless of the material sealing joints) should be taken, mm. for pipe diameters up to 300 mm – 5, more than 300 mm – 8-10.

3.46. Dimensions elements sealing butt joint cast iron pressure pipe shall conform to the values ​​given in Table. 1.

Table 1.

Nominal pipe diameter y , mm

Planting depth, mm

when using hemp strands

when the device lock

Only when applying sealant

65-200

35

30

50

250-400

45

30-35

60-65

600-1000

50-60

40-50

70-80

ASBESTOS PIPE

3.47. The distance between the ends of the pipe should be taken, mm for pipe diameters up to 300 mm – 5, more than 300 mm – 10.

3.48. Before starting the installation of pipelines at the ends of the pipe, depending on the length of the coupling should be used to make a mark corresponding to the initial position before mounting the coupling interface and end – in the assembled joint.

3.49. Connect cement pipes with fittings or metal pipes should be carried out with the help of cast iron fittings or welded steel pipes and rubber seals.

3.50. After the installation of each butt joint, check the proper location couplings and rubber seals in them, and the uniformity of torque flanges cast iron couplings.

Concrete and concrete PIPELINES

3.51. The distance between the abutment surface and the socket end of the pipe should be taken, mm:

- For concrete pressure pipe diameters up to 1000 mm – 12-15, over 1000 mm in diameter – 18-22;

- For concrete and concrete unconfined socket pipes with diameter up to 700 mm – 8.12, more than 700 mm – 15-18, for rebated pipes – no more than 25.

3.52. Butt joints of pipes supplied without rubber rings should seal the hemp resin or bituminized strand or strand sizalskoy bituminized with embedded lock the asbestos mixture, and polysulfide (Thiokol) sealants. Planting depth is given in Table. 2, with deviations in depth sealing locks and lock shall not exceed ± 5 mm.

Clearances between the abutment surface and the ends of pipe sockets in pipes with a diameter of 1000 mm, and should more grout to seal the inside. Cement brand defined by the project.

Drain pipes are allowed to flare working gap to the full depth patch mortar Grade B7, 5 if the other requirements are not provided by the project.

Table 2.

Nominal diameter

passage, mm

Planting depth, mm

when using n Enkova sizalskoy or strands

when the device lock

Only when applying sealant

100-150

200-250

 400-600

 800-1600

 2400

25 (35)

40 (50)

50 (60)

55 (65)

70 (80)

25

40

 50

 55

 70

35

40

50

70

95

3.53. Sealing joints rebated unconfined concrete and concrete pipes with smooth ends should be made in accordance with the project.

3.54. Connect concrete and concrete pipes with pipe fittings and metal pipes should be made with steel or concrete inserts shaped connecting parts manufactured according to the draft.

LINES OF CERAMIC PIPES

3.55. The distance between the ends of stacked ceramic pipe (regardless of the material sealing joints) should be taken, mm for pipe diameters up to 300 mm – 5 – 7, at larger diameters – 8 – 10.

3.56. Butt joints of pipes ceramic pipes should be compacted or hemp sizalskoy bituminized strand followed device lock cement mortar Grade B7, 5, asphalt (bitumen) and mastic polysulfide (Thiokol) sealants, if other materials are not provided by the project. Use of mastic asphalt is allowed when a temperature of the transported waste liquid does not exceed 40 ° C and in the absence of solvents bitumen therein.

The main dimensions of the elements butt joint ceramic pipes must conform to the values ​​given in Table. 3.

Table 3.

Nominal diameter, mm

Planting depth, mm

when using hemp or strands sizalskoy

when the device lock

when used enii only sealants or Bituminous

160-300

350 – 600

30

30

30

38

40

45

3.57. Pipe seals in the walls of wells and chambers should be leak-proof and waterproof compounds wells in wet soils.

 

LINES OF PLASTIC PIPES *

3.58. Connect pipes made of polyethylene (LDPE) and high density polyethylene (HDPE) with each other and with shaped parts should be carried out by hot-plate contact-flash butt welding or bell and spigot. Welding together pipes and fittings of various types of polyethylene (HDPE and LDPE) is not allowed.

3.59. Should be used for welding installation (device) to ensure the maintenance of parameters of technological regimes in accordance with OST 6-19-505-79 and other normative and technical documentation, duly approved.

3.60. Pipeline welding of LDPE and HDPE allowed welders in the presence of documents for production work on welding of plastics.

3.61. Welding of pipes of LDPE and HDPE is allowed to produce at an ambient temperature not below 10 ° C. At low outdoor temperature welding should be done in heated rooms.

When welding the weld must be protected from rain and dust.

3.62. Connecting pipes of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) between themselves and with the molded parts should be carried out by gluing bell and spigot (using glue marks GIPK-127 in accordance with TU 6-05-251-95-79) and using rubber sleeves supplied complete with pipes .

3.63. Glued joints for 15 minutes and not be subjected to mechanical stress. Pipelines with adhesive compounds for 24 hours should not be hydraulically tested.

3.64. Work should be done by bonding at an ambient temperature of 5 to 35 ° C. Work place should be protected from exposure to rain and dust.

 

4. Pipeline crossing NATURAL

And artificial barriers

4.1. Crossings pressure pipelines of water supply and sanitation through water obstacles (rivers, lakes, reservoirs, canals), underwater pipelines and sewer intakes issues within the channel reservoirs and underground crossing ravines, roads (motorways and railways, including metro lines and tramways ) and urban thoroughfares must be done by specialized organizations in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.02.01-87, SNIP III-42-80 (Section 8) and this section.

4.2. Methods of laying pipeline crossings over natural and artificial barriers defined by the project.

4.3. Laying of underground pipelines under roads should be carried out at constant surveying and geodetic control over compliance with a construction company under the draft horizontal and vertical positions casings and pipelines.

4.4. Axis deviation protective cases transitions from design position for gravity free-flow pipes must not exceed:

- Vertical – 0.6% of the length of the case, provided that the design gradient;

- Horizontally – 1% of the length of the case.

Penstock these deviations should not exceed 1, respectively, and 1.5% the length of the case.

 

 

5. WATER AND SANITATION FACILITIES FACILITIES FOR SAMPLING SURFACE WATER

5.1. Construction of facilities for the abstraction of surface water from rivers, lakes, reservoirs and canals should be, as a rule, specialized construction and installation organizations in accordance with the project.

5.2. Before the start of the base unit under the riverbed water intakes should be monitored by their alignments axis and mark time frames.

Boreholes

5.3. In the process of drilling all kinds of work and key performance indicators (excavation, drilling diameter, mounting and removing the pipe from the well cementation, measurements of water levels and other operations) should be recorded in the journal production drilling. We should celebrate the name passed rocks, color, density (fortress), fracture, grain composition of rocks, water content, the presence and magnitude of “plug” in the sinking of quicksands, and appeared steady water level all encountered aquifer fluid loss. Measure the level of water in wells during drilling should be carried out before starting work each shift. In flowing wells water levels should be measured by building pipes or by measuring water pressure.

5.4. During drilling, according to the actual geological section may be installed within the aquifer project organization drilling depth adjustment borehole diameters and technical columns planting depth without changing the operating diameter of the well and without increasing the cost of operations. Modifications to the well must not impair her health status and performance.

5.5. Samples should be selected, one from each layer of rock, and at a uniform layer – 10 m

In agreement with the developer is allowed to select rock samples are not from all wells.

5.6. Isolating exploited aquifer in the well of unused aquifers should be done with drilling method:

rotary – through the shell side of the annulus and cementing casing strings to a level stipulated by the project:

shock – zadavlivaniem and clogging in the casing layer of natural thick clay at a depth of at least 1 m or conduct podbashmachnoy cementation by creating a cavity or expander bit eccentric.

5.7. To ensure the project under the granulometric composition of the material dusting filter wells and fine sand clay fraction should be removed by washing, and before backfilling the washed material should be disinfected.

5.8. Outcrop filter while it should be sprinkled by raising the casing string each time by 0.5 – 0.6 m after dusting wells at 0.8 1m height. The upper limit must be sprinkled above the working part of the filter not less than 5 m

5.9. Water wells after drilling and installation of the filter to be tested pumping produced continuously within the time provided by the project.

Before starting the pumping well should be cleaned of sludge and pumped usually airlift. In fractured rock and gravel-pebble-bearing rocks pumping should start with the maximum design water level decline, and in the sandy rocks – with a minimum reduction project. The minimum of the actual lowering of the water should be between 0.4 – 0.6 max actual.

When forced to stop work on the pumping of water, if the total stop time exceeds 10% of the total project time per lowering of water level, water pumping for this reduction should be repeated. In the case of pumping from wells equipped with filter dusting, dusting material shrinkage value should be measured in the process of pumping once a day.

5.10. Flow rate (capacity) wells should be determined measuring cup with a time of filling at least 45 s. Flow rate may be determined by using weirs and water meters.

The water level in the well should be measured with an accuracy of 0.1% of the depth of the measured water level.

Flow rate and water level in the well should be measured at least once every 2 hours throughout the evacuation time, a certain project.

Control measurements of the depth of the well should be done at the beginning and end of the pump in the presence of the customer.

5.11. In the process of pumping drilling organization must produce measured water temperature and water sampling in accordance with GOST 18963-73 and GOST 4979-49 with delivery to the laboratory for testing water quality in accordance with GOST 2874-82.

Quality of casing cementation, as well as the location of the working of the filter should be checked by geophysical methods. Estuary flowing wells at the end of drilling must be equipped with valve and fitting gauge.

5.12. Upon completion of the water well drilling and water pumping test its top service pipe must be welded metal lid and have a threaded hole for the bolt-tube to measure the water level. On the tube should be applied design and drilling wells numbers, name of organization and year of drilling drilling.

To operate the well in accordance with the project must be equipped with devices to measure water levels and flow rates.

5.13. Upon completion of drilling and testing of pumping water well drilling organization should pass it to the customer in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.01.04-87, as well as samples passed rocks and documentation (passport), including:

- Geological and lithological section with the construction of wells, corrected for geophysical data;

- Acts on the drilling, installation of the filter casing cementation;

- Consolidated with the results of well log decrypt it signed organization, run geophysical operations logbook for pumping water from wells, and data on the results of chemical, bacteriological analysis and organoleptic characteristics of water in accordance with GOST 2874-82 and the conclusion of the sanitary-epidemiological service.

Documentation before delivery to the customer should be agreed with the developer.

 

Capacitive structures

5.14. When installing concrete and reinforced concrete monolithic and precast capacitive structures except for the requirements of the project should be carried out as the requirements of SNIP 3.03.01-87 and these rules.

5.15. Backfill soil in the sinuses and sprinkled capacitive structures should be performed, as a rule, mechanized way after laying communications to capacitive structures, hydraulic testing facilities, address the identified defects, waterproofing the walls and ceilings.

5.16. After all the types of work and a set of concrete design strength produced hydraulic test capacitive structures in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 7.

5.17. Installation of drainage and distribution systems are allowed to produce filtering facilities after hydraulic test tank facilities for leaks.

5.18. Round holes in the pipelines for the distribution of water and air, as well as to collect water drilling should be carried out in accordance with the class indicated in the draft.

Deviations from the design width of slot openings in polyethylene pipes should not exceed 0.1 mm, and the length of the project in light of the gap ± 3 mm.

5.19. Deviations in the distances between the axes coupling caps in the distribution and outlet filter systems should not exceed ± 4 mm, and marks the top caps (for cylindrical projections) – ± 2 mm of the design position.

5.20. Mark edges weirs in devices for distribution and collection of water (gutters, gutters, etc.) must comply with the project and must be aligned to the water level.

When the device overflows with triangular cutouts deviation marks the bottom of the recesses of the project shall not exceed ± 3 mm.

5.21. On the inner and outer surfaces of the grooves and channels for the collection and distribution of water, and to collect the rain should not be shells and growths. Trays gutters and channels should have given the project a bias towards the movement of water (or sediment). Presence on them sites with reverse bias is not allowed.

5.22. Stacking filters boot installations for water treatment filtration may be performed after the hydrostatic test the capacities of these facilities, washing and cleaning of pipelines connected to them, individual testing of each distribution and collection systems, measuring and locking devices.

5.23. Filter media materials, to be laid in water treatment facilities, including biofilters, granulometric composition shall conform to the requirements of the project or SNIP SNIP 2.04.02-84 and 2.04.03-85.

5.24. Layer thickness deviation of each fraction from the filtering bed and the design value throughout the thickness of the load should not be more than ± 20 mm.

5.25. After completion of the installation of the filter loading facilities of drinking water must be made washing and disinfection facilities, conduct which is presented in Annex 5 recommended.

5.26. Installation of flammable wooden structural elements irrigators, vodoulovitelnyh lattices air guide panels and partitions cooling tower and spray ponds should be carried out after the welding work.

 

 

6. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF PIPELINES AND WATER AND SANITATION FACILITIES IN SPECIAL natural and climatic conditions

6.1. The pipelines and water supply and sanitation in the special natural and climatic conditions should comply with the requirements of the project and this part.

6.2. Temporary water supply pipelines, it is usually necessary to lay on the ground while adhering to the requirements for laying pipelines permanent water supply.

6.3. Construction of pipelines and facilities in permafrost should be made, as a rule, at subzero temperatures outside air frozen soil conservation grounds. In the case of construction of pipelines and facilities for positive outdoor temperatures should remain the foundation soil in the frozen state and prevent violations of their temperature-humidity regime established by the project.

Training base for pipelines and facilities on ldonasyschennyh soils should be carried out by thawing them to the projected depth and seals, as well as by replacing in accordance with the project ldonasyschennyh soil thawed soil compaction.

Movement of vehicles and construction machinery in the summer should be for roads and access roads that have been built in accordance with the project.

6.4. Construction of pipelines and structures in seismic areas should be carried out by the same methods and techniques as well as in normal construction, but with the implementation of the activities envisaged by the project to ensure their seismic resistance. Joints of steel pipes and fittings should be welded only electric arc method and check the quality of welding their physical control methods in the amount of 100%.

During the construction of reinforced concrete capacitive structures, pipelines, wells and chambers should be used mortars of plastics in accordance with the project.

6.5. All work to ensure seismic resistance of pipelines and facilities, made during construction, it should be reflected in the job log and survey instruments hidden works.

6.6. When backfilling sinuses capacitive structures, built on undermined territories should ensure the safety of joints.

Gaps joints all their height (from the base to the top of the foundations of the buildings nadfundamentnoy) must be free of soil, construction debris, sagging concrete, mortar and waste formwork.

Acts examination of the hidden works shall be executed all major special work, including: installation of expansion joints, seams slip device in foundation structures and joints, anchoring and welding joints field device connections-struts, the device passes through the pipe wall wells, chambers, capacitive structures.

6.7. Pipelines should be laid on the marshes in the trench after removal of water therefrom or in the flooded trench subject to acceptance in accordance with the project the necessary measures against them floating.

Scourge of the pipeline should be to drag along the trench or move afloat with plugged ends.

Laying pipelines to completely backfilled with sealing dam must be carried out in normal soil conditions.

6.8. The pipelines on subsiding soils pits under butt joints shall be made by compaction.

 

7. TEST pipelines and facilities

Penstock

7.1. In the absence of instructions to the draft test method of pressure pipes to be tested for strength and integrity are usually hydraulically. Depending on the climatic conditions in the construction and in the absence of water can be applied pneumatic test method for pipes with internal calculation pressure P p , max:

- Underground cast iron, asbestos cement and concrete – 0.5 MPa (5 kgf / cm 2 );

- Underground steel – 1.6 MPa (16 kgf / cm 2 );

- Aboveground steel – 0.3 MPa (3 kgf / cm 2 ).

7.2. Test pressure pipelines of all classes should be the construction organizations, usually in two stages:

first - a preliminary test of strength and tightness performed after filling cavities with tamping soil to half the vertical diameter and powdering pipes in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.02.01-87 with left open for inspection butt joints, this test may be carried out without the participation of the customer and operational organization with drawing up the act, approved the chief engineer of the construction company;

second - acceptance (final) strength test and tightness should be performed after complete filling of the pipeline with the participation of representatives of the customer and operational organization with the drawing up of the results of the test in the form of mandatory application of 1 or 3.

Both phases of testing should be performed prior to installation of hydrants, air valves, safety valves, instead of on which the test should be set flanged plugs. Preliminary testing of pipelines, inspection available in working order or be in the process of building an immediate filling (production work in the winter, in cramped conditions), with appropriate justification in projects not allowed to produce.

7.3. Pipelines underwater crossings are subject to a preliminary test twice on the slipway or site after welding pipes, but prior to the application of anticorrosion insulation to welded joints, and second – after laying pipe in the trench in the design position, but before backfilling with soil.

Results of the preliminary and acceptance tests should execute an act of compulsory application form 1.

7.4. Pipelines, built on transitions through rail and road category I and II shall be subject to a preliminary test after laying the pipeline working in box (housing) to fill the annulus cavity case and to backfill the working and receiving pits transition.

7.5. Magnitude of the internal design pressure P P and P test pressure and to conduct a preliminary review and testing the strength of the discharge pipe should be determined in accordance with the project requirements of SNIP 2.04.02-84 and listed in documentation.

The test pressure for leaks P g for both pre-and acceptance test pressure line must be equal to the value of the internal design pressure P p plus the value of P, plus the value  to be considered in accordance with the Table. 4 depending on the upper limit of the pressure measurement accuracy class and the scale interval gauge. The magnitude of R g plus the value should not exceed the value of the acceptance test pressure pipeline strength P and . plus the value of

7.6 * Pipelines made of steel, cast iron, concrete and asbestos cement pipes, regardless of the test method shall be tested at a length of less than 1 km – at one time, at greater length – areas less than 1 km. Length of the test sites of these pipelines for hydraulic testing method permitted to take more than 1 km, provided that the value of the allowable flow of water should be podkachennoy for area 1 km long.

Pipelines from pipes LDPE, HDPE and PVC regardless of the test method should be tested at a length not more than 0.5 miles at a time, at greater length – areas not more than 0.5 km. With appropriate justification test in the project allowed these pipelines at a time when the length of 1 km, provided that the value of the allowable flow podkachennoy water should be for 0.5 km long section.
TABLE 4.

The magnitude of the internaldesign pressure in its pipeline Pp, MPa (kgf / cm2 )

for different values ​​of the internal pressure P calculated its p in pipeline and characteristics

using technical actuated gauges

upper limitl measuring pressure, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

price Affairseniya, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

P,MPa( kgf /

cm 2)

upper limitl measuring pressure, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

price fission, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

P,MPa (kgf /

cm 2)

top beforeeating measuring pressure, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

Price division, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

P

MPakgf /

cm 2)

upperlimit tions measuring pressure, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

price dElena MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

P

MPa (kgf / cm2 )

Accuracy classes techn eskih manometers

 

0.4

0.6

1

1.5

0.4 (4)

0.6

(6)

0,002

(0.02)

0.02

(0.2)

0.6

(6)

0,005

(0.05)

0.03

(0.3)

0.6

(6)

0,005

(0.05)

0.05

(0.5)

0.6

(6)

0.01

(0.1)

0.07

(0.7)

From 0.41 to 0.75

(4.1 to 7.5)

1

(10)

0,005

(0.05)

0.04

(0.4)

1.6

(16)

0.01

(0.1)

0.07

(0.7)

1.6

(16)

0.01

(0.1)

0.1

(1)

1.6

(16)

0.02

(0.2)

0.14

(1.4)

0.76 to 1.2

(7.6 to 12)

1.6

(16)

0,005

(0.05)

0.05

(0.5)

1.6

(16)

0.01

(0.1)

0.09

(0.9)

2.5

(25)

0.02

(0.2)

0.14

(1.4)

2.5

(25)

0.05

(0.5)

0.25

(2.5)

1.21 to 2.0

(12.1 to 20)

2.5

(25)

0.01

(0.1)

0.1

(1)

2.5

(25)

0.02

(0.2)

0.14

(1.4)

4

(40)

0.05

(0.5)

0.25

2.5)

4

(40)

0.1

(1)

0.5

(5)

From 2.01 to 2.5

(From 20.1 to 25)

4

(40)

0.02

(0.2)

0.14

(1.4)

4

(40)

0.05

(0.5)

0.25

(2.5)

4

(40)

0.05

(0.5)

0.3

(3)

6

(60)

0.1

(1)

0.5

(5)

From 2.51 to 3.0

(From 25.1 to 30)

4

(40)

0.02

(0.2)

0.16

(1.6)

4

(40)

0.05

(0.5)

0.25

(2.5)

6

(60)

0.05

(0.5)

0.35

(3.5)

6

(60)

0.1

(1)

0.6

(6)

From 3.01 to 4.0

(From 30.1 to 40)

6

(60)

0.02

(0.2)

0.2

(2)

6

(60)

0.05

(0.5)

0.3

(3)

6

(60)

0.05

(0.5)

0.45

(4.5)

6

(60)

0.1

(1)

0.7

(7)

From 4.01 to 5.0

(From 40.1 to 50)

6

(60)

0.2

(0.2)

0.24

(2.4)

6

(60)

0.05

(0.5)

0.4

(4)

10

(100)

0.1

(1)

0.6

(6)

10

(100)

0.2

(2)

1

(10)

 

7.7. In the absence of the draft guidance on the magnitude of the hydraulic test pressure Ree to perform preliminary tests flowlines strength value taken in accordance with the Table. 5 *

TABLE 5.

Char eristika pipeline

Bandwidth specifications Test Yelnia pressure in the preliminary test, MPa (kgf / cm 2 )

1. Steel tion ith class * with butt joints n Aoi your arch (including underwater) with vnutreoy nnim rascheoy apparent to those davleniemoy P p th to 0.75 MPa (oh 7.5kgs/sm 2 nd) th

1.5 (15)

2. However, from 0.75 to 2.5 MPa (7.5 to 25 kgf / cm 2Same as 0.75 to 2.5 MPa (7.5 to 25 )

Internal calculation etnoe pressure a factor of 2, but no more than the factory test pressure pipes

3. Same communication. 2.5 MPa (25 kgf / cm 2 )

Internal settlement e pressure a factor of 1.5, but not more than the factory test pressure pipes

4. Steel, consisting of separate sections, connected by flanges with internal design pressure it Pp to 0.5 MPa (5 kgf / cm 2 )

0.6 (6)

5. Steel 2 – and third classes with butt with Unity on welding and internal calculation pressure Pp to 0.75 MPa (7.5 kgf / cm 2 )

1.0 (10)

6. However, from 0.75 to 2.5 MPa (7.5 to 25 kgf / cm 2)

Internal settlement e pressure a factor of 1.5, but not more than the factory test pressure pipes

7. The same. St.. 2.5 MPa (25 kgf / cm 2 )

Internal design pressure by a factor of 1.25, but n e a factory test pressure pipes

8. Steel Samoth echny intake conduit or sewer issue

Fits about ektom

9. Cast iron with butt joints under Crimping (GOST 9583-75 for pipes of all classes) with an internal calculation pressure of 1 MPa (10 kgf / cm 2 ) Int morning calculated pressure plus 0.5 (5), but at least one (10) and not more than 1.5 (15)
10. Same with butt joints s rubber cuffs for pipes of all classes In nutrennee design pressure by a factor of 1.5, but not less than 1.5 (15) and not more than 0.6 factory hydraulic pressure test
11. Reinforced Ext morning the design pressure by a factor of 1.3, but not more than the factory test pressure waterproof
12. Asbestos cement Internal ennee design pressure by a factor of 1.3, but not more than 0.6 factory test pressure waterproof
13. Plastic Internal ennee design pressure by a factor of 1.3

 

* Classes pipelines accepted SNIP 2.04.02-84.

 

7.8. Prior to the preliminary acceptance test and pressure piping must be:

- Completed all work on the sealing of joints, the device stops, installation fittings and fixtures, results are satisfactory for welding quality control and insulation of steel pipe;

- Flanged plugs installed on taps instead hydrants, air valves, safety valves and places joining operated pipelines;

- Prepared by means of filling and emptying of the test crimping area, mounted and installed temporary communication devices and cranes required for testing;

- Drained and ventilated wells for the production of preparatory work, organized vigil on the border areas of the buffer zone;

- Filled with water to the test section of the pipeline (for hydraulic testing method) and bled.

Procedure for hydrostatic test pressure pipes Leak and set out in Annex 2 recommended.

7.9. For testing the pipeline responsible executor of works should be issued permit-to-work with high-risk indication of the size of the buffer zone. Form the permit and order his extradition must comply with the requirements of SNIP III-4-80 *.

7.10. To measure the hydraulic pressure during the pre-acceptance testing of pipelines and Leak and certified should apply in the prescribed manner spring gauges accuracy class 1.5 with a body diameter of not less than 160 mm and with a scale for nominal pressure of about 4/3 test P and .

To measure the volume of water is pumping into the pipeline and let him out during the test should be applied dimensional tanks or cold water meters (water meters) according to GOST 6019 – 83, certified in the prescribed manner.

7.11. Filling the pipeline with water test should be carried out usually at a rate m 3 / h, not more than 4 – 5 – for pipes up to 400 mm, 6 -10 – for pipes with diameters from 400 to 600 mm, 10 – 15 – for pipe diameter
700 – 1000 mm and 15 – 20 – Pipe diameter greater than 1100 mm. no more than 4 – 5 – Pipe diameter up to 400 mm, 6 -10 – Pipe diameter from 400 to 600 mm, 10 – 15 – Pipe diameter

When filling the pipeline with water air must be removed through the open taps and valves.

7.12. Acceptance test hydraulic pressure pipe is allowed to start after filling it with soil in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 3.02.01-87 and fill with water to water saturation, and if he was born in a full state of at least 72 h – for concrete pipes (including including 12 hours at an internal calculation pressure P p ); cement pipes -24 hours (including 12 hours at an internal calculation pressure P p ) h-24 for cast iron pipes. For steel and polyethylene pipes for the purpose of saturation extract is performed.

If the pipe was filled with water to backfill soil, the specified duration of saturation established since reburial.

7.13. Penstock is recognized and passed the preliminary acceptance hydraulic leak test, if the flow rate of water podkachennoy not exceed the allowable flow podkachennoy water on the test plot 1 km in length and pain of the table. 6 *

If the flow exceeds the permissible podkachennoy water, the line is not recognized to pass the test and should be taken to identify and eliminate latent defects of the pipeline, and then must be done retesting the pipeline.

* Table 6.

Internal enny pipe diameter, mm

Permissible flow podkachennoy water on the test section of the pipeline length of 1 km or more, l / min, with the acceptance test pressure for pipes

steel

iron

asbestos-cement

iron- concrete

100

0.28

0.70

1.40

-

125

0.35

0.90

1.56

-

150

0.42

1.05

1.72

-

200

0.56

1.40

1.98

2.0

250

0.70

1.55

2.22

2.2

300

0.85

1.70

2.42

2.4

350

0.90

1.80

2.62

2.6

400

1.00

1.95

2.80

2.8

450

1.05

2.10

2.96

3.0

500

1.10

2.20

3.14

3.2

600

1.20

2.40

-

3.4

700

1.30

2.55

-

3.7

800

1.35

2.70

-

3.9

900

1.45

2.90

-

4.2

1000

1.50

3.00

-

4.4

1100

1.55

-

-

4.6

1200

1.65

-

-

4.8

1400

1.75

-

-

5.0

1600

1.85

-

-

5.2

1800

1.95

-

-

6.2

2000

2.10

-

-

6.9

 

Notes: 1. For cast iron pipes with butt joints in rubber seals podkachennoy permissible flow of water should be taken with a factor of 0.7.

2. With a length of the test section of the pipeline less than 1 km in the table eligible costs podkachennoy water must be multiplied by the length, expressed in km, with a length of over 1 km podkachennoy permissible flow of water should be taken for 1 km.

3. For pipelines of LDPE and HDPE with welded joints and pipe PVC glue joints podkachennoy permissible flow of water should be taken as for steel pipes, equivalent largest outer diameter defining this flow interpolation.

4. For pipes of PVC compounds for rubber cuffs podkachennoy permissible flow of water should be taken as for cast iron pipes with the same compounds, equivalent largest outer diameter defining this flow interpolation.

7.14. The test pressure for pipelines pneumatically Leak and in the absence of data in the project should be taken:

- For steel piping with the calculated internal pressure Pp to 0.5 MPa
(5 kgf / cm 2 ) to 0.5 MPa
vklyuch.do 0.5 MPa
- 0.6 MPa (6 kg / cm 2 ) for preliminary and acceptance tests pipelines; 0.5 MPa

- For steel piping with the calculated internal pressure Pp 0.5 – 1.6 MPa
(5 – 16 kgf / cm 2 ) – 1.15 Pp at preliminary and acceptance tests of pipelines; iem Pp 0.5 – 1.6 MPa

- For cast iron, concrete and asbestos cement pipes regardless of the value calculated internal pressure – 0.15 MPa (1.5 kgf / cm 2 ) – Advance and 0.6 MPa (6 kg / cm 2 ) – Acceptance test.

7.15. After filling the steel pipe with air prior to its alignment tests should be performed in the pipeline temperature, and soil temperature. Minimum exposure time depending on the pipe diameter, h, at DN:

Up to 300 mm 2

From 300 to 600 “- 4

“600″ 900 “- 8

“900″ 1200 “- 16

“1200″ 1 400 “- 24

St. 1400 “- 32

7.16. In preliminary tests the strength of a pneumatic pipe should be maintained under the test pressure for 30 minutes. To maintain the test pressure must Priming air.

7.17. Inspection of the pipeline in order to identify the defective locations allowed under the pressure reduction: in steel pipes – up to 0.3 MPa (3 kgf / cm 2 ) in cast iron, concrete and asbestos – 0.1 MPa (1 kgf / cm 2 ). While identifying leaks and other defects in the pipeline should be made ​​by the sound leaking air and bubbles, formed in areas of air leakage through the butt joints, covered on the outside with soapy emulsion.

7.18. Defects are identified and marked during the inspection of the pipeline, should be removed after the reduction of excess pressure in the line to zero. After the elimination of defects must be made re-test the pipeline.

7.19. Pipeline to pass the preliminary recognized pneumatic test of strength, if by careful examination of the pipeline will not be found violating the integrity of the pipeline, defects in welds and joints.

7.20. Acceptance testing of pipelines pneumatically Leak and should be performed in the following sequence:

- The line pressure should be brought to test pressure on the strength specified in paragraph 7.14, and under this pressure pipe stand for 30 minutes, if the violation of the integrity of the pipeline under the test pressure does not happen, the line pressure to reduce to 0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf / cm 2 ) and the pipe stand at this pressure for 24 hours;

- After the expiration of Exposure pipeline pressure of 0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf / cm 2 ) is set to a pressure of 0.03 MPa (0.3 kgf / cm 2 ), which is the initial test pressure piping for leaks P , noted start the leak test, as well as barometric pressure P , mm Hg, relevant to the test;

- Line testing under this pressure for the time specified in Table. 7;

- After the time specified in the Table. 7, measure the final pressure in the pipeline P in mm of water column, the barometric pressure and the final P to , mmHg;

P the pressure drop, mm of water. Art. determine the formula

 

P =  (P n = P - P to P = ) + 13.6 (P b P = N = P - P b P = a ). (1) P =

 

Table 7.

Inner Diam eter

pipes, mm

Pipelines

Steel

iron

Asbestos-cement and reinforced Eton

Duration s test, h-min

allowable pressure drop during the test, mm water column

duration of test, h – min

allowable pressure drop during use tests are carried mm water column

duration nost test h – min

allowable pressure drop during the test, mm water column

100

125

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

900

0-30

0-30

1-00

1-00

1-00

2-00

2-00

2-00

4-00

4-00

4-00

6-00

6-00

6-00

55

45

75

55

45

75

55

45

80

75

50

60

50

40

0-15

0-15

0-15

0-30

0-30

1-00

1-00

1-00

2-00

2-00

2-00

3-00

3-00

4-00

65

55

50

65

50

70

55

50

80

70

55

65

45

55

0-15

0-15

0-15

0-30

0-30

1-00

1-00

2-00

3-00

3-00

3-00

5-00

5-00

6-00

130

110

100

130

100

140

110

100

160

140

110

130

90

110

1000

1200

1400

12-00

12-00

12-00

70

50

45

4-00

-

-

50

-

-

6-00

-

-

100

-

-

 

When using the gauge as a working fluid water = gauge When used in water as a working fluid  1 using a pressure gauge, as a working fluid of water kerosene -  = 0.87. When using the gauge as a working fluid of water kerosene -

 

Note. Upon agreement with the duration of the project organization is allowed to reduce the pressure drop in the two times, but not less than 1 h, while the magnitude of the pressure drop should be in proportion to the reduced size.

 

7.21. Pipeline recognized withstood acceptance (final) pneumatic test, if not compromised his integrity and pressure drop P, defined by (1) shall not exceed the values ​​given in Table. 7. Thus air bubbles may be formed on the outer surface of the wetted concrete pressure pipes.

Non-pressure pipes

7.22. Gravity piping shall be tested for leaks twice: preliminary – to backfill and acceptance (final) after filling in the following ways:

first - determine the amount of water added to the pipeline laid in dry soils and in wet soils, when the level (horizon) of groundwater at the top of the well is located below ground by more than half the depth of the pipe, starting from the hatch to shelygi;

second - definition of water flow into the pipeline laid in wet soils, when the level (horizon) of groundwater at the top of the well is located below the ground surface at less than half the depth of the pipe, starting from the hatch to shelygi. Testing method established pipeline project.

7.23. Wells pressureless pipes having waterproofing the inside, be tested for leaks by determining the amount of water added, and the wells having a waterproofed from the outside, – determining the flow of water through them.

Wells with the project waterproof wall interior and exterior insulation can be tested for the addition of water or ground water inflow, in accordance with paragraph 7.22, together with pipelines or apart from them.

Wells without project watertight walls, interior or exterior waterproofing, acceptance tests for leaks exposed.

7.24. Non-pressure test pipelines for leaks expose portions between adjacent wells.

If you experience problems with the delivery of water in the project-based, non-pressure test pipes are allowed to produce selectively (as directed by the customer): the total length of the pipeline to 5 km – two or three sections, with the length of the pipeline over 5 km – several sections with a total length of not less than 30% .

If the results of a sample test sections of the pipeline will be unsatisfactory, the test shall be subject to all sections of the pipeline.

7.25. The hydrostatic pressure in the pipeline during its preliminary test water to be created by filling riser installed in the upper point and the upper pit filled with water if the latter is to be tested. The magnitude of the hydrostatic pressure at the top of the pipeline is determined from the high water level in the riser or pipeline shelygoy pit above the horizon or groundwater, if the latter is above shelygi. The magnitude of the hydrostatic pressure in the pipeline at his trial should be specified in the documentation. For pipelines, built from the unconfined concrete, reinforced concrete and clay pipes, this value should normally be equal to 0.04 MPa (0.4 kgf / cm 2 ).

7.26. Preliminary testing of pipelines for leaks produced in the pipeline is not covered with earth for 30 minutes. The test pressure must be maintained by addition of water in the riser or in the well, preventing lowering of the water level at which more than 20 cm

Pipeline and well recognized to pass the preliminary test, if their examination is not detected water leaks. If no plan increased requirements for the tightness of the pipeline on the pipe surfaces and joints are allowed to form dew drops do not merge into a single stream when the amount of fogging by not more than 5% in the test tube section.

7.27. Acceptance test for leaks should begin after exposure to water-filled state of reinforced concrete pipe and manholes with waterproofing on the inside or waterproof wall project – within 72 hours and pipelines and wells of other materials – 24 hours

7.28. The tightness in the acceptance test the buried pipeline is defined ways:

first - measured on top in the sump volume is added to a riser or well water for 30 min, thus lowering the water level in the riser or in the well may be no more than 20 cm;

second - measured by volume in the lower pit of the inflowing groundwater in the pipeline.

Pipeline to pass the acceptance test is recognized for leaks if certain volumes in the test water added by the first method (a tributary of groundwater by the second method) will be no more than indicated in Table. 8 * what should be drafted act in the form of compulsory application 4.

 

TABLE 8 *

Conditional

diameter pipeline

in mm

Allowable added in transport uboprovod water (water flow) 10m length of the test pipe during the test period of 30 min, l, for pipes

concrete and reinforced concrete

ceramic

asbestos

100

1.0

1.0

0.3

150

1.4

1.4

0.5

200

4.2

2.4

1.4

250

5.0

3.0

-

300

5.4

3.6

1.8

350

6.2

4.0

-

400

6.7

4.2

2.2

450

-

4.4

-

500

7.5

4.6

-

550

-

4.8

-

600

8.3

5.0

-

 

Notes: 1. By increasing the duration of the test more than 30 minutes the allowable amount of added water (water flow) should be increased in proportion to the duration of the test.

2. The allowable amount of added water (inflow) in zhalezobetonny pipe diameter over 600 mm should be determined by the formula

= 0.83 (+4 D), l, 10 m length of pipeline in the test, 30 min (2)

where D-inner (conditional) pipe diameter, dm.

3. For reinforced concrete pipe with butt joints in rubber seals allowable amount of added water (water flow) should be a factor of 0.7.

4. Allowable amounts of added water (water flow) through the walls and the bottom of the well to a depth of 1 m it should be taken as an acceptable amount of added water (water flow) per 1 m of pipes with a diameter equal on the area to the inner diameter of the well.

5. Allowable amount of added water (water flow) in the pipeline being constructed from precast concrete and blocks should be the same as for pipes of reinforced concrete pipes of equal to them in cross-sectional area.

6. Allowable amount added to the water pipeline (inflow) 10 m length of the test pipe during the test 30 minutes for LDPE and HDPE pipes with welded joints and pressure pipes PVC glue joints should be determined for diameters up to 500 mm inclusive. according to the formula q = 0.03 D, a diameter of 500 mm – the formula
q =
0.2 +0.03 D, where D - violation zhny diameters transport conduit dm; q - led Jicin allowable amount of water added l.

 

7. Allowable amount added to the water pipeline (inflow) 10 m length of the test pipe during the test 30 minutes for PVC pipe with rubber compounds cuff should be determined by the formula q = 0.06 +0,01 D, where D - outer diameter of the pipeline, dm; q - the permissible amount of water added, l.

 

7.29. Storm sewer pipes are subject to prior review and testing for leaks in accordance with the requirements of this subsection if it is provided by the project.

7.30. Pipelines of unconfined concrete socket, rebated and plain end pipes with a diameter of more than 1600 mm, intended for the project pipeline, either continuously or intermittently pressurized to 0.05 MPa (B m of water column) and having performed in accordance with a special project waterproof outer or inner lining, the hydraulic pressure test shall be specified in the project.

 

Capacitive structures

7.31. Hydraulic test for water resistance (permeability) capacitive structures should be performed after the design strength of concrete, cleaning and washing.

Waterproofing and sprinkled ground capacitive structures should be performed after a satisfactory hydraulic testing of these structures, if the other requirements are not justified by the project.

7.32. Prior to the pressure test tank facilities should be filled with water in two stages:

first - filling a height of 1 m with time during the day; second - content to the design level.

Capacitive structures, filled with water to the design level, it should be kept for at least three days.

7.33. Capacitive structures withstood pressure test recognized if the decline of water in it for the day is less than 3 liters per 1 m 2 of wetted surface and bottom walls, the walls in the seams and no signs of a leak and found the soil moisture in the ground. Allowed only slight darkening and fogging separate locations.

When tested for water resistance capacitive structures decline of water to evaporation from an open water surface should be considered further.

7.34. If there are leaks and jet water stains on the walls or wetting the soil at the base of the capacitive structure is not considered to pass the test, even if the loss of water in it does not exceed the standard. In this case, after measuring the water loss from the complete bay facilities must be fixed place to be repaired.

After elimination of the detected defects must be made re-test capacitive structures.

7.35. When tested reservoirs and tanks for storage of aggressive fluids leaking water is not allowed. The test should be performed prior to the application of anti-corrosion coating.

7.36. The flow channels filters and contact clarifiers (prefabricated and monolithic concrete) tested hydraulically calculated pressure specified in the documentation.

7.37. The flow channels filters and contact clarifiers are recognized to pass the pressure test if visual inspection of the side walls of the channel filters and water leaks were found and if within 10 minutes The test pressure does not decrease by more than 0.002 MPa (0.02 kg / cm 2 )

7.38. Catchment tank towers must be waterproof and hydraulic testing of the tank on the inside surface of the walls is not allowed browning or weak fogging separate locations.

7.39. Drinking water reservoirs, septic tanks and other facilities after the capacitive device overlaps be tested hydraulically to the water leakage in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 7.31-7.34.

Drinking water reservoir to waterproofing and backfill soil should be additionally tested for vacuum and overpressure respectively vacuum and pressurized air at a rate of 0.0008 MPa (80 mm water column) for 30 min and recognized pass the test if values ​​respectively vacuum and excess pressure for 30 minutes will not decrease by more than 0.0002 MPa (20 mm of water. tbsp.) if other requirements are not justified by the project.

7.40. Digester (cylindrical part) should be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs. 7.31-7.34, and joists, metal gas cap (plenum) should be tested for leaks (gas-tight) pneumatically pressure 0.005 MPa (500 mm water column).

Digester kept under test pressure of not less than 24 hours When a defective places they should be removed, after which the structure should be tested at a pressure drop for an additional 8 hours Digester recognized pass the test for leaks if the pressure in it for 8 hours drops more than 0,001 MPa (100 mm wg).

7.41. Breather caps and distribution system filters after installation to download filters should be put to test by applying water intensity of
5-8 l / (s • install them before downloading filters should be subjected to the test by the water intensity
2 install them before downloading filters should be subjected to the test by water supply intensity
) to install them before downloading filters should be subjected to the test by the intensity of the water supply
and air intensity of 20 l / (s • install them before downloading filters should be subjected to the test by the water intensity
2 ) to install them before downloading filters should be put to test by applying water intensity
by threefold repetition of
8-10 min. Detected with defective caps must be replaced.

7.42. Completed construction of pipelines and construction of drinking water supply prior to acceptance into service subject to washing (cleaning) and disinfection by chlorination followed by washing to obtain satisfactory control of physico-chemical and bacteriological analyzes of water meeting the requirements of
GOST 2874-82 and the “Guidelines for the control of household disinfection potable water and chlorine disinfection of water supply facilities in central and local water supply, “Health Ministry SSSR.7.42. Completed construction of pipelines and construction of drinking water supply prior to acceptance into service subject to washing (cleaning) and disinfection by chlorination followed by washing to obtain satisfactory control of physico-chemical and bacteriological analyzes of water meeting the requirements of

7.43. Washing and disinfection of pipelines and facilities of drinking water supply should be made of the construction organizations working for the laying and installation of pipelines and facilities, with the participation of representatives of the customer and operational organization in monitoring, carried out by representatives of sanitary-epidemiological service. Procedure for cleaning and disinfection of pipelines and plants for water-injection is presented in Annex 5 recommended.

7.44. On the results produced by washing and disinfection of pipelines and facilities of drinking water supply should be made by an act of the form given in Annex 6 mandatory.

Test results should be issued capacitive structures act, signed by representatives of the construction organization, customer and operational organization.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

TO TEST pressure systems and water supply and sewerage, under construction in the special natural and climatic conditions

 

7.45. Penstock water and sanitation conditions under construction in all types of soil subsidence outside the industrial sites and settlements, tested portions of not more than 500 m in the territory of industrial sites and settlements length test sites should be administered according to local conditions, but not more than 300 m

7.46. Checking waterproof capacitive structures built on subsiding soils of all types, must be made ​​within 5 days after they are filled with water, with the decline of water per day should not exceed 2 liters per 1 m 2 of wetted surface and bottom walls.

Upon detection of a leak of water facilities shall be released and discharged into place certain project, excluding built-up area flooding.

7.47. Hydraulic testing of pipelines and capacitive structures erected in areas where permafrost should produce, as a rule, at an ambient temperature below 0 ° C, unless other test conditions are not justified by the project.

 

ANNEX 1

Required

ACT

About an acceptance of hydraulic tests penstock Leak and

 

City __________________ “” _____ of _____________ 19

 

Commission composed of representatives of: construction organization

_____________________________________________________________

(Name of organization, position, name, Acting)

 

technical supervision of the customer ___________________________________

(Name of organization, position,

_______________________________________________________________

surname, Acting)

operational organization ____________________________________

(Name of organization, position,

________________________________________________________________

surname, Acting)

made this act of acceptance on hydraulic test

Leak and pressure pipe section

_____________________________________________________________

(Name of the object and number of pickets on its borders,

_____________________________________________________________

pipe length, diameter, pipe material and joints)

These working documents in quantities calculated internal pressure test of the pipeline P p = _____ MPa (_____ kgf / cm 2 ) and the test pressure
and ) and the test pressure
MPa = ______ (_____ kgf / cm 2 ).) and test pressure

Pressure measurement during the test performed by the technical accuracy class __ manometer with an upper limit of measurement __ kgf / cm 2 .

Scale interval gauge _____ kgf / cm 2 .

Manometer was located above the axis of the pipeline on the Z = ______ m

With the above values ​​of the internal settlement and the test pressure of the pipeline pressure gauge P RM and P IM should be respectively:

RM = R p - = ______ kg / cm 2 - , R IM -  = R and - = ______ kg / cm 2 . - -

Permissible flow podkachennoy water defined by Table. 6 * 1 km of the pipeline, equal ________ l / min, or, relative to the length of the test pipe is ______ l / min.

 

 

CONDUCTING TESTS AND RESULTS

 

To test the strength of the line pressure was increased to P IM = ______ kg / cm 2 and maintained for _____ minutes, with the exception of its reduction of more than 1 kg / cm 2 . Thereafter, the pressure was reduced to a value calculated internal gauge pressure P RM = ______ kg / cm 2 and inspected the pipeline nodes in wells (cells) with leaks and ruptures were found and the pipeline was admitted for further testing for leaks.

For leak testing pressure in the pipeline was increased to test pressure for leaks P r = P RM + R = ______ kg / cm 2 + , observed during the test T n + = ___ hours ___ minutes, and the initial water level in the measuring tank h + n = _____ mm. +

Test pipeline in the following order:

 

____________________________________________________________

(Specify the sequence of testing and surveillance

 

____________________________________________________________

pressure drop, whether to release water from the pipeline

____________________________________________________________

and other features of the test procedure)

During testing of the pipeline for leaks in the pressure gauge reading on it was reduced to _____ kgf / cm 2 , marked the end of the test time T to h = _____ ______ minutes and the final level of water in the measuring tank h to = _____ mm. The volume of water necessary in restoring pressure to the test defined by levels of water in the measuring tank, Q = ____ l.

Duration of the test pipe for leaks T = T to - T n = ____ min. The flow rate of water in the conduit podkachennoy during testing is
q = ____ min. The flow rate of water in the conduit podkachennoy during the test is n = ____ min. The flow rate of water in the pipeline podkachennoy during the test is =  ____ = l / min, which is less than the allowable flow rate.

 

 

COMMISSION DECISION

Pipeline to pass the acceptance test is recognized for strength and tightness.

 

The representative of the construction and assembly organizatsii__________________ (signature)

Technical supervision of the customer representative __________________ (signature)

The representative of the operational organization __________________ (signature)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX 2

Recommended

ORDER hydraulic testing of pressure pipelines Leak and

1. Preliminary testing and acceptance hydraulic pressure pipe Leak and should be carried out in the following order.

When tested for durability:

- Increase the pressure in the pipeline P to test and by pumping water and maintain it for at least 10 min, not allowing the pressure reduction of more than 0.1 MPa (1 kgf / cm 2 );

- The test pressure to reduce internal design pressure P p and keeping it through, pump water to inspect the pipeline in order to detect defects on it for the time required to perform this inspection;

- In the case of defects to remove them and make the re-test of the pipeline.

After the test, the strength of the pipeline start testing it for leaks, it is necessary:

pressure in the pipeline to increase the test pressure tightness R g ;

fix the time of the test T n and measure the initial water level in the reservoir dimensional h ;

observation produce a pressure drop in the conduit, wherein there may be three variants of the pressure drop:

first - if within 10 minutes, the pressure will fall by at least two divisions of the scale gauge, but will not fall below the internal design pressure P p , then this observation pressure drop finish;

second - if, within 10 minutes, the pressure will fall by less than two-division scale pressure gauge, the observation of a decrease in pressure to the internal design pressure P p should continue as long as the pressure drops by at least two-division scale pressure gauge with follow-up should not be more than 3 hours for concrete and 1 h – for cast iron, asbestos cement and steel pipelines. If after this time the pressure drops to the internal design pressure P p , you should reset the water from the pipeline into the measuring tank (or measure the amount of water discharged by other means);

third - after 10 minutes, the pressure falls below the internal design pressure P , then further testing of the pipeline to stop and take measures to detect and eliminate hidden defects of the pipeline by keeping it under internal pressure P calculated p as long as a careful examination will not be identified defects caused unacceptable pressure drop in the pipeline.

After closure the pressure drop observations of the first embodiment and water discharge completion according to the second embodiment in the following sequence:

pumping water from the measuring tank pressure in the pipeline to increase the test pressure for leaks P g , fix the time of closure leak test T to the end and measure the level of water in the measuring tank h to ;

determine the duration of the test pipe (T a - T n ) m, the amount of water in the pipeline podkachennoy dimensional reservoir of Q (the first embodiment), the difference between the volumes podkachennoy conduit and discharged therefrom further volume of water or a water pipeline podkachennoy Q (for the second option), and calculate the value of the actual flow of additional volume of water vkachennoy q , l / min, according to the formula

Q

n = _________

to - T n

2. Filling the pipeline an additional volume of water with the tightness test is required for replacement of air released through the water-tight looseness in the joints, filling the pipeline volumes encountered in small angular deformation of the pipe in the butt joints, advancements rubber seals in these compounds and displacements end caps; additional soaking under the test pressure of the walls of asbestos and concrete pipes, as well as to compensate for possible hidden water seep out of reach for pipeline inspection.

 

 

APPENDIX 3

Required

ACT

ON THE PNEUMATIC TEST

Penstock Leak and

 

 

City __________________ “” _____ of _____________ 19

 

The Commission, composed of representatives:

construction organization ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________ (Name of organization, position, name, Acting)

, Technical supervision закачика_____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

 (Name of organization, position, name, Acting)

operational organization _____________________________________________________

(Name of organization, position,

_________________________________________________________________________________

surname, Acting)

made this act on pneumatic test Leak and pressure pipe section _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

(Name of the object and number of pickets on its borders)

_______ M length of pipeline, pipe material ___________, _______ mm pipe diameter, material joints _______

 

Magnitude of the internal design pressure in the pipeline P p is ____ MPa (___ kgf / cm 2 ).

 

To test the strength of the line pressure was increased to ________ MPa
(______ kgf / cm 2 for the strength test pressure in the pipeline was increased to ________ MPa
) and maintained for 30 min. Pipeline integrity violations were found. Thereafter, the line pressure was reduced to 0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf / cm 2 ) and under this pressure was maintained in the conduit 24 during ch.Dlya strength testing pressure in the conduit was increased to ________ MPa

After completion of the pipeline delay in the initial set therein had a test pressure P n = 0,03 MPa (0.3 kgf / cm 2 ). This pressure corresponds to reading connected manometer P n = _________ mm vod.st (or ker.st. mm – gauge when filling kerosene).

Test start time ____ h ____ min, the initial barometric pressure P n = _______ mmHg Under this pressure, the pipeline has been tested within _____ hours After this time, the test measured the pressure in the pipe P to = ____ mm water column (___ Mm ker. Tbsp.). In this final barometric pressure P to = ____ mm Hg.Art.

Actual value of the pressure drop in the pipeline

 

P = (P n = P - P to P = ) + (P b P = N = P - P b P = a ) = _________ mm of water. Art., P =

 

Table 6 that less than the allowable pressure drop * ( = 1 for water and kerosene = 0.87).

 

COMMISSION DECISION

Pipeline recognized withstood pneumatic test for strength and tightness.

 

The representative of the construction and installation-

tion organization __________________

(Signature)

Representative technical supervision

customer __________________

(Signature)

The representative of the operational bodies

Organization __________________

(Signature)

 

 

ANNEX 4

Required

ACT

About an acceptance pressureless hydraulic testing lines for leaks

 

 

City __________________ “” _____ of _____________ 19

 

The Commission, composed of representatives:

construction organization ____________________________

(Name of organization,

____________________________________, Technical supervision order-

position, name, Acting)

чика_________________________________________________________

(Name of organization, position, name, Acting)

operational organization ____________________________________

(Name of organization, position,

_____________________________________________________________

surname, Acting)

made this act of acceptance on hydraulic test unconfined portion of the pipeline ______________________

(Name of facility

_____________________________________________________________

Room pickets on its borders, length and diameter)

The groundwater level at the location of the top of the well is located ________ m from top of the pipe in it at a depth of emplacement pipe (to the top) ________ m

 

Test pipe produced __________________________

(Specify with or

____________________________ Way ________________________

separately from the wells and chambers) (specify test method -

 

____________________________________________________________

adding water into the conduit or an influx of ground water into it)

Hydrostatic pressure value ______ m of water. Art. Created by filling with water ______________________________________________

(Specify the number of wells installed in it or riser)

In accordance with Table 8 * allowable added to the pipeline of water, ground water inflow at 10 m length of the pipe during the test

(Delete as appropriate)

of 30 minutes is equal to ________ l. Actual during the test volume of water added, the flow of groundwater was __________ l, or

(Delete as appropriate)

based on the pipe length 10 m (based tests together with wells, chambers) and the duration of the test, for 30 minutes was ________ l, which is less than the allowable rate.

 

COMMISSION DECISION

Pipeline to pass the acceptance admits pressure test for leaks.

 

The representative of the construction and installation-

tion organization __________________

(Signature)

Representative technical supervision

customer __________________

(Signature)

The representative of the operational bodies

Organization __________________

(Signature)

ANNEX 5

Recommended

CONDUCT OF FLUSHING and disinfecting pipelines and facilities of drinking water supply

1. To disinfect the pipelines and facilities of drinking water supply is permitted to use the following chlorinated reagents, authorized by the Ministry of Health:

dry reagents – bleach according to GOST 1692-85, calcium hypochlorite (neutral) according to GOST 25263-82 grade A;

liquid reagents – sodium hypochlorite (sodium hypochlorite) in accordance with GOST 11086-76 grades A and B; electrolytic sodium hypochlorite and liquid chlorine in accordance with GOST 6718-86.

2. Purification cavity and flushing the pipeline to remove residual impurities and incidental items should be performed, usually before the hydraulic pressure test by water-air (hydropneumatic) rinsing and hydro elastic manner by treatment of the pistons (foam, etc.) or water alone.

3. The speed of movement of the elastic piston hydromechanical washing should be between 0.3 – 1.0 m / sec at an internal pressure in the pipe of about 0.1 MPa
(1 kgf / cm 2 ). nnem line pressure of about 0.1 MPa

Purification foam pistons should be used within a diameter of 1.2-1.3 diameter pipe length – 1.5-2.0 diameter pipeline only on straight pipe with smooth curves, not exceeding 15 °, with no protruding inside the pipe ends piping attached thereto or the other parts, as well as fully opening the gate valve in the pipeline. The diameter of the discharge pipe should be one gauge smaller than the diameter of the pipeline to be washed.

4. Hydropneumatic washing should be carried out by feeding conduit with the compressed air with water in an amount not less than 50% of the water flow. The air should be injected into the pipeline at pressures greater than the internal pressure in the pipeline at
0.05 – 0.15 MPa (0.5 – 1.5 kg / cm 2 ) .4. Hydropneumatic washing should be carried out by feeding conduit with the compressed air with water in an amount not less than 50% of the water flow. The air should be injected into the pipeline under the pressure higher than the internal pressure in the pipeline on the
speed of water-air mixture is taken in the range from 2.0. m/s.4 to 3.0. Hydropneumatic washing should be carried out by feeding conduit with the compressed air with water in an amount not less than 50% of the water flow. The air should be injected into the pipeline under the pressure higher than the internal pressure in the pipeline at

5. Length leached sections of pipelines, as well as the site of administration in the water pipeline and the piston and the order of operations must be defined in the project production work, which includes working scheme, route plan, profile and detailing wells.

Length of the pipeline for chlorination should be used, as a rule, no more than 1 – 2 km.

6. After cleaning and rinsing conduit be disinfected by chlorination at a concentration of active chlorine of 75 – 100 mg / l (g / m 3 with chlorine water contact time in the conduit 5 – 6 hours or at 40 – 50 mg / liter (g / m 3 ) with a contact time of at least
24 hours The concentration of active chlorine is assigned depending on the degree of clogging the pipeline. with a contact time of at least

7. Prior to chlorination, perform the following preparatory work:

carry out installation of the necessary communications to introduce a solution of bleach (chlorine), and water, air exhaust risers for sampling (with out them above ground level), installation of pipelines and disposal relief chlorinated water (with security measures) to prepare a working circuit chlorination (route plan, profile and detailing pipeline applying these communications), as well as a schedule of work;

identify and prepare the necessary amount of bleach (chlorine) with regard to the content of the commodity product chlorine, chlorinated volume of the pipeline with the highest concentration (dose) of active chlorine in the solution according to the formula

 

0,082 D lK

T = _____________

A

where T – required mass market product chloro reagent based on 5% of the loss, kg;

D and L - respectively diameter and length of the pipeline, m;

K - adopted concentration (dose) of active chlorine, g / m 3 (mg / l);

A - percentage of active chlorine in the commodity product,%.

Example. Chlorination dose of 40 g / m 3 of the pipeline with a diameter of 400 mm and a length of 1000 m with the use of bleach containing 18% active chlorine need marketable weight of bleach in an amount of 29.2 kg.

8. For control of active chlorine content along the pipeline during its filling with chlorine water every 500 m should establish temporary sampling risers with isolation valves output above the earth’s surface, which is also used to release the air as you fill the pipeline. Their diameter is adopted for the calculation, but not less than 100 mm.

9. Introduction of chlorine in the solution should be continued until the pipeline until at points farthest from the feed point of bleach, water will flow from the active content (residual) chlorine of at least 50% set. From this point further feeding the chlorine solution should be discontinued, leaving the pipeline filled with chlorine solution for the estimated time of contact of the n .6 of this application.

10. After chlorine water contact closure must reset to the locations specified in the draft conduit, and rinsed with pure water to until the residual chlorine in the wash water is reduced to 0.3 – 0.5 mg / l. For subsequent chlorination chlorine water pipe sections may be used repeatedly. After closure of the discharged duct disinfecting chlorine water to be diluted with water to the active chlorine concentration of 2 – 3 mg / l or dechlorinates by introduction of sodium hypophosphite in an amount of 3.5 mg per 1 mg of active chlorine remaining in the solution.

Places and conditions of discharge chlorinated water and the procedures to monitor its withdrawal should be coordinated with the local sanitary-epidemiological service.

11. In the connection (frames) of newly constructed pipeline to the existing network should implement local disinfection fittings and fixtures with a bleach solution.

12. Disinfection of water wells before taking into operation is performed in cases where after washing them with water quality bacteriological does not meet the requirements of GOST 2874-82.

Disinfection is carried out in two stages: first topside well then – underwater. To decontaminate the topside of the roof above the downhole aquifer must be installed the pneumatic tube, which is well above the fill bleach solution or other chlorine-containing reagent at a concentration of active chlorine of 50 – 100 mg / l depending on the intended degree of contamination. After 3-6 hours of contact to be removed and the stopper using a special mixer enter a chlorine solution to the underwater portion of the wellbore in such a way that the active chlorine concentration after mixing with water was not less than 50 mg / l. After 3 h -6 contact evacuate before the disappearance of water noticeable chlorine odor, then water samples for bacteriological analysis control.

Note. Estimated volume of chlorine solution adopted more volume wells (height and diameter) for disinfection topside – 1.2 – 1.5 times, underwater, 2-3.

13. Disinfection capacitive structures should be done by irrigation solution of bleach or other chlorine-containing reagents with active chlorine concentration of 200 – 250 mg / l. This solution must be prepared at the rate of 0.3 -0.5 liters per 1 m 2 and the inner surface of the irrigation hose through the atomizer or to cover them, and the bottom wall of the tank. After 1 -2 hours to disinfect the surfaces rinsed with clean tap water, removing waste solution through mud issues. Work should be done in special clothes, rubber boots and masks, before entering the reservoir tank should be installed with a solution of bleach for washing boots.

14. Disinfection filters after their loading, sumps, tanks, mixers and the pressure vessel must be small to produce a volumetric method, filling them with a solution with a concentration of 75 – 100 mg / l of active chlorine. After exposure for 5.6 hours, the solution is necessary to remove chlorine mud through the pipe and the container rinsed clean tap water until the rinse water content 0.3 – 0.5 mg / l of the residual chlorine.

15. In the chlorination of water supply pipelines and facilities should meet SNIP III-4-80 * and departmental regulations on safety.

ANNEX 6

Required

ACT

ON THE WASHING AND DISINFECTION

PIPELINE (BUILDINGS)

Potable water supply

 

 

City __________________ “” _____ of _____________ 19

 

The Commission, composed of representatives:

Sanitary-Epidemiological Service (SES) ______________________

(Town, district,

___________________________________________________________

position, name, Acting)

 

customer ___________________________________________________

(Name of organization,

___________________________________________________________

position, name, Acting)

 

construction organization ______________________________

(Name of organization,

 

__________________________________________________________

position, name, Acting)

operational organization __________________________________

(Name of organization,

 

__________________________________________________________

position, name, Acting)

 

made this act that the pipeline construction ________

(Delete as appropriate) (naimenova-

 

_______________________________ Subjected to washing and disinfection

Object of the length, diameter, volume)

 

tion at a concentration of chlorination ______________________

(Specify how reagent)

_________ mg of active chlorine / liter (g / m 3 ) and the duration of contact parts ____

The results of physico-chemical and bacteriological analyzes of water ______ sheets attached.

 

The representative of the sanitary

Epidemiological Service (SES) __________________

(Signature)

 

Customer Representative __________________

(Signature)

Representative construction

installer __________________

(Signature)

The representative of the operational bodies

Organization __________________

(Signature)

Conclusion SES: pipeline, construction disinfected consider-

(Delete as appropriate)

bathrooms and washed out and allow it to start operation.

Chief physician SES:

“” _________________________________________

(Date) (name, acting, signature)

PB 03-106-96

26 Jan 2014 Comments
Off

PB 03-106-96  영문번역

PB IPTF. Safety rules for the construction of subways and underground structures.

 

SAFETY

SUBWAY AT CONSTRUCTION

And underground structures

as amended (PB 03-106-96)

Apply to the design and construction of subways, transportation, industrial, utility tunnels and underground structures

 

 

 

 

INTRODUCTION

 

New Safety Rules for construction of subways and underground structures cover design, design documentation, research and construction of subways, transportation, industrial, utility tunnels and various underground structures implemented underground and open ways.

The new edition of the Rules developed by the Central Research Institute of Transport Construction, Gostgortechnadzor Russian Research Institute of Hygiene involving rail transport and the Moscow Mining Institute. In the final editing and Rules attended by leading specialists from organizations Tonnelmetrostroya, Mosmetrostroy, Mosinzhstroya, Metrotonnelgeodezii, a number of design and research organizations involved in the design of underground structures.

During the recycling regulations reflect changes in technology, technology and organization of underground construction that occurred in recent years, advanced domestic and foreign experience in safe work performance, including in complex engineering system of cities, also takes into account the analysis of occupational injuries in different areas of underground construction . First included requirements for safe operation in underground machines with internal combustion engines, changed requirements for ventilation of underground workings, electrical and special works.

More fully articulated and differentiated responsibilities and tasks for the security of underground construction work for all the functional services and in this regard there are special sections on Mine Surveying and ensure liability for failure to comply with the Regulations. Have changed the position of the individual tasks of technical supervision.

With the introduction of the Regulation to all heads of state, stock, rental, cooperative organizations, leading underground construction, it is necessary to carry out the certification of its employees on the knowledge of new safety rules.

With the introduction of the new Rules are repealed rules of safety and sanitation in the construction of subways and tunnels, approved by the Ministry of Transport Construction of the USSR in 1975 and the “Additional safety requirements in the construction of lifting facilities in Moscow, located at a depth of not more than 40 m and the length of the production work no more than two years, “approved Gostgortechnadzor USSR in 1987

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1. SCOPE project documentation

 

1.1.1. These Regulations are binding on all officials and technical officers engaged research, design and construction of subways, transportation, industrial and utility tunnels and underground structures.

Note. Workers are required to comply with instructions for safe work practices.

 

1.1.2. Each organization involved in the construction of subways, tunnels and underground structures, should have design and technical documentation, including the organization of construction projects (PIC) and projects of works (CPD) or procedures for all types of work. The sections of this documentation must be set out specific safety solutions, conservation of resources, environment and sanitary maintenance of workers.

Not be derogated from PIC and PPR without prior coordination with organizations to develop them.

 

1.1.3. Organizations developing projects are obliged to provide them safe methods of mining, construction, installation and other works, guided by current safety regulations for special works, sanitary and fire regulations, SNiPs and guests.

 

1.1.4. Projects and production work flow sheets should be developed and attached directly to the building site, taking into account local conditions.

 

1.1.5. In the production and transport of common work related to the construction of underground structures, as well as the organization of the construction site, scaffolding and other means of paving, installation of formwork, reinforcement, performing sanitary, electrical and finishing work should be guided by the requirements of Chapter existing SNIP “Safety construction “, as well as relevant safety regulations.

 

1.1.6. Operation of construction, lifting, mining and transport machinery, including maintenance, shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Chapter snip, “Rules for design and safe operation of cranes” and the manufacturer’s instructions.

 

1.1.7. Use of explosives in mining excavations shall be in accordance with the requirements of the “Uniform Rules for safety during blasting operations.”

 

1.1.8. Builder leading the construction of underground facilities must have as-built drawings reflecting geotechnical conditions of penetration, and eliminate existing underground structures and communications that may affect the construction work, the state mining and their fastenings, drainage, water supply, ventilation, energy, communications, heating, communications, underground transport.

Allowed in some cases the production of works without the executive documentation (drawings, structural elements, etc.) for engineering services in the presence of materials topographic and geodetic and geotechnical surveys performed in accordance with regulatory requirements, and in agreement with the owners of elevating structures and communications.

 

1.1.9. The design, installation, operation and maintenance of lighting systems, emergency lighting and working in industrial environments, as well as in open areas should be guided by the requirements for light sources, lighting devices, lighting quality and operating SNIP “Norms for artificial lighting during the construction of subways and tunnels “sanitary standards.

 

1.1.10. On during commissioning (rolling subway lines, etc.) should be developed special safety measures approved by the Chief Engineer (associations).

Manufacturing jobs in exploited subways and tunnels should be done by the joint order (or other joint document) construction organization and the organization operating the underground facility.

 

1.1.11. All employees of a construction company operating in the underground tunnels and operated railways work required to know and comply with, their existing rules and regulations for safety and signaling Rules of technical operation and underground railways in the part of the order flow and relieve tension with contact rail fencing places of work, use of signals, order closing spans for work, as well as “Instruction on the order of works by foreign organizations operated facilities underground.”

1.1.12. Manufacture and repair of mining heading machinery, equipment and tooling should be in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation and additions thereto.

 

 

 

1.2. Approvals;

Emergency SOFTWARE

1.2.1. Commissioning of newly-mounted mining and tunnel complexes, lifting, the main ventilation and drainage installations, locomotive haulage should be made by a commission with the participation of a representative of Gosgortechnadzor after the presentation of objects and acts readiness results of control tests.

During the construction of utility tunnels Commissioning of mining heading machinery and equipment (except for cargo and human upgrades, having in its composition hoisting machines and mechanized tunnel boring systems (boards) with a diameter of 3.6 m or more) made commission of the enterprise.

 

1.2.2. On the construction of underground structures are allowed to use the equipment, machines, equipment, tools and materials for subsurface conditions or authorized to use the relevant state supervision.

 

1.2.3. Observational and experimental use in underground construction, admission to acceptance testing and licensing for the production and use of new models of mining equipment and electrical devices must be carried out in the manner prescribed instruction approved by the Russian State Technical Supervision.

 

1.2.4. Application of new technologies and methods of work not covered by this Regulation shall be carried out under the project developed a specialized organization, agreed with Gosgortechnadzor.

 

1.2.5. Head of the organization tasked with the construction of the underground facility, not later than 15 days before the start of major works required to submit for registration in the local list of sites Gosgortechnadzor works, regardless of the manner in which they are constructed.

 

1.2.6. All constructed underground facilities must be serviced Paramilitary Mountain Rescue units.

Office (headquarters) VGSCH must agree to the deployment of rescue units Gosgortechnadzor.

On the construction of utility tunnels command and administration of the organization can be created VGSCH auxiliary mine rescue team in accordance with the Model Regulations on them. approved by the Ministry of Construction of Russia in agreement with the Russian State Technical Supervision.

 

1.2.7. For each object underground construction plan should be developed emergency response (PLA) in accordance with the “Instructions for emergency response plans for the construction of underground facilities” (Annex 1).

The emergency plan is reviewed and approved once every six months, not later than 15 days before the beginning of next year.

When the changes in the location of mines, ventilation scheme and related ways out of people on the surface of the PLA in no later than the next day should be made appropriate corrections.

Never allow people to work who are not familiar with the PLA do not know it in part related to their place of work and ways of movement. Each introduction of PLA and outputs should be carried out on receipt before beginning work.

Re-introduction of working with wire outlet faces technical supervision every 6 months, and when the outputs – within days.

 

1.2.8. In all organizations conducting underground work, organized by turns registration of persons descended in development and left on the surface. Responsibility for ensuring such records shall be foreman.

 

1.2.9. To notify employees about emergency at each site underground construction except telephone must be equipped with an alarm (light, speakerphone, wireless radio, etc.).

 

1.2.10. All underground workers and those technical supervision before going into mining, hazardous gas or dust explosion must be issued individually assigned to them self-rescuers.

The number of self-rescuers at the facility must be 10% more than the listed number of underground workers.

 

1.2.11. On underground construction sites, not hazardous gas and dust explosion, allowed selfrescuers storage group in an amount exceeding 10% on the number of employees in most large change. Storage areas selfrescuers special boxes must be marked, and further illuminated.

Responsibility for the condition and safety of self-rescuers assigned to section chief, and for providing them in sufficient quantities – the head of the organization.

 

1.2.12. Workers, as well as those technical supervision should be provided with personal protective equipment in accordance with applicable regulations, be able to use self-rescuers, and the performance of special operations – Additional protective measures.

 

1.2.13. Tunnelling work on the underground construction sites must be carried out by written along issued in accordance with the Regulations on the elegant system, approved by the chief engineer of the construction company.

 

1.2.14. Work with increased risk should be carried out by the permit. The list of such works approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

1.2.15. Each employee, noting the danger that threatens people or object shall notify the employees, to inform the person of technical supervision, and if possible take measures to eliminate the danger.

 

1.2.16. When work on the subject by several organizations should be developed joint activities on safe work and division of responsibilities in accordance with the Regulations on the relationship of organizations – general contractors with subcontractors.

 

 

 

1.3. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1. The works of increased danger in the construction of underground structures allowed a person 18 years of age.

 

1.3.2. Workers, engineers, technicians and employees entering the building are subject to prior medical examination. Re-examination of persons engaged in underground work and work in high risk, should be done annually.

 

1.3.3. For technical manual labor in underground mines and surface allowed persons who have completed education or mining engineering graduates special school or courses entitling technical guidance (in charge of mining and blasting).

On the surface of the mine on the technical documentation of production processes, not related to mining, allowed a person without a special mountain formation, but with technical education, corresponding to the profile works.

Leading experts design company engaged in the development of mining projects and construction of the underground facilities, project organization and technology of mining operations, mining engineering should have education and work experience of at least three years in this profession.

 

1.3.4. All newly entering the workforce or transferred from other institutions of engineering and technical personnel engaged in the design and construction of underground facilities must, within one month, and subsequently at least every three years to pass the exams on the knowledge of these Rules.

Students of higher and secondary specialized schools, vocational school students before passing the first production practices must undergo training and pass exams on a par with the safety of underground workers. Before the start of the subsequent practice, they are instructed on safety.

 

1.3.5. Workers received and transferred to work in another profession are required to undergo a preliminary safety training. Education is made with a margin of production in accordance with the “Programs prior training of workers engaged in underground work” agreed with Gosgortechnadzor, with the obligatory exams in the committee chaired by the chief engineer of the organization.

Durations must be at least:

- For workers not previously worked pas underground works – 5 days;

- Previously worked on them – 2 days;

- Transferred from one profession to another – 1 day;

- For working on the surface:

- Have not previously worked in construction – 2 days;

- Previously worked – 1 day.

Working combining several professions, should be trained and instructed in all occupations.

 

1.3.6. Vocational training of workers should be carried out in vocational schools, training center, technical schools or training centers. To work independently workers may be admitted only after the exam and obtain a license.

Permitted the training of workers in occupations not related to increased risk in the construction organization, individual and group order. At the time of such training workers be allowed to work only in conjunction with an experienced worker or a master instructor.

 

1.3.7. By managing machines and equipment allowed persons specially trained in the profession who have passed the exam and get your license.

Machinists (their assistants) of these funds that are managed due to the rapid introduction of electric, should have besides qualifying group on electrical windchill II, confirmed the identity of the sample set.

 

1.3.8. All workers should be familiar with the requirements for receipt of safety instructions for occupations and types of work performed. Instructions shall be kept at each site in an accessible location.

A review of all work done by a person of technical supervision area at least twice a year, and for the workers employed in jobs with high risk – once every three months. Results of primary and repeated briefings are recorded in personal card or a special journal.

 

1.3.9. One visit to underground excavation person not on the construction of underground facilities allowed by permission of the object only when accompanied by a person of technical supervision and after a preliminary briefing.

 

 

 

1.4. ORGANIZATION institutional control

1.4.1. In every construction organization should be developed and approved by agreement with the union committee and Gosgortechnadzor Regulation on preventive work on labor protection, regulating the duties and rights in this area for all officials.

General and administrative organizations (corporations, associations, firms, etc.) shall maintain control and coordination of measures aimed at improving safety.

1.4.2. Guidance and technical officers are obliged to visit the job site to check the status of safety and take concrete measures to eliminate violations.

 

1.4.3. Foreman or on behalf of the Deputy (leading master) is obliged to check the status of each workplace at least once a day, mine foreman – at least two times per shift.

 

1.4.4. Every organization engaged in the construction of subways and tunnels shall be provided post mining safety engineer and equipped office but OSH.

In some cases, the responsibilities safety engineer may be imposed on persons having Montan education and work experience of not less than three years, appointed by the head of the enterprise.

 

1.4.5. Prescriptions workers exercising state supervision, departmental and public control of the security requirements are binding for all organizations involved in joint operations.

 

1.4.6. Manual labor protection and responsibility for her condition imposed on the head of the organization.

 

 

1.5. REQUIREMENTS workplaces and equipment

1.5.1. Every workplace should have a safe passage. Do not obstruct the jobs and approaches to them, as well as the movement of people and goods.

When carrying out work in avalanche areas and in areas with possible talus should be provided and implemented specific measures to protect against avalanches and rockfalls.

 

1.5.2. Workplace underground work should provide normal ventilation, lighting, warning about the accident, in a state that provides complete safety of workers, and before starting work inspected mine foreman or on his behalf – foreman (team leader).

 

1.5.3. All branch shall be equipped with lighted pointers direction to the surface.

 

1.5.4. Do not stand in the mines, the state of which is harmful to men, except for the removal of these hazards with additional remedies.

 

1.5.5. Mining, the state of which is a danger to people or works that are suspended, should be protected at all entrances to them hanging with the prohibitory sign.

 

1.5.6. Working at heights more than 1.3 m from the rock or working platform shall be made with sites equipped with railings and fences at impossibility device used safety belts, the attachment of which are specified in advance carbines.

By agreement with the regional bodies Gosgortechnadzor in some cases allowed the development of the face with rock ledge height of more than 1.3 m without fencing device when using safety belts.

 

1.5.7. Prohibited from performing any work simultaneously in two or more tiers on the same vertical as well as under operating equipment in the absence of an intermediate continuous protective flooring made in accordance with the project.

 

1.5.8. Used cars, machinery and equipment, as well as forests, bridges, decks, stairs, and other equipment must be in working order, comply with the relevant law and to ensure safe operation.

Machines, equipment and tools, forest inventory and cradles must have passports and identification numbers on which they are recorded in the logbook and maintenance checks.

 

1.5.9. In underground mines do not perform any work from ladders except for inspections, measurements, as well as urgent (emergency) work.

Permitted in the construction of utility tunnels use ladders to perform short-term work and operations.

 

1.5.10. Any change in the operating mode of the machine or mechanism (starting, running, stopping) can be done only after the applied signal. Value signals in the process of operation, should be explained to all persons involved in the operation of machines and mechanisms. The alarm should be entrusted with a particular person. Any understood the signal is considered to signal the driver to stop and executed immediately.

 

1.5.11. Before starting the movement of mining complex (shield stacker technology platform), drilling, tunneling regiments, formwork, other machinery and equipment, all employees, not associated with the implementation of this process should be removed from the zone of movement to a safe distance.

 

1.5.12. Do not leave unattended operating machinery except machinery with automatic and remote control.

 

1.5.13. When using mobile machines must be designed to prevent inadvertent movement.

After graduation and during work breaks all the machines and mechanisms should be put on guaranteeing their inability to start by unauthorized persons.

 

1.5.14. Do not stay in dangerous zone operating machinery.

 

1.5.15. Repair of machinery and equipment necessary to carry out within the timeframe established approved schedule regular preventive maintenance in accordance with the technical documentation.

 

1.5.16. All exposed moving parts of machinery (clutch, transmission, pulleys, etc.) must be protected.

 

1.5.17. Do not operate faulty machinery, as well as cleaning and lubrication during their work.

 

 

 

1.6. Procedures for investigating accidents and incidents

1.6.1. Investigation of accidents and accidents at controlled Gosgortechnadzor, should be in accordance with the Regulation on investigation and registration of occupational accidents and the Regulations on technical investigation of accidents, not entailing accidents controlled enterprises and facilities.

 

1.6.2. For each group, and deadly accidents and head of the organization must, in accordance with the current instructions to notify the local authority Gosgortechnadzor.

 

 

 

2. CONSTRUCTION SITE

2.1. The organization of the construction site shall ensure safety of workers and the passage of people at all stages of any type of work, both on the surface and underground conditions.

 

2.2. The construction site must be protected by a fence. Fencing adjacent to places of public passage of people, must be equipped with a continuous protective canopy.

 

2.3. Before the commencement of mining operations should be ensured adequate sanitary and domestic services.

 

2.4. Location of permanent and temporary roads, passages for people networks of energy and water, mechanized units, cranes, platforms for storage, sanitary and industrial premises, as well as other devices must fully comply with the general plan of construction or PIC.

 

2.5. The construction site should be designed and equipped with devices for removal of atmospheric and industrial water from the construction of underground structures.

In appropriate places must be posted inscriptions:

“ENTRY”, “exit”, “turn”, “PASS FOR PEOPLE”, as well as road signs, regulating the procedure and speed circuit and vehicular traffic.

Border hazardous areas should be further fencing and warning signs and labeling signals clearly visible both day and night time.

 

2.6. Walkways and driveways on the construction site must be free, not cluttered ground, equipment and building materials. They should be cleaned of dirt, snow, ice and suppress dust.

 

2.7. Temporary buildings and structures, workshops, copra, flyovers, machine and other facilities, as well as the size of the sanitary protection zones must comply with the sanitary and fire regulations.

 

2.8. Storage of materials and tunnel construction on the building site must be done in compliance with the requirements given in Annex 23.

Gaskets and lining must be placed in the same vertical plane. Their thickness shall be not less than the height of the protruding mounting tabs and fixings.

 

2.9. Placement of materials, structures and equipment at the construction site shall be determined taking into account the sequence of assembly and transport, dimensions and weight of products carrying capacity of crane equipment. Aisle width between piles shall not be less than 1 m

 

 

 

3. SUBWAY CONSTRUCTION AND UNDERGROUND

FACILITIES open way

3.1. Before starting work on the road construction technical oversight entity should be familiar with the location of facilities and communications municipal urban planning and order of the organization, appointed responsible for excavation work related to the depredations and relaying communications.

 

3.2. Manufacturing jobs in the area of ​​location of underground utilities (electric cables, communication cables, pipelines, etc.) is allowed only after obtaining a special permit (order) and written permission of organizations responsible for the operation of these communications, which are called representatives in place before beginning work.

Excavation pits to specify location of communications can only be done in the presence of representatives of the relevant operational organizations.

 

3.3. When approaching the work to the lines of existing underground utilities at a distance closer than 2 m by 1 m horizontally or vertically to use excavation equipment and jackhammers prohibited unless other regulations or the owner does not specify other sizes of the buffer zone. Excavation in these conditions permitted only hand tools.

 

3.4. In the field of movement of people and vehicles developed recess should be securely fenced, and the place of work, walkways and driveways – lit. On the fence must be installed warning labels and signs, and at night – signal lights.

When working on the roads and in other places where provided for vehicles must comply with applicable rules of the road.

 

3.5. To prevent shifts or collapse pits, trenches and other depressions developed in unstable soils, surveying service must be set daily and weekly visual tool monitoring of their boards, coving and lining with an entry in the log.

 

3.6. Procedure of excavation in the development of soil in trenches, pits width, steepness of slope, height shoulder width berms and method of fixing the boards should be established by the project. The draft should be made for the drainage of storm and flood waters to overflow grooves. The distance from the edge of the cut slope to the edge of the groove should be at least 3 m

 

3.7. Perform activities in pits and trenches developed with slopes (without fixing) undergoing hydration is allowed subject to the following precautions against collapse:

a) manufacturer’s overhaul works or master before the start of each shift state of the soil and its artificial caving in places where found “Visors” and cracks in brovok and on slopes;

b) temporary cessation of work in the recess before draining soil collapse in case of danger;

c) reducing the local steepness of slope in areas where the performance of work in the recess is urgent;

g) prohibit the movement of vehicles and machinery within the sliding wedge;

d) purifying the slopes of stones to prevent them from sliding into ditches and trenches.

For submission of materials to be used in the pit or hoists are equipped with special ramps. Place of filing and acceptance of the goods must be identified and protected.

 

3.8. When mechanized excavation in the pit installation excavator within the cavity and on the surface, as well as the sequence and order of seizure shall be defined in CPD.

 

3.9. Movement within the construction site excavator and mechanized units copra should be for temporary power and aligned coated surfaces with slopes not exceeding the established technical passport movable machine (installation).

 

3.10. Used excavating soil in vehicles must be done from the rear or side board. Awaiting loading the car must be outside the range of the bucket for loading and become only after enable signal excavator operator.

 

3.11. When designing the excavation is prohibited:

a) excavation pit board with sap. When using a shovel excavators face height should be limited to a maximum digging height of the excavator;

b) simultaneous execution at one site excavation other works within the zone defined BPD, but no closer than 5 m from the moving parts of earthmoving machinery;

c) the use of bulldozers on slopes with an angle greater than 30 ° and extension of the bulldozer blade for a curb cut slope.

 

3.12. For timely implementation of security measures and measures to ensure the safety of people on the job site should have the necessary emergency supply of materials, tools and accessories.

 

3.13. At the time, disconnect the power lines located at the work site. If operating conditions these pipelines can not be disabled, it is necessary, in consultation with the operating organization, reliably protect them from damage.

 

3.14. In case of deformation structures, paths, facilities, communications work must be stopped immediately, the people removed from the danger zone, urgently warned the organization which is run by a deformable structure, and exhibited alarms.

Resuming possible only as directed by the responsible person of technical supervision.

 

3.15. Installation of temporary lining pits and trenches must be done in accordance with the method statement and maps.

 

3.16. Build, move, turn and demolition copra for piling work must be carried out under the supervision of a person of technical supervision, while around the installation site (displacement) of copra should be designated a danger zone radius of 5 m over the height of the mast. In the danger zone when working copra all other work should be stopped, and the people not associated with the work of copra, removed beyond this zone.

 

3.17. Lifting and installation of piles (rebates) in the presence of inhabited buildings in the danger zone shall be permitted to implement additional security measures provided for repairing and performing lifting operations using the hoisting rope copra and second belay, rope and a winch.

 

3.18. When carrying out the method of “slurry wall” moving along the trench excavator should be planned on having a solid surface (asphalt, concrete, road plates) site with a slope of not more than 2 °. Level mud should not be less than 0.5 m from the edge of the trench.

 

3.19. With the development of the trench for the “wall in the ground” it must be done on both sides of the fence or overlap. For people pass through the trench bridges shall be equipped with a minimum width of 1 m and fenced on two sides railing height of not less than 1.2 m

Descent into the excavation and installation (installation) temporary roof support elements must be made using lifting devices, wherein:

a) in the pit and on the adjacent construction site on the descent, lift and install the shootings in the danger zone is not permitted the presence of persons who are not related to this operation;

b) prohibits the circulation on executions or finding people on them. When installing the wedges should be used suspended cradles or scaffolding.

 

3.20. The rope may be weakened or rasstroplen of installed lining element or other shipping only at steady load or final fixing it in place.

 

3.21. When applying for a temporary roof bolting attachment:

a) prohibited: build screw rod to a complete stop or shaft rotator feeder jumbo, use drill rod having cracks or tears; shovel drill cuttings during drilling from the wellhead, or clear the bar, to drill without installing fingers fixing drill rods;

b) by pulling the cylinder body anchors must be fastened to the longitudinal belt lining;

c) finding a forbidden people closer than 10 meters in the direction of the anchor axis, and not less than
2 m on both sides of the tensioner;

d) inspection of roof bolting excavation should be made chief of the site at least once every three months, with record results in the “Book of the lining inspection” (Appendix 11).

 

3.22. Prohibited warehousing and storage of materials and equipment at congresses and descents into pits or executions lining, as well as closer than 2 m from the edge of the excavation or trench.

 

3.23. Additional checking the temporary lining and brovok (pits and trenches) must be done with seasonal changes in temperature, as well as after the storm and during heavy rains.

Inspection results must be recorded in the lining “Book lining inspection.”

 

3.24. Descent (ascent) of people in the pit to a depth of 25 m are allowed on specially equipped for this purpose ladders having rest areas not less than 10 m In the absence of Congresses ladders should be installed along the length of the pit not less than 40 m, and at a lower the length of the recess must be arranged at least two ladder outcrops, distant from each other to the maximum distance.

In the trenches and pits to a depth of 5 m for lowering and lifting people allowed to use portable ladders, securely attached to the temporary lining.

 

3.25. In developing pits using shields open dimensions of the working chamber to display the shield on the road, the order of development and face mount device supporting wall and base laying rails, etc. are determined by SPR.

 

3.26. When tunneling with depth of emplacement exceeding height shield throughout its length must be installed metal security section protruding above the ground not less than 15 cm

 

3.27. Requirements of paragraphs 3.1 – 3.26 apply only to the construction of underground transport facilities open way.

 

3.28. During the construction of municipal and industrial underground facilities open pit (underground parts of pumping stations, reservoirs, tunnels for various purposes, garages, storage facilities, cultural and other purposes) should be guided by the requirements of the SNP “Safety in Construction” and projects of the work.

 

 

4. SUBWAY CONSTRUCTION AND UNDERGROUND

STRUCTURES closed method

 

4.1. OPENINGS AND FITTING

4.1.1. Before any work on the sinking of the underground workings, all persons of technical supervision and workers should be aware of a receipt with the geological and hydrogeological conditions of the site, as well as with the location of existing and abandoned underground structures and utilities in the zone of operations.

 

4.1.2. Methods of penetration and attachment area of ​​underground workings and outcrop section parameters must be defined in the projects on the basis of the stability of rocks, hydrogeological and other conditions of construction.

 

4.1.3. Fixing all underground workings should be in accordance with the approved projects and passports temporary fastening. Passport shall be made in accordance with the Regulations on the certificates of temporary fastening mining (Appendix 2) and approved by the head or chief engineer organization.

Workers and those technical supervision before beginning work must be familiar with the projects and securing passports under the painting.

With deteriorating geological conditions and industrial holding production should be suspended pending a review of the passport.

Mining operations without an approved passport temporary fastening or the breach is prohibited.

Passport should eliminate the need for mounting relocation of components when installing a temporary roof support tubing or blocks slotted rings. Do not remove the element of time lining up to secure the tubing and blocks lining the bottom hole.

 

4.1.4. All coupling and mouth openings shall be secured regardless of the stability of rocks.

Section length fastening set project.

 

4.1.5. The mouth of the vertical and inclined shafts, pits and tunnels should be located and equipped so as to prevent the penetration of surface water in the mine workings. Upon the redemption of these generation must be separated from water surface.

 

4.1.6. In a highly unstable rocks (loose, loose or quicksand) and unstable rocks (requiring maintenance of the array directly behind the groove rock) excavation workings must be made using special techniques or mechanized tunnel complexes (shields).

 

4.1.7. Develop rock solid when driving workings slaughter or ledges should be done in all cases, since the upper part of the face. This rule does not apply to the slaughter, developed using mechanized complexes.

 

4.1.8. The magnitude of the backlog lining (permanent support) from the bottom of excavation shall be installed by the project. In this plot develop between slaughter and lining must be secured or protected by temporary fencing bolting-supporting structures of mobile heading machines.

In weak and unstable rocks lining the lag time of slaughter is not allowed.

 

4.1.9. Disclosure tunnel full lining and installation of slotted rings during installation shall be supervised by a person with technical supervision mandatory installation of temporary supports. Section length for mounting slotted rings is determined based on geological conditions.

 

4.1.10. In the development of unstable rock face on a full installation of slotted rings on stope should be no longer than one team lining rings. Under these conditions blasting prohibited.

 

4.1.11. Production, under construction continuous slaughter, should be developed with the use of mobile metal scaffolding, suspended scaffolding, drilling rigs or other special tunneling equipment, providing convenience and safety production work in the mine.

 

4.1.12 Cross-sectional dimensions of developments in light lining should provide the ability to save free passes and clearances given of laid communications.

 

4.1.13. When blasting subcontractor passport blasting must be approved by the chief engineer of a general contractor in agreement with the technical manager of subcontractor.

 

4.1.14. Before starting work under the supervision of a person technical supervision must be restored lining destroyed in the explosion and, under the guise of a temporary roof support or safe places with special Oborniki frill made of peeled pieces of rock (“stabbing”) from the surface of the face, roof and sides develop.

 

4.1.15. For inspection and frills rock faces in the workings of a height greater than 4 m shall apply sliding scaffolding and self-propelled units, to ensure the safe production of such works.

Persons not involved frill, it is prohibited to the dangerous area closer than 10 m

 

4.1.16. Shoring generation must be carefully proppant to its contour, the voids between the bolting and surface generation must be carefully zabucheny. Prohibited zabuchivat tree cavities or other flammable materials and post items for lining of temporary wooden roof supports, except in cases envisaged by the project.

 

4.1.17. If cracks in the lining of shafts and tunnels should be established systematic observation of them surveying service construction. The results of observations are recorded in the “Book of the lining inspection and condition workings.”

 

4.1.18. Geological Survey of construction or design organization shall monitor the geological structure of the soil (rock) and the state faces.

Said work shall be performed in accordance with instructions on engineering-geological surveys for the design and construction of subways, mountain railway and road tunnels.

Allowed to carry out geotechnical construction services by engineering, surveying services, construction company in simple hydrogeological conditions, unless construction of underwater tunnels, as well as communal deep tunnels traversed by densely built areas.

 

4.1.19. In areas of geological faults, possible breakthroughs in the areas of water or near surface and underground structures and utilities excavation workings must be performed in compliance with the additional security measures for dangerous conditions in accordance with these Rules.

 

4.1.20. Drifting mines for at least 15 m before and after the construction of places of impermeable protective structures should be done without the use of blasting. Allowed to perform blasting in hard rock on a special project, comprising the necessary measures against the increase of fracture the surrounding rock.

 

4.1.21. Work on continuous drifting debris and perekrepleniyu mining must be performed by a specially developed project approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

When perekreplenii generation do not remove more than two frames simultaneously without installing grabs at RAMS mount or remove the nuts and grabs more than two transverse rows of anchors when anchored. New lining located near removed, should be strengthened.

These procedures must be performed under the supervision of experienced workers face technical supervision.

 

4.1.22. Excavation excavation pit bottom should begin after the trunk lining erection equipment and its kletevym (skip) lift. Allowed penetration crosscuts from the trunk using badevogo rise to a length not exceeding 20 m

Excavation utility tunnels on all their length can be performed using badevogo recovery.

 

4.1.23. Inset generation of horizontal predportalnoy recesses into the portal slope must be secured and protected so as to prevent the fall of pieces of rock from the slopes.

 

4.1.24. If signs of deformation or contour lining workings necessary to put additional strengthened lining (intermediate frames, tiebacks, poles, struts, sleepers, anchors). At the same time to remove the deformed or broken frames wooden lining or metal arches should be erected near, proppant and embroidered with new frames or arches.

 

4.1.25. Ducts, pipes compressed air, dewatering pipes, cables or other arrangement in developments should be located so that they do not obstruct the movement of rolling stock, the movement of materials, equipment and movement of people.

 

4.1.26. Shafts and other vertical ladder generation should have compartments for the passage of people. Ladders should be set at an angle of 80 °. Production over the mouth and over every regiment they should extend 1 m or above the opening in the lining of the regiment must be firmly embedded metal braces. The inner side of the clamp should be spaced from bolting to a distance of not less than 4 cm, the distance between the brackets should not exceed 0.4 m, and the width of the bracket of at least 0.4 m

Installation of stairs must allow free movement of rescue crews in respirators and satisfy the following conditions:

a) dimensions manholes along the length of the ladder must be not less than 0.7 m, width – not less than 0.6 m;

b) the distance from the base of the stairs to the trunk lining or cladding department ladder – not less than 0.6 m;

c) The distance between the shelves – not more than 8 m;

g) Stairs shall be strong, every 2 m stitched with metal buckles, steadily secured and positioned so that they are above the openings (access doors) in the shelves.

Width of the stairs shall be not less than 0.4 m, and the distance between the steps – no more than 0,4 m above the first hole upper stairs should be closed solid lyadoy. Office for the passage of people must be securely fenced off the entire length of the other departments. Each staircase should be covered. Ladders must be kept in good condition, step – cleaned of dirt and ice.

For the period of the output shaft sinking department ladder to the surface to be fitted with a safety booth.

 

4.1.27. If the main exit from the underground workings is sloping tunnel and its finite difference marks exceeds 60 m, then it must be equipped with a manual delivery people.

Also, exit of people should be provided free passage width of at least 0.7 m at 1.8 m height, all over which is constructed at angles of tilt:

7 ° to 15 ° – the railing;

from 15 ° to 30 ° – ladders and railings;

from 30 ° to 45 ° – stairs with horizontal solid steps and railings;

45 ° or more – way office, equipped similarly vertical separation of steps workings.

 

4.1.28. All revolting generation, except for the sole descent breed should be equipped offices for the passage of people.

 

4.1.29. Completed mine workings should be kept clean and in good repair.

 

4.1.30. In case of changing conditions of a possible accident or emergency rations should be provided materials.

List of emergency stock of materials, tools, equipment and their storage organization approved by the chief engineer.

Do not use the emergency reserve for the current job.

 

4.1.31. Everyone working in the mines, passable without fixing the duration of the blasting in adjacent mines, located less than 50 meters shall be displayed in advance to a safe place.

 

4.1.32. During excavations counter or come slaughter without blasting operations, as well as the approach to the previously passed workings, since the distance between them less than half the diameter (height) of the generation, evaluation activities must be carried out in compliance with the additional security measures on a single agreed schedule approved by the principal engineers organizations leading this work.

When this distance is reduced to a value of height slaughtering operation should be conducted only by one of the workings.

 

 

 

4.2. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE UNDERGROUND

And fastening inclined workings

4.2.1. All inclined generation equipped rail transport should have compartments for the passage of people. They must be located above the most protruding parts of the rolling stock.

If you can not locate the passage at height equipment allowed the passage below, provided the auxiliary fence it from the cargo compartment of the project.

When descending the sloping rocks develop under its own weight of human passage should be protected solid sheathing.

 

4.2.2. In driving, or repair uglubke inclined generation working in the mine must be protected against the danger of a cliff on top of trolleys and other objects fall at least two strong barriers whose designs approved by the chief engineer of the organization. One of the barriers to be installed at the mouth of production, the other – less than 20 meters from the place of work.

 

4.2.3. Inputs to produce sloping must be fenced to a height of not less than 1 m and a non-working sides – a minimum height of 2.5 m

 

4.2.4. Rail tracks at the face must be equipped with inhibitory stoppers.

 

4.2.5. By injecting a solution for the lining should be fitted with alarm between slaughter and supercharger solution.

 

4.2.6. During production inclined to breed with the descent and to the underlying horizon traversed a pass (well) in the PPR should include measures to avoid falling into a walker working (well).

 

4.2.7. Brackets, which moves Stacker lining should be inspected every shift face technical supervision. Replacement of defective brackets should be carried out using mechanical means in the presence of the driver handler.

 

 

 

4.3. Sinking vertical OPENINGS

 

4.3.1. Vertical shaft sinking and underground workings with consistent development of the breed in the mine and the erection of the lining near the wellbore may be performed in stable rocks. With the expected influx of water of more than 10 m 3 / hour should include measures to reduce water production.

 

4.3.2. In driving around the mouth of the trunk should be left berm width of not less than 1 m, and lining the trunk above the level planned surface of not less than 0.5 m Mouth trunk must be overridden by a strong solid design and is equipped with opening lyadami. Overlap and berm must be kept clean.

Shaft sinking at a depth of 20 m using as a means of lifting boom, of ball, tower cranes and hoist 8 flyovers permitted production works without overlapping the mouth of the barrel with the device solid and durable fencing with a minimum height of 1.5 m around the perimeter of the trunk.

 

4.3.3. For the period prior to installation copra, overlap and mounting device of the tunnel mouth Regiment trunk must be enclosed by a secure fence with a minimum height of 1.2 m

For the passage of people should be arranged door.

 

4.3.4. After mounting all mobile (sinking and safety), hanging shelves and floors trunk should be taken into service commission appointed chief engineer of the organization.

 

4.3.5. In driving the trunk should be provided protection from possible falling objects are prohibited:

a) simultaneously perform work at different height levels in the absence of safety regiments set no higher than 2.5 m from the working shelf;

b) stored breed, equipment and materials on the ceiling of the mouth and within the enclosure, as well as hanging shelves;

c) to deliver on jobs tools, fasteners, etc. without the use of specially designed for this purpose containers, boxes, etc.;

g) analyze safety shelves before the end of crosscuts pit bottom and driving workings of at least 5 m

 

4.3.6. Location workers in the mine during the construction of the lining should be protected from drip drainage devices.

 

4.3.7. When cleaning the rocks at the bottom of the barrel pneumatic grabs forbidden: to use grapple diversion, located near the tub when it is loaded, to inspect or repair the grapple in the presence of compressed air in his pnevmokommunikatsiyah and release pieces of rock from beneath the blades grab hands.

 

4.3.8. When tunneling barrel with dropping rocks down the development of advanced (furnel, porodospusk) the latter must have a strong fence, excluding people fall in production. When installing the fence after the explosion workers should use safety belts securely fastened.

 

4.3.9. Sinking shafts using mobile lifting cranes and installations must be carried out in compliance with the additional security measures:

a) placement of lifting machines at the mouth should be defined in PCF with the completeness review of the working area and room for maneuver;

b) between the lifting machine machinist and bugler at the mouth must be installed reliable direct visual or light and sound bilateral relationship;

c) prior to lifting (lowering) of the cargo people who are at the bottom, should be displayed in a specially allocated a safe place.

 

4.3.10. Do not allow people in the barrel when cleaning rocks at the bottom using a crane equipped with a clamshell, as well as finding people at the bottom of the remote control when loading mechanisms sinking aggregates sites and regiments.

 

4.3.11. In case of simultaneous execution of works in the mine and with false shelf should be provided with an isolated alarm every place of work.

 

4.3.12. Mountings pipeline (between themselves and to the lining), a method of descent and slinging schemes should be determined on the shaft sinking project.

 

4.3.13. Technological equipment trunks utility tunnels shall be in accordance with the design of works, approved by the chief engineer of the company.

 

 

4.4. Additional requirements for shaft sinking

Ahead MOUNT (ANCHORS AND standpipe crepes)

 

4.4.1. Work on installing and removing templates, vibrators and vibromolotov, assembly and dive zabivnoj standpipe or lining should be carried out under the supervision of a person of technical supervision. Thus:

a) harvesting of the tongue should be made with durable and sustainable scaffolding and installation of standpipe lining – with false shelf, fastened by clips mounted on the ring lining;

b) during a dive of a driven vibrator lining must be firmly fixed on the tongue;

c) do not perform tongue dive using vibrators without guide frames, and tighten the wedge bolts helmet during vibromolota or vibrator;

g) before turning on the vibrator workers should go to the opposite side of the face, and when submerged standpipe lining – in the center or in a secure portion of the face. When forced lowering lining in the project must be additional security measures, including the withdrawal of working the surface.

 

4.4.2. Sinking shafts standpipe bolting allowed in the absence of the prism within the collapse of buildings and structures, or on a special project.

When a driven shaft sinking and standpipe bolting should be organized systematically surveying monitoring of the lining, as well as a draft of the surface. These observations and measurements shall be recorded in the journal of mine surveying. When the sediment surface around the mouth, at the buildings, cracks and deformation of the lining, to continue further development of rock at the bottom of the barrel is prohibited.

 

4.4.3. To dive lining permitted to start only after filling the gap between the thixotropic solution supporting collar and segmental lining of. The solution level should be 2 m above the base of the support collar.

 

4.4.4. Nailing tongue and lining dive standpipe should be initiated at the level provided for the project.

 

4.4.5. Shaft sinking in the area watered unstable rocks, including prone to slipping and quicksands, hydraulically CANTLEDGE slaughter must be carried out with the following requirements:

a) The level of water in the barrel to exceed the benchmark pressure aquifer quicksand of not less than 1 m;

b) immersion lining standpipe must be at least the development of mechanized slaughter carried out evenly from the center to the sides of the barrel leaving the perimeter berm with a minimum width of 0.5 m along the lining of the knife;

c) advancing knife standpipe lining plane face at least 1 m

In exceptional cases, when you stop dipping lining due to significant increase in the resistance of rocks allowed the development of part of the berm and slaughtering knife standpipe below banquettes lining, while maintaining the level of a thixotropic solution and preparedness for emergency flooding trunk. Pumping water from the bottom after crossing allowed to produce unstable rocks and sinking knife standpipe bolting resistant impermeable rock formation at a depth of not less than 2 m

 

4.4.6. Shaft sinking in stable impermeable rocks (clay, silt) in the area immediately after crossing the water-saturated rocks unstable, prone to slipping, stope should be done to a depth of no more than one ring to the abandonment of the berm at the ends of the tongue or lining knife standpipe with a minimum width of 0.75 m .

In anticipation of these conditions allowed the development face of not more than 0.5 m from the edge of the blade.

 

4.4.7. In driving the barrel in hard rocks at the site of the first five rings after crossing the aquifer development slaughter must be carried to a depth of not more than one ring and carefully swabbed the fixing space.

 

4.4.8. Injection of cement-sand mortar lining for the areas traversed in stable rocks, should be done from the bottom up after lowering lining.

Control of filling voids for bolting standpipe must be through hole injection or through a specially drilled hole.

 

 

 

4.5. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE UNDERGROUND

And fastening the rebels OPENINGS

 

4.5.1. On site facilities furneli in CPD should be provided for broadening the lower gallery by the ladder compartment for safe movement of people. Passage for people in this place with a minimum width of 0.7 m shall be securely fenced off from the ways of the solid plank partition the entire height of the gallery.

 

4.5.2. Resection of the lower gallery furneli should be done with scaffolding inventory or shelf, designed for the maximum possible load, including pieces from falling rocks. Breed a regiment or scaffolding should be removed promptly.

During the descent and ascent of rock materials in pipes is not permitted otshivat ladder compartment. In this transitional shelves can be fitted on the entire section furneli passable.

 

4.5.3. In driving that rise developments:

 

a) are not permitted in furneli people and pairing it with the lower galleries while picking rocks at the bottom, but at the time pass rolling furneli work should be suspended;

b) should be arranged signaling between slaughter and lower galleries;

c) in layered alternating rocks and aquifers, as well as the approach to the horizons of occurrence of such species should be carried out advanced drilling wells of at least 5 m with constant intelligence ahead of slaughter production of not less than 2 m;

g) frill rock at the bottom of the ladder should be done under the protection department furneli drawer precautionary umbrella (visor).

 

4.5.4. All furneli but intended only for the descent breed must have Office for the passage of people, the size of which shall not be less than 1×0, 6 pm

 

4.5.5. Cargo compartment bypass breed should be closed grohotnymi grilles with mesh size 0,3 x0, 3 m

Porodospusknye department furneley (porodospuski) must also be equipped with gates or sector type of gate on the lower adit.

 

4.5.6. Approaches to porodospusku should be protected. Do not allow people to breed under porodospuskom.

Eliminate hangs breed in porodospuske must be performed by specially trained personnel.

 

 

 


4.6. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DISCLOSURE

PROFILE OUTPUT BY PARTS

4.6.1.Sposoby profile development and construction of the lining should be established on the basis of the design organization of research and study engineering-geological conditions of the tunnel location.

 

4.6.2. Crosscuts the upper galleries of furneli development calotte may only after penetration furneli to the design level.

 

4.6.3. Height of the upper galleries should be such that under the wheels set for vaulting lining remained passage height of not less than 1.8 m

 

4.6.4. Length should be determined culotte project indicated in the passport and attachment should not exceed 6.5 m in sinking way simply supported arch and 4 m – way supporting kernel.

 

4.6.5. In rings adjacent to the concreted vault disclosure culotte allowed when the concrete strength of not less than 60% of the project.

 

4.6.6. Development of secondary Strauss when driving way simply supported arch should begin after the concrete vault in the design strength. Allowed to start developing when the concrete at least 75% of the design strength in stable rocks. In developing the average Strauss at toe arch should be left berm width which must be installed and the project specified in the passport fixing.

 

4.6.7. The mouth of the wells developed in Strauss, in summing up the walls of a ready set, should be protected.

 

4.6.8. Strauss development side when driving way simply supported arch in unstable rocks and below the base of Strauss should be performed with the use of bolting.

Development side Strauss must begin after the concrete in the arch of at least 60% of the design strength and should be carried out under the stope side walls of the tunnel leaving pillars.

Prohibited to develop concrete pillars to reach the walls of the design strength.

 

 

4.6.9. It is forbidden to give a bias rail tracks, laid on a suspended flooring (overpass), and finding people is not permitted under this flooring while driving vehicles on rails.

 

4.6.10. When conducting penetration ledges and shoulder height of 4 m scarp slope angle to the horizon defined by the project.

 

4.6.11. For communication between the benches should be installed stairs with a slope of not more than 70 °, fitted with guards bilateral rails with a minimum height of 1.2 m with an intermediate board.

4.7. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE UNDERGROUND OPENINGS

In frozen or chemical grouting

4.7.1. Production work on underground development after soil freezing is permitted only after the formation of a closed loop design frozen thickness and achieve project provided the soil temperature. Work must be performed in accordance with the draft of the work.

 

4.7.2. Work on underground development can be started after the signing of the Executive committee of the representatives of the freeze, the project organization, the general contractor, the customer and the representative body Gosgortechnadzor.

 

4.7.3. For blasting operations in the passport of blasting shall be provided special precautions in order to prevent destruction and freezing columns ldogruntovogo screen.

 

4.7.4. When tunneling mining should be organized systematically control the frozen rocks. When the wet spots, local darkening of frozen soil at the bottom, as well as increasing the temperature of rocks in monitoring wells should be developed further measures to ensure the safety of operations.

 

4.7.5. Condition slaughter quality soil freezing, the presence of exposed frozen columns showing their positions on the stationing in plan and profile, the state segmental lining, etc. should be recorded every shift mine foreman in a special journal.

 

4.7.6. When the water in the trunk or the contour of production conducted on frozen rocks work, except for repair must be stopped before the freezing or further development of the project, ensuring the safe conduct of work.

 

4.7.7. Prohibited excavation excavations in frozen ground with a lag of temporary fastening from front face. Lagging permanent support from the bottom should be determined by the project. In plastic soils (clay, marl), prone to swelling, excavation workings small stope should be conducted not more than 2 m, which are to be fixed immediately.

 

4.7.8. Temporary supports should be installed so that you can monitor the status of frozen soils.

 

4.7.9. By sinking workings in chemical grouting allowed to start only after all preparatory work and acceptance by the Commission under the guidance of chief engineer of the organization performing the work to consolidate the soil, under the act, which must be accompanied by:

a) Plans and profiles fixed array with the designation location injectors;

b) an extract from the log pile injectors and injection solutions and mixtures;

c) The laboratory test data source chemical materials;

g) acts fixed ground control tests;

d) data for speed and groundwater levels in piezometers:

e) observations of foundations.

 

4.7.10. Water seepage through the lining as the thawing of frozen rocks must be repaired immediately by caulking joints of tubing or plugging space for bolting.

 

 

 

4.8. Drilling holes and boreholes in underground mines

4.8.1. Before drilling holes and wells slaughter workings should be carefully examined by a person of technical supervision and brought to a safe state.

 

4.8.2. Drilling holes shall be in accordance with the passport blasting, chief engineer approved organization.

With a passport blasting should be instructed on receipt mountain master, sinker, miners and Blasters working directly in the face.

 

4.8.3. Visual layout of holes with their depth and magnitude of the charges shall be displayed in the design, carried out where blasting.

 

4.8.4. Drilling holes and wells located at a height of more than 1.3 m from the base of the face, without any special support devices or scaffolding inventory prohibited.

 

4.8.5. Drilling holes with the blasted rock is only permitted if the device aligned horizontal platform that provides location workplace driller no closer than 2 m to the border inclines.

Make loading rocks within the danger zone, as defined in PPR while drilling is prohibited.

 

4.8.6. Length borer for drilling hand punches should not exceed
0.8 m, and the drilling hand electric drill – 1 m

 

4.8.7. Extract from holes jammed Boers may only be using the drill key or tool.

 

4.8.8. Connect the air hoses between them must be carried out with the help of bilateral nipple and hose with perforator – using conical nipple, union nut and nipple.

Securing the hose on the nipple should be metal clamps bolt or using a special device.

 

4.8.9. Mobile scaffolding platforms and drilling frames should have a strong solid floor, curbs a minimum height of 15 cm and a robust metal enclosure with an intermediate horizontal member with a minimum height of 1 m hatches entrance with stairs to the site should be protected on three sides.

Running on the lower tiers rigs must be protected from the top pull platforms and aprons.

 

4.8.10. Before drilling holes or wells lower ledge near the edge downward blown slaughter should be set a sturdy fence, located on the edge of the slope at a distance of not less than 0.5 m

 

4.8.11. Retractable platform (platform) drilling frames should have limiters nomination, as well as devices to prevent them from falling.

Are not permitted on the site at the same time more than two people.

 

4.8.12. Before you start installing the driver must make sure that the its main components: the chassis, drilling equipment, drive motors, control systems, connections and air-water-supply hose, hydraulic, mounting sled arrows (manipulators).

Any faults must be removed before the start of work.

 

4.8.13. Technical condition of the installation must be checked according to the instructions, but not less than the following dates:

- Machinist – before starting work, every shift;

- Mechanic area – weekly;

- Chief mechanic organization – monthly.

 

4.8.14. During operation, the drilling rig, when you change the Boers, crowns, making repairs to be prohibited under the raised arrows (devices) and automatic feeders, as well as near the wellbore.

 

4.8.15. Movement of the drilling rig from one face to another is allowed only in the transport position.

 

 

 

 

4.9. CLEANING OF BREED

4.9.1. Service (towing) muck loaders, excavators and others on the workings must be made on a rigid coupling.

 

4.9.2. By the simultaneous operation of two in the bottom muck machines machinists prohibited manage with sites located by mezhduputya.

 

4.9.3. Distance haulage loaded trolleys near the wellbore through muck cars should not exceed 25 m and is limited to the technological complex stacker or shield.

Coupling and uncoupling of trolleys with the machine during operation and traffic is prohibited.

 

4.9.4. Loading vehicles (wagons, dump trucks, etc.) must be carried out so as to prevent the loss of pieces of rock in their motion.

 

4.9.5. In tunneling and development of cameras with horizontal ledges and rock excavation loading height after the collapse of the rock explosion, do not exceed the height of the excavator digging.

The procedure and conditions of continuous loading machine and machine bucket defined by the project. At a height of up to 4 m collapse loading machine continuous can be performed without additional descent slopes.

 

4.9.6. In refining the part of the tunnel with a tray loading rocks into the bucket loading machine manually at the end of track must be installed removable stops.

 

4.9.7. The gaps between the upper roller excavator and outermost tail excavator body and contour generation should not be less than 0.4 m

 

4.9.8. Upon completion of works driver loading machine (excavator) must take the car to a safe place, lower down until it stops loading authorities shut down the machine and the power cable.

When you stop the conveyor or conveyor mucker-loader unloading his part must be cleared of overhanging pieces of rock.

 

 

 

4.10. Construction of the tunnel with the team lining

USING tunnel complexes

4.10.1. Breed and accumulate in cells of wrought materials, near fences, in the aisles, on sliding platforms and sites handlers lining prohibited.

 

4.10.2. Decks on billboards and pavers should be equipped boards and have a robust metal enclosure.

 

4.10.3. Before starting the movement with non-mechanized shield downhole hydraulic cylinders should be removed wooden struts to prevent the weakening of cylinders in the case of a pressure drop in the hydraulic network.

After movement shield spacers should be repaired immediately.

 

4.10.4. When moving the tunnel shield or stacker is prohibited:

a) to perform work in the absence of technical oversight entity, or when in the bottom of persons not related to this work;

b) removing boulders and other solids from the bottom zone in the panel;

c) used to increase the stroke cylinders shield improvised devices, be within the shield cylinders.

 

4.10.5. Cylinders and control panel must move the driver board.

Control of hydraulic cylinders and the process of advancing the tunnel shield is carried out in the presence of the shield machinist foreman or team leader.

 

4.10.6. Support team handlers lining, traveling on the pan of the tunnel, rail tracks and brackets should be inspected every shift face technical supervision and detection of defects immediately corrected or replaced. Brackets and rail route which move handlers must be installed with the use of mechanization in the presence of persons of technical supervision or driver board (stacker).

 

4.10.7. Before moving the stacker team lining must be removed all supporting beams lining.

 

4.10.8. When tunneling in unstable ground shields equipped dissecting horizontal platforms, in the case of a sharp decrease in the angle of repose for dissecting work sites should be stopped immediately to take measures against the excessive release of soil.

 

4.10.9. Break up large boulders and retrieve them from the soil mass should be protected by secure attachment chaired by a technical oversight.

 

4.10.10. When working mechanized shield should provide special arrangements for suppressing or collect dust, reducing its content in the bottom zone to the levels of sanitation.

Dust suppression or dust removal devices shall be activated to start working body shield.

Continuous operation of mechanized shield without using special devices to suppress or trap dust while providing means of ventilation in the bottom zone of dust concentration in the air is not above the maximum allowable limits.

 

4.10.11. Workplace driver mechanized shield must be equipped with light and sound alarms connected with all the mechanisms of technological complex.

4.10.12. Engines working body shield can be activated only after the driver personally verify the absence of people in the mine, as well as the dam breed residues lining or any other items.

 

4.10.13. When viewed from the face, shield repair and drives all engines must be off, and the remote control must be posted poster “DO NOT INCLUDE – working people”.

 

4.10.14. Driver board is obliged to turn off the engine drive and shield complex in case of emergency, at the request of any member of the team working on a mechanized complex.

 

4.10.15. When mechanized shield stops for more than changing slaughter must be fixed.

When you stop the mechanized shield for more than changing slaughter must be fixed in accordance with the requirements of the CPD.

 

4.10.16. Work done in front of a working body shield (ground-fall liquidation, temporary lining, etc.) must be performed under the direct supervision of a person of technical supervision.

 

 

 

4.11. CONSTRUCTION OF UNDERGROUND OPENINGS IN PARTICULARLY

DANGEROUS geological conditions

4.11.1. Construction of tunnels and underground structures in particularly hazardous geological conditions (in zones of tectonic faults, possible water breakthrough, quicksands, gas emissions, etc.), as well as under the beds of rivers and ponds should be done on a special project, which should be determined by the boundary possible sudden breakthrough in the production of water, silt and gases, as well as measures for their prevention and elimination.

When approaching faces of underground workings to areas particularly dangerous conditions in emergency response plans should include measures to save lives and eliminate the consequences of potential accidents using special devices and protective structures.

During the construction of utility tunnels in particularly difficult geological conditions of the above work is done in accordance with the project design and construction organization of works subject to these conditions and in agreement with the Russian authorities Gosgortechnadzor.

 

4.11.2. Construction of underwater tunnels permitted only under special safety devices against flooding or filling primer finished portion of the tunnel, as well as output devices for people from the emergency zone.

 

4.11.3. In the construction of a tunnel under compressed air are required to use safety rules when carrying out works under compressed air (caisson work).

 

4.11.4. In the construction of an undersea tunnel without the use of compressed air at a certain distance behind the project necessarily shield device jumper with open doors through which are transported in the lower tier of rock and materials, and the top – are people. In case of breaking water and soil doors this jumper should be closed at the same time and hold an emergency zone from the rest of the tunnel.

In the construction of utility tunnels with a diameter less than 5.6 m equipped with a watertight bulkhead door for transporting goods and people pass.

 

4.11.5. Excavation excavations in areas of geological faults (tectonic faults, changes, discharges, lenses, etc.), as well as breakthroughs in the areas of possible water or near the ground or underground structures and communications must be conducted on a special project with the following requirements:

a) before the commencement of work should be clarified passports and projects with the necessary calculations bearing ability of lining and values ​​ahead or behind it from the bottom;

b) enhanced monitoring of the geological structure of rocks, state attachment surface deformation and structures, provided every shift allowance of water inflow and advance well drilling to a depth defined project with a constant slaughter ahead of not less than 5 m;

c) constructed walkways and decks at the top of the workings of a large section or suspended from ropes (arranged railing) into the workings of small cross-section of people for emergency exit;

g) arranged waterproof arch perimeter workings and safety waterproof jumper (hydraulic locks) in them;

d) when driving with blasting operations, all persons in the areas of possible water breakthrough at the time of blasting and bottom ventilation should be withdrawn beyond erected in the workings of impermeable arches and water seal.

The number of control and monitoring wells, the diameter, length and direction, design and placement hydraulic locks, as well as devices for self-rescue people in case of flooding should be provided in projects approved by the chief engineer of construction management. Drilling wells must be obtained through the leveling or column locking device protivovybrosnye. Thus, if the slaughter is below the static groundwater level, should be provided safety pillar.

Excavation of tunnels in communal areas of geological faults is conducted in accordance with the requirements of PIC and PPR.

 

4.11.6. Boreholes crossing aquifers should be zatamponirovany after their need.

 

4.11.7. Organization producing drilling is obliged to reflect on the topographical plans and directories coordinate location mouths, faces and intersections workings all boreholes. One copy of the geological report to be stored in construction management (Production Association), which is obliged to inform the offices all related exploration data. Upon the redemption of boreholes necessarily plugging them, eliminating the possibility of penetration of surface and groundwater in mining.

 

4.11.8. In a shift, discharges, in zones of tectonic faults, as well as increasing the degree of rock fracturing should be taken additional security measures: reducing the length of the stope, the increase in the carrying capacity of temporary lining, construction of permanent lining with no lag from the face.

 

4.11.9. When mining operations in the arrays are prone to rock bursts, work must be performed in accordance with the current instructions for the safe conduct of mining operations on metallic and nonmetallic deposits prone rock bumps approved Gostgortechnadzor.

 

4.11.10. During the construction of tunnels in permafrost temperature regime should be observed in the workings of the rocks, and should also take into account seasonal fluctuations in air temperature when the mining priportalnyh on construction sites.

Excavation workings in these circumstances must be made using temporary lining with minimal lag or permanent support lining.

Allowed on the workings of the project without temporary support in the rocks, stability does not decrease during thawing, at the conclusion of this geological expertise.

 

4.11.11. In tunnels, constructed in seismic regions more than 7 points, temporary buildings and structures should priportalnye performed in accordance with this seismicity.

Resumption of work after the earthquake, more than 5 points allowed after examinations of mining, timbering, communication and presentation of results act.

 

4.11.12. Responsible for the development and implementation of measures for the safe conduct of mining operations in hazardous areas rests with the chief engineer of the organization performing these works.

 

 

 

4.12. INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL TEAMS lining

4.12.1. Mounting and dismounting of the tunnel lining tubing and blocks should be performed with special mechanical packers.

Allowed in some cases, in coordination with local authorities Gosgortechnadzor, to make installation of the tunnel lining prefabricated by winches on a special project. Erection and dismantling of prefabricated tunnel lining utility tunnels can be done using winches according to PPR. approved by the Chief Engineer.

When tunneling shields 2 m in diameter may be installed manually lining small-sized block with maximum weight of each unit is not more than 60 kg in accordance with measures to safe work as part of CPD.

 

4.12.2. When lifting and installing tubing (blocks) by winches in the project must be defined schema installation and fixing mounting winches, mounting and slinging tubing (blocks) of each type of the attachment points are marked carbines safety belts and safe location of people in the operations. Thus:

a) The installation should be made using at least two winches (lift and pulls);

b) mounting the winch must be positioned horizontally from being lifted at a distance of 5 to 15 m;

c) prohibited peretseplyat tubing (blocks) in the raised position with a rope winch rope on the other.

 

4.12.3. When assembling the team lining bridle or release tubing from grabbing arm blokoukladchika may only after connecting tubing by tightening the bolts previously mounted elements lining not less than three points (two on the flange and one on the face).

 

4.12.4. When the assembly and dismantling is forbidden to clean out drawers mounted elements lining up to full beam stacker ring closure lining, as well as to produce work from ladders and tunnel lining.

 

4.12.5. The means of mechanization should be raised and lowered to allow tubing (blocks) smoothly without jerking, rocking and sudden stops.

 

4.12.6. Raised and stacked elements lining the team should always be in sight of people working on winches. When installing slotted rings or ring in the first allowed to work on winches without a direct line of sight, while the winch should be two-way sound-light alarm to the place of installation.

 

4.12.7. Compression team lining the rock should be done immediately after the podviganiya shield. Do not stand at the time of compression within the crimp ring and leave the ring lining in neobzhatom condition.

 

4.12.8. Remove cells lining team and correcting geometry rings lining the block to be performed under the direction of the face of technical supervision, and the project should be provided technical solutions to ensure the preservation of stability of the open-ring design of the tunnel lining in the process of removing the tubing (blocks).

 

4.12.9. When the component removal team lining:

a) Do not loosen the fasteners and remove the same time more than one element in the ring lining;

b) to remove cells lining the team should be made from the top down on the perimeter of the tunnel cross-section;

c) dismountable element before easing fasteners must be secured to the second rope winch or safety slings to stable elements lining the methods stipulated in the PPR;

g) after removal of each element lining outcrop should be fixed according to the passport attached;

d) used the winch to be placed within 10-25 m from the dismantled cell lining.

 

4.12.10. For lining of emptiness must be mounted zabucheny or filled with a hardening solution in accordance with the project.

By injecting cement slurries for the lining:

a) injection nozzle must be securely fixed in the holes and attach to the lining further by fear devices;

b) hoses mud channel should not hang over the edge and shall be attached to the lining and scaffolding not less than 5 m;

c) working pressure systems rastvoronagnetaniya be within the stated project and technical passports installations;

g) prohibits the mud channel disconnects under pressure, inspect and clean the hoses from the injection nozzle, perform work from ladders.

 

4.12.11. After that shift the face of technical supervision is obliged to inspect the place of work, damage to machines, forests, scaffolding and disassemble the attachment.

 

4.12.12. Technical condition of the supercharger solution, its devices, pipes and hoses should be checked every shift persons working on them, or a mechanic on duty with a record test results in log.

 

 

 

4.13. Construction of monolithic lining AND INSTALLATION

Anchors

4.13.1. If necessary, the movement of people and vehicles in the area of ​​reference concrete (formwork, reinforcement) works to be fitted with free passage for transport and passage for people to meet the established dimensions. When working on the pass and drive they should be covered solid flooring. Before the roadworks must be posted lit banner: “WARNING DANGER AREA! WORK IN PROGRESS”.

When working and tunnels diameter of 2.6 m or more in CPD activities should be designed to ensure the safe passage of rolling stock and the passage of people.

 

4.13.2. Reinforcement cages installed circling and shuttering should be securely fastened. Proper installation and tightness of formwork face TÜV checked.

 

4.13.3. Never use the boom excavators, cranes and other hoisting equipment not equipped with special devices (cradles), for installation and fixing of reinforcement cages and modular formwork.

 

4.13.4. To move the formwork should be used winches to ensure smooth movement and uniformity of tension ropes. Allowed to move movable formwork on a rigid coupling with the help of self-propelled machinery. All kinds of mobile formwork must have anti-seizure or stoppers. When moving formwork finding people in the danger zone is prohibited.

 

4.13.5. Work on installing and removing mobile formwork must be performed in accordance with the CPD.

 

4.13.6. When the amount of space zaopalubochnogo least 0.45 m finding people in it is prohibited.

Keep people in zaopalubochnom space for installation and concreting at a distance of not more than 10 m from the edge (end) of the formwork.

 

4.13.7. When installing a temporary roof support with mobile scaffolding they should be securely fixed in place parking brakes and special devices.

 

4.13.8. Before you start laying concrete manufacturer is obliged to work to check the reliability of fastening formwork supporting scaffolding and working platforms.

 

4.13.9. When submitting a concrete mix concrete pump, pnevmobetonoukladchikom necessary: ​​after each installation betonovoda to work it must be tested by hydraulic pressure of 1.5 times the working; provide a place of work for laying concrete bilateral signaling; betonovoda at the outlet damper set speed.

The concrete units removed only after stopping work and depressurization.

When cleaning betonovoda all people should be removed from its outlet at a distance of not less than 10 m

Fender over the receiving hopper of concrete pump is lockable, remove it during operation Concrete prohibited.

 

4.13.10. Before beginning work on the concrete schprits machine must check whether the safety valve.

Troubleshooting an installation or pipeline and nozzle material can be carried out only when the power of compressed air and the pressure is removed.

 

4.13.11. With the construction of the lining of shotcrete should:

a) Do not allow people who are not associated with production operations, a distance of less than 5 m from the place of work.

Do not stand under the arch covered with freshly applied shotcrete layers, without enclosing solid flooring;

b) jobs soplovschika driver and the concrete spraying machine in the absence of visual contact between them should be provided with a light or audible alarm;

c) when applied shotcrete using a hardening accelerator, which has toxic properties, measures must be taken to exclude hit with the eyes and skin working;

g) rastvoropodayuschy hose before the work must be securely attached at a distance of not more than 5 m from the nozzle;

d) the appearance of cracks or delamination of the coating of shotcrete should be taken to strengthen the lining on this site.

 

4.13.12. By injecting a solution for the lining, paving all work at height must be done only suspended or mobile scaffolding. Do not store on the scaffold materials from dismantling formwork.

 

4.13.13. For the descent of the concrete mix from the upper to the lower horizon is necessary to use pipes or gutters. Pipes should be closed at the top (broadened) of the metal grille with a mesh size of not more than 300×300 mm, and at the bottom are protected.

 

4.13.14. Application of bolting must be justified in the project for the study of stability of rock during tunneling excavation.

When installing roof bolts in the workings traversed by species, prone to peeling, you should take measures to prevent the fall of pieces of rock (to the suspension anchors safety net, shotcrete surface coating, etc.). Net, suspended from the anchors should be systematically cleared of lying on her breed to its sag does not exceed 20 cm Verification of temporary fastening should be done at least once every 10 days removable face technical supervision with the entry in the “Book of the lining inspection and condition workings “(Appendix 11).

 

4.13.15. Never remove and loosen the nuts after the installation of roof bolting. To replace the grid and additional hanging grabs you must install a second thrust washer and nut. When installing the torque may not take part time rock anchors around.

 

4.13.16. When you are on a fixed anchors and shotcrete lining of the site develop cracks or delaminations need to take measures to strengthen the lining on this site.

 

 

 

4.14. CONSTRUCTION horizontal mine workings

WAYS punching, puncture and DRILLING

4.14.1. Route mining must be consistent with all owners and communications facilities within the area of.

 

4.14.2. Projects for the construction of a mining structures and communications should include measures for the protection and safe operation of existing facilities.

 

4.14.3. Before starting work on the construction of mining works manufacturer must specify the location of the existing objects in the work area and perform security measures provided by the project.

 

4.14.4. When carrying out work should be carried out monitoring of the situation regarding passable excavation design marks.

 

4.14.5. For the construction of mining methods punching, puncture and horizontal drilling should be equipped with a camera or pits.

 

4.14.6. Excavations should have perimeter fencing with a minimum height of 1.2 m and an embankment to prevent flooding precipitation, as well as fixing the walls and stairs to get down into the pit.

 

4.14.7. Base of the pit should be durable and, if necessary, have a coating (concrete, wood, etc.).

 

4.14.8. Prohibited conduct punching (piercing), using as a support lining pit. Installation for punching must have the same type jacks, firmly attached to the frame.

 

4.14.9. Pressing pads and connections shall be equipped with lifting lugs or brackets required for installation of the operating position, and have smooth mating surfaces without shells, dents or sagging.

Use as a pinch nipples pipe sections.

 

4.14.10. Hydraulic pumps must be equipped with pressure gauge, safety valve and installed no closer than 1 m from the edge of the pit. Pumps and piping must be before the work tried and tested, with drawing up the act.

 

4.14.11. When operating systems are not permitted by punching people in the danger zone jacks and lay pipes.

 

4.14.12. Laying the pipes bursting method with manual dismantling slaughter is allowed pipe diameter not less than 1200 mm and a length of 40 m, as well as the exclusion of the possibility of getting into the face of harmful gases, groundwater or silt.

This should meet the following conditions:

- Length of the pipeline at 10 meters should be artificial ventilation slaughter;

- Prior to admission into the face of people need to take pressure off the hydraulic power pack;

- Feedback should be provided from the bottom of the workers, on the surface.

 

4.14.13. Develop slaughter manually outside part of top blade Burst pipe is not allowed.

Transportation of soil should be done on trucks, the height of which shall not exceed half the diameter of the pipe.

It is forbidden to accumulate soil at the face and flip it by hand along the pipe.

 

4.14.14. Tube during the punching should have the sliding support, covering it by 1/3 of the height, all over the pit.

 

4.14.15. In developing the soil in places where they can get into the face of water or watery rock mass, gas drilling should be carried out from the bottom of wells, leading to the slaughter of a length of not less than 5 meters, and made every shift measurements of gas.

 

4.14.16. When tunneling mining method of horizontal drilling disassembly and removal of soil from the hole should be made mechanically. Prohibited drilling uncased their pipes.

 

4.14.17. Construction of horizontal workings way puncture should be mechanized method using prokolnyh installations or pneumodrills.

Work must be conducted in accordance with the instruction approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

4.14.18. Do not work prokolnymi installations at depths less than 1.2 m when crossing driveways with improved road surface.

 

 

 


4.15. CONTENTS, REPAIR AND DISPOSAL OF UNDERGROUND

OPENINGS

4.15.1. Underground workings during the construction period should be kept clean and in good repair. Not be deformed lining and reducing the cross-sectional dimensions of the internal workings, as well as clutter free passes to people.

 

4.15.2. Development and their arrangement shall be regularly inspected a section foreman at least once a day, and the mountain master – at least once per shift.

 

4.15.3. Persons responsible for the technical supervision of the conformity of the workings and their arrangement and design requirements of this Regulation. Discovered violations must be corrected immediately.

 

4.15.4. If cracks in the lining must be installed systematic instrumental watching them surveying service.

 

4.15.5. Shoring and reinforcement trunks serving for lowering and lifting people must be inspected daily by persons especially designated by the order of construction, which are required to record the results of the inspection in the “Book of records of an inspection trunk” (Appendix 12).

 

4.15.6. Shoring vertical, inclined and horizontal workings should be reviewed periodically, but not less than once every 10 days, or chief of the site inspected by a designated person and not less than once a month as chief engineer organization results to be entered in the appropriate inspection book. In case of violations of work in mines should be discontinued and the lining is provided in a safe condition.

Inspection lining and lining vertical and horizontal workings utility tunnels made Chief Engineer at least 1 time in 3 months.

 

4.15.7. Repair workings associated with replacement of elements or temporary lining lining, cross-sectional extension workings collapse and liquidation of consequences of water breakthrough, quicksand, and all repair work in the mine shafts, including those associated with replacement of elements of reinforcement plating ladder or lifting offices must be carried out on a special project.

4.15.8. Repair work in the shaft on perekrepleniyu must be carried out using fixed or suspended workers and safety regiments output which must be equipped with shelves ladder trunk compartment.

 

4.15.9. Perekreplenie and repair of the Deaf (deadlock) horizontal and inclined workings must be carried out by means which ensure, in the event of a sudden collapse, the possibility of people.

 

4.15.10. When cleaning sump mine shaft lifting vessels allowed to drive on the trunk.

 

4.15.11. Elimination of vertical, inclined and horizontal workings must be performed in accordance with the project, with the removal of a temporary or permanent lining lining prohibited.

Removing the lining and the lining is allowed in special cases, the bill approved by the chief engineer of the construction company, in the presence of persons of technical supervision.

 

 

 

4.16. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

Collector TUNNEL

4.16.1. Work on the construction of trenches and wells for the cameras must be in accordance with the draft of the work.

 

4.16.2. Permitted to arrange temporary mounting shelves for the installation of wells and chambers on the rings mount vertical workings.

 

4.16.3. When mounting elements prefabricated manhole be people in the pit is prohibited.

 

4.16.4. Transportation pipes and precast concrete rings in horizontal workings should be made in accordance with PPR, which should include: passport mount winch way insurance transported elements, means of communication between the train driver and winch installers, as well as guidance on safe methods of work.

 

4.16.5. When work near the tram tracks should be set on the fence and not less than 50 m to the place of work facing traffic – traffic signs with the words “Quiet move.” When the location of manhole chamber or pit in tramways not store materials, tools, implements and equipment at a distance of less than 2 m from the head of the outer rail.

 

4.16.6. Manufacturing jobs in existing chambers and wells permitted with mandatory presence of a representative organization – the owner of the building. Before any work is to be made an express analysis of air pollution.

Link workers shall consist of not less than three persons.

Work in existing utility tunnels, as well as connection to the newly built tunnel current should be in accordance with CPD approved by the chief engineer of the construction company and approved by the chief engineer of the operating company.

 

4.16.7. If you find that the air current underground facility harmful or hazardous gas is necessary to forced ventilation with a fan or compressor with a full air exchange underground facility. After that another measurement gas analyzer.

 

4.16.8. Before descending into the existing underground structures (well, camera) the worker must be provided with hose masks, life-belt with a safety rope. Each descends must be trained and able to apply conditional signals using a safety rope.

 

 

 

5. AIRING UNDERGROUND OPENINGS

 

5.1. MINE (MINE) AIR

5.1.1. In underground mines, which are or may be people, the air must contain not less than 20% oxygen (by volume). Carbon dioxide content in mine air field work must not exceed 0.5%, and in the workings of a common outgoing jet – 0.75%.

The air in the existing underground workings should not contain toxic gases longer maximum allowable concentrations indicated in Table. 1.

 

5.1.2. The amount of air required for ventilation openings should be calculated on the greatest number of people employed in underground work simultaneously on carbon dioxide at toxic and explosive gases, dust, gases’ from explosive and elektrogazosvarochnyh work on harmful exhaust components on the equipment with engines Internal combustion and minimum velocity of the air stream, and is accounted for the largest amount of air produced by the above factors.

 

5.1.3. The amount of air, calculated as the number of people must be at least
6 m 3 / min for each person, considering the largest number of people simultaneously working in smene.5.1.3. The amount of air calculated by the number of people must be at least

 

5.1.4. While production in the workings of welding operation and the required amount of air transport on these factors must be added.

 

Table 1

Name of toxic gases (vapors)

Formula

Maximum allowable concentration of gas in existing mines

% By volume

mg / m 3

Carbon monoxide (carbon monoxide)

CO

0.0017

20

Oxides of nitrogen in terms of NO 2

NO 2

0.00026

5

Sulfur dioxide

SO 2

0.00038

10

Hydrogen sulfide

2 S

0.00071

10

Acrolein

CH 2 CHCHO

0.000009

0.2

Formaldehyde

CH O

0.00004

0.5

Hydrocarbons based on carbon

300

Ammonia

NH

0.0025

20

Aerosols:
Welding fumes (iron oxide doped with fluoride or from 3 to 6% of manganese compounds)

4

 

 

Note. When checking the adequacy of the explosion products dilution toxic oxides of nitrogen take 1L equivalent 6.5 L of carbon monoxide, sulfur dioxide gas 1 L – 4.5 L of carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulfide l 1 – 2.4 liters of carbon monoxide.

 

5.1.5. In the production of blasting required amount of air to the underground workings must be determined by the number of toxic products of the explosion generated while blasting the greatest amount of explosive, believing that with the explosion of 1 kg of explosives produced an average of 40 liters of conventional carbon monoxide, including inclusive and nitrogen oxides.

It is necessary to observe the following:

- The quantity of air supplied to each face, in which are produced blasting must be such that before the admission to said working backspace formed during blasting toxic combustion products (carbon monoxide, nitrogen, etc.) were thinned to not less than 0.008% volume in terms of notional carbon monoxide, such dilution should be achieved in a period of not more than 30 minutes;

- The amount of air and the time required for the release of toxic gases from the bottom – the explosion products defined above calculations, analyzes must be checked;

- For at least 2 hours after admission working air must be supplied in place of explosives in the same amount, in which he did after blasting prior to admittance to the workers in the slaughter.

 

5.1.6. Air to the underground workings fans in the winter should be heated using heater installations. The temperature in the working area must be not more than +26 ° C and not lower than + 14 ° C when the air stream velocity is not greater than 2 m / s.

Application of fire heaters to preheat the air entering the production and used for curtains, is prohibited.

The air temperature in the working zone of horizontal underground utility tunnels construction complexes defined by the project on the basis of structural and technological parameters and structures should not be below +2 ° C. When shaft sinking in the winter temperature in the working zone is established in accordance with the CPD approved by the chief engineer of the company.

 

5.1.7. Priportalnye land mines must be protected from the cooling effect of the external temperature of the device, defined by the project (gates, locks, air curtains, etc.).

 

5.1.8. The temperature to which air must be heated to be supplied to the generation, located in the area of ​​long-term or artificial permafrost set chief engineer of a construction company in consultation with the project organization and SES.

 

5.1.9. Cooling air underground workings exposed to excessive heat should be on a special project with regard to the nature and power of heat input, opportunities to combat overheating, the availability of energy resources, economic and other factors.

 

5.1.10. Movement speed jet of air in underground section of up to 25 m 2 defined by the project and shall be not less than 0.15 m / s and should not exceed:

a) the horizontal and sloping excavations – 6 m / s;

b) in the trunks, which made the descent and ascent of people and goods – 8 m / s;

c) in the ventilation shafts that are not equipped lifts and ventilation ducts – 15 m / s, in the ventilation holes – not limited.

In workings section of more than 25 m 2 minimum velocity of the air stream to be determined project, but in any case not be less than 0.1 m / s.

 

 

 

5.2. GENERAL RULES FOR AIRING UNDERGROUND OPENINGS

5.2.1. All underground workings must have mechanical ventilation. Project organization should be designed ventilation schemes and projects for all stages of construction and finishing works in accordance with the PIC, including the construction of individual blind workings.

 

5.2.2. In case of detection of toxic gases in mines and reduce air quality against the standards established by paragraph 5.1.1 of this Regulation, as well as in violation of ventilation within these workings people should be immediately withdrawn on a fresh approach.

 

5.2.3. Unventilated generation must be closed louvered baffles, excluding the possibility of people pass through them. Resuming in closed mines allowed only after adjusting the air composition to the established norms.

 

5.2.4. Generation, ventilated after blasting should be shielded with a warning sign that says “No entry, ventilated slaughter.”

 

5.2.5. Prohibited without a special project combining two adjacent mines with independent ventilation in one ventilation system.

Adjacent mines with separate ventilation systems (or two generation), interconnected by one or more underground workings, or should be isolated from each other strong ventilation facilities (ventilation doors, lintels, gateways, etc.) or have a unified system of ventilation with a single plan emergency response and be under the same technical manual ventilation.

The project combined ventilation must be approved by the Chief Engineer (associations, management, trust).

 

5.2.6. All machinery and transformer chamber should be ventilated with fresh air stream, with the camera up to 10 meters are allowed to ventilate due to diffusion at the entrance to the width of which not less than 1.5 m, equipped with lattice door.

 

5.2.7. Use the same vertical or inclined shafts or tunnels for the simultaneous passage of incoming and outgoing air jets.

An exception may be allowed at the time of sinking shafts and tunnels to connect to another barrel or tunnel, having an output surface or a longer period if the Breakthrough of the underground workings gateway installed jumper. In the latter case in the trunk and underground workings must be metallic ventilation pipe.

Airing construction of tunnels and shafts can be done using flexible ventilation ducts in cases where the conditions but the safety of people in accidents does not change the direction of air flow in mine workings, in accordance with the PLA.

 

5.2.8. Underground workings, which detected or projected emission of methane, hydrogen or hydrogen sulfide, should be transferred to the gas mode.

Working in such excavations shall be in accordance with the special arrangements agreed with the State Technical Supervision.

 

5.2.9. Before the transfer of the object on the gas mode in current workings must provide enhanced ventilation and organize gas air monitoring.

 

5.2.10. Underground work in mines in the case of gaseous hydrocarbons (oil) must be conducted in accordance with the special arrangements approved by the chief engineer of a construction company in coordination with local authorities Gosgortechnadzor.

 

5.2.11. In the production of low-temperature freezing, chemical grouting, etc. allowed people to the place of work in underground workings must be done after checking the composition of air express method and evaluation of its oxygen content, free formaldehyde and nitrogen compared with the MPC.

 

 

 

5.3. Ventilation devices

 

5.3.1. Ventilation doors must be installed under the project special jumpers ensuring tightness perimeter generation.

Leave the doors open is prohibited.

After necessary ventilation doors and bridges must be cleaned.

 

5.3.2. In places significant pressure ventilation doors should be equipped with devices allowing them opening.

 

5.3.3. When installing single door in passageway in the same jumpers must get the door for the passage of people. The width of doors intended only for the passage of people, should be at least 0.7 m

 

5.3.4. To prevent air leaks on its way to the motion must include project and jumpers:

a) in the ventilation and other mines after they need;

b) between the workings with the incoming and outgoing streams.

Inspection of bridges should be done at least once a week.

 

5.4. MAJOR fan installation

5.4.1. Underground workings must be ventilated by means of continuously operating main ventilation fans located on the surface in accordance with the project.

When placing the construction site of the mine in a particularly cramped conditions, as well as underground construction shallow permitted by agreement with the Gosgortechnadzor installation of underground main fans.

 

5.4.2. Air intake fan systems should be located in areas not contaminated by dust, smoke and gases.

 

5.4.3. Home fan installation shall consist of one self-blower unit with a backup engine, except gassy mines where there should be two independent fan unit.

When ventilation fan installation utility tunnels moivt not completed backup motors and equipped with reversing devices, if the terms of the safety of people in accidents does not change the direction of air flow in mine workings.

 

5.4.4. When you stop the main fan of more than 30 people in the non-gas mines mines should be withdrawn from the bottom of blind workings included in this scheme of ventilation fan for a fresh approach. When you stop the main fan of more than 2 hours people found on the surface from all jobs. Resumption of work may be allowed only after due and careful examination airing persons interchangeable faces supervision using gas analyzers.

 

5.4.5. The main fan installation must be equipped reversing devices enabling them to change the direction of air flow in ventilated mines within a single system of ventilation and of which there are at least two exits to the surface no more than 10 minutes. The amount of air passing through the workings after the reversal should not be less than 60% of its amount in the normal ventilation.

 

5.4.6. Inspection devices reversible serviceability of their actions without tipping the jet should be made to develop the mechanic area at least once a month.

Checking action reversing devices skipping inverted air flow takes place once every 6 months according to the “How to Test action reversing devices fan systems” (Appendix 3).

The results of inspection and testing devices reversing fan reversal recorded in Section II “Book fan installations inspection and verification of reversion.”

Test results air flow reverse executed an act that should be attached to the emergency plan.

 

5.4.7. The main fan installation shall at least once a day to look around employee appointed chief mechanic organization. In addition, at least once a week to inspect the fan installation must mechanic area. The results of the inspection shall be entered in Section I “Book fan installations inspection and verification of reversion.”

 

5.4.8. Allowed to work the main fan installations without a driver, provided that the remote control at the remote control for changes in the fan systems and the availability of devices for remote start and stop the motor.

Remote control and monitoring the fan unit must be in a place where it can be provided constant surveillance action signaling equipment and registration papers of all incoming signals and indications of technical guidance.

 

5.4.7. Building the main fan installation should be made of nonflammable materials, and have a constant back lighting. The building should be closed on the lock in the absence of a permanent shift.

The building (and for automated installations and in the control) must be posted scheme reversing fan, individual characteristics of the fan and the instructions for the person serving the fan installation.

Employee serving remote management and control of the fan, is required to maintain the “Book of accounting work and exam main fan installation” (Annex 10).

 

5.4.8. Main ventilation fans stop to repair or change their operation modes, as well as off the feeders, can produce only on the written order of the chief engineer of the main plot or organization.

About sudden stops fans caused their malfunction or power outages should be immediately reported to the head of the change and the head portion. Duration and stop time must be recorded in the “Book of the main accounting fan installation.”

 

 

 

5.5. Ventilation of blind workings

 

5.5.1. Fan installation for ventilation when drilling the barrel must be installed on the surface of at least 15 m from the trunk.

Lagging ventilation pipes from the bottom barrel project must be determined and be no more than 15 m During loading rock grab this distance may be increased to 20 m

The pipes must be made of noncombustible materials and suspended on ropes or rigidly attached to the lining.

 

5.5.2. Slaughter underground workings must be ventilated by fans, established under the project. In driving that rise workings ends vent pipes should be placed in the baffle shelf from the bottom and be at a distance of not more than 6 m When driving workings lag ventilation pipes from the face must not exceed 10 m in cross-sectional area slaughter not more than 16 m . With an area of working face more than 16 m lag value vent pipes installed project.

Allowed in some cases airing blind workings using compressed air ejectors.

In non-gas underground mine ventilation allowed diffusion deadlocks up to 10 m

 

5.5.3. On tunneling revolting workings must be drafted Works, approved by the chief engineer of the organization. This project includes fixing passport and blasting, calculations and mode of installation of local ventilation fans.

Prohibited blast-hole drilling vosstayushih not equipped with remote-set from the bottom of the air samples for quality control of its composition.

 

All shifts employed in the sinking of the rebels, should be provided with appliances rapid analysis of air and trained to use them.

 

5.5.4. Installation of local ventilation fans in dead mines should be made to the bill approved by the chief engineer of the organization. The productivity of local ventilation fan should not exceed 70% of the amount of air supplied to the place of its installation due obscheshahtnoy depression local ventilation fan must be installed on a fresh stream of air at a distance of not less than 10 m from the outgoing stream in such a way that the air outgoing jet could be sucked back fan.

 

5.5.5. In some cases, for long lengths of ventilation openings in coordination with local authorities Gosgortechnadzor permitted for local ventilation fans scattered along the length of the duct, subject to the development of additional security measures.

 

5.5.6. Tory valve inspection facilities and reversing devices these installations on construction sites communal tunnels made at least 1 time per month employee designated by the head of the enterprise.

 

 

 

5.6. Monitoring the state of the mine atmosphere

And the instrumentation

 

5.6.1. In an organization engaged in the construction of underground structures, depending on the scope of work should be organized plot ventilation or appointed persons responsible for ventilation.

 

5.6.2. It is forbidden to appoint persons responsible for ventilation, no higher or secondary mine technical education.

 

5.6.3. Those responsible for ventilation, ventilation should be plans with drawing on them jets movements, locations of fan systems, ventilation and fire fighting equipment. These plans need to be replenished and prepared in accordance with the Instruction to develop and implement emergency response plans for the construction of underground structures (Annex 1).

All changes that have occurred in the location of fans, air handling units, in reversing the air jets, as well as newly planted production must be marked on the plans no later than the next day.

 

5.6.4. To validate air distribution and its quality should be conducted measurements of quantity and air sampling in the workings of not less than once a month, as well as any significant change in ventilation mode in accordance with the “Regulations for the sampling of the mine air” (Appendix 4).

To check the quality of air after blasting and adjust the concentration of toxic gases in it until the rules laid down in this Regulation, air samples are taken according to the changing conditions of work, but at least once a month.

 

5.6.5. Gas control after slaughtering blasting and ventilation prior to admission should people be made to the face by rapid technical supervision devices face or on behalf of a foreman (team leader).

In addition, at the beginning of the change before the admission of people in the workplace face technical supervision is obliged to check the qualitative composition (CO 2 , O 2 and CH 4 ) in each bottom air express method.

 

5.6.6. In mines with temperatures above +20 ° C simultaneously with the measurement of quantity and air sampling in the same time frame should also be carried out measurements of air temperature.

The results of temperature measurements and analyzes of samples and the amount of air entered into the “book based on the analysis of air samples for dust and gas pollution” (Appendix 17).

 

5.6.7. To determine the number and composition of the air should be in a construction company or organization performing measurements, the following equipment: anemometers, stopwatches and express apparatus for determination of carbon dioxide in the air, sulfur compounds, carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides.

 

 

 

6. SPECIAL WORK

 6.1. WELL DRILLING SURFACE

6.1.1. Designated wells location, accommodation and communications equipment on the ground should be determined by the project. In this case the horizontal distance from the rig to the residential and industrial premises, security zones LEP, oil and gas pipelines, railroads and highways should be at least the height of the tower plus
10 meters.

Not install stationary rigs in the settlements at a smaller distance subject to additional measures to ensure the safety of the population and work in coordination with the State Technical Supervision and fire surveillance.

Continuous operation of mobile drilling rigs and drilling rigs in the settlements in the vicinity of buildings and structures but production project activities approved by the chief engineer of a construction company, and in agreement with the owners of buildings and structures, and other interested entities.

 

6.1.2. When the location of the drilling rig near steep slopes (bounce) the distance from its base to the edge of the slope should be less than 3 m in all cases rig should be located outside the sliding wedge.

 

6.1.3. Each tower shall be equipped with audible alarm and stop the lift drilling tools or lifting devices.

 

6.1.4. Build towers on the ground should be done in crates or goats, climbing up and down the towers and masts in installations without lifting mechanism – with the help of winches, cranes, tractors.

Winches are used for lifting such masts and towers assembled on the ground, must be no less than three-fold safety margin relative to the ropes as possible static loads.

Lifting mechanisms that serve to set rigs (masts), should be placed on the axis of the borehole at a distance of three-quarter height tower (mast).

 

6.1.5. Ascent and descent of the towers, drilling masts, erection and dismantling rigs should be made for projects and for a typical assembly chaired by a technical oversight. Projects and typical installations must be designed in accordance with the instructions of the equipment and these Regulations and approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

6.1.6. Do not install, dismantling and moving rigs with wind speeds exceeding 15 m / s, as well as during a rainstorm, icy conditions, thunderstorms, and at night.

 

6.1.7. Movement of drilling rigs should be done under the supervision of a person approved by the technical supervision by the chief engineer of the organization to plan the route. On route plan should be clearly indicated areas of high danger and security measures.

 

6.1.8. Technical condition of drilling equipment, towers (masts), units and installations should be checked:

- Master (foreman) – at least twice a week;

- Persons Technical Supervision Organization – at least once a month;

- Driller – when Acceptance shifts.

In addition, the technical condition of the tower (mast) must be checked:

a) before and after the movement;

b) prior to lowering the casing string;

c) after the wind velocity exceeding 9 m / s;

g) before and after the work relating to the elimination of accidents.

Results inspection foreman (foreman) and those technical supervision logged fixed form. Any faults must be repaired before the work.

 

6.1.9. Work on the sinking of wells can be initiated in the presence of the following technical documentation:

a) a warrant for execution of works;

b) the project works;

c) the act of acceptance of the rig in operation;

g) instructions for opening the facility;

d) ground resistance measurement protocols and equipment insulation and electricity;

e) act crimp pumps.

 

6.1.10. Mud pumps and pipes, hoses and seals before entering the rig-up and after each installation must be pressure tested with water sesquialteral calculated maximum pressure to check the safety valve. About crimping results should be an official act.

 

6.1.11. Work on the sinking of wells must be in accordance with the technological instructions.

Drilled wells should overlap or be protected.

 

6.1.12. When tripping the winch drum shall be at least three wraps of wire rope; wireline fixed end should be secured with three screw terminals in the device mounted on a separate foundation or the base frame of the rig (mast), the bending radius of the rope should be at least 9 diameter rope.

 

6.1.13. During operation of drilling rigs are prohibited:

a) switch on the rotational speed of the winch and back to standstill jammed handle machinery; produce stopped rotating kelly, use cartridges with protruding spindle head clamping bolts; climb to the jobsite;

b) work on winches with faulty brakes; stand in the immediate vicinity of the descent (raised) pipes and elevators; nedovernutymi down pipes with threaded connections, keep the weight on the traveling system under load or without using the load imposed on the brake lever or by jamming handle; inspect or clean the threaded connections;

c) to repair pipes, hoses, gaskets, fittings work without warning the twisting around the discharge hose or pipe leading to retain his hands.

 

6.1.14. When drilling in the protected zone of objects (air and cable transmission lines, gas pipelines, etc.) must be issued working permit-defining a safe environment for their production.

 

 

 

6.2. Artificial freezing of soils

6.2.1. When carrying out the artificial freezing of soils, construction, installation and operation of equipment and pipelines freezing stations should be guided by the applicable Rules of the device and the safe operation of ammonia, freon and Chladone refrigeration, safety rules in sinking shafts in special ways, Rules devices and safe operation of vessels working under pressure and the Regulations on the design and production work on the artificial freezing of soils in the construction of subways and tunnels.

Production of artificial freezing of soils must be carried out in accordance with the project.

 

6.2.2. Installation of compressors, heat exchangers and appliances (refrigeration) freezing stations should be carried out in accordance with the method statement and factory instructions.

Operation and brine freezing station network is allowed after the test and its acceptance by a special commission.

Driver must maintain a record of all parameters of the station with a note in the “Book of accounting freezing station” (Appendix 21).

 

6.2.3. Width of free passes in the engine rooms along the walls and between machines (units) must be at least 1.5 m, and the height of machine hardware and space – not less than 4 m

For refrigerant piping should be used seamless steel seamless pipes. Applications for these purposes or cast iron pipes of gas is allowed.

The requirement of this paragraph does not apply to a mobile station freezing.

 

6.2.4. It is forbidden to manufacture welding and other hot work on pipelines and filled with refrigerant or brine.

 

6.2.5. Pickle network made of forward and reverse rassoloprovodov, distributor and collector should be in that serves forshahte (mouth), the network is allowed to place on the surface of the device insulation.

 

6.2.6. Brine on the network must be installed:

- Gauges – one for the discharge line and the collector;

- Thermometers – on the distributor and collector;

- Gauge brine – for circulation tank and alarm on lowering brine.

 

6.2.7. Machine room and hardware departments freezing station should be located in a separate building and have a telephone.

Operate mobile stations without freezing device they telephony provided that such a construction site in the territory of the base at a distance of not more than 0.3 km from the freezing station.

 

6.2.8. Engine room freezing station should have:

 

a) compulsory ventilation with double air exchange per hour with a triple and exhaust air exchange, as well as emergency exhaust with the sevenfold air exchange per hour minimum temperature of + 16 ° C, not less than two outs, doors and windows that open to the outside;

b) equipped with storage space for no more than two cylinders filled with refrigerant. Refrigerant cylinder is allowed to attach to the system only for the time needed to recharge;

c) telephone, light and sound alarm to the job site;

g) devices for the control over the content of harmful substances in the air;

d) means of individual protection for each worker on a freezing station and first aid kit. Furthermore, the freezing plant must be at least two masks.

 

6.2.8. * The engine room freezing station should be posted:

a) scheme refrigerant and brine;

b) the scheme of water circulation;

c) User manual chillers;

d) User manual electrical equipment;

d) internal rules;

e) The schedule of preventive maintenance;

g) machinist job description chillers.

________________________

* The numbering of the original. Note legal bureau “Code”.

 

6.2.9. Restrooms in the engine room should have its own separate ventilation system.

Power emergency ventilation should be provided as from the ground and from an independent source of energy.

 

6.2.10. All freezers (condensers, evaporators, maslovodootdeliteli etc.) and pipes must be fixed. For straight pipe length of 100 m should be arranged compensators.

 

6.2.11. System refrigerant and brine freezing station (compressor, condenser, evaporator, piping, etc.) at the end of the installation to be tested at the appropriate pressure.

 

6.2.12. Release any refrigerant through the relief valve station system should be made via the discharge pipe in accordance with the project agreed with the authorities of SES. Diameter outlet hose should not be less than nominal diameter of the safety valve.

Connection is allowed several separate discharge pipes, relief valves to a common outlet pipe. Total cross sectional area of ​​the draft tube should be not less than the sum of individual sections attached taps safety valves, while the number of such outlets more than four can not be less than 50% of this amount.

 

6.2.13. Artificial thawing frozen ground permitted to complete after construction of underground structures.

After thawing, freezing pipes should be removed and wells filled with cement-sand mortar. When leaving the freezing pipes in the wells they must also swabbed.

 

6.2.14. In places where the pipelines are damages should arrange guard.

Discharge the refrigerant piping in places pass through combustible walls and ceilings must be separated from them fireproof insulation.

 

6.2.15. Filling the system with refrigerant, operation of chillers and compressors must be made in accordance with the instructions drawn up for each freeze station and instructions equipment manufacturers.

 

6.2.16. All installed gauges shall be inspected annually and have a tattoo or fillings gospoveritelya. Additionally, at least once in six months, it shall be verified working gauge readings by comparison with a test pressure gauge readings. The result must be documented by a statement.

 

6.2.17. When operating the chiller refrigerant leak location must be made chemical indicator or other device designed for this purpose.

When operating chillers periodically, but not less than once a month, it shall be verified exhaust from the condenser water and brine for the presence of coolant.

 

6.2.18. Never open the cylinder and crankcase dismantle machines, pipes and valves to completely remove them from the refrigerant and oil, as well as carry out this work without a mask and rubber gloves.

 

6.2.19. Refrigerant cylinders must be stored in special warehouses fireproof (no windows and heating) in the supine position in an amount not exceeding 25% of annual consumption. Room temperature storage should not exceed +25 ° C.

 

6.2.20. Warehouse for refrigerant bottles must be removed from the buildings and warehouses storing flammable combustibles at least 50 m and be within the lightning. Cylinders must be protected from sunlight.

 

6.2.21. Prohibited from sharing storage cylinders with different refrigerants or other compressed gases and combustible materials.

 

6.2.22. Freezing columns brine system freezing station before placing in the well should be tested by hydraulic pressure not less than 2.5 MPa (25 atm). After washing and mounting Brine network must be subjected to the hydraulic test sesquialteral brine pump design pressure, but not less than 0.5 MPa (5 atm). Brine piping and fittings in the operation must be tight.

 

6.2.23. Prohibited when there is pressure to repair pipelines brine system and remove the plugs from the speakers after freezing test.

 

 

6.3. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

At low temperature (nitrogen) FREEZING

 

6.3.1. Work on nitrogen freezing technology must be carried out under the project developed a specialized organization.

 

6.3.2. Maximum allowable working pressure in stationary and portable tanks, as well as in all the other elements of the system nitrogen freezing should not exceed 0.25 MPa.

6.3.3. Persons employed in jobs with liquid nitrogen should be provided with special protective equipment from frostbite: woolen jackets and gloves, special glasses, etc. Clothes should not have oil stains.

 

6.3.4. All components of the system nitrogen freezing elements and components shall be tested for leaks with registration acts.

 

6.3.5. Vessels, piping and fittings shall be thoroughly degreased and protected from falling oil.

 

6.3.6. All valves nitrogen freezing systems must be marked and numbered in accordance with the flow chart. Scheme with indelible paint on a board fitted to a control system.

All valves shall be provided with stencils and bears rooms inscriptions and arrows indicating the direction of rotation of the flywheel at closing in an emergency diversion.

Gates intended for emergency shutdown system shall be painted red.

 

6.3.7. Zone control nitrogen discharge must be ensured:

- Warning triangle;

- Isolating self-rescuers in an amount exceeding the maximum number of people working in the change by 10%;

- Regulatory oxygen inhalers in case of sudden loss of consciousness one of the crew members;

- First aid kit;

- Electric lighting (not less than 50 lux).

About learning the rules and methods of work with self-rescuers and inhaler must be recorded in the journal of safety instructions.

 

6.3.8. In process control zone should be provided with the control of oxygen content (twice the detector tubes in change, the gas analyzer) while discharging nitrogen and once per shift necessary to take samples in the air discharge nitrogen for laboratory analysis VGSO.

 

6.3.9. On road transport capacity must be recorded as “closing the valve issue of liquid nitrogen, open drainage. CAUTION Follow time, drain valve is open!” Operator working on road transport tank when draining nitrogen should see improvement nitrogen freezing system involved in the distribution of the discharged nitrogen, and persons employed in carrying out this work, or have a two-way communication with them.

 

6.3.10. Drain liquid nitrogen from the trucking capacity in the circulation system permitted after the withdrawal of the operating mine workings.

 

6.3.11. When carrying out the nitrogen freezing technology is prohibited:

a) overlap the two valves simultaneously within a closed circulation network to complete evaporation of liquid nitrogen in the absence of this site safety devices (safety valve, bursting disc);

b) to carry out welding and other work with an open flame in a nitrogen circulation network elements are not disconnected from the network technology and purged with warm air (nitrogen) with an outlet temperature 15 20 ° C;

c) to repair the system nitrogen freezing, including tightening of fasteners in the circulation of nitrogen;

g) smoking in the area of ​​process control nitrogen freezing, as well as for repairs in this area, what should be posted in these posters.

 

6.3.12. Installation site and rail tank car route for the transportation of liquid nitrogen should be defined in the project.

 

6.3.13. Warming piping and valves when frost build-up may only be outside the steam or hot water.

 

6.3.14. When freezing soils near existing capital facilities should be conducted instrumental survey control for possible deformation structures.

 

 

 

6.4. Chemical grouting

6.4.1. Injectable work on chemical fixation of rocks shall be made for special projects, which should be provided: the maximum allowable discharge pressure, rates of injection solutions and security measures for handling chemicals used.

During the construction of utility tunnels work but chemical fixation of rocks shall be in accordance with PIC and PPR.

 

6.4.2. All work related to the physicochemical fortifications unstable rocks, should be made under the guidance of persons having experience in manufacturing these papers and license in their jurisdiction.

 

6.4.3. Before starting work, injecting equipment and communication systems shall be tested at a pressure greater than 1.5 times the highest discharge pressure, and adopted by the Commission under the guidance of chief engineer organization leading the work.

 

6.4.4. Pipelines for injection solutions should be safety valves adjusted design pressure with a device to collect discharges.

Pumps used in work with chemicals should have proper seals, preventing leakage of fluids.

 

6.4.5. In the production of injection works:

a) must not be operated leaky suction and discharge line injection systems, pumps, tanks and dispensers;

b) transport and storage of resin liquid glass, acid and other chemicals must be carried in a sealed metal container (original packaging) with tightly sealed lids. Used on all containers must then be printed with the name of the chemical reagent (“Pitch”, “water glass”, etc.);

c) in mines, on the spot cooking injecting chemical solutions, supply of chemicals shall not exceed the amounts required for chemical grouting rock excavating one stope;

g) prohibits the preparation of solutions in containers with open lids. Mortar used for the preparation of injectable solutions of synthetic resins, liquid glass and other chemical reagents must be equipped with hatches with tight fitting lids;

d) equipment used for injecting fluids (pumps, hoses, injectors) must periodically during operation and after closure washed with hot water, and injectors, moreover, lubricated with grease. Remains of the gelling solution and solidified gel when washing should be collected in a special hermetically sealed containers and transported to the surface periodically to neutralize;

e) in the field of preparation of solutions (mixing unit) shall be posted in the control circuit mechanisms indicating sequence start and stop operations.

 

6.4.6. While working with chemicals content of toxic substances in the workplace must not exceed the maximum allowable concentrations. In the workplace should be clean water and 10% solution of baking soda.

 

6.4.7. Slaughter tunnel and mixing unit must be connected telephone and two-way alarm (sound and light), as well as the procedure for the exchange of signals.

 

6.4.8. Prohibited during the production work on the injection does not lead other related work in mines.

 

6.4.9. Decant acid from one container to another is allowed only with a special pump.

 

6.4.10. Installations for preparation of liquid glass, as well as boiler installation, used for cooking and heating chemical solutions must be regularly inspected and be hydraulically tested in accordance with current guidelines of the device and the safe operation of vessels working under pressure.

 

6.4.11. To prevent the possibility of breaking out of caustic solutions when working directly from the ground should be left loose soil layer thickness of 1-1.5 m and put a layer of concrete with a minimum thickness of 10 cm with 5 cm diameter holes for driving injectors.

 

6.4.12. During injection works is prohibited:

a) work with the injection of installation, lubrication, cleaning and repair;

b) to disassemble and repair of injection valves and disconnect the hoses from the injector under pressure;

c) removing the injectors from the ground without the help of special devices (iglovydergivateley, rack jack, etc.);

d) to use equipment with faulty gauges and hoses, having a swelling;

d) to perform quick overlap cranes on mud channel communications;

e) to remain open well after removing injectors. Wells should be zatamponirovany mortar or plastic clay.

 

6.4.13. When working with chemicals is prohibited:

a) be without protection vicinity of the preparation of solutions;

b) transfusion reagents using buckets;

c) be in the field of storage and cooking chemicals to unauthorized persons;

g) to start working without checking health of supply lines to the work site, valves and mechanisms;

d) to carry out work on the preparation of solutions and injections in unventilated mines.

Removing formwork swirling, mounting wedges set out details, delete parts of the projections under the bed next row, loading hanging in the eaves of the (arch) is allowed only with the permission of the master (superintendent) after full hardening solution.

 

6.6.6. Preparation antiseptic and flame retardants should be conducted at designated sites. At the same time within less than 50 m shall be prohibited to use open flames, including smoking and perform activities related to possible sparking. Vessels with antiseptic agents should be permanently shut tight lids or stoppers.

Exempt material containers of antiseptic products must be collected and neutralize. Not allowed to leave her work area, as well as throwing in loading and unloading.

After completing work on antiseptic and fire-retardant treatment of wood storage and preparation of relevant materials and structures, equipment and tools should be cleaned and neutralized.

 

6.6.7. Used for painting work paints, enamels, varnishes, primers, putty, solvents and thinners must match the project, with each batch of paint in the organization and should be available for the entire period of work with him persist passport or certificate from specified chemical composition .

Use for painting works paint materials of unknown composition. Such materials may be approved for use in writing to the chief engineer of the organization based on an analysis of their chemical composition and resolution of SES.

 

6.6.8. When painting work in mines, underground and other enclosed spaces in projects for their performance parameters must be defined and the methods of control of ventilation air composition both in the workplace and in the total outgoing air flow.

 

6.6.9. The amount of incoming air at workplaces should be sufficient to prevent the formation of explosive or harmful concentrations of volatile constituents working paint materials. In all cases should be provided with not less than two-fold air exchange for an hour.

 

6.6.10. When using nitrokrasok and other materials that emit volatile explosives, in the buffer zone around the site of production of painting works defined BPD, but not closer than 50 m, is allowed to use only electrical intrinsically safe.

Prohibited to perform hot work, smoking, as well as other works, causing sparks.

 

6.6.11. Prohibited in the preparation of paint was used as a solvent of benzene and leaded gasoline. Workers employed in painting works shall be provided with protective clothing and personal protective equipment. When painting the maximum allowable concentration of acetone vapor in the air of the working area must not exceed 200 mg / m .

 

6.6.12. Do not store in the workplace in mines and other enclosed spaces stock paint materials in quantities exceeding the replacement demand. Containers of paints, varnishes and solvents should be tightly closed and at least use empties should be disposed of in specially designated and enclosure at the construction site.

 

6.6.13. Finishing work in the area of ​​permanent and potentially dangerous occupational hazards prohibited.

 

6.6.14. Field storage of paints and production work with them must be at least two foam extinguishers, boxes of sand and 10% above the stock selfrescuers the number of persons engaged in activities in the development.

 

 

 

6.7. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR IMPLEMENTATION

Anti-corrosive

6.7.1. When used in underground hot bitumen capacity to raise and lower him vertically permitted on closed duct. Allowed toe cap containers with bitumen to the workplace on inclined ladders with handrails, equipped in accordance with GOST.

 

6.7.2. On the use of polymeric materials that emit harmful gases and flammable substances should be pre-obtained permission from the local authorities and Gosgortechnadzor SSES.

 

6.7.3. Construction company, which operates using polymeric materials in tunnels and other underground facilities, before starting work must notify the general contractor on the timing of the start of work with harmful, flammable substances.

 

For the production of such works must be a special project of works, approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

6.7.4. Jobs for the preparation and application of polymeric materials should be provided with ventilation. The content of harmful substances in the air of the working area must be within the permissible concentration.

 

6.7.5. Work on the preparation and application of polymeric materials must be carried out under the direct supervision of a person of technical supervision.

In the area of ​​their application in underground structures production of other works is prohibited.

 

6.7.6. Cleaning material after its use must be collected in a special container for subsequent extradition to the surface. Burn used cleaning material is prohibited.

 

6.7.7. Device surface storage facilities for polymeric materials and packaging must comply with the technical requirements for these materials.

 

6.7.8. Resumption of work and availability to persons in the underground structures after the polymer coating is permitted only after the complete removal of hazardous work area or inflammable substances.

 

 

 

7. Markshejdersky SOFTWARE

 

7.1. REQUIREMENTS surveying service

 

7.1.1. Organizations and businesses, leading work on the design and construction of underground facilities must be composed of surveying services or software to organize surveying work done. The heads of these organizations are responsible for providing and surveying services necessary engineering and technical staff and workers, providing them with specially equipped premises, tools and appliances.

 

7.1.2. Surveying software construction of underground arms shall be in accordance with the requirements of the current User-geodesic surveying work in the construction of transport tunnels.

Surveying software utility tunnel construction is performed in accordance with departmental regulations consistent with Gostgortechnadzor Russia.

 

7.1.3. Surveying service shall provide the required accuracy:

a) the construction and development of surveying and surveying networks of support on the surface and in mines, production filming mining and earth surface, preparation and completion of surveying documentation transference in nature geometric elements spans, buildings, borders safe mining operations;

b) carrying out instrumental observation of the processes of displacement of rocks, rock pressure, deformation of the earth surface, buildings and structures;

c) monitor the implementation of projects contained in the requirements for the timely and effective implementation of measures to ensure the mining operation safety of workers and the public, protecting the natural environment, buildings and structures from the harmful effects of these works and subject to the other requirements relating to the activity of surveying services.

 

7.1.4. Workers and geological surveying services are required, using the project design document, to identify the presence of the listing on the highway tunnel under construction hazardous areas, at a meeting which may occur in an emergency situation as a newly built tunnel and in the zone itself. These include the areas of operating, under construction or abandoned underground structures, areas with unstable soils, tectonic disturbances, as well as a particularly difficult and dangerous in the engineering-geological conditions regarding production work. List of dangerous zones approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

 

 

7.2. Safe conduct surveying work

7.2.1. Before starting work, the performer must carefully inspect the work area, to ensure the safety of their production and, if necessary, take appropriate action.

Geodesic-surveying work must be performed brigade, consisting of at least two people, one of whom is appointed senior and responsible for compliance with the requirements of the brigade safety instructions. When tunneling shield diameter less than 3.6 m-geodesic surveying work shall be made at the stopped hauling.

 

7.2.2. All alignments and basic geodetic surveying work-faces near mining should be done only with the permission of the mountain master who is obliged to provide a safe environment for these works (frill bottom, the technical condition of scaffolding, ladders, sliding platforms, fences, lighting, ventilation, electrical) .

 

7.2.3. Working with laser devices in underground mines is permitted only if the following requirements:

a) shall apply stakeout lasers 1st Class danger;

b) levels of dangerous and harmful factors in the workplace should not exceed the limits established by the applicable “Sanitary norms and rules of the device and laser operation” and guests;

c) in the area of ​​the laser radiation may be the sign of laser hazards and work with optical devices visual guidance prohibited.

 

7.2.4. Found during the development of geological penetration violations and place large windfalls occurred rock removal fluid masses (for moist sand, quicksand, pulp, etc.) and breakthroughs groundwater should be applied to surveying mining plans with the date.

Chief and district surveyors are required to make a written warning to the chief engineer and the chief portion of the approach of the danger zone at least 20 m before.

From the moment when the distance to the danger zone is 7 m, measuring and reporting on the size of the pillar district surveyor should do after each stope.

 

7.2.5. In areas of geological faults in unstable porodgah near underground facilities and communications, as well as during mining using special methods should be further organized systematic observation of the surface displacement, buildings and structures located in the zone of influence of mining, with reflection results surveying measurements in the books of account of observations and recommendations on the issue of compensation for such deformations.

 

7.2.6. It is forbidden to lay on the surface points of geodetic surveying networks used as reference frames specialized lines of observation stations within the danger zones and in areas where resistance is not provided signs and frames for the period of observation, including in the areas of traffic, places loading and unloading, storage of materials, designs, etc.

 

7.2.7. Stationing in the ground near the cables, pipelines and other underground utilities should be done in the presence of representatives of the organization – owner communications. When work is necessary to use only hand tools.

 

7.2.8. Prior to the measurements of sediment deformation frames installed in the walls of buildings, should be taken to protect workers against falling accumulations of snow, ice and other items from the roofs and walls.

 

7.2.9. Works with the plumb line in the mine shafts should be made after the cessation of all other activities in these two trunks teams created to perform work on the upper and lower horizons, with the senior team leader must be an upper horizon. Teams must be maintained between a reliable connection.

 

7.2.10. At the time of geodetic-surveying works in crosscuts and furnelyah all other work in these mines should be discontinued.

 

7.2.11. When straightening and remaking the way spreading and puterihtovochnymi jacks allowed to work with the devices at a distance of not less than 10 meters from the work site.

 

 

8. UNDERGROUND TRANSPORT AND RECOVERY

 

8.1. UNDERGROUND TRANSPORT ON vertical excavation

8.1.1. When shaft excavation deeper than 40 m climb and descent people should be mechanized. All vertical trunks must be equipped with stair offices regardless of the mechanical lifting. In driving, uglubke vertical workings and brace climb and descent people must be made in tubs. After penetration of the trunk and 25 m near barrel workings needed to organize Stacker lining, mucker and mine trolley, people should only go up and down in the stands, equipped with parachutes.

For sinking a vertical shaft to a depth of 40 m may be used as a means of lifting cranes winches having working and safety brakes independent of each other on a special operating the power production project activities approved by the chief engineer of the construction company. Capacity in the tub should not exceed 1 m3 . Climb and descent people in the tub while prohibited.

For lowering and lifting for material separation furneli lining elements, structures, equipment and trolleys individual is allowed to use a hoist lifting mechanisms suspension made under the project.

Application cargo lifting hoist with suspension for lowering and lifting people furneli prohibited.

During the construction of utility tunnels excavation vertical and horizontal workings can be performed using as a cargo lift car, tower, jib, gantry cranes and hoist racks in accordance with the Rules for design and safe operation of cranes. Type lifting mechanism and arrangements for the safe movement of goods and determined PIC and PPR. In some cases, minor amounts of work and depth of over 40 m trunk movement of people allowed on the trunk compartment of steps in accordance with PPR, consistent with regional bodies Gosgortechnadzor Russia.

 

8.1.2. At each lift installation must be available:

a) technical certificates: hoisting machine, gear, outboard and trailer coupling, lifting vessels, parachutes, hoisting pulley, lift motor;

b) the scheme:

- Parachute devices with controlled dimensions;

- Detailed braking device with principal dimensions;

- Executive power (the principal, assembly);

c) instructions: hoist operator, banksman and brainstem (in the workplace);

d) reports on the results of the annual and semiannual audits and commissioning, as well as acts of inspection and testing of the elevator installation, elevator installation surveyor checks in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation, the test parachutes acts, acts of certifications (factory) and type approval ropes;

d) laced in the book: “The Book of records of an inspection trunk”, “Book of the inspection of the elevator installation,” “book examinations hoisting ropes and their consumption”, “The Book of reception and delivery shifts machinists hoist” (Annex 12, 13, 14, 15) .

 

8.1.3. By managing the lifting machine allowed a person older than 18 years that have passed a medical examination, special training, passed examinations and having trained for at least two months to manage the lifting machine under the supervision of an experienced driver and appointed to the position by the order of the driver head. Machinist receiving replaced before work is required to check whether your installation. After that make launching and recovery workers permitted after prior haul stands idle.

 

8.1.4. The facility should be appointed by order of the organization stem, banksman and those responsible for:

- Organization of descent, lifting people and goods;

- The condition and inspection shafts, ropes, hoisting machines, trailer, safety and other devices of the elevator installation.

 

8.1.5. Each organization must be developed and approved by its chief engineer manual descent and rise of long and oversized cargo, specifying the sequence of technological operations of accessory equipment and facilities.

 

8.1.6. Shaft sinking equipment badevogo lift for lowering and lifting people and goods should be carried out in accordance with the method statement and subject to the following conditions:

a) lifting plant must be a constant or excavating copra;

b) buckets for lowering and lifting people must be deaf height of at least 1 m Apply for lowering and lifting people Overturning tubs permitted only at presence of the lock, providing rise above the bottom of the tub is not receiving area. Apply the tub with opening bottom prohibited;

c) in sinking shafts prohibited to use for lifting badevogo uncoiling ropes;

g) tubs should move on rails or in special compartments of the barrel, covered with boards. Movement tubs without guide allowed a maximum distance of 20 m from the face. When used on a sinking vertical tunnel excavation units (mechanical shovels, grabs, etc.) distance may be increased to 40 m;

d) prohibits the launching and recovery of people in tubs without a guiding framework and not equipped with umbrellas to protect workers from accidental injury by falling objects. In some cases, when performing emergency repairs and in the trunk allowed climb and descent people in tubs without a guiding framework. In this case: speed on the trunk of the tub should not exceed 0.3 m / s; guide frame shall be secured at the discharge site and unloading Lyady closed;

e) during the descent and ascent of the people in tubs for one person must be at least 0.25 m base area;

g) planting people in the tub and out of them should be made on site with lower receiving special ladders or stairs tubs only closed Lyady tub and stopped;

h) landing people in the tub and out of them at intermediate depths and chambers should be made with folding platforms, and on the shelves only when the board stopped the tub is at the socket or sex in the presence of floor doors in the socket;

i) Do not climb or descend standing or sitting on the edge of the tub, as well as to make the descent and ascent people laden tub;

k) for lowering and lifting of goods and people in tubs sinking lifting equipment in the case of mechanized loading breed must be equipped with a locking device, excluding the passage of the tub through the funnel in the bottom shelf when a socket is loading device. Terms such equipment upgrades of existing locks to be installed in agreement with the Gosgortechnadzor.

 

8.1.7. Speed ​​when ascending and descending in tubs on rails shall not exceed 6 m / s, and in the case of lifting and lowering people in tubs – 1/3 standards for cages. On a plot of absence guides greatest speed buckets should not exceed 2 m / s for cargo and 1 m / s – for people.

 

8.1.8. When excavating dvuhbadevom lifting the gap between the average guide ropes shall be not less than 300 mm.

At a depth of over 400 meters trunk obligatory installation of fenders ropes or other devices that prevent the possibility of a collision tubs. These devices are not required if the gap between the average guide ropes not less than

 

mm

where H – depth of the barrel, m

 

The gap between the moving tubs and extensions of pipelines, communication and trunk lining should not be less than 400 mm. The gap between the walls of the funnel tunnel Regiment and the protruding portions of the moving guide frame or tub must be at least 100 mm, including a zero and unloading sites.

 

8.1.9. In operation, the human cargo badevogo rise at shaft excavation:

a) the use of towed devices and hoisting rope for other purposes (for assembly and disassembly of segmental lining, piles and piles of extraction, etc.) is prohibited;

b) towed devices must be tested and have a passport, marked with the serial number and date of sample. Pull the device at least once every two years must be replaced by new;

c) ropes, tow hooks and signaling must satisfy the requirements of the human mine hoist;

d) suspension devices shall be fitted securely closing hook mouth and avoid spontaneous uncoupling in accordance with these Rules;

d) shackle buckets to be replaced or repaired when worn her eyes or replacement bushings in the eye more than 5% of the diameter axis. Total wear eye or bow and removable sleeve axis connecting it with the tub should not exceed 10% of the diameter axis.

 

8.1.10. Lift in a tub on the surface of the patient is allowed only with accompanying. The patient and the accompanying need to be tied to the lifting cable.

 

8.1.11. Handling of materials and tools in a bucket hanging from a rope, as well as suspension of equipment or materials to the rope with open Lyady prohibited. Launching and recovery of materials without tubs permitted only on a special hitch safe design.

 

8.1.12. Protruding over the edge of the tub materials and tools at their descent and ascent of the trunk should be tied to the lifting cable. It is forbidden to climb and descent over the cargo tub.

 

8.1.13. Tub should undercharge 100 mm to top edge bead. Never use the tub without devices to maintain the bow in the lowered position (cam). Jaw height must be at least 40 mm.

Tub before issuing should be raised from the bottom barrel to a height of not more than 1 m, soothed by rocking, and her bottom cleared of adhering pieces of rock.

When issuing breed tubs trunk must be opened only in the part needed to pass buckets, while Lyady only be opened for the passage of the tub. Ladi design should exclude falling rocks in the trunk or other items at unloading buckets.

Finding people under badevym department during the descent and ascent of tubs is prohibited.

 

8.1.14. When going up and down the trunk without cargo vessel (buckets, crates, etc.) with the slinging them directly to the rope at the bottom of all working people trunk should be withdrawn to a safe place designated PPR.

 

8.1.15. Construction of the tunnel shelf should match the project developed specialized design organization.

 

8.1.16. Heading shelves should be a strong overlap for the protection of workers from falling objects, sockets have a minimum height of 1600 mm to skip tubs.

 

8.1.17. In the case of a suspended shelf he should be suspended at least four points in such a way as to prevent it from rolling over on loss of one of one of the ropes or turnbuckle.

 

8.1.18. When you move the shelf mounting or dismounting the pipeline suspended equipment work in the mine should be stopped and the workers from the bottom to bring to the surface.

 

8.1.19. Before lowering or lifting the regiment all objects lying on the edges of tubing must be removed.

 

8.1.20. Work on the movement of the regiment must be performed under the supervision of experienced workers face technical supervision in accordance with PPR.

This should be ensured by technical or organizational measures movement shelf without distortions caused by non-simultaneous (OFF) winches, ropes unequal velocities, etc.

 

8.1.21. After moving the shelf and work on it at the bottom can be resumed only after the installation of the regiment on the sliding support (at least three), centering and tensioning frame shelf, as well as the application of new labels on the index depth lifting machine.

 

8.1.22. The gap between the developing and bolting regiment after installing it in the operating position must be not more than 120 mm and during shut aprons.

 

8.1.23. To move the tunneling equipment (suspended shelves, pumps, etc.) for shaft sinking winch gear should be used in the construction of which is provided for operating and safety brake with independent operating the power and hrapovichnoe device. Speed ​​of movement of the rope during the descent-rise should not exceed 0.35 m / s. Enabling safety brake must be accompanied by an automatic brake actuation shunting. Factor of each brake deceleration (ratio of momentum created by the brake, to the highest static load torque) must be at least 2. Winches with electric drive must have a lock, automatically applies the brakes when the engine is turned off.

Allowed the use of manual winches end load on the rope to 2m in the constructions which ascent and descent is achieved by rotating the handle. Winches should have brake ratchet locking device and dual gear. Manual winch handle after use should be removed, be deposited with the operator to lift the machine and can only be issued by a person authorized technical supervision.

 

8.1.24. Hanging shelves and cradles with pumps and equipment after each of their movements should be securely attached to the permanent or temporary lining the trunk. Pumping units and starting equipment, in turn, must be securely attached to these shelves and cribs.

Connection with the hoisting rope hanging chains, hooks, shelves, pumps, pipelines, tensioners and other equipment must be designed to prevent any separation.

 

8.1.25. Winches shall be mounted on a foundation or equipped ballast for their stability under load in accordance with the project.

Winch after installation, before starting the work, and periodically every 12 months should be subject to technical examination mechanic area.

 

8.1.26. Static test with the technical examination of winches must be loaded in excess of 2 times their work (design) load, and dynamic – a load exceeding the same capacity by 10%.

 

8.1.27. Shelves, winches and all everything should be inspected every shift on duty and an electrician once a day – or a mechanic area specially designated person. On the results of the inspection of technical condition of the journal should be made within the record. When fault finding lifting and lowering of the regiment is not allowed.

 

8.1.28. On a shelf should be posted diagram download it, given the maximum allowable number of simultaneously being on the shelf people and a list of materials or equipment with their weight and quantity.

 

8.1.29. Stand serving for lowering and lifting people must have solid metal roof or opening roof with opening a manhole, and solid durable flooring. Allowed to have sex safely strengthened by folding or removable parts for inspection Lyady locking devices. Long side (side) stands must sheathe the full height solid metal sheets. Forbidden to have holes in the hull stand against locations conductors. Along the long sides of the cage should be designed handrails.

With the short (end) side stand must be arranged door to prevent the possibility of loss of people from the cage.

Doors should open inside and locked the bolt located on the outside. The upper edge of the door should be above the level of the floor stand is not less than 1200 mm, and the lower – no more than 150 mm. The design should include door locking devices that do not allow the removal of the door in the closed position. In the cage should also be arranged stoppers and closures, which ensure reliable retention of trolleys and other types of rolling stock in motion stands on the trunk. Newly designed cage should have suspended the device for lifting and lowering of large equipment and long materials.

 

8.1.30. The distance from the floor to the outermost part of the roof cage should be at least 1.9 m, excluding the main bar with a spring. Rod spring should be protected with a safety glass. Safety glass equipped with a rubber lining at distances him from the floor stand less than 1.9 m

 

8.1.31. Floor area shall be at least 0.2 m per person in the cage. The number of people that can fit in the cage at the same time, shall be indicated in the declaration, hung out in the pithead and in the pit bottom in the stands. Cages for lowering and lifting people must be provided with safe operating parachutes. All joints should be systematically parachutes lubricated so that they rotate freely. Parachutes should be tested at least once every six months and inspected mechanic area (lift) daily volume requirements Instructions test parachutes mine hoisting installations (Annex 8).

 

8.1.32. As human cargo lifts are allowed to use two-stand ups and odnokletevye equipped with a counterweight. Counterweight rope must be the same with the hoisting rope and counterweight mass equal to the mass of the empty weight plus stand trolley. Counterweight should move in reliable guides and separated from the cage separating partition of rails or cables, if not equipped with a counterweight in case of breakage catchers rope.

 

8.1.33. The gaps between the sliding guide shoes lifting vessel (counterweight) and conductors when they are installed shall be 10 mm on each side (total gap of 10 mm) with a wooden conductors and 5 mm – for metal at the base level *, and depth-barrel total clearances for wood Conductors must be 20 ± 10 mm, for metal – 10 ± 8 mm.

__________________

* The reference mark is the section of conductors from the limit switch on the copra to the top of the receiving area.

 

Shoes should be replaced when worn contact surfaces than 8 mm on a side. Conductors and the total wear slip-on shoes side shall not exceed at wooden conductors – 18 mm, metal – 10 mm.

When worn conductors, which reached 15 mm on the side of the wooden and 8 mm from the metal, while the rope – 15% of the nominal diameter of the rope, but not more than half the height or diameter of the outer wires, frayed wires must be replaced.

 

1.8.34. The gaps between the trolleys and the most prominent elements of the cage should be at least 50 mm.

The gaps between the lifting vessels bolting and shootings in the trunks vertical shafts shall conform to the dimensions given in Table. 2.

Before starting again hinged or repaired lifting vessel clearances must be checked.

 

8.1.35. Maximum deflection angle (deviation) of the hoisting rope string on the guide pulleys and drums human cargo lifting should not exceed 1 ° 30 ‘.

Winches for cargo lifting angles of deviation allowed up to 2 ° 30 ‘.

 

8.1.36. Climb and descent people and cargo crates skips allowed only during the inspection, repair and stem crash. In tilting stands for lowering and lifting people must be tools, precluding the possibility of rollover cage as it moves down the barrel, and devices for preventing lifting stand in unloading curves.

 

 

Table 2.

Type of trunk lining

The type and location of reinforcement

Where the gap is provided

Minimum clearance mm

Note

1

2

3

4

5

1. Wooden Metal – a one-sided arrangement of conductors and wood – a two-way Between the lifting vessels and executions (crepe)

200

In cases of particularly constrained location of lifting vessels in the trunk with wooden armouring may be a gap of at least 150 mm in frontal location conductors
2. Concrete, brick, metal Metal – with one-and two-sided arrangement of conductors

150

3. Concrete, brick, metal Wood – a two-way arrangement of conductors

Same

200

4. Wood, concrete, brick, metal Between the lifting vessels shooting missing Between two moving lift vessels

200

When rigid conductors
5. Wood, concrete.brick, metal Metal and wooden executions without carrying conductors Between the lifting vessels and executions

150

At extremely cramped location lifting vessels in the trunk, this gap may be reduced to 100 mm
6. Wood, concrete, brick, metal Unilateral and bilateral arrangement of conductors Between executions and parts of lifting vessels distant from the axis of conductors up to 750 mm

40

In the presence of the lifting vessel discharge rollers protruding gap between the roller and the executions should be increased by 25 mm
7. Wood, concrete, brick, metal Wood, located at the ends of the lifting vessel Between shooting carrying conductor, and cage

50

8. Concrete, brick, tubbing Rope Guides Between shooting and cage

250

9. Same Same Between moving vessels

+ 250 (H 2), but not less than 300

H – depth of the mine, m
10. Wood, concrete, brick, tubbing Unilateral, bilateral frontal and the conductors Between the speakers and the most remote parts of the center of the vessel and shot adjusted for depreciation conductors and legs and a possible rotation of the vessel

25

Designed for mines
11. Wood, concrete, brick, tubbing Steel reinforcement Between the outer edge of the shoe, lifting the container and the clamping device for fixing the metallic conductors executions relation to the maximum permissible wear of conductors and paws

20

Designed for mines

 

 

8.1.37. It is forbidden to climb and descent people in the same cage at the same time with the load, as well as an explosives having explosives with him.

 

8.1.38. In trunks equipped with two or more lifting installations for the launching and recovery of people and cargo, cargo lifts in work hours tripping change prohibited.

 

1.8.39. Timber slide on the surface should be protected by a barrier height of 1 m and have Lyady, and pit bottoms have an opening, providing a free supply of long materials. Opening when not in use, should be closed with locked gates. The mouth of the vertical and inclined workings must be constantly protected from the trailing side to a height of not less than 2.5 m, and with the workers of the parties to have the doors or guards for.

During the construction of utility tunnels and shafts mouth inclined workings must be fenced to a height of 1.2 m with the unit door at the entrance to the ladder compartment. Around the perimeter fence to a height of not less than 0.15 m must be made solid flange, preventing accidental dropping objects in the trunk. In the near barrel opening doors and crosscuts that supplies of long materials, at a time when it is not used, it should be closed with locked gates up to 2 m

 

1.8.40. When fault finding lifting equipment lifting and lowering must be stopped immediately until completely correct identified problems. The results of the inspection, faults found and corrective measures must be included in the construction mechanic laced book inspection of the elevator installation.

 

1.8.41. The building lifting machine must be working except electric lighting and emergency also powered from an independent source of electricity. It is not allowed to use for emergency lighting fixtures of all types of individual (battery, etc.).

 

1.8.42. Repair and inspection barrel permitted to stand on the roof of the cage or skip unloaded. But people have to be attached to the rope or hitch safety belts and protected from falling objects accidentally umbrellas. It is forbidden to attach harness to brace, the lining, and communications structures of the trunk. Safety belts every 6 months should be tested on a static load of 4000 N for 5 min. When viewed from the trunk speed lifting vessel must not exceed 0.3 m / s.

 

1.8.43. Checking the status of headgears Commission should be done under the supervision of the chief engineer of the organization with registration act, metal and concrete – once a year, and a wooden tunnel – twice a year.

 

8.1.44. During work on the receiving kletevogo lift (landing) site should be banksman, and pit bottoms – stem.

 

8.1.45. In the pit bottoms necessarily bypass device Walker. Prohibited the passage of people and transport routes through lifting the trunk compartment, as well as clutter the bypass walker.

During the construction of utility tunnels allowed the device of men’s Walker in the mine shaft section provided that a continuous solid otshivki separation between the lifting of the trunk and salable. Walker should have a strong protective overlay, providing safe passage of people. Allowed passage of transport and exchange of rolling stock within the section of the trunk, if it is not equipped with a lift cage.

 

1.8.46. On receiving sites at zero horizon and pit bottom must be installed to prevent guards for the passage of people through the lifting department, semi-detached with alarm lift in order to prevent the departure stand without opening the lattice fence. When you have an open lattice hoist operator should light signal “STOP” and the working alarm off. Over workplace safety should be a stem visor. Allowed to use on the top floor reception guillotine door in the presence of additional barriers preventing people’s access to the trunk to a complete stop and stand in the period of its origin. Requirements signal “STOP” at the driver and blocking signaling with the lattice in this case does not apply.

 

1.8.47. On all seating areas and in the engine room shall be posted warning signs and safety announcements stating:

a) The name of the person responsible for launching and recovery of people and banksman (stem);

b) applied signal;

c) Schedule of ascent and descent shifts;

g) the number of people simultaneously placed in the cage;

d) the allowable load stands.

Everyone understood the signal must be perceived machinist lifting, banksman and stem as a signal “STOP”. After this renewal is permitted only after the rise of personal clarification machinist banksman stem or by phone or negotiating pipe causes an ambiguous message and snooze.

 

1.8.48. Each lifting unit must be equipped with an alarm system working for supplying the signal from the brainstem to the banksman and banksman from the train operator, as well as repair alarm used in the inspection and repair of the barrel. Repair the alarm system shall be capable of supplying a signal from any point of the trunk.

On human and cargo hoists other than human labor and repair system must also provide for and backup alarm powered by a separate cable, which is the functional capabilities should not differ from the working alarm.

Lifting plant used in shaft sinking, must have at least two independent alarms, one of which should serve as the working alarm, and the second – backup and repair. Device in the operating system shall be capable of signaling from the bottom and with false Regiment – banksman and from banksman – machinist, and repair and backup – in every barrel banksman.

Between winding machine machinist and banksman and between banksman and stem should be telephone and intercoms.

 

8.1.49. If there are several working levels each horizon should be equipped with self-reception area served by the stem. In this case, the alarm system shall be provided, which excludes the possibility of simultaneous signaling stem from different horizons, as well as a device that shows the horizon from which signal is applied.

 

1.8.50. When using the reception areas at intermediate horizons, including the site at the zero horizon, the requirements:

a) lifting unit must be equipped with a lock comprising signal “STOP” in the driver seat when summarizing his fists on the intermediate horizon;

b) the fender should be closed, folding his fists – and open in this position (except when the cage is on fists intermediate horizon) must be closed on the lock, and the key must be a responsible person designated by order of the organization;

c) the light signals from the intermediate horizon in their colors on the remote should differ significantly from the brainstem signals;

d) at intermediate horizons should be used as a seating arrangement rocking platform.

 

1.8.51. Perepodema height for lifting equipment in the presence of protection installed:

a) for human cargo kletevyh lifting equipment when lifting speeds of up to
3 m / s – not less than 4 m;

b) for the lifting units for lifting speeds over 3 m / sec – not less than 6 m;

c) for cargo lifting equipment when lifting cages, skips and platforms – not less than 2.5 m;

g) for lifting badevogo at:

descent and ascent of the people – not less than 4 m,

shipping – not less than 2.5 m;

d) in the construction of shallow tunnels closed method height perepodema kletevoy freight elevator installation at speeds up to 1m / s – not less than 1.5 m at a speed of 2 m / s – not less than 2.5 m

e) when used as a freight elevator installation jib cranes lifting height is set according to the design of works, approved by the Chief Engineer.

 

1.8.52. Perepodema height should be considered:

a) neoprokidnyh stands – height that can rise freely crate from its normal position when unloading on the top floor reception to contact the top rope to the rim zhimka idler or parts stand with elements of copra;

b) for tilting stands with people going up and down – the height to which the cage can rise from its normal position when landing people before the swing stand, if there is no discharge unloading rails at lifting people. In the presence of drainage discharge guide perepodema height should be considered from the top position when planting people in subparagraph “a”;

c) for freight lifts in tilting skips and cages – the height to which can rise freely skip or cage tilting from the normal position during unloading until it touches the top rope to the rim zhimka idler tilting of the skip or cage, or parts thereof with elements of copra;

g) for badevogo lifting up or down with the people – the height to which the tub is free to rise from zero to pad contact zhimka top rope or the top edge of the rim of the frame rail guide pulley or with protruding metal parts podshkivnoy site.

 

 

 

8.2. LIFTING MACHINES AND WINCHES

 

8.2.1. Human and human cargo lifting machines and winches shall be electrically operated, equipped with dynamic braking. Dynamic braking in case of violation of its scheme, is to work on the safety brake and have retroactive electrodynamic connection.

Each hoisting machine shall be equipped with a working safety and mechanical brakes with independent from each other inclusion drive. These types of inhibition may be with one or two brake actuators. On the newly designed hoists shall be provided with two machine independent brake actuators.

Brakes should be located so that the driver can freely manage, without leaving the workplace.

 

8.2.2. Drums winders must have flanges on both sides of a height of not less than 1.5 times the diameter of the rope. When more than one layer coiling rope flange should extend through the top layer of rope diameter of 2.5, and for the portion of the rope (critical) length of a quarter of the last round of the bottom row (move to the top row) should be conducted enhanced surveillance (broken records in this place wires ) and made the movement of the rope through a quarter turn every two months.

 

8.2.3. In mine hoist safety brake must provide when it is turned to a complete stop deceleration of the vessel not less than 1.5 m / s during the descent and the estimated load of not more than 5 m / s - when lifting rated load.

 

8.2.4. Duration idling safety brake must not exceed 0.5, and cargo sinking winches – 1.5 sec. Response time of the safety brake (including idle time) should not exceed 0.8 seconds. Safety at work and working brakes are not allowed fluctuations in the linkage system brakes.

 

8.2.5. Enabling safety brake must be accompanied by automatic shut-off power supplied to the motor winding machine. Safety brake shall be operable from the limit switch and the emergency button lift driver.

 

8.2.6. In addition to the case of brake adjustment of the brake drums or repair the device in each lifting machine must be provided by a special locking device.

 

8.2.7. Hoisting machine shall be provided the device showing the position of the cage in the shaft (depth gauge), and automatic call, signaling the engineer about the need to start slow motion.

Scale indicators should be done on a scale of not less than 1 cm to 1 m depth.

Lifting machinery must have monitoring instruments (ammeter, voltmeter gauges) showing the relevant parameters of the engine power supply and the pressure in the brake system, as well as recording speedometers (for machines with speeds in excess of 3 m / s).

 

8.2.8. Each lifting unit must be equipped with the following safety devices operating correctly:

a) for each lifting vessel (counterweight) – limit switch mounted on copra and designed to enable the safety brake when lifting vessel (counterweight) at 0.5 m above the top of the receiving area (level normal position for unloading skip), and backup end switch on the index depth lifting machine;

b) the device automatically shuts down the installation in case of exceeding the normal rate of 15%;

c) a safety device (speed limiter or regulator stroke) are not allowed to approach lifting vessel normal upper position with a speed higher than 1 m / s. This requirement is mandatory for kletevyh lifting equipment with a maximum speed of more than 3 m / s;

d) the maximum and zero protection (electric winders) acting overload machines and there is no voltage;

d) sewn from hovering lifting vessels in unloading curves;

e) a device which transmits a signal stem or head machinist at yanked brake cables in their attachment to the sump;

g) lock from excessive brake wear (to equip a lock installed in coordination with the State Technical Supervision). This requirement does not apply to trucks and sinking winches;

h) lock, allowing the engine to enable the vessel only after perepodema towards eliminating perepodema;

and) lock which does not allow removal of the safety brake, service brake when the handle is not in the “inhibited” and handle the administration (controller) – in the zero position;

a) lock, stop providing the tub with its approach to the closed lyade, as well as at the approach of a 5 m to the working shelf or to the bottom of the barrel;

l) arc reverse interlock between contactors and dynamic braking;

m) protected string slack rope;

n) lock swinging platforms, landing fists and enclosing grids consisting of “Stop” from the driver when superimposed swinging platforms, summing fists and open grate, except lattices guillotine;

o) redundant overspeed if the primary limiter does not have full self (for human and human cargo lifts). Terms such equipment speed limiters installed in coordination with the State Technical Supervision.

 

8.2.9. Conductors before the pulleys should be close together and strengthened to wedge them stand on the length defined by the project.

 

8.2.10. Velocity of the stands when raising and lowering of people and goods along the vertical workings determined by the project, but must not exceed:

2.5 m / s with a lifting height up to 40 m

4 m / s with a lifting height of 100 m

6 m / s for a lifting height of more than 100 m

Value of the average deceleration of the elevator installation as in the safety and working with (in case of emergency) braking must not exceed at tilt angles of 50 ° and more than 5m / s , as well as being at the safety braking of at least 0.75 m / s at angles of inclination of the workings 30 ° and not less than 1.5 m / s at tilt angles more openings 30 °.

 

8.2.11. As winches are allowed to use gear winch with two brakes if the requirements of this Regulation.

 

 

8.2.12. Lifting vessels, tow hooks, parachutes, guide shoes, boarding, loading and unloading devices, guides and deflection pulleys, bearings and their linings, brake system and other elements of the lifting machinery, equipment protection and alarm systems and controls must be inspected and verified:

- Every shift – machinist lifting, banksman, stem and duty when receiving an electrical shift;

- Daily – mechanic plot or a person designated responsible for the condition and inspection of the elevator installation. These same people made daily inspection of the trunk and reinforcement of the hoisting ropes;

- At least once in 15 days – with the participation of the chief mechanic of the organization. While further checks of the safety brake and safety devices.

All kinds of inspections should be carried out according to the schedule developed by the chief mechanic and chief engineer of the approved organization. The results of inspections recorded in the relevant books of the elevator installation.

Upon detection of faults and deviations from the established norms of the elements of the elevator installation, conductors and reinforcement trunk ascent and descent should be stopped immediately until the problem is detected violations.

Instrumental validation provisions copra elevator installation, guide pulleys, gaps between the lifting vessels and bolting stem, conductors and other elements of the project and for compliance with the requirements of this Regulation should be made surveyor area at least twice a year. When the scan is drawn.

 

8.2.13. Before commissioning and thereafter once a year specialized commissioning team with representatives from electromechanical service organization should perform the audit and adjustment of the elevator installation in the amounts stipulated by the “Guidelines for auditing, commissioning and testing of mine hoist installations.” This requirement does not apply to cargo winches designed for lowering or lifting equipment and materials.

Electric parts and equipment automated lift systems are subject to audit and adjustment after 6 months.

In auditing the brake and shaft newly commissioned winders necessary to make their inspection. In the future, testing shall be carried out regularly, at least once every three years.

Simultaneously with the production of the audit and adjustment, except surveyor checks hoisting pulley and copra, staff organization has been entirely Surveying verification of hoisting machines and conductors wear what is drawn.

After revision and adjustment of the elevator installation chief mechanic organizations with Alignment team produces its control tests.

Six months after the audit and adjustment of elevator installation shall be subjected to technical inspection and testing involving Commission chief mechanic organization. On inspection and test shall be drawn.

 

8.2.14. After replacing the brake system (pads, rods, cylinders, etc.) necessary to make it a test. Test results should be decorated act.

 

8.2.15. All newly created safety and protective equipment (brakes, canopy, suspension devices) and equipment (limit switches, speed limiters, pressure regulators, etc.), as well as ways to manage the lifting units must be consistent with the specialized institutions.

 

8.2.16. In the trunk, where there are several lift systems, remote control of each of them should be a button simultaneously disable all winders (date equipment lifting equipment such devices are coordinated with Gostgortechnadzor).

 

8.2.17. On winches serving for lowering and lifting people in the stands and trolleys on inclined developments, apply all the requirements to lift cars.

8.3. ROPES, tow hitch and pulleys

8.3.1. For mine hoisting plant shall be applied steel cables that meet the quality, design and stranding GOST or TU agreed specialized institutions. Lifting and towing ropes for human cargo lifting equipment must be in the brand, for other lifting equipment grade not less than I.

 

8.3.2. Ropes for lifting equipment of all systems should be chosen when hitching the following safety margin:

a) 9-fold – for lifting equipment intended solely for lowering and lifting people;

b) 7.5-fold – for cargo and human kletevyh badevyh lifting equipment, mechanical loaders (grabs) in the trunk, tunnel cradles;

c) 6.5-fold – for lifting plants intended only for lowering and lifting;

g) 5-fold – to balance rope and cable conductors tunnel upgrades;

d) 6-fold – to rescue ladders, rope suspension regiments, pumps, pipelines, tunneling machines.

The margin of safety rope is defined as the ratio of total breaking force of the rope all the wires to the static load on the rope.

Static load hoisting rope consists of mass lifting vessel with towbar, maximum load weight and weight of the rope from the vanishing point from the pulley to the point of attachment to the lifting receptacle at the lower end lift.

 

8.3.3. As the cable conductors must be used ropes closed and semi-closed design or untwisted kruglopryadnye monolayer regular-lay rope with a diameter of the outer wires of at least 2 mm. Recommend the use of galvanized ropes.

Tension cable conductors should be installed depending on the PPR capacity lifting vessel.

 

8.3.4. All human hoisting ropes, cargo and freight of human lifting equipment, as well as suspension ropes regiments rescue ladders and cradles tunnel should be tested for linkage to the cable-testing station registered Gosgortekhnadzor. All other ropes used in the cores, as well as ropes and all other installations before linkage mechanisms can not be tested. Reserve tested rope in front linkage can not experience a second, if its retention period does not exceed six months from the date of the test.

To test his end of the rope is cut of at least 1.5 m To retest the rope cut a piece of the same length over the last zhimkom zapantsirovki.

 

8.3.5. Hoisting ropes human and human cargo lifting equipment must be re-tested every six months from the date of their sample. Retesting hoisting ropes exclusively cargo lifting equipment is permitted to produce 12 months from the date of their sample, and then every six months.

 

8.3.6. Directed to the test in the cable-rope sample test station must be equipped with copy of factory act certificate, plaque (label) attached to it, and the statement by the organization containing the necessary tests for the ABOUT rope and lift installation.

Each wire rope sample that is tested before and re-linkage, must be tested on a break and bend in accordance with GOST. Based on the test results processing cable-testing station provides organization certificate in the prescribed form with the conclusion about the suitability of the rope to the further operation.

Certificate of primary and repeated tests of the rope must be kept in the organization for the lifetime of the rope.

 

8.3.7. It is forbidden to hang or use steel ropes with torn strands in a side, with a reduced diameter while working more than 10%, with nodes, “bugs” and other injuries.

 

8.3.8. All ropes lifting vessels and balances should be inspected daily for the entire length at a speed of not more than 0.3 m / s. Weekly to make an additional inspection of the rope in which determined the maximum number of broken wires rope stranding step. Damaged parts of the rope and land on which the number of broken wires on the step length of lay of less than 2% of their total number in the rope must be inspected at a fixed rope.

Do not operate the ropes for suspension lifting vessels and balances, as well as suspension and mechanical loaders regiments (grabs) when the number of breaks on the step length of lay of 5% or more of the total number of wires.

Ropes to move and suspension equipment (pumps, pipes, cables, etc.), brake and conductor ropes must be replaced if the number of breaks in step-lay up to 10% of their total number in the rope.

 

8.3.9. Hoisting ropes should be lubricated at least once a week. Before lubricating the rope should be cleaned of dirt and old grease.

 

8.3.10. The results of the inspection of the hoisting ropes shall be on the same day entered into laced “Book for recording inspection results of the hoisting ropes.”

This book should be written every case of damage ropes.

 

8.3.11. Deadline service ropes lift systems that do not suffer during the operation tests shall not exceed:

- Brake parachute ropes and depreciation – 4 years;

- The cable conductors, fenders ropes and ropes for suspension tunneling equipment – 2 years.

Lifetime these ropes can be extended by decision of the special commission of up to 5 years on the results of the inspection and control of instrumental metal loss section along the entire length of the rope every 6 months. Deadline service ropes mechanical movers (grabs) should be 2 months and will not be extended.

 

8.3.12. Rope shall be rejected if the test before linkage total sectional area of ​​the wire, do not stand the test of tensile and bend is for ropes that are used to lift and lower people (Grade B) – 6% for ropes (grade I) – 10%.

The rope must be removed and replaced with another, if the retest:

a) reserve its strength is below 7.5-fold for human lifts, 6-fold for human cargo lifts and cradles tunnel, 5-fold for cargo lifts, aerial ladders and rescue regiments;

b) the total area of ​​the wires have not sustained tensile test and bend, reaches 25% of the total cross-sectional area of ​​the wire rope.

 

8.3.13. Stand for human and human cargo lifts must be double-independent suspension – working and safety. Counterweights odnokletevyh safety upgrades suspension may not be fitted. The margin of safety (in relation to the calculated static load) must not be less than:

a) 13 times – for outboard and trailer units and human-human cargo lifting equipment, as well as for the tow hitch and tubs tunnel arches;

b) 10-fold – to tow hitch cargo lifts, hanging shelves and hanging tunneling equipment in the trunks;

c) 6-fold – for semiconductor and demolition ropes.

 

8.3.14. Deadline operation and trailed suspension devices of all types and skip hoists kletevyh installations shall not exceed 5 years. The newly made chains and hangers shall be subjected to factory testing. Test results should be recorded in the passport factory supplied with your product. Carried and towed devices must be marked with the serial number and date of manufacture.

Prohibited from making chains used as a precautionary suspension, forge welding and manual electric welding.

 

8.3.15. Ratio of the smallest diameter to the diameter of the body coiling rope shall not be less than:

a) 60 – to guide pulleys and drums human and cargo-lifting equipment and human badevyh tunnel;

b) 30 – to guide pulleys and drums cargo lifting equipment and winches with a lifting height of over 60 m;

c) 20 – in other cases.

 

8.3.16. On vertical and inclined (over 60 °) human cargo and human climbs winding ropes on drums machines should be single and allowed:

a) two-layer – for freight lifts for vertical installation workings lifting machine or winch on the surface, as well as for human and human cargo lifts at tripping people inclined developments with a slope of 30 to 60 °;

b) a three-layer – when lifting-descent people inclined developments angle up to 30 °; sinking vertical and inclined workings; truck lifts at underground installation lifting machine;

c) a multilayer (three rows a) – for slow sinking cargo winches with lifting speed is not higher than 0.2 m / s.

 

8.3.17. Attaching the rope on the drum should be performed so that when passing a rope through a slit in the cylinder of the drum it is not deformed by sharp edges of the slit. Prohibited the attachment end of the rope to the drum shaft. Fixing all the rope on the drum is made specifically to devices provided on the drum, allowing the rope to fix at least three points.

To release the tension of the rope at the point of attachment to the drum on the surface of the latter must be at least three turns of friction drums. Also turns friction must be replacement coils for periodic testing of the rope. Spare coils may be disposed on the drum surface as well as inside it.

 

8.3.18. Sinking winches designed for suspension regiments shields shells, formwork, pipelines, guide ropes shall be provided with protective equipment from retensioning terms agreed with Gosgortechnadzor.

 

8.3.19. In the case of the guide pulleys with lining segments it must be attached so that at the edges of the trough lining had no connecting piece that at infringement of attachment may fall into the chute under the rope.

Bolts that secure the lining should be inspected weekly. Unfit bolts must be replaced.

Flange of the guide pulleys must act over the top rope not less than 1.5 times the diameter of the rope.

 

 

 

8.4. TRANSPORT IN inclined workings

8.4.1. Prohibited the movement of people on the transport department inclined workings.

 

8.4.2. On top, bottom and intermediate reception venues inclined workings at end haulage ropes must be set stops and safety barriers, managed with reception areas.

Stops and barriers to receiving sites in the normal position should be closed and opened only for passing vehicles. At the reception areas at the endless rope haulage shall be provided to prevent falls of rope on the ground when coming off it with supporting rollers or asterisks.

Types of stoppers, design safety barriers and their locations should be provided by the project.

 

8.4.3. When hauling on inclined developments longer than 10 m shall be provided safety devices that prevent pilling down on loss of rope or tow.

8.4.4. An inclined path setting derailed trolleys, platforms and other items of rolling stock is allowed only after taking action against them rolling.

 

8.4.5. Trolleys, platform, or other units of rolling stock left on an inclined path for the production of works, shall be secured and inventory devices hooked to the traction rope.

 

8.4.6. It is forbidden to lower or lift loads on inclined developments winches equipped with a brake or friction clutch cam.

 

8.4.7. When lifting loads in skips the sloping tunnel subject to the following conditions:

a) skips shall be equipped with safety devices to delay (trapping) them at break of war;

b) Tyrants under rail tracks cross section corresponding to the calculation shall be stowed at a distance from each other of not more than 1 m and securely fastened; avoiding contamination of the space between the Tyrant wakes breed;

c) skips undercharge must not less than 20 cm to the upper edge;

r) at the face to be installed barrier designed to stop the skip and to arrest any falling weight. Location relative to the bottom of the barrier set PPR;

d) lifting unit must be equipped with a winch reducer with two brakes working alarm, limit switches, and zero maximum protection under the provisions of this Regulation.

 

8.4.8. When lifting loads in skips on an inclined generation speed should not exceed 2 m / s.

 

8.4.9. Inclined mine workings must be equipped with their angles of inclination:

from 7 to 15 ° – railing located on mounting feet;

from 15 to 30 ° – with steps ladders and railings;

from 30 to 45 ° – stairs with steps;

more than 45 ° – ladder compartment.

 

8.4.10. On the construction shall be appointed persons responsible for organizing the lifting and lowering of people and goods, as well as for the condition and inspection of ropes in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation. This should be posted in these ads.

 

 

 

8.5. Underground transport along the horizontal workings

8.5.1. In horizontal workings projects must be installed and maintained during construction free passes to people and the gaps between vehicles and bolting (lining), as well as the gaps between the opposing moving vehicles. Free passes should be kept to a height of not less than 1.8 m from the pedestrian deck (soil), the gaps – on the perimeter of the vehicle.

During the construction of utility tunnels inside diameter of 3 m and including the movement of people allowed on the entire width of the output. In the field sketches and pricing cars must be kept free pass for people with a minimum width of 0.7 m and a minimum height of 1.7 m PPR should be developed for the security measures employed in the formulation or by moving it when passing rolling stock .

 

8.5.2. Width of free passes to people and clearances determined by the distance between the outermost edge of the envelope of the rolling stock and bolting (lining) generation or placed in the development of equipment, piping, materials, and in all cases shall not be less than the values ​​given in Table 3.

 

Table 3.

Number p / p Mode of transport

Maximum value, m

Notes

passage

clearance

1

2

3

4

5

1. Rail

0.7

0.2

Tubbing lining, stone, concrete, reinforced concrete;

0.7

0.25

timbering and temporary frame structures lining of other materials;

1.0

-

in excavations near barrel for loading (and unloading) and points in places coupling (uncoupling) trolleys, as well as in places of landing people in passenger cars on the length defined by PPR. Extending from two sides
2. Propelled (nerelsovy) transport

1.2

0.5

 

 

Note. Mezhduputya width (distance between the direct paths) should be such that the gap between the opposing electric locomotives (trolleys) on the outermost edge of the envelope electric (trolley) was not less than 0.2 m flight clearances, including and in Table 3, must also be kept at the rounded.

 

8.5.3. Rolling stock, track, travel device (stops, barriers, turnouts, etc.), network of contacts, alarms, as well as free passes and clearances shall at least once a month to check face technical supervision.

Do not make in mines repairs rolling stock related to air pollution (paint, hot work, etc.).

 

8.5.4. Maximum speed of the rolling stock on the horizontal workings should not exceed:

a) 4 km / h – for manual hauling;

b) 3.6 km / h – with cable haulage with an endless rope;

c) 5.4 km / h – when hauling rope end;

d) 10 km / h – with locomotive haulage;

d) 20 km / h – for nerelsovyh machines;

e) 10 km / h – for machines with nerelsovyh turnout (maneuvering).

Speed ​​of movement of rolling stock in curves way to pit bottom, the arrows and the sites where any work shall not exceed 5 km / h

 

8.5.5. Rolling stock shall meet the requirements of GOST, cargoes and ensure the safety of their handling and transportation.

 

8.5.6. Machinist prohibited while driving standing control the locomotive and go with him, as well as unauthorized transfer control locomotive to another person.

When forced absences driver shall switch off the engine, brake locomotive, remove the handle from the controller and leave the lights glowing.

Prohibited from carrying passengers and freight locomotives that are not designed for this purpose.

 

8.5.7. Production site repairs and other work on the road should be protected typical of the signs to be installed at a distance of not less than 80 m from the production of these works. Prohibited from doing service to fencing signals their places of production and removal of these signals to the full completion of the work and check the status of the path.

 

8.5.8. When the distance to the place of work of more than 2 km to transport people is required. For these purposes must be used with special trolley seats, blind end walls, a metal roof and the side walls to full height trolley. Openings for landing people should have a minimum width of 0.7 m and be provided with enclosing devices. Trolleys should be equipped with devices to signal the engineer of the locomotive. Transport people contact electric roof trolleys must have good contact with the rails through the body and frame.

Allowed, rechargeable electric locomotives hauling to resolve the chief engineer organization agreed with the authorities Gosgortechnadzor, carrying passengers separate train of trolleys with conventional hollow body and removable seats.

Directions accompanying staff on locomotives is permitted only if there is a special design of the locomotive passenger seat or on a specially equipped for this purpose trolley.

 

8.5.9. Prohibited: attached to passenger trains or trolley platform with materials and equipment, transport trains people with explosives, flammable and corrosive substances.

 

8.5.10. Before you start transporting people locomotive engineer must inspect trolleys, paying particular attention to the serviceability and signal coupling devices.

 

8.5.11. In horizontal workings should be stacked two narrow-gauge track with the device through 200-300 m unilateral or cross Congresses.

In the mines, which is over 500 m is permitted laying one way trips with the device through the 200-300 m

Leveling and straightening of track shall be made as necessary, but not less than once a year.

During the construction of utility tunnels with a diameter up to 4.1 m allowed styling With one track, regardless of the extent of the workings without the device trips.

 

8.5.12 Design and content of tracks used in the building should comply with current building regulations. Temporary track should be laid on the leveled ground development and prepared substrate (ballast, solid floor, trough the tunnel lining elements).

When used as the base of the pan elements tunnel lining must be provided therein for fixing the device tracks.

Allowed laying of tracks on the overpass at the construction site of the subway station, subject to the requirements of this Regulation.

During the construction of tunnels inside diameter of 3 m inclusive assumed laying railway tracks without mounting directly on the chute tunnel lining elements provided you use manual or electric haulage with coupling undoubt to 4.5 then the speed of trains up to 4 km / h

 

8.5.13. Do not operate the rail tracks at:

a) expanding way more than 4 mm and 2 mm restriction against normally fixed width of the track;

b) the wear of the rail head along a vertical rail 12 mm for type P-24 and 16 mm – of the type P-33, as well as flanged wheels touch the bolt heads, the presence of longitudinal and transverse cracks in the rails, the rail head pitting, spalling of the rail flange and other defects that can cause the gathering rolling stock of railways;

c) the gaps between the joints of the rail exceeding 5 mm;

g) in the workings with a slope greater than 0.01 without a set (according to CPD) devices do not allow the movement of rolling stock Samokatnaya.

 

8.5.14. The radius of curvature of the curves of the track must be at least seven times the length of the most rigid base rolling at a speed of 1.5 m / s and 10 times the length of the rigid base at a speed of 1.5 m / s and rotation angles greater than 90 °.

Gauge the magnitude of broadening the areas of 8-10 m radius curves should be: with a rigid base 600 mm – 10 mm, and the same 800 mm – 10-15 mm, 1100 mm – 20-25 mm.

The value exceeding the outer rail track on the curves of radius 8 m should be 20 mm at a speed of 1.5 m / s and 35 mm at a speed of 2 m / s, and at portions of the curve of radius 10 m – 15 mm at a speed of 1.5 m / s and 25 mm at a speed of 2 m / s.

 

8.5.15. Mechanical or manual drive turnouts haul routes should be set at the free passage for the people so that the distance from the drive to the edge of the rolling stock is not less than 0.7 m distance from the drive to the lining (lining) shall ensure ease of installation, inspection and repair . In case of insufficient width generation drives turnouts shall be installed in niches.

 

8.5.16. Turnouts are laid in tunnels, apply only prefabricated wits with adjacent type and equipped with manual or mechanical shifter. Translation shooter is allowed stopped up.

Do not operate the turnouts at:

a) downed and curved in longitudinal and transverse direction or loosely adjacent to the frame rails and Shoe switch point;

b) switches disconnected rods;

c) closing the gap with the arrows 4 mm pressed between wisecracking and stock rail;

g) the absence of fixing the position of turnouts using clamps or other devices;

d) open ditches turnouts.

 

5.8.17. To exclude the dimensional changes of track laid in the operation must be installed between the rails and ties between the struts ways:

a) straight-line with a slope of 0.02 – four ties over 2.5 m, one of them with the protective device and one strut on the link;

b) on the curves of a radius of 10 m and a slope of more than 0.02 – four ties over 2.5 m, two of them with the protective device and two spacers. Ties and braces-section must be at least 4 cm .

c) cross-section and is heavy with spacers for mounting rail tracks in lifting mines, their number and the material from which they are made, determined by the project of works approved by the Chief Engineer.

 

5.8.18. When hauling contact electric haulage rails in joints, as well as all elements of turnouts and crossings must be connected, except linings, partitions, whose resistance must be equivalent to the resistance of the copper wires of 50 mm , a length of 520-560 mm. The ends of the webs have to be soldered to the steel and the lugs are welded to the bottom of the rail track on the outer side. All threads of track haulage drifts every 50 m to be securely interconnected by means of an electric conductor whose resistance is equivalent to the resistance of the copper conductor cross-section less than 50 mm .

 

8.5.19. All railway lines, not intended for contact with electric locomotives haul rocks, at points of contact with the conductive rails must be electrically isolated from the last two points separated by a distance equal to or greater than the maximum possible length of the composition.

 

8.5.20. On all trolleys and blokotyubingovozkah not equipped with automatic couplers must be on both sides of the buffer, acting on a minimum length of 150 mm and excluding mutual body blows. The schedule for implementation of the requirements established by agreement with the Gosgortechnadzor.

 

5.8.21. Breaking body trolleys must have a device that prevents unwanted tipping them.

 

5.8.22. Do not operate the rolling stock with bad traction and locking devices, chassis, brakes and curved outward more than 50 mm bulkhead.

 

8.5.23. Do not operate the locomotives, which are absent in the design roof cab, in the workings equipped catenary.

 

8.5.24. The distance between the trolleys for manual hauling should be at least 10 m with a slope on the tracks up to 0,005 and not less than 30 m – on the tracks with a slope of more than 0,005.

Not allowed manual hauling over a distance of 100 m units of rolling stock weighing more than 2 kg or thousand requiring efforts to haul more than 20 kg, and on slopes greater than 0.01.

 

8.5.25. At movement of rolling stock on rail tracks shall be prohibited:

a) push unlinked compositions cavil directly to the locomotive platforms and trolleys with a lengthy materials, as well as platforms, or trolleys, loaded above the upper envelope of the vehicle;

b) produce a manual coupling and uncoupling trolleys, used as couplers cuts rope, wire, and other materials at hand;

c) push convoys and cargo platforms using locomotive stops of boards, bars, etc., and also suitable for braking and holding rolling on inclines improvised.

 

8.5.26. When locomotive haulage to develop a slope of more than 0.01, the trains should be determined by the project of the works. Stopped at this composition bias trolleys should be podtormozhen inventory boots.

 

8.5.27. Long loads to be transported on special “goats” with an elongated rigid coupling with the mandatory presence of the side posts and sustainable loading cargo. In the composition between blokotyubingovozkoy or “goat” and the locomotive must necessarily be “buffer” trolley.

 

5.8.28. When hauling locomotive must be in the head of the convoy. Roll back using the locomotive located in the tail of, permitted only when maneuvering at a distance of not more than 200 m on a slope not exceeding 0,005, as well as in tunneling diameter less than 2.5 m with a speed of up to 4 km / h In this case, should be allocated special bugler with flashing lights and a whistle.

When tunneling inside diameter of 3 m and less permitted haul the entire length of production using the locomotive, which is located in the tail structure. In the production design work should be developed arrangements for the safe movement of goods and people in the tunnel.

 

8.5.29. The maximum possible part of the weight of the locomotive must be calculated according to the weight of trailer, train braking conditions, slope, and the way his condition. Workers should be instructed on the number of loaded or empty rolling stock units, which can be in either direction under specific conditions.

 

5.8.30. Braking distance of at maximum slope (downhill) for the carriage of goods shall not exceed 40 m, and transport people – 20 m

 

5.8.31. Mounting height of contact wire in all underground mines must be at least 1.8 m from the rail head, and every path must have its wire. Elektrovoznaya allowed to haul markets in the portal and in the dump soil suspension of contact wire at a height of 2.2 m, provided the haulage ways intersect carriageways or pedestrian paths.

 

5.8.32. Contact the network should be partitioned disconnectors, the distance between them should not exceed 250 m Sectional disconnectors must also be installed on all branches of the contact wire. Copper contact wire cross section must be at least 65 mm .

It is forbidden to hang or continue to use the contact wire wear which exceeded 30% for wire cross section of 100 mm and more than 20% – for the conductors 65 and 85 mm 2 . forbidden to hang up or continue to use the contact wire wear which exceeded 30% for wire cross section of 100 mm

 

8.5.33. Suspension of the trolley wire in tunnels should be flexible on guyed. Procrastination on both sides of the trolley wire must be insulated from the holder, the distance from the support to each of the insulators should be no more than 0.3 m Trolleederzhatel must be isolated from the bolt.

Mount hangers to ducts is not permitted. In the galleries, places of formwork, ventilation doors allowed the stiffening of the trolley wire. The distance between the contact wire and the roof bar lining, as well as the current collector electric generating and lining up to protrusions rigidly attached equipment when the conductor must be at least 0.2 m height braces contact wire above the bottom of the pavement must be at least 2 m

The distance between the suspension points of contact wire in underground mines shall not exceed 5 meters on straight track and 3 m – on curves.

 

8.5.34. Contact the network must have the device (equipment) protection against electric shock to persons.

 

8.5.35. Contact wire at the loading of rock covers, stamping work on sites and the production of other works near it should be protected to securely protect people against electric shock or off.

At the time of the descent and ascent shift workers in the contact wire pit bottom must be switched off using the switch disconnect for at least 50 m from the trunk, in which people go up and down.

If you leave your work hauling duration per shift and more tension with the contact wire on the idle portion must be removed.

 

8.5.36. When two or more locomotives in the workings must be fitted dvuhsvetovaya alarm.

 

8.5.37. When powered catenary substations on several networks must be isolated from one another.

 

8.5.38. Contact the network must be repaired after removal of voltage, grounding contact wire hanging and warning signals.

 

5.8.39. Prohibited the loading and unloading of long and bulky materials and equipment in the workings when the contact line.

 

5.8.40. In mines where the contact wire is suspended, every 100 m, and at intersections with other roadways in curves and slopes must be posted glowing inscription warning that the live wire.

 

8.5.41. Rail haulage distances when electric battery should be grounded throughout. Distance between the ground shall not exceed 75 m

 

5.8.42. Space charge (battery) must be constructed of fire-resistant materials and self-assured, is not related to the overall system, a forced ventilation system in accordance with the approved design. Smoking in the firing chamber is prohibited.

Layout and decoration space charge must be carried out in accordance with the project.

 

8.5.43. Electrical equipment in the charging chamber must be explosion-proof. Permitted to use battery tester in normal version, but they measure the voltage permitted no earlier than 10 minutes after removing the cover from the battery box.

 

5.8.44. To prepare the electrolyte solution and fill them batteries should be used special tools, protecting against splashing and spilling electrolyte. Workers must be provided with protective goggles, rubber gloves and aprons. First aid for burns electrolyte in the charging chamber should be stored solutions or powders that neutralize sulfuric acid or alkali.

 

8.5.45. Battery cells should be equipped with devices allowing mechanized eat and posing battery electric boxes and may not charge the batteries directly to the locomotive.

During the construction of utility tunnels allowed charging batteries directly on the locomotive is placed in conjunction with a tunnel section or in the trunk. Such work may produce subject to the development of special regulations, part of WPP, which provides for additional security measures (ventilation rate, control over the content of hydrogen sulfide, extractor fan, etc.), while simultaneously charging no more than one battery.

 

5.8.46. While charging the battery electric battery box cover must be removed and the tube elements should be open. Battery box lid can be closed only after the termination of the battery gassing vessels, but no earlier than one hour after charging. Before issuing a battery in the charging should be checked its isolation from the body of the battery box. Insulation resistance of a battery must be at least 10000 0m. Do not put under the charge defective or contaminated batteries.

 

5.8.47. Do not operate the locomotives at fault buffers, coupling devices, brakes, sandboxes, lighting, signaling and interlocking devices, electrical faults and remedies.

Each locomotive must be provided or jack samostavom, shoes, tool kit and calibrated elektropredohranitelyami.

 

8.5.48. Derailment of rolling stock (locomotives, mine cars, blokotyubingovozok platforms for the delivery of long material) should be investigated by the rails face technical supervision to identify and eliminate the causes.

Work on lifting and setting on rails rolling stock must be carried out under the supervision of a person of technical supervision.

 

5.8.49. Rope haulage, including infinite, should be applied in accordance with a special project. The winch should be installed on a firm base and firmly reinforced. Around the winch must be free passage width not less than 0.7 m for staff.

 

5.8.50. With endless rope haulage distance between trolleys must be at least 5 m Construction towbar must exclude the possibility of slipping on a tightrope.

 

5.8.51. When hauling cable trolleys for engaging with each other, and to attach them to the rope should be used hitch and devices that do not allow arbitrary decoupling.

 

8.5.52. Rings, thrust coupling trolleys and tow hooks for infinite and locomotive otkatok must pay not less than six-fold margin of safety, and trailing arms at the end haulage – at least tenfold safety margin with respect to the maximum static load at which they are applied.

 

 

 

 

9. Self-propelled equipment ENGINES

INTERNAL COMBUSTION in underground mines

9.1. The order of operation and maintenance of machines with internal combustion engines (ICE), including refueling points machines and their temporary sludge should be determined by the project.

 

9.2. To control the machine with the engine specialists should have been trained in TRAINING (points) and received a Certificate for machines in underground conditions.

 

9.3. Transportation of people allowed only in specially provided for this purpose machinery and trailers to them prefabricated. Trailers must be equipped with braking systems and warning lights at the rear.

 

9.4. Machine should move to develop at a rate to the safety of people and equipment, but not more than 20 km / h Turnout at the speed of their cars should be reduced to 10 km / h

 

Note. On straight sections of the horizontal working in length over 500 m maximum speed and empty freight cars can be increased to 40 km / h At this speed machines for more than 20 km / h set chief engineer organizations in coordination with local Gosgortechnadzor.

 

9.5. Free passage for people and the roadway in haulage roadways should be separated pointers. In mines where permissible speed machines of more than 20 km / h, and in inclined workings device footpaths should exclude them hitting the bumper bar setting machines, lifting footpaths etc.

 

9.6. Roadbed in the workings must be flat, providing motion machines without jerks and jolts. In those cases, when the soil is composed of the workings of unstable rock slopes Driving trucks to the formation of irregularities, the road must get paved.

 

9.7. In the mines, which are moving self-propelled machines should be installed standard traffic signs regulating movement. Signposting scheme approved by the chief engineer of the organization.

 

9.8. When two-way traffic in the development of the headlights should be such as to avoid blinding oncoming traffic drivers (dipped beam, sidelights).

 

9.9. Lighting the need for excavation, which operated self-propelled machines, chief engineer of the organization is determined by taking into account local conditions in coordination with local authorities Gosgortechnadzor.

 

9.10. All machines are working in underground mines must have a number and be assigned to specific individuals.

 

9.11. On machines must be installed or cockpit canopies, protecting the driver from falling pieces of the rock mass at the top and at the same time providing sufficient visibility.

 

Note. In applying the mountain LHD equipment in existing mines with a fixed roof or roof of the stable species install cab or visors are not mandatory. The distance from the driver’s seat to the most salient part of the roof must be at least 1.3 m

 

9.12. The machine must be loaded in such a way as to prevent its loss during the motion of the body pieces of the rock mass or other transported materials.

 

9.13. Towing faulty machines in underground workings must be made only by means of rigid coupling length of less than 1 m

Do not leave the self-propelled machines without measures against their spontaneous movement. With all the time stops on the way of self-propelled machines off lights is prohibited.

 

9.14. Each machine must be fitted with a fire-extinguishing installation.

 

9.15. On each machine should be started magazine inspection machine, control of the exploitation converter, exhaust gas analysis. The magazine is filled with the specific instructions of the equipment. Procedure for filling the magazine set chief engineer organization.

 

9.16. During the operation of the machine with the engine carried the following control over its technical condition:

a) before the beginning of every shift of the driver checks the technical condition of the car (with the assaying of individual devices). Test results are logged. If any safety devices work, is defective, the machine is prohibited to operate;

b) at least once a week mechanic area or on behalf of another person who has the appropriate qualifications, produces technical inspection of each machine working on the site. The car has not passed a weekly routine inspection, operate prohibited.

 

Note. Specified in paragraph “a” of every shift inspection machines for the transport of persons, should be made a face Technical Supervision. On admission the machine to transport people must be recorded in the log.

 

9.17. For use in the mine of each type (brand) vehicles with internal combustion engines must be authorized by local Gosgortechnadzor. Permission is granted on presentation of information about the organization of this type of machines under (brand) and their operating conditions in underground mines present requirements.

 

9.18. For each type of machines used in underground work must have the following information:

a) changes in all areas of the engine operating modes before and after gas treatment, the amount and the exhaust gas temperature, the concentration and the amount of carbon monoxide therein, oxides of nitrogen, and the solid filtrate aldehydes. These data are presented in the form of graphs or tables;

b) serial domestic brands of fuel allowed for use in the underground operation of the engine;

c) the rules of control and adjustment of the engine, which offers the least harmful exhaust gases;

g) the technical operation of machines, including the order and timing of current and capital repairs and preventive examinations depending on the number of operating hours or mileage in kilometers;

d) User manual converters.

 

9.19. Self-propelled vehicle shall be equipped with:

a) instruments that are in sight and the driver shows the speed of the machine;

b) audible alarm;

c) an hour meter or mileage in kilometers;

g) lighting fixtures (lights, stop sign, marker signals in width), providing the normal performance of work and safety of people at the same time. Where necessary, the machine must be installed reverse light illumination. Transport vehicle have to be equipped with rear stop lamp that is activated when braking.

 

Note. Mountain load-haul, haul cars and tractors with a constant speed in each gear, jumbo and other sedentary machines set speed indicators and brake lights are not necessarily.

 

9.20. In underground conditions allowed the use of diesel fuel with a flash point in closed crucible is not below 50 ° C and a sulfur content of 0.2% by weight.

 

9.21. The gaps between the outermost part of the vehicle and the wall (bolting) generation or placed in the development of equipment to be taken depending on the purpose and workings of the speed of movement of the machine:

a) openings, intended for transporting rocks, must be made – at least 1.2 m from the passage for persons and 0.5 m – on the opposite side. When the device footpath height of 0.3 m and a width of 0.8 m or device niches through 25 m clearance from the free passage of people can be reduced to 1 m Nishi should get height of 1.8 m, 1.2 m wide , a depth of 0.7 m;

b) in the workings intended for loading rock and its delivery to the development of transport, in the workings of repositories excavated at a speed machines 10 km / h and with the exclusion of the possibility of finding such workings of people without work-related machines – at least 600 mm on each side.

 

Note. In all cases, the free passage height of the whole production width should be at least 1.8 meters from the soil excavation.

 

At the beginning of excavation for which the motion of self-propelled vehicles pass people is not provided, shall be posted prohibiting signs illuminated.

 

9.22. In underground conditions are allowed to use engines, the exhaust gases which in any mode permitted concentration of harmful components does not exceed the values ​​given in Table. 4.

 

TABLE 4.

Name

The content by volume%

before scrubbing

after scrubbing

1

2

3

Carbon monoxide

0.2

0.08

Oxides of nitrogen in terms of NO 2

0.08

0.08

Aldehydes, based on acrolein

-

0,001

 

 

Notes.

1. Indicators to gas cleaning during operation are not checked and are only for the manufacturers.

2. Opacity is determined by the method of GOST 21293-75 and free acceleration factor “K” should not exceed 40%.

3. Carbon monoxide should be determined at a temperature of exhaust gas catalytic converter for not less than 250 ° C.

 

9.23. In production, where machines are running with the engine, must be supplied fresh air in an amount to decrease the concentration of harmful exhaust products in the mine atmosphere to sanitary standards, but not less than 5 m / min for 1 liter. s. nominal capacity of diesel engines and 6 m / min – rated power of gasoline engines.

 

9.24. All cars with a diesel engine must be equipped with two-stage exhaust gas cleaning system (catalytic and liquid), and the machine with petrol engines – catalytic converters.

On machines with diesel engine operated at low temperatures, allows only catalytic converters.

 

9.25. During operation, the composition of each of the undiluted exhaust gas of the diesel engine is checked after scrubbing idling at least once a month for carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides.

Machines that emit harmful gases in concentrations exceeding the maximum allowable shall be removed from service. Analysis of exhaust gases must be performed before operating the engine in underground conditions, after each repair, engine adjustments or long (more than two weeks) recess and during refueling of a new brand.

Analyses of nitrogen oxides must be done by “Method of determination of the total content of nitrogen oxides in the exhaust gases of internal combustion engines,” on the other gases – by methods adopted VGSCH.

 

9.26. Composition of the mine atmosphere at key locations of machines with internal combustion engines shall be determined on carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen (in the cabin) at least once a month. At each point in the period of the greatest number of vehicles shown in at least two samples with an interval of 5 min.

 

9.27. Do not operate the machine with the engine in dead mines, hazardous gas and dust.

 

9.28. Prohibited device in underground garages and warehouses lubricants.

 

9.29. Adjusting the engine on the machines in operation, must be carried out in specially designated for this purpose workings. Exhaust gases during the adjustment must be discharged directly to the outgoing stream.

 

9.30. On the device to regulate the fuel equipment must be installed seals ensure that none received the maximum cycle fuel injection timing and angle. The seal is placed face for causing the machine to operate.

Upon completion of scheduled maintenance and inspection of the engine seals and labeling of fuel equipment should be restored. Upon detection of violations of the seal and marking engine fuel equipment must be removed from service and sent to the control check adjustments.

 

9.31. Cars with petrol engines can be used only on fresh arrival in the jet without stub generation. As fuel gasoline vehicles should be used gasoline with an octane rating of at least 72. Use of leaded gasoline is prohibited.

 

9.32. Never use gasoline in underground work for any purpose other than fueling vehicles.

 

9.33. Carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides in the exhaust gases of gasoline engine cars before and after the converter controlled prior to admission to the underground workings, as well as during operation in underground conditions within the time specified in paragraph 9.25.

Checking the engine is idling, for uniform motion with partial engine load and uniform motion with a full load of the engine.

 

9.34. Car engines operating in underground conditions must meet the following requirements:

carbon monoxide content of the exhaust gases in the selection of the sample to the neutralizer should not exceed:

2.8% – with the engine idling;

1.2% – in the uniform motion of a vehicle with partial engine load (throttle is not fully open);

4.5% – in the uniform motion of the car with a full load of the engine.

 

9.35. After adjustment of the fuel equipment and adjustable ignition system bodies (the needle position of the main dosing system, the idle screw and distributor) are fixed so as to prevent any violation of regulation by outsiders, and sealed.

 

9.36. Neutralization of exhaust gases imposed on automobiles, must be effective in achieving the exhaust gas temperature of 300 ° C at the inlet to 70%.

 

9.37. The work of each machine must be considered in kilometers or duty hours. After every 250 hours of engine operation or 2500 km should be performed preventative maintenance to the extent provided by the manufacturer.

After 2600 hours of operation, the engine is removed from the machine, regardless of its technical condition. Lifetime overhauled engine – 1600 hrs

 

9.38. Neutralizer drive installed instead of the muffler.

 

 

10. Pumping

10.1. For each object of underground construction project should be provided the means and methods with the definition of drainage main parameters, precinct (intermediate) and downhole drainage installations.

 

10.2. Camera main drainage installation shall be located not more than 10 m from the trunk. Gender pumping chambers must beat above haulage ways at least 0.5 m

In the pumping chambers should be tools for assembly, disassembly and repair.

 

10.3. Main drainage installations shall be equipped with at least three pump units (groups of pumps) at the rate of one – in the second – in reserve, the third – to repair. Working units should ensure maximum daily inflow pumping for 20 hours

When two or more operating units in the group total number of units in reserve and repair should not be less than the number of operating units.

When shaft sinking regardless of water flow is allowed to use a false pump with obligatory presence of a standby pump on the surface near the trunk.

In the intermediate pump stations and drainage downhole pumps amount determined by the project of the works.

During the construction of utility tunnels allowed to produce pumping water directly from sumps trunks without special camera device. When this drainage installations can be equipped with one pump unit, in consultation with the regional body Gosgortechnadzor Russia.

 

10.4. Each of the main drainage pumping units must be equipped with a pressure gauge, ammeter and voltmeter.

 

10.5. All major dewatering equipment shall be equipped with a water level alarms with a signal at the point of finding permanent staff on duty. In operation, the main non-automated drainage installations shall be provided four-hour duty staff.

 

10.6. Main drainage installations shall be equipped with at least two of the drainage pipes, one of which is redundant. Working piping must be designed for the issuance of the mine daily inflow of water for no more than 20 hours Reserve pipes must have a cross section of the pipeline workers.

When two or more units of the total number of workers becoming drainage must be at least three.

 

10.7. Pressure pipes in the pumping chamber of the main drainage shall be electrically connected and equipped with valves so that each pump unit could run on any of the drainage pipe.

 

10.8. In the main chamber drainage should be working and emergency lighting, fire protection and posted: manual pumping systems, piping diagram labeled valves and gates, power supply circuit.

 

10.9. All dewatering equipment shall be inspected daily mechanic area or a designated person, the main drainage installations, in addition, at least once a week – as a chief mechanic organization. The results of the inspection shall be entered in the “Book of inspection drainage installations” (Appendix 16).

 

10.10. Water from the workings of faces should be given in the ditches, gutters or pipes into the main drainage cisterns or auxiliary pumping systems. Dimensions drainage devices must be designed for the maximum expected inflow. Flooding decking and haul routes is prohibited.

All water taking device and cisterns must be cleaned regularly.

 

10.11. In dead-end roadways used by pumping chambers, with their length of 10 meters should be forced ventilation.

 

10.12. Each facility must be carried out regularly, but not less than once every six months, mine water inflow measurements and chemical analysis.

 

11. ELECTRICAL NETWORK AND electroload

 

11.1. ELECTRICAL NETWORK

 

11.1.1. For the electrical installations on the surface claim existing Regulations for Electrical and Regulations for the Operation of electrical installations and safety rules for the operation of electrical consumers. These rules are mandatory for underground electrical installations, if they do not contradict this Regulation.

 

11.1.2. Organizations should be established service commissioning of electrical equipment, communications and automatic isolation control cable networks, which during the construction period shall adjustment and control of good and safe operation of electrical equipment, communications and automatic isolation control cable networks.

 

11.1.3. Electrotechnical staff serving the power plant on the construction of subways and tunnels must have a qualifying group of safety not less than III for units with electrical voltage to
1000 V and below IV – for installations with electrical voltage above 1000 V.

 

11.1.4. For power supply for construction of tunnels and underground substations should be used indoor and outdoor.

Reliability of external power substation project object should be determined depending on the method of construction, hydrogeological and other conditions and should not be taken below the Category II according to the SAE.

Reliability of supply from the substation electroreceivers object must be taken according to current recommendations for designing and apparatus temporary electricity in the construction of subways and tunnels, with electricity the most critical groups electroreceivers: mine hoist, drainage, dewatering systems, the main fan installation, lighting workings and low pressure compressor units when working in caissons must be carried out by two independent power sources.

Allowed the construction of electricity utility tunnels with a degree of reliability for Category III, if electrical power interruptions cause no threat to the security of employees, as mining and the environment. If necessary, improving the reliability of power supply may be used as a backup power supply mobile power.

 

11.1.5. In the underground workings in the construction of subways and tunnels should use insulated neutral transformers and generators. Exceptions are special transformers designed for power conversion devices contact locomotive haulage.

 

11.1.6. During the construction of sewer tunnels in cities, where possible from existing electricity substations, electricity is allowed for the use of underground electrical networks with earthed neutral supply transformers under the following technical measures:

a) protection of the trunk and branches to the current-short circuit should be instantaneous automata responding to current overload in any phase. Setting current release machine should correspond to the upper limit of the operating current of the protected area network;

b) monitoring the condition of the insulation and the current collectors networks should be carried out using high-speed (0.05 in) Protective isolating device (30 UP, AK-2443) to the setting leakage current less than 0.01 amps;

c) the presence in all branches of the main line re-grounding neutral conductors cables.

The resistance value of each of the current spreading repeated grounding devices must be no more than 2 ohms;

g) conduct before starting work and periodically once every three months insulation resistance measurements of electric and current collectors, re-resistance grounding devices, loop impedance “phase-zero” design with results protocols supporting electrical work;

d) to protect people from electric shock when a voltage on a piece of equipment not normally energized, must be done in conjunction with the vanishing of the protective tripping device (ZOUP) and circuit-breakers with overcurrent protection (cut-off).

Time off the damaged part of the network should not exceed 0.2 seconds.

Action (operation) protective disconnection device (ZOUP) button must be checked before each shift. Checking ZOUP during his trip should be done at least once every 6 months;

f) maintenance of blasting in underground mine using electric detonators must be made during a power outage.

 

11.1.7. In electrical networks, voltage up to 1140 V with isolated neutral to protect people should use protective grounding and continuous automatic monitoring of network isolation with the action to disable the damaged network and signal separately for each working face, generation. Total breaking time network section with damaged insulation should not exceed 0.2 s at a voltage of 660 V and 0.12 s – with voltage 1140 V.

 

11.1.8. Checks of vehicles insulation monitors and disconnecting devices are:

- Electrical mechanic on duty every shift;

- Daily responsible for the electrical portion;

- Once a week, chief energy organization.

The verification results shall be recorded in the “Book of records verifying operation of electrical insulation monitors and electricity” (Appendix 18).

During the construction of utility tunnels checks of insulation monitoring devices and isolating device is made at least 1 time per week as an electrician and a tunnel section chief energy company at least 1 time in 3 months.

 

11.1.9. Electricity consumers terrestrial (HLG, lifting equipment, dewatering, compressor installations, temporary facilities and on-site lighting, electricity works on development of building sites) allowed networks of up to 1000 V with earthed neutral. Protection of persons against electric shock should be performing vanishing.

 

11.1.10. Each building plot (object) must have:

- Schematic diagram of the executive power supply;

- Executive layout electrical schematic plan applied to the mine workings;

- Circuit grounding device;

- “Book of records verifying operation of electrical insulation monitors and electricity”;

- “Book of electrical insulation resistance test and elekrosetey” (Annex 19);

- “Book of accounting checks electrical grounding” (Annex 20);

- Journal of issuing protective equipment for individual use;

- Online magazine.

Operational technical documentation is, adjusts and stores responsible for the electrical portion (object).

All changes must be made in electrical circuits to the appropriate urgency.

 

11.1.11. At each start-up dispenser must be clearly marked to indicate includes the installation or network, as well as setting tripping the overcurrent protection or the rated current of fuse-links.

Prohibited the use of fuses without cartridges and uncalibrated fusible links.

 

11.1.12. During the construction of subways and tunnels are allowed to use the following electrical network:

- For power loads – three-phase AC line voltage insulated neutral 380, 660 and 1140, inclusive;

- For contact locomotive haulage – DC voltage up to 300 inclusive;

- Remote control for mobile mining equipment and machinery – AC voltage to 42 inclusive;

- For structures on the surface – in accordance with the EMP and specifications supply organization to join loads and construction mechanization.

To supply some powerful electric energy receivers, mobile substations and transformers installed in mines, application of electrical cabling systems with insulated neutral in the underground environment variable voltage up to 10 kV. Project should be made to protect such networks from short circuit and earth leakage.

 

11.1.13. Transmission and distribution of electrical energy in underground cables must be used with shells, a protective cover or mastic coatings and flame retardant.

 

11.1.14. During the construction period should apply the following cables with shells and the protective cover and flame retardant:

- For installation on horizontal and oblique (45 °) workings – armored cables in the lead, aluminum or PVC sheath;

- For installation on vertical and sloping (over 45 °) workings – power and control cables with wire armor in the lead, aluminum or PVC sheath with depleted or nestekayuschey impregnated insulation.

Permitted to supply mobile machinery, as well as portable consumer voltage up to 660 V inclusive application hose cables.

You can use non-armored cables with non-combustible insulation pads provided they avoid damage when coming off the rolling stock, as well as the machines are running.

 

11.1.15. At the end razdelok all cables and electrical service must be posted raspredpunktah tag indicating the value, brand and cable cross-section.

Prohibited from joining cable cores to the terminals of transformers, motors and machines without tips, special crown (vane) washers or other equivalent devices to prevent the dismemberment of the strands of the cable.

Prohibited from joining multiple cores cables to one terminal (starter, transformer, etc.), if the clip design such a device is not provided.

Connect the flexible armored cable in power circuits should be connected via terminals unit (starter machine) and permitted by bus or boxes couplings prefabrication.

 

11.1.16. In mines, hazardous gas or dust, prohibits the use of cables with aluminum conductors and aluminum cladding.

 

11.1.17. In underground electrical network voltage up to 110 V should be protection:

a) transformers and each of them joining the exhaust short circuit – breakers with overcurrent protection or fuse link;

b) the supply of electric motors and their cables short circuit, overload, zero;

c) electrical network from dangerous ground leakage currents – breakers complete with current leakage relay electrically connected to the entire network. The total length of the network cable must not exceed 3 km.

Setting value of current relay overcurrent circuit breakers should be calculated and indicated in the diagram of power supply section.

 

11.1.18. Flex cable, mobile feeding mechanism (loader, excavator, shuttle car, etc.), should be suspended. Adjacent to the car part hose cable can be laid on the ground for no more than 30 m in compliance with measures to prevent the risk of damage. At the end of the mobile mechanism of the cable must be unplugged.On flexible rubber cables for mobile machinery allowed to have no more than four vulcanized schalok for every 100 m cable length.

 

11.1.19. Do not hold flexible cables under tension as “bays” and “eights”. This requirement does not apply to the case when the performance conditions mining and construction machines (stackers, suspended pumps, etc.) provides a flexible supply cable on a special device or trolley.

 

11.1.20. Cables laid in horizontal and inclined workings with temporary supports with up to 45 °, should be hung loosely, with sag and placed at such a height as to prevent damage to cables moving machinery and vehicles. Span suspension cable should be no more than 3 m, and the distance between the cables – at least 5 cm

 

11.1.21. Cables installed in inclined workings with an angle of 45 ° to 85 °, must be rigidly fixed by clamps, staples or other devices, unloading cable from the action of its own weight. Support spacing should not exceed 3 meters

 

11.1.22. Cables installed in vertical and inclined workings with an angle greater than 85 °, should have a rigid mount. Distance between places of fastening of the cable must not be more than 7 m

 

11.1.23. Cables installed on the well, must be attached to a steel cable using the securing devices, unloading cable from its own weight, the design of which is determined by the project.

 

11.1.24. Electrical wiring on the scaffolding, scaffolding must be made flexible cable or wire hose.

 

11.1.25. Apply uninsulated wires for electrical power and lighting networks in underground mines are not allowed.

Prohibited joint cabling and ventilation rubber pipes. The latter should be laid on the opposite side of the excavation.

 

11.1.26. Allowed connection between a flexible cables requiring disconnection during operation via plug sockets. At the same box with contact sockets (female) must be installed on the supply side of electricity. Plug couplings must have the electric lock, eliminating cable connection or disconnection under stress.

Mass coupling should not be transmitted to the cable.

 

 

 

11.2. ELECTRICAL

 

11.2.1. In underground mines, no hazardous gas and dust should be applied electrical machines, transformers and equipment in the performance specified in Table 5.

TABLE 5.

Type of electrical

Zone placement of electrical

on the surface

in dry openings, tunnels staked with lining, ruddvorah and workings near barrel

in wet roadways and tunnels with nezachekanennoy lining of

at the bottom and bottom zone

on tunneling machines and mechanisms

1

2

3

4

5

6

Lighting transformers

IR43

IR51

IR54

IR54

IR54

Electric

IR43

IR51

IR54

IR54

IR56

Cabinets and assembly

IR43

IR51

IR54

IR54

-

Freestanding magnetic starters

IR43

IR51

IR54

IR54

IR54

Lighting

-

IR51

IR54

IR54

IR54

 

 

11.2.2. In underground mines, hazardous gas (methane, hydrogen, hydrogen sulfide, gasoline fumes, etc.) and dust shall apply explosion-proof electrical equipment.

 

11.2.3. In use in underground workings power and lighting transformers and switching equipment containing oil, is prohibited (except for high-cell explosion proof).

Application of oil-filled transformers or electrical equipment may be permitted provided that they are located in fireproof chambers with lockable doors and under each oil-filled unit with the amount of oil over 75 kg provided the weep holes with gravel cushion.

 

11.2.4. At least once a quarter should be made insulation resistance and electrical power grids. Insulation resistance measurement results needed to be inserted in the “Book of accounting test the insulation of electrical equipment and power grids.” Any faults in the electrical insulation of electrical equipment and power grids must be repaired immediately.

 

 

11.3. UNDERGROUND central distribution point

11.3.1. Camera electrical installations should be placed in a special formulation, adjacent to pit bottom. Allowed if the dimensions allow the device in accordance with the project mezzanine type cameras on the ceiling in the pit bottom.

The cells are longer than 10 m should be two exits located in the most far-flung parts of the camera.

Camera electrical installations should be made of non-combustible materials.

During the construction of utility tunnels camera electrical installations and distribution centers are located in areas of special non-combustible surface.

 

11.3.2. Floor level cameras switchgear and transformer substations adjacent to the pit bottom, should be above the level of the rail head at least 0.5 m

 

11.3.3. Chamber must be closed metal doors opening outwards and do not interfere with the movement in the open position to develop.

Solid metal doors must be fitted with vents close when the need to stop access of air into the chamber.

Allowed to arrange metal lattice doors with additional solid doors. These door and vent windows (holes) of the chamber must be closed in case of fire.

 

11.3.4. Doors, where there is no constant attendants should lockable.

Live parts of the switchgear, Shitov assemblies available for neelektrotehnicheskogo personnel must be protected by solid fences.

 

11.3.5. Log into the camera electrical distribution board is permitted only attendants. At the entrance to the chamber must be posted warning sign “No Trespassing.”

 

11.3.6. The floors in the chambers before electricity distribution switchboard and behind it the entire length of the shield should be covered:

- At up to 380 inclusive – wooden bars on insulators or insulating mats,

- At a voltage exceeding 380 V – wooden bars on insulators, additionally coated insulating mats.

 

11.3.7. Passages behind and in front switchgear must be a minimum of 1 m

Bare live parts that are above the passageway at a height of less than 2.5 m, should be protected by solid mesh or mixed species barriers.

 

11.3.8. In the approach of transport and temporary lifting mines high power transformers should be installed under the project with special niches lining of concrete or metal.

 

11.4. PROTECTIVE EARTH, GROUND

 

11.4.1. At the construction site should arrange general earthing network to which you want to attach all be grounded objects and local grounding. Overall earthing network shall have a continuous electrical connection.

Grounding metal parts subject to electrical devices, normally energized, but which may become live in the event of damage to the insulation and metal pipes, signal cables, etc., located in excavations in which there are electrical installation and wiring. These requirements do not apply to the metal lining, with dead rails, as well as the suspension of pipes, cables.

As a conductor connecting the local grounding should be used steel armor and lead sheath of armored cables or other conductors.

The total resistance of the earthing network, measured in the most remote places on earth electrode shall not exceed two ohms. In case of excess of the quantity necessary to arrange re-grounders. As the main earthing used ground loop QFT CSGN; repeated as earthing can be used earthing hosted in sump sump and local grounding.

 

11.4.2. Ground Position (group of settings) should be achieved by earthing and grounding conductors. As earthing must be used in mines, steel sheets measuring at least 0.75 m 2 , a thickness of not less than 5 mm, placed in the sump or the sump and steel pipes with a diameter of 50 mm and a length of not less than 2 m, placed in the drilled hole a depth of not less than 1.5 m may be used as an earthing metal tunnel lining and in this case it must be connected to the grounding obscheshahtnoy network.

Subject to ground must join separate grounding conductor cross-section of steel not less than 50 mm (copper not less than 25 mm ) directly to earth ground or to a collection ground conductor (bus loop). In the latter case the prefabricated drain wires, in turn, must be connected to ground by means of metal strips or cable section not less than 50 mm .

Earthing should be connected to the grid grounding conductors of the same cross section.

 

11.4.3. Ground loop in the chamber for electric traction substation contact haulage except joining the local earth ground and obscheshahtnoy grounding network must be connected to the current-carrying rails used as a reverse catenary wire, or rails connected to negative pole of a direct current (rectifier unit).

In addition, the traction substation for electric contact reversion to the network ground should join the live rails, used as a reverse catenary wires.

 

11.4.4. Grounding electrical DC in close proximity to the rails, should be carried out by a reliable connection to the grounding design rails used as a reverse catenary wires.

 

11.4.5. The metal shell and the grounding conductor DC cable must be electrically grounded on only one side by means of their attachment to the negative pole of the rectifier unit. Bilateral ground shells and grounding lived DC cables are not allowed.

 

11.4.7. Ground mobile and portable electrical equipment connected to the mains flexible cable connection must be effected by equipment enclosures with obscheshahtnoy network grounding grounding lived through flexible cables to be connected to the internal ground terminal provided in the cable entries.

 

11.4.8. In the construction of tunnels with metal lining of electrical, devices, machines and mechanisms can be grounded on the lining. In this case, the metal lining should be an integral part obscheshahtnoy grounding device.

 

11.4.9. During the construction of the tunnels team block or monolithic concrete lining must be installed assembly grounding conductor (circuit).

May be used as a ground loop rail track with ground all along the way. The distance between the ground points determined by calculation.

 

11.4.10. Ground network of production facilities on the surface, freezing stations, dewatering facilities, workshops, etc. must be connected to protective earthing of substations, power stations or other earth electrodes. In installations up to 1 kV neutral to earth should be made vanishing. And the resistance of the grounding device to which are attached neutral transformers, generators at line voltage of 380 V, should be less than 4 ohms.

 

11.4.11. In the construction of tunnels open pit earthing grounding circuit can serve electrosubstations or hammered into the ground metal mounting piles of excavation, etc., if the measured ground resistance metal piles will be no more than 1.25 ohms.

 

11.4.12. Grounding conductors must be available for inspection and protected from mechanical damage and corrosion.

 

11.4.13. After each repair of electrical equipment and electric check the operation of their grounding devices.

 

 

 

11.5. Electric welding and flame WORK

11.5.1. When carrying out electric and gas-flame operations necessary to fulfill the requirements of the SNP and these Rules. Work must be performed in accordance with the Regulations for the production of welding and other hot work in underground mines and pithead (Appendix 6).

 

11.5.2. When performing electrical welding work in flooded roadways with nezachekanennoy lining of all electric welding unit with AC power source must be equipped with automatic removal of the open circuit voltage or limit it to 12 with a time delay of not more than 0.5.

 

 

 

11.6. ELECTRIC

11.6.1. When operating manual electric tools necessary to perform the requirements of the PTE and PTB.

 

11.6.2. In workings constructed with nezachekanennoy lining of food for manual electric machines and tools (drills, hammers, power saws, etc.) should be applied voltage (linear) not more than 127 V.

 

 

 

11.7. TELEPHONY

11.7.1. Each mine must be equipped with telephones. All telephone lines underground in the mines shall be of dual operating voltage not exceeding 80 V.

Excavation utility tunnels longer than 0.3 km should be in the presence of local telephone communication with the construction site slaughter.

Construction sites, having in its composition administrative buildings should be equipped with an external telephone lines with access to the PBX.

When the timing of construction of up to 6 months may be the lack of telephone communication on construction sites, provided they are at a distance less than 1 km from the other building sites with a telephone, or in the presence of a phone booth in a radius of 0.5 km. Inability to fulfill these conditions to be equipped with a radio system.

 

11.7.2. Telephones must be installed at main haulage and transport of goods, in all-electric cells with on-duty personnel, chambers main drainage installations, the trunk, the VM in stock, in the infirmary, as well as at the locations provided emergency response plans.

 

11.7.3. Food equipment underground telephone must be done with a linear voltage not exceeding 220 V from the lighting network and rectifying devices or batteries.

11.7.4. Communication lines in underground workings must be met:

- Main lines – cables with rubber, PVC or lead sheathed. Lead sheathed cables should have the armor;

- Subscriber (distribution) lines – cables with a rubber or PVC jacket. Perform field wiring lines is allowed only in the workings, not hazardous gas and dust.

 

11.7.5. Laying of communication cables should be carried out on the side of underground excavation, free from the power cables, and in failing to meet this requirement – at a distance of not less than 0.2 m from the power cables.

 

 

 

11.8. LIGHTING

11.8.1. When the device, operation and maintenance of lighting systems in underground mines and open construction sites must comply with the requirements of the SNP and these Rules.

 

11.8.2. Network operating and emergency lighting should be separate. Fixtures emergency and evacuation lighting can have a network and must be attached to a separate independent power supply or automatically switch to it in emergency mode.

During the construction of utility tunnels allowed to use in underground workings single network operating and emergency lighting with two independent power sources.

 

11.8.3. Lighting should be executed in accordance with the requirements of Regulation (Table 5 § 11.2.1).

Types of lighting and light sources should be selected in accordance with the recommendations of the Guide for the lighting of underground workings and open construction sites during the construction of subways and tunnels.

 

11.8.4. In lighting networks is permitted to use a voltage not exceeding 220 V. For lighting faces in flooded mines, as well as tunneling machines and mechanisms (boards, pavers tunnel lining, mobile metal scaffolding, drilling installations and units, etc.) and non-stationary (hanging, floor and table) voltage lighting fixtures networks should not be higher than 42 V. Move unsteady lamps permitted only after disconnecting them from the network. For handheld portable lamps permitted voltage not exceeding 12 V.

 

11.8.5. In an emergency (evacuation) lighting in mines allowed to use headphones or manual battery and other fixtures for personal use, provided that each descended into mines such lamp.

Approved as several evacuation lighting, but at least two lamps on the team.

 

11.8.6. Each accumulator should be provided with a lamp room, a head lamp, moreover, must be secured for workers.

Rechargeable lamps issued workers should ensure the normal duration of continuous burning at least 10 hours.

 

11.8.7. At each organization using individual rechargeable lamps, lamp shall be arranged.

Lamp for rechargeable lamps, except for the premises for storing them, must also have space:

- For dismantling and cleaning lamps;

- To prepare the electrolyte and fill the batteries;

- For storing electrolyte;

- For battery charging;

- For rectifiers;

- Ancillary facilities (workshops, pantries, etc.).

Design and operation of lamp shall be in accordance with the requirements of SAE, PTE and PTB.

During the construction of utility tunnels premises tube device required for storage, battery charging and maintenance of lamps shall be in accordance with the project.

 

11.8.8. In underground mining, tunneling to the machinery on construction sites should be organized regularly monitor light.

 

11.8.9. Installation and cleaning fixtures, changing blown bulbs and repairs must be performed by a network electricians with de-energized.

 

11/08/10. For illumination of warning posters allowed to use the DC voltage of the trolley wire. Attach the cables to the contact wire you need to use special clamps, and the rail – via a bolt and washer. Section of the cable from the rail to the side walls of development and the wall to the height of the rolling stock must be protected pipe.

 

 

 

12. FIRE PROTECTION

12.1. On all construction sites of underground facilities monitor the implementation of the established requirements for fire safety provided VGSCH units.

Authorities carried out a legally on these sites monitor the implementation of fire safety requirements of building regulations in the projects of these objects and in the process of acceptance into service.

 

12.2. Fire protection excavations shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Instructions for fire protection in mining construction of subways, tunnels and other underground structures (Appendix 7).

Fire protection of underground construction and implemented in accordance with the draft fire Shiites approved by Chief Engineer and approved by the regional authorities and VGSCH Gosgortechnadzor Russia.

 

12.3. For each object of underground construction project must be drafted fire protection as part of the project construction organization.

 

12.4. Each underground construction must be ensured by means of fire prevention devices and fire in accordance with the approved design of fire protection.

Prohibited conduct works on objects that are not equipped with fire devices and do not provide a set of fire-fighting equipment.

 

12.5. Order of the organization must be assigned to the person responsible for fire safety of underground workings and construction site.

Responsibility for the state fire safety jobs lies with the workers who perform work on them. In the case of joint work of several organizations responsible for fire safety shall be general contractor. Ensuring subcontractor fire means entrusted to general contractor.

 

12.6. All the workers, engineers and technicians should be aware of how to fire alarm, call VGSCH units and trained how to behave during a fire, self-rescue and fire extinguishing tools available (PLA).

 

12.7. Any person who discovers a fire, or the appearance of any signs of a fire, shall immediately notify the person of technical supervision or management of the organization.

 

12.8. All buildings and structures on the surface of the construction site shall comply with the fire protection industry, and the building immediately adjacent to the mouth of the tunnel, and the mouth of the tunnel lining shall be constructed of non-combustible materials.

 

12.9. The whole territory near the mouth of the tunnel (trunk) before the construction of surface facilities shall be in accordance with the draft cleared of forest, shrub, peat and other vegetation, and combustible materials.

 

12.10. Never place the warehouses of fuels and lubricants, fuel dumps and spontaneously combustible rocks and boiler slag closer than 100 m from the mouth of the tunnel (the trunk). These stores must be located in accordance with the project, subject to the prevailing wind direction.

 

12.11. Do not store timber and other combustible materials in underground mines, clutter and clutter the aisles used wood. In the mines in the vicinity of the place of work must only be stored emergency supply timber and materials necessary to perform the work.

 

12.12. Do not store in the underground workings of fresh and spent fuel and lubricants, oxygen cylinders, acetylene and other flammable gases in excess of requirements necessary to perform the work defined by PPR.

 

12.13. Lubricants must be delivered to the place of work in the metal fitting container. Cleaning materials may be transported to the work site and stored there for a change in metal boxes with lids in an amount not exceeding the replacement needs. Used cleaning materials should be disposed of every shift mining in closed metal boxes.

 

12.14. Washed and cleaned and drill hammers in underground mines is permitted only in specially constructed chambers, fixed supports from non-combustible materials, equipped with metal doors and unfunded fire and ventilation.

 

12.15. Elektrokamery in underground workings must be provided with carbon dioxide fire extinguisher.

 

12.16. Hot work in underground workings must be conducted in accordance with the Regulations for the production of welding and other hot work in underground mines and pithead (Appendix 6).

 

12.7. Work to eliminate fires in underground workings must be performed in accordance with the emergency plan.

 

12.18. By reducing and other works are allowed to start only after the fire is completely extinguished, development and ventilated analysis showed no in mine air toxic gases.

 

 

 

13. Sanitary SOFTWARE

 

13.1. Prior to the start of production of major works on the construction of underground facilities in accordance with the construction project should be completed all work on:

a) the construction and equipment of sanitary facilities;

b) installation and commissioning of the ventilation system for ventilation of mine workings;

c) providing technical facility and drinking water, the organization of temporary drains.

 

13.2. Distance from ablutions (SBP) to the shaft or portal shall not exceed 200 m

Permitted location sled mining domestic premises at the base site. This should be ensured delivery workers at construction sites in their distance from the base of the mine over a distance of 1 km.

 

13.3. As part of SBP should be provided and equipped with:

a) walk-in closets for storing everyday wear;

b) walk-in closets for clothing;

c) showers;

g) washrooms in a separate room or in the dressing room;

d) space for women’s personal hygiene;

e) fotary transmission type and group inhalation;

g) space for drying towels and clothing;

h) the restrooms;

and) separating the device for operating drinking water.

 

13.4. The internal layout of SBP should exclude mixing streams of working in everyday and working clothes.

 

13.5. SBP should have forced-air ventilation, heating, sanitation and centrally supplied with hot and cold water at the rate of 500 liters per hour per shower grid.

Sourcing SBP hot and cold water are determined by the PIC.

 

13.6. Cranes with mixing devices should be placed side cockpit and have clear signs of cold and hot water. Pipes that lead the hot water should be insulated or fencing to a height of 2 m above the floor.

 

13.7 The floors in the shower, washroom, bathroom feminine hygiene, dressing room, laundry room, dressing room, storage room overalls should be water-resistant non-slip surface having a slope to the ramp for water drainage.

In the locker rooms and showers, moreover, must be laid grooved rubber or plastic mats legkomoyuschiesya.

 

13.8. From the dressing rooms everyday and working clothes should be provided separate entrances into the shower.

Log in SBP from the construction site must be equipped with a device for cleaning boots.

 

13.9. Size of the room for drying clothes and shoes, its capacity should provide reliable drying at maximum load during a break between shifts at work.

 

13.10. As part of SBP should provide space for dedusting clothing, footwear repair, laundry or dry cleaning with separate facilities for collecting and issuing scrubbing dirty clothes.

Overalls, contaminated with lead, dinitrophenol, other harmful substances must be decontaminated beforehand.

 

13.11. Storage space for special and casual wear should be equipped with individual lockers.

In some cases, permitted storage group overalls on the shoulders.

 

13.12. At the work site all workers, engineers and technicians engaged both on the surface and in the subsurface conditions should be provided with potable water that meets the requirements of current GOST.

Employees serving drinking water, must undergo a medical examination on a quarterly basis.

 

13.13. In the faces remote from the portal trunk or more than 500 m must be set first aid kit with medicines for emergency care, as well as skid-type stretcher with a solid bed of allowing transport the victim directly to the surface.

Supervision of the availability and condition of kits and stretchers laid on duty paramedic, and in his absence – the chief of the area.

 

13.14. Every single object underground construction must have medical center, equipped with all means of communication production sites and the nearest medical institutions, with the obligatory medical staff around the clock.

 

13.15. All workers should be trained and have practical skills of first aid and transportation of accident victims.

 

13.16. For transporting the injured or ill at work in the infirmary of the hospital organization that is not served by specialized ambulances, should have an ambulance, which in the winter should be additionally equipped with warm clothing and blankets.

When the number of employees over 1000 people – two cars.

 

13.17. Each worker and engineering workers engaged in construction of underground facilities shall be provided in accordance with standard rules and trained in the use of special clothing, footwear and personal protection equipment (PPE).

Those without helmets, clothing, footwear and PPE, as well as deviating from their use, the work should not be done.

 

13.18. All working directly on machines, with hand tools, which generate higher noise levels, as well as persons in them at a distance of less than 50 m in length shall be provided with additional means of personal hearing protection (antiphons, earplugs or headphones).

 

13.19. Workers serving machinery, generating higher levels of vibration, vibration-proof must be provided with special gloves and shoes on anti-vibration soles.

 

13.20. Drying and dedusting overalls must be performed after each work shift, laundry or dry cleaning – as necessary, but not less than once a month.

 

13.21. For storage, issuance and maintenance of respirators in the organization should be created respirator.

Change filters in them should be done when the resistance of 10 mm water column on a standard air flow.

 

13.22. At the construction of underground structures in all areas of dust must be taken effective measures to their localization and reduce dust levels to the level of air pollution existing sanitary norms.

 

13.23. Organization is obliged to determine in advance in a specialized laboratory composition of dust generated in the working area for process and establish indicators MPC dust and rock faces silikozoopasnye (output) depending on the content of free silica (Table 6).

 

13.24. In areas of dust must be regularly sampled air in accordance with the Regulations for air sampling (Appendix 4). The results are recorded in the “Book of accounting results of analyzes of samples of air and dust gassed” (Appendix 17).

In silikozoopasnyh faces such measurements must be made at least twice a month.

 

TABLE 6.

 

Characteristics of dust

TC, mg / m 3

Dust containing more than 70% of free SiO 2

1

Dust containing from 10 to 70% SiO 2

2

Dust containing less than 10% SiO 2

4

Cement dust, clay, minerals and mixtures containing no free SiO 2

6

 

13.25. To protect your face and hands of workers from exposure to hazardous substances, as well as the blood-sucking insects, it is necessary to issue special ointments, creams, sprays and repellents.

 

13.26. At a distance of 75 m from the work site for the construction of underground structures shall be equipped with temporary heating working items, shelter from rain and solar radiation.

In autumn and winter they must be supported by the air temperature +24 ± 2 ° C.

 

13.27. With work in the area of ​​frozen soil must:

a) a set of overalls working to include underwear, sweater, overalls, padded pants, padded jacket, canvas boots, a hat under the helmet;

b) in paragraph heating additionally mount heaters hand with surface temperature +40 ± 2 ° C or elektropolotentsa;

c) every 40 minutes to provide operating manual Percussive breaks of up to 15 min.

 

13.28. In underground mines during the construction project should be provided for the construction of temporary latrines, conforming to sanitary standards. They must be placed in dry excavations isolated from groundwater.

 

13.29. Each organization should have a set of tools and instruments necessary for the operational control of working conditions in the workplace.

Control over labor conditions in the workplace can be done on a contractual basis relevant specialized companies and institutions.

 

14. RESPONSIBILITY FOR VIOLATION OF SAFETY

 

14.1. Officials of organizations involved in the construction of subways and underground structures, as well as engineering and technical personnel of institutions engaged in the design, research and other work for organizations involved in the construction, guilty of violation of this Regulation, shall be personally responsible, regardless of whether or not led led a violation of an accident or injury, and are also responsible for violations of this Regulation committed by their subordinates.

 

14.2. Issuance of any officials instructions or orders, enforcing their subordinates to violate safety rules and instructions to resume work without permission, stopped Gosgortechnadzor, technical labor inspection and other regulatory authorities, as well as officials of the failure of measures to eliminate violations that are allowed in their presence, are gross human rights violations for which they are, depending on the nature of the violation, shall be liable to disciplinary, administrative or judicial procedure.

 

14.3. Working with non-compliance of safety requirements set out in the instructions for safe working practices should be suspended from work and, depending on the nature of the violations involved in the statutory responsibility in a disciplinary or judicial order.

 

 

15 . Conservation utility tunnels and other underground structures

 

15.1. Preservation built utility tunnels and other underground structures (shafts, wells, etc.) caused by financial, organizational and other reasons, should be carried out usually by enterprises, the construction of objects in accordance with the Project conservation utility tunnels and other underground facilities to be agreed with regional bodies Gosgortechnadzor Russia.

 

15.2. Draft conservation utility tunnels and other underground structures developed, usually by the enterprise, performed the tunnel project, an underground facility, or other project company under compulsory appropriate license Gosgortechnadzor Russia.

 

15.3. Conservation project is subject to review, consultation with the relevant services of the city (other settlements, territories), as well as the approval of the authority which approved an initial draft.

 

15.4. Sooty conservation work but must be taken in full compliance with the regulations by the Ministry of Construction Russian acceptance of the completed construction projects.

 

15.5. During the entire period of time that has elapsed since the preservation of underground facilities to resume their construction should be carried out surveillance of these structures. Surveillance methods, their frequency, the structure of executive documentation defined conservation project.

 

15.6. Responsibilities of a range of works by monitoring the state of suspended objects, buildings and the Earth’s surface are assigned to a specific organization. Resolution on conservation of objects can be made relevant local authority.

 

15.7. The composition and content of the draft conservation utility tunnels and other underground structures should cover the full range of organizational, technical, regulatory, and other solutions that provide bezopasnost environment in the area of ​​accommodation facilities from possible harmful effects of dormant underground structures (underground space, transportation, and other underground utilities, buildings, the earth’s surface, aquifers, etc.).

 

15.8. Conservation projects of underground facilities must meet the following requirements:

a) be developed only on the basis of a construction company executive documentation, which is passed through the customer (geodesic-Surveying documentation acts on the hidden work, magazine work, as-built drawings of underground structures, etc.);

b) provide an exception of groundwater movement through the tunnels, the trunks of them, as well as soil removal and construction of them, any human access to them when wet conservation options;

c) covering mines, wells of strength, durability and stability must satisfy regulatory requirements Russian Ministry of Construction on the bridges and pipes;

d) contain a naming scheme on the ground track tunnel (trunks, wells, turning points and linear points) with the design of signs that allow to conduct year-round visual observation of the entire band tracks within the boundaries of the possible theoretical trough with soil movement;

d) the technical solutions of underground structures (linings, roof supports, bridges) are performed prior to the stage at which it can not happen Pinch array even in the case of unpredictable emptying (flooding) conserved underground structures;

e) all underground constructions (lining, lining, jumpers, etc.) should be calculated on the perception of the hydrostatic pressure of groundwater to the maximum possible values ​​for those objects. Design should have no lower level of capital adopted the original design decisions;

g) to provide full coverage of all the available time preservation of underground structures, including any passed for the construction of underground structures, wells, pits;

h) the design of conservation land objects should be conducted in accordance with the Ministry of Construction of Russia.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX 1

INSTRUCTION

To develop and implement emergency response plans

ON Tunnelling

 

GENERAL PROVISIONS

 

1. At each site * underground construction plan should be developed emergency response (PLA), regardless of the number of contractors and subcontractors performing work in underground and on the surface.

_____________________

* An object of underground construction will be understood network of underground workings, ventilation system with a common and shared their exits to the surface, with the adjoining building sites.

 

In terms of emergency response measures should be provided as quickly as possible to rescue people, measures to eliminate accidents, acts of engineers and workers in the event of accidents, as well as actions VGSCH in the initial stage of an accident.

 

2. In the PLA must include all species and possible in the specific construction accidents: fires in pithead and underground mines, and flooding zagazirovanie workings breakthrough quicksand, sand, debris in the faces mining, gas explosions and explosives, mining strikes, accidents elevation, damage underground utilities, accidents in caissons, etc.

 

3. PLA is made chief engineer of the organization * for each half, agreed with the commander VGSCH ** serving the property and approved by the chief engineer of the Construction (union) 15 days before the beginning of the next semester.

_____________________

* When performing on-site underground construction work by several organizations (contractors, subcontractors) at the same time order the construction management (association), one of the leading organizations assigned (head) in the development of the PLA.

 

** Here and hereinafter – the commander (platoon).

 

4. The review and approval of the PLA should be submitted to:

test if the act of reversing devices fan installation skipping inverted air jet in mine workings of the facility;

inspection report emergency measures provided for in the PLA on: fire protection, and state of preparedness of emergency exits, emergency lighting, signaling, communications, security and other self-rescuers

 

5. Provided in PLA material and technical resources for the implementation of measures to rescue and emergency response must be available, in good condition and in the required quantity.

Checking the status of these funds shall be commander and chief of the site before VGSCH PLA agreement on a new semester.

 

6. PLA is developed in accordance with the actual situation of the underground workings of the object.

With subsequent changes in ventilation schemes, the location of emergency exits, etc., in the event of non-compliance events PLA actual position of chief engineer of the workings in the daily organization shall submit to the appropriate plan amendments and coordinate them with the commander of the mine rescue.

In the case of non-payment within the specified period of necessary changes in the PLA or detect inconsistencies actual situation in mines PLA commander has the right VGSCH mismatched plan for the whole site or some of its positions.

About PLA commander VGSCH disagreement in writing informs the chief engineer and construction management organization (association), as well as local authority Gosgortechnadzor for them to take the necessary measures.

Responsible for the timely and proper preparation of PLA and its compliance with the actual situation in the mines are the chief engineer and commander of the mine rescue organization, which agreed to this plan.

Responsibility for ensuring the construction material and technical resources necessary for the implementation of measures to rescue and emergency response, shall head the organization, and for their safety on the site – the section chief.

 

7. The emergency plan should contain:

- Operational part, which will include: activities to save lives and eliminate accidents in the initial period, the responsible persons and the perpetrators of these activities, ways and time to the people of disaster areas and endangered *, routes and assignments for offices VGSCH;

__________________

* Land (development) refers to a threatened, if the accident occurred as a result it can be gassy or will be cut out of it.

 

- The allocation of responsibilities between the individuals involved in the emergency response and the order of their actions;

- The list of officials and agencies that need to be immediately notified of the accident.

 

8. By the operative part of the PLA must be accompanied by the following documents:

 

8.1. The scheme of the underground workings and bears her symbols *: a network of underground air ducts and water pipes, locations of fire extinguishers, emergency stock of materials and tools, pumps and water tanks with their performance and capacity, location of fire nuts installed on the water supply, water-resistant jumpers.

_________________

* Shown in this manual, the recommended scale specified in Guidelines on preparation of PLA.

 

8.2. Ventilation plan of underground workings to which the symbols are applied: the type and performance (estimated and actual) main fan installation, direction, air flow, ventilation devices (doors, lintels, metering stations, ventilation ducts, etc.), the amount of air entering in production and slaughter-section excavation, air velocity, the installation location partial ventilation fans with their characteristics, location of the telephone and other means of communication.

 

8.3. Scheme underground electrical power facility, applied to mining scheme indicating her symbols:

types of electrical equipment and power, power and the lighting networks stating the amount applied voltage, stamps, cable lengths and cross sections, location and types of electricity and protective equipment.

 

8.4. Site plan with drawing arrangement stems, pits, tunnels and other outcrops and access roads, wells, sinkholes, cracks in the gutters (ravines, etc.), reservoirs and water tanks with their capacity, pumps, pipelines, indicating their diameters, pressure and quantity of water supplied to them and to develop industrial site, hydrants, valves, fire nuts, production and domestic premises, warehouses, etc.

 

8.5. List of materials, tools, fire fighting equipment and other emergency materials in mines, indicating their locations.

 

9. SSNs with all applications must be in the organization of the chief engineer, head of the site (at the command post) and the commander of the mine rescue.

An instance of SSNs that are among the chief area of ​​underground construction, must be accompanied by:

- Special forms for admission passes people in the mine workings in the accident:

- Journal of operational emergency response form according to guidelines.

 

10. PLA should be carefully studied by all the staff and workers of the organization *, as well as the personnel of the mine rescue units.

_________________

* When carrying out work on the subject by several organizations (contractors, subcontractors) responsible for the timely briefing on PLA employees of these organizations rests with the organization that is the general contractor (head) in the development of the PLA.

 

Familiarization with the plan must be executed on receipt.

 

11. Responsible for the technical supervision of the PLA study rests with the chief engineer, the workers – to the section heads, composition VGSCH – on mine rescue commander.

 

12. Never allow to work in the underground work of persons who are not familiar with the PLA in part related to their place of work.

 

 

The operational part of emergency response plans

 

13. In the operative part of the PLA each type and location of a possible accident is assigned a number (position).

PLA positions should be developed based on the fact that for a given generation or group workings occur airing the same conditions, the same way out of people and priority actions VGSCH.

 

14. Of items in the operational part of the PLA must include all possible types of accidents, based on the terms of a specific object of underground construction.

 

15. In the immediate measures to rescue and emergency response operations of the PLA must be provided:

 

15.1. Notification methods of accident sites and jobs, the output path of the emergency sections of people, the actions of individual supervision, and call VGSCH route Branch mine rescue to save lives and eliminate accidents.

 

15.2. Ventilation modes ensuring safe passage of people from the emergency site to the surface and rescue departments access to the crash site, including operation of local ventilation fans, the use of compressed air.

 

15.3. Mode power supply emergency site and other underground workings (blackout catenary locomotive haulage lighting network, including emergency lighting, etc.).

 

15.4. Alignment of security posts.

 

15.5. Ways and means of active struggle with the consequences of the accident occurred in the initial stage.

 

15.6. Using underground transport for quick evacuation of the emergency site and shipping offices VGSCH to the accident site.

 

15.7. Location of the command post.

 

16. Call VGSCH units should be provided for all types of accidents and fires in the pit head buildings and structures, in shafts and other openings, having access to the surface, and also call the fire brigade.

 

17. In the PLA depending on the location of fire, explosion or sudden release of gas provides for various emergency ventilation modes:

- Normal, which existed prior to the accident;

- Reversible, rollover air flow for all or some of the workings.

 

18. Reversal of the air flow, as a rule, should be provided for those occasions when there are fires on the incoming stream of air in the pithead, in trunks, near barrel workings and in the adjacent cells.

 

19. Ways and time to the people of emergency and threatened areas in the operational part of the PLA set for each place of work and in each case an accident, and the route of people from emergency site to the workings of fresh air stream must be specified in detail, and then can only be specified destination where people are displayed. In case of failure O people of disaster area should be used cameras or other produce as temporary shelters where people are included in the self-rescuers, should be before the arrival of rescuers.

Fires, explosions, gas emissions and sudden breakthroughs in mine workings of the water should be provided from the output of all the people on the surface of the mine workings.

 

20. Installed ventilation modes and choose the output path of people with emergency excavation should, where possible ensure their yield nezagazovannym workings.

 

21. The procedure for sending VGSCH offices for operational tasks set depending on the location of fire in accordance with the requirements of the Charter VGSCH on organization and conduct rescue work.

In each case, the route branches VGSCH the withdrawal of people and elimination of accidents should be carefully considered the chief engineer and commander of the mine rescue organization based on safe and fast arrival departments to the scene.

 

 

 

DUTIES OF OFFICERS IN THE ELIMINATION OF ACCIDENTS

22. Responsible supervisor of the emergency response is the chief engineer of the company *, and before his arrival at the facility – the section chief (duty manager) or the person replacing him, which is solely responsible for the implementation of measures to rescue and liquidation of the accident or its consequences, including provided emergency response plans.

__________________

* If you explicitly wrongdoing accountable manager to eliminate the accident, as well as in the case of on-site construction of several organizations, higher direct boss – chief engineer of the construction (association) has the right to take over the leadership of the liquidation of the accident, or to appoint another person by performing a corresponding entry in the operating log.

In cases where a single object in mines perform work several construction companies, rescue work is carried out by a single (common) object PLA. Responsible supervisor of the emergency response is the chief engineer of the general contractor or the chief engineer of one of these organizations for the activities in the operational position of the PLA.

 

23. Head of rescue work is a senior commanding officer VGSCH, who arrived first on the emergency facility. Head of rescue work performs tasks convener works to eliminate the accident and is solely responsible for the organization and conduct rescue work.

 

24. Those present at the emergency facility senior managers, regardless of their affiliation, representatives of expert groups and individual experts can not interfere with the function of the head and impose emergency response to him their decision.

 

25. Responsible manager to eliminate the accident:

 

25.1. After reviewing the situation, immediately proceeds to the activities foreseen in the operational part of the PLA, and direct the work on rescue and emergency response, writing content issued orders in the online redo log (paragraph 39).

 

25.2. Organizes the command post and is constantly on it * appoint persons responsible for the conduct of the online redo logs and run other errands.

____________________

* Responsible head to eliminate the accident has the right to leave the command post (descend into the mine, go on vacation, etc.), instead of appointing a Vice-President from among persons supervision. On the decision responsible manager must make an entry in the operating log.

 

25.3. Causes (check call) unit VGSCH and officials on the list.

 

25.4. Reveals the number caught in the workings of the accident and the people of their location, take measures to rescue them and exposes security posts on the descent (at the entrance) in the development of (pit) and on other approaches to disaster areas in places, certain positions in the PLA and, if possible secured by telephone.

 

25.5. Upon arrival at the mine rescue units to:

- Must inform the senior commander VGSCH (head of rescue work) with an emergency situation, saying as much as possible, the most complete data known to him about the place, the nature and time of occurrence (detection) of the accident, the number of people caught by accident and possible their location (work) measures taken before the arrival of mine rescue, including according to the selected position of PLA, the availability of funds to combat the accident, the state of ventilation, etc.;

- Issue a written assignment ** senior commander VGSCH stating the position number of the PLA, according to which priority actions are performed to save lives and on the basis of which the head of rescue work personally poses problems squad leaders.

___________________

** The job can be prepared in advance (before the arrival VGSCH object) or logged in the online redo log VGSCH signed by the accountable manager to eliminate the accident.

 

25.6. Depending on the particular situation may change the general problem of mine rescue, putting it in whole or in part in accordance with the developed PLA *.

___________________

* In case of disagreement between the commander of the mine rescue and responsible supervisor of the emergency response is required to implement the decision of the head, if it is not contrary to the Charter VGSCH on organization and conduct rescue work. Dissenting opinion commander VGSCH recorded in the online redo log.

 

25.7. Reports to the parent organization and the situation in consultation with the head of rescue work arranges to call additional units VGSCH.

 

25.8. After obtaining sufficiently complete information about the situation in the mines and if the main activities of PLA exhausted or do not provide the successful struggle of the accident, is developing an “Operational Plan for the Elimination of accident” in the manner prescribed by the Charter of the mine rescue organization and conduct rescue work. ”Operational Plan for emergency response,” signed by the accountable manager and the head of rescue work.

 

26. Head of rescue work (commander VGSCH) located at the command post and direct the work of rescue departments in accordance with the PLA, the operational plan, performs tasks of Executive Director to eliminate the accident, Guided by the Charter VGSCH on organization and conduct rescue work systematically informing him during rescue and responsible for their implementation.

Detachment commander, his deputy and the platoon commander, arriving at the emergency facility must take leadership in the established order of rescue work on a junior post, regardless of the prevailing situation.

 

27. Chief engineer of the construction (association) if necessary, take measures to focus on emergency facilities necessary material and human resources from other organizations and has the right to take over the management of an emergency.

 

28. Foreman (his deputy), on which the accident occurred, while on the surface and learn about the accident, immediately takes over the leadership to eliminate it and save lives and acts in accordance with this Instruction before the arrival of the chief engineer organization, guided by the PLA.

 

29. Engineering and technical personnel emergency area, caught by accident in mines, take measures in place for lifting people on the surface according to the plan and immediately report the accident to the responsible person (head of operations) to eliminate the accident. While on the surface, are immediately responsible to the head of the works to eliminate the accident to obtain orders and report on the number of people and places of work.

 

30. Head of the organization, having an accident, shall report immediately to the emergency facility, arrange medical care and, if necessary, bring the elimination of accidents experienced workers and technical personnel and other specialized organizations.

 

 

 

GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT engineers and workers

When a fault occurs in mines

31. Fires

 

31.1. People on fire emanating from the source stream of air required to engage in self-rescuers and led by a senior (master, foreman, etc.) come to the surface along the route provided for the PLA.

 

31.2. People on fresh air jet received the message about the accident, and have to take a self-rescuers to reach the surface along the routes provided SSNs.

 

31.3. Any person who first discovered the source of the fire in the mine workings, is obliged to assess the situation and immediately report the accident (in person or by means of communication) senior person in the change (master, mechanic, foreman, etc.) or the management of the organization, if possible, take measures to eliminate the source of the fire in the initial stage.

 

32. For fires in dead mines where access to a fresh stream of air or on the surface is covered hearth burning, people left behind the hearth fire, should take the following measures:

 

32.1. Engage in self-rescuers, controlling the concentration of carbon monoxide by express or visually, the degree of smoke, to find the most safe place and wait for the arrival of rescue units.

 

32.2. Open the valves on the compressed air line, get together, usually at the end of the vent pipe (if it comes to a standstill fresh air) or under ventilation borehole.

 

32.3. Shut-section deadlock elaboration of a temporary bridge from improvised materials or emergency stock (can be used oilcloth flexible ventilation pipes), trying to create in the walled part of the working air overpressure to prevent the penetration of the products of combustion and heat to its location.

 

32.4. Establish and maintain liaison with the responsible supervisor of the emergency.

 

33. Collapses when people caught in a deadlock over the rubble of the production must primarily take measures to strengthen the lining in a place where they are caught by the collapse, and then start applying signals.

Shall be given by blows with a metal object on the rails, pipe, roof support elements, etc. or by periodically switching air tools (jackhammer). Upon receipt of the response signal attempt to establish voice communications.

 

34. On all objects underground construction workers and engineers, who by the nature of work performed can be caught by accident in mines should be instructed in advance of the action on the object order and methods of notification of an accident.

As a general danger signal, typically used repeatedly opening and closing task lighting in mines.

 

35. For all accidents, especially in accidents involving fires in mines, each employee (workers, engineers) as checked out (released) to the surface, and was at that time on the surface, is obliged to hear about the accident, personally inform their Chief (Supervisor, mechanics, etc.) about leaving (output) and perform duties in accordance with the PLA or remain at the disposal of the responsible supervisor for an emergency.

 

36. At each site underground construction time (on the schedule) must be carried out drills. Training schedule alarm for a calendar year is made by service safety of the Construction (union) and agreed with the commander and chief VSGCH GTI.

 

37. List of officials and institutions that need to be immediately notified of the accident, is given in Table 7.

 

Table 7.

 

Institution or an official Surname, first name

Telephone number

Address

servi.

house.

servi.

house.

1

2

3

4

5

6

VGSCH (duty)
Fire brigade
Chief engineer of the organization in which the accident occurred
Head of organization
Section chief, on which the accident occurred
Chief mechanical engineer
Chief Power Engineer
Mechanic section
Chief engineer and head sections of contractors and subcontractors performing work on objects
Chief engineer of the construction (union)
Mountain safety engineer
Local authorities Gosgortechnadzor
Technical inspection of labor unions
Ambulance

 
38. Form the operational part of the PLA

 

Measures to save lives and eliminate accidents

Those responsible for the execution of activities and performers

Ways and time-people

Path of rescue departments and job

Path of rescue departments and job

1

2

3

4

5

 

Note. Column 5 is cut off the head of the works to eliminate the accident and awarded the head of rescue work. After the liquidation of the accident column 5 is restored.

 

39. Form of operational log to eliminate accidents

 

Management ______________________________________________________________________

 

Scene of an accident ____________________________________________________________________

 

Nature of the accident _________________________________________________________________

 

Time of the accident (year, month, day, hour, minute) _________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

Date

Hours and minutes

Contents of the task in the liquidation of the accident and deadline

Responsible for the job

Mark on the execution of tasks

 

 

Responsible manager works

emergency liquidation

(Signature)

 

 

 

40. The main symbols in the diagrams and plans annexed to the operational part of the PLA

 

 

Number p / p

Diagram

Description of the graphic image, color *, clarifications, additions

1

Number and position of the operative part designation PLA in case of fire, the diameters of circles 10 and 16 mm, color between the two circles should match the color of workings related to this position

2

Phone numbers (different colors depending on the type of accident) and marking the positions of the operative part SSNs for other types of accidents, 10 mm diameter circle

3

Location of the command post (on the plane of the surface)

4

Home (auxiliary) air handling unit, stamp (type) with the diameter of the impeller and productivity (m 3 / s)

5

Shafts, pits, wells (round, square, rectangular, etc. form) indicating: the incoming fresh air stream – red arrows and outgoing air stream – the blue dashed arrows, the number of incoming (outgoing) of air (m 3 / s)

6

Heater indicating system and the heating surface

7

A breath of fresh air (red arrow length 10-20 mm)

8

Exhaust air flow (blue dotted arrow length 10-20 mm)

9

Metering station (place in the development of measurement) with the velocity of the air section of development and the amount of air

10

Wooden door vent generation

11

Metal vent door to the development of

12

Jumper deaf in development: concrete (green), brick (brown), wood (Yellow)

13

Local ventilation fan (VMP) and ventilation ducts in the development showing the type, its performance (P) and quantity supplied to develop to the installation of air VMP (s)

14

Vent line of hard (metal) pipe, laid in the design, arrow indicating the direction of air through the pipes (fresh stream – red, the fulfilled – blue dashed) and the amount of air at the end of the pipeline (Q) arrows are applied to each line 5-10 cm at the end of pipes

15

Vent hose (dashed line) that runs in the generation, indicating the amount of air at the end of the pipeline

16

Fan – booster mounted in the vent line, stamp (type)

17

Stench in the arches: concrete (green), brick, stone (brown)

18

Storage of materials and equipment of fire (red)

19

Emergency reserve storage of materials and equipment (red)

20

Location selfrescuers storage group (red)

21

Location number (in mines specified number)

22

Plug connector connection shahtofonnoy

23

_________________ Plumbing (solid line)

24

Duct (dotted line)

25

  Fire-process line (red) indicating the end of pipe 80 – flow rate, m 3 h
14 – the pressure, kgf / cm 2 for a given flow
17 – static pressure, kgf / cm 2

26

Tank fire (red) 300 – capacity, m 3

27

Gate (red) 137 – serial number)

28

Crane Fire (red) 6 – number 50 – the diameter of the connection head, mm

29

Fire pump (red) 60 – capacity, m 3 / h, 20 – pressure, kgf / cm 2

30

Well hydrant (red) on the mains water supply (in terms of surface)

31

Train fire (red) with fire extinguishing agents

32

Fire extinguisher foam hand (red) 4 – number, pcs.

33

Manual powder fire extinguisher (red) 3 – quantity, pcs.

34

Sand box (red)

35

Central drainage pump indicating the type (brand), performance and pressure

36

Tunneling machine (shield, combine, complex) indicating the type (brand)

37

Stacker by type (brand)

38

Winches by type (brand)

39

Central (ZPP) or precinct (SCP) underground substation showing: accommodations in mines, entry number, and the introductory section switchgear (CRU) of the rated current (100 A) and setting overcurrent relays (200 A) transformers , feeder breakers and magnetic contactors with their types (brands) and setting the overcurrent relay

40

Mobile polling station underground substation by type (brand) setting overcurrent relays

41

Power or lighting transformer installed separately in mines by type (brand)

42

Introductory or sectional complete switchgear (CRU) at rated current 100A and authorized overcurrent relay 200 A

43

Feeder complete switchgear for rated current of 100 A and the setpoint current relay 200 A

44

Circuit breaker, magnetic starter in the circle indicating the type (brand) and under the circle setting overcurrent relays (900 A)

45

Disconnector or manual starter indicating fuse current (100 A)

46

Cable type RLS-6 6000 V cross sections 3×25 mm 2 and a length of 500 m (red)

47

Armored cable brand RLS-1 up to 1000 V, conductor cross-section 3×35 mm 2 and a length of 200 m

48

Flex cable brand GRSHE, section power lived 3×35 mm 2 and a length of 150 m

49

Line lighting

50

Emergency lighting line (red)

51

Couplings without potting

52

Couplings with potting compound

53

Splint box or cable box
Developing with bolting:
54 of noncombustible materials
of slow-burning materials
of combustible materials

56

Device to switch puts on fire water (red)

57

Spray, nozzle (red)

58

Water Curtain (Red)

 

__________________________

* In cases where the description of the color of the graphic is not specified, the designation is done in black.

 

If necessary, the application of the scheme to additional symbols should be guided by the relevant standards.

ANNEX 2

INSTRUCTION

The certificates of the lining of mine workings

1. Passport fixing underground workings is a document that defines adopted for the development of attachment methods, design and bolting sequence production work on the mount.

2. Passport fixing underground workings are made chief of the site (the object manufacturer work, etc.) in accordance with PPR considering geological and production features of this generation and approved by the chief engineer of a construction company.

3. Passport fixing production consists of graphic material and explanations to it.

4. Passport attachment shall contain:

a) cross-section of developing a scale of 1:50, which should be shown the configuration and size of production, the surrounding rock, design and dimensions of permanent and temporary lining and their components (including lining with TBMs), the width of the side berms Strauss, the location of haul routes , the size of gaps between bolting and electric (or trolleys) and between the loading machine and auxiliary equipment at the bottom, drain groove dimensions, etc.;

b) longitudinal section of developing a scale of 1:50, which should be reflected to the construction lining (including lining with TBMs), the spacing between the structural elements lining, length of a given piece and one stope allowable backlog of temporary and permanent lining (lining) from the working face and the like;

c) when anchored: material, direction, length, relative position of anchors and dimensions of parts lining (hole diameter, the rod and lock dimensions wedges supporting tiles grabs, metal mesh, etc.);

g) how to install roof support and the required degree of tension anchors;

d) procedures for monitoring bearing ability of lining.

5. In the notes to the celebrated graphic material requirements, compliance with which is particularly important to ensure the safety of the works.

6. When changing geological conditions passport fixing should be revised.

7. Passport fixing underground workings are prepared in duplicate for each generation and must be: one copy posted in the office of the chief of section (object), the second copy shall be posted near the corresponding face as a distinct stable image on a rigid base with indelible paint.

8. Workers and representatives of technical supervision area must be familiar with the passport fixing receipt.

9. Mining operations without an approved passport or the breach is prohibited.

 

 

 

APPENDIX 3

INSTRUCTION

VERIFICATION OF THE REVERSAL OF DEVICES

Fan installations

 

1. Reversal of air flow – artificial change in the direction of air flow in mines reversed.

Reversal should be carried out by switching ducts with suction blower, and vice versa.

 

2. State reversing devices, if provided by the project should be such that the change of direction in the workings of air jets carried out not more than 10 minutes after the reversal.

 

3. Reliability of functioning devices reversing fan installation should check the mechanic and the person responsible for airing workings, at least once a month. State reversing devices and the actual time required to switch the direction of ventilation shall be recorded in a book on the attached form.

 

4. In the presence of ventilation shaft on the two fans – working and back – check reversing device is held in a closed Schieber first backup in the fan, and then, after starting the backup fan in normal ventilation and stop working, – the second fan.

 

5. Responsibility for the state of reversible devices bear the chief mechanic of the organization.

 

6. System developments, which will facing air stream must meet the following requirements:

a) the resistance of the system shall not be less resistance in the normal workings of the movement of the air stream in order to avoid a significant increase in the amount of air supplied by the fan and motor overload it;

b) resistance to reverse jet openings should not substantially exceed the normal winding resistance in order to avoid reducing the amount of air supplied by the fan, to a value below 60% of the normal flow rate.

 

7. By reversing the air stream necessary to observe the state of the fan motor, so it does not overload.

 

8. At the time of air flow reverse the number of people in underground mines and their location sets the chief engineer of the organization, which also solves the problem of the need to withdraw from the working faces for a fresh approach or on the surface.

 

9. By reversing the air flow in the production of any work faces prohibited.

 

10. By reversing the air flow must be established and recorded in the inspection report reversal:

a) depression created by a fan to reversion and reversions;

b) the capacity of the fan (m / s) to the reversion and reversions;

c) the time, the debt on the change in direction of the jet, and the transition back to the normal direction;

g) the duration of the fan when overturned jet;

d) all shortcomings identified in the state and reversing fan installation devices.

 

11. Checking reversing the air flow is led by Chief Engineer (Technical Manager), chief mechanic organization in the presence of mine rescue and made an act that should be attached to the plan of liquidation of the accident. Air measurements at sites and a set of air samples in the faces when reversing jets conducted respiratorschik VGSCH.

 

12. Acts check air flow reverse should be directed VGSCH.

 

13. After each test if the reversing devices (not to reverse the air flow) all produce must be ventilated normal jet at least 15 minutes before the start of work must be inspected ventilation supervision.

 

14. Serviceability of the air handling unit should check mechanic plot or his assistant at least once a week. The results of the inspection shall be entered in the “Book fan installations inspection and verification of reversion.”

 

15. ”Book fan installations inspection and verification reversion” consists of two sections. Section I “Inspection fan installations” contains a record of an inspection of these installations. These settings inspect every person appointed as a mechanic, and weekly – mechanic area. All comments, identified as a result of the inspection, the book is written in the pages designated for each fan unit. At the top of each page is written fan installation location (trunk hole and others), as well as the type and number of fan operating unit and the remaining observations are recorded in the book graphs.

Acceptance fan installation after repair mechanic carries. About the quality of the repair mechanic makes appropriate entries in the book.

Section II “Inspection and testing devices reversible reversion fans” written examination results of all reversing devices and verify their reversion.

Serviceability action reversing devices must be inspected at least once a month. Verify the operation of reversing devices simultaneously metering the amount of air and gas in the mines, as well as verification of the ventilation circuit with reverse ventilation are required to spend time off at least twice a year.

The results of inspection and testing devices reversing fan reversal recorded in Section II of the book.

 

 


BOOK AND INSPECTION fan installations

Reversal checking

 

Section I. Inspection fan installations

Fitting Position fan ______________________________________________________

 

Fan type and number of the unit __________________________________________________

 

Day, month, year

The results of the inspection of the fan, noticed defects

Description of measures to eliminate the defects

Deadline for inspection fan installations

Signature of the person who examined the fan installation

1

2

3

4

5

Section II. Inspection and testing of reversing devices

reversion fan

 

Fitting Position fan ______________________________________________________

 

Fan type and number of the unit __________________________________________________

 

Day, month, year

Defects found during the inspection reversing devices

Planned activities to eliminate defects found

Length change the direction of air flow, min

The amount of air released to the generation after rollover air flow, m / s

The amount of air released to the generation after rollover air flow,% of the normal flow of air

Signature persons who conducted the inspection and verification of reversion fan

Instructions of the chief engineer to improve the ventilation unit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

     

 

       

MODEL LABEL

_______________________________________

(Organization, site)

BOOK

inspection fan installations

and checking reversion

Started ____________________________________

Over __________________________________

ANNEX 4

INSTRUCTION air sampling

1. This Instruction establishes the procedure for selection in mines air sampling under these Rules and the Uniform Rules safety during blasting operations.

 

2. Mine air sampling for laboratory analysis is performed by employees VGSCH special plan (Form 1) in the presence of a representative of the organization. Allowed if necessary More samples to produce by the employees of the organization.

 

3. Sampling plan drawn up for the quarter mining engineer OSH organization agreed with the unit commander and approved by the mine rescue chief engineer organization.

 

4. In the days specified sampling plan air sampler samples received in the laboratory VGSCH filled act attire (Form 3 and 4) and on arrival at the facility makes his boss portion (overman). Foreman (overman) reviews and signs the act of attire, and, if necessary, revise it, and confirm each with his signature.

 

5. Responsibility for proper selection sampling locations shall be representative of the organization, and for the proper execution of selection – VGSCH sampler.

 

6. During air sampling compositor samples in the “Note” act-dress Jot environment and conditions under which the measurement is made of gases and air sampling, including:

6.1. Enabled or stopped when the air handling unit air sampling and the distance from the bottom to the last level of ventilation pipes.

6.2. How much longer after the explosion of air sampling (conducted with the use of blasting).

6.3. How much longer after welding air sampling (for the cases of air sampling for outgoing air flow from the weld).

 

7. In the mines, where the content of harmful gases in the air above the maximum allowable concentrations, as well as to establish time airing after slaughter experienced blasting air sampling should be carried out in the mine rescue workers insulating respirators.

 

8. Samples taken for checking the composition of air, should characterize the average concentrations of gases in the air jets cross sections (average samples).

 

9. Analysis of air sample must be done by carbon dioxide, methane, oxygen, carbon monoxide, and of the charging chamber, moreover – with hydrogen.

Air samples from the workings developed by drilling and blasting, must be analyzed for carbon dioxide, methane, oxygen, carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, regardless of how much time has passed since the explosion.

If signs of hydrogen sulfide and sulfur dioxide samples were analyzed for the content of these gases.

During the construction of shallow tunnels closed way in localities, especially near the communications, storage, etc., must be carried out sampling and analysis of air on the allocation of petrol vapor or gas.

 

10. Simultaneously, air sampling should be carried out of the mine air temperature measurement, gas metering devices GC type and SHI.

 

11. Mine air samples are taken in the following locations of underground workings:

11.1. When the suction method of ventilation:

- On the surface at the mouth of the barrel air supply generation, galleries, the tunnel;

- On the output in each slaughter (on site) jet ventilation in 10-15 m from the interface with the output of another;

- 10 m from the beginning of each horizontal generation, supply air;

- In the slaughter of people in the workplace;

- At the mouth of the suction vent pipes (outgoing jet area);

- In the diffuser main fan (total outgoing jet).

11.2. When the discharge process of airing:

- On the surface in the suction pipe main fan (total incoming stream);

- In a deadlock generation part for outgoing stream 10 meters before pairing with another elaboration;

- At the mouth of the pipe, supply air to the face (incoming jet area);

- In the slaughter of people in the workplace;

- In the development of 10-15 m from the outcrop (mouth generation) – the total outgoing jet.

11.3. With any method of ventilation:

- All cells;

- When passing shafts at a distance of 1/3, 2/3 of the depth of the mouth and at the bottom;

- From skazhin, piper.

 

12. To check for air during blasting operations sampling should be carried out in the mine at the place of work of people at the time specified in the passport of blasting, but not earlier than 15 minutes. Samples are taken at least once a month, and when the passport blasting.

 

13. When the operational analysis of mine air using GC instruments and interferometers measurements should be made at the mouth of production, in the middle, at the bottom and in the workplace. Analysis of the composition of the air must be in accordance with the instructions and regulations on the use of devices.

 

14. Results of the measurements of gas and temperature, as well as coming from laboratory analyzes VGSCH mine air samples recorded by the responsible person in the “Book of accounting results of the analysis of air samples for dust and gas pollution” (Appendix 17), stored at the head of the site (the object).

 

15. When welding in underground mines responsible for the hot work face measure the amount of carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen in the field of welding and outbound from these places vent streams where there are or may be people. In cases of excess gas content above acceptable norms welding work must stop and take measures to ensure normal ventilation regime. The results of measurements with a high content of harmful impurities and measures adopted to improve ventilation recorded in “Book of accounting results of the analysis of air.”

 

16. Monitoring the quality of the implementation of measures to combat the dust carried by VGSCH air sampling to determine its dust. Sampling on the dustiness of air necessary to make at least once a month.

 

17. Sampling is carried out on the dusty air in all the places dust during the execution of each process (drilling, loading operations, etc.) in accordance with the plans of dust sampling (Form 2) and filled in the laboratory acts VGSCH-dresses (Form 5).

 

18. Dust sampling should be carried out at a distance of 1.5-2 m from the source of dust. Allonge filter should be directed toward the dust flow at right angles at a height of 1.5 m from the ground.

 

19. Duration of sampling in a continuous process – 15 minutes. In the case of high dust content of mine air (about 400-1000 mg per 1 m ) sampling time is reduced to 5 minutes.

 

20. Determination of dust in mine air produced “method of determining the mass concentration of aerosols (dust) with a filter.”

 

21. During accidents and other emergency air sampling procedure is set chief engineer (responsible supervisor of the emergency response) and the unit commander VGSCH.

 

Form 1

Organization ________________________

 

Plot ____________________________

 

AGREED:

 

Command __________________________

___________________________________

(Name of the platoon, detachment)

 

“” ______________________ ’19

 

APPROVED:

 

Chief engineer

 

____________________________________

 

“” _________________________ ’19

PLAN

air sampling on _______________________ half ’19

Category mine gas _______________________________________________________

 

Number p / p

Name workings

Place of sampling

Number of samples per quarter

What gases to analyze samples

Note

           

 

 

 

Composed by:

 

position ________________________

(Signature, name)

 ”" ___________________ ’19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Form 2

 

Organization _______________________

 

Plot ___________________________

 

AGREED:

 

Command _________________________

__________________________________

(Name of the platoon, detachment)

 

“” _____________________ ’19

APPROVED:

Chief engineer

 

______________________________

 

“” _____________________ ’19

 


PLAN

dust sampling on _______________________ half of ’19

Number p / p

Name generation

Sampling (room picket or distance from mating with any elaboration)

Under what works sampled

The free silica,%

Number of selections

Note

             

 

 

 

Composed by:

 

post _______________________

(Signature, name)

 

“” ________________________ ’19

 

 

Form 3

ACP-JOB

for air sampling in the area (mine) ____________________

 

 

Organization ____________________________________________________________________

 

Sampling performed sampler ___________ platoon VGSO ____________________

 

______________________ And a representative portion ___________________________________

(Surname)

 

________________________________________________________________________________

(Title and surname)

“” _________________ ’19 __________ Shift in the following mines:

 

 

Number p / p Name workings and sampling locations Number of vessels (samples)

Measurements

Note

2 , NO 2

CH 4

CO 2

CO

T °

 

 

Foreman _______________

(Signature)

Sampler ______________________

(Signature)

Representative portion _______________

(Signature)

 

Mine air samples in the amount deposited in the lab ______________________

 

“” ___________________ ___________________ In ’19 hour min ____________

 

Samples accepted techniques ______________________

(Signature)

Form 4

ACP-JOB

for air sampling after blasting

On the site (mine) ____________________ Organization ______________________________

 

Sampling performed proborootbrschikom _________ platoon VGSO _____________________

 

________________________ And a representative portion ________________________________

(Surname)

 

_______________________________________________________________________________

(Title and surname)

“” _____________ ’19 ____________ Change in the following mines:

 

 

Number p / p

Name workings

Sampling

Time after which the samples are taken after the explosion

Rooms

Terms of air sampling 

Camera

Container (bottle)

2

CH 4

CO 2

CO

NO 2

5

 

 

 

Foreman _______________

(Signature)

Sampler ______________________

(Signature)

The representative of the mine area __________

(Signature)

 

Mine air samples in the amount deposited in the laboratory _________________

 

“” _______________ ’19 Hour ___________________ in ____________ minutes

 

Samples received technician __________________

(Signature)

 

Form 5

Organization ___________________

 

Mine site _________________

 

 

ACP-JOB number ________________

for dust sampling

Sampling performed proborootborschikom _________________________________________

(Surname, name of the platoon, detachment)

 

Representative portion ____________________________________________________________

(Title and surname)

 

“” ______________ To _______________ ’19 replaced by the following roadways:

 

Number p / p

Name generation

Sampling (room picket or distance from mating with kakoylibo elaboration) Work is performed under any dust sampling

Operating mechanisms

Methods of dust control

The number of workers in the sampling sites

Number of filters

Duration of sampling, min.

Volumetric flow rate pulling air through the filter The content of free silica,% Note

type

k-in

         

 

             

 

 

Foreman _______________

(Signature)

Sampler ______________________

(Signature)

Representative portion ________________

(Signature)

 

The samples were put into the lab in the amount of _______________ ________________

(Date and time)

 

Samples accepted techniques ____________________

(Signature)

 

ANNEX 5

INSTRUCTION

Anti-dust MECHANICAL Burenin

Holes in ROCKS

1. When tunneling mining using drilling projects should provide for ways and means of dust control by flushing with water holes and wells during drilling. In mines and other facilities underground construction in such cases must be installed plumbing technology. You can use special dust control fire main. Water supplied for drilling with flushing, must comply with the current GOST “drinking water”.

 

2. For dust suppression allowed the use of dry dust collection using portable or semi-permanent dust extraction systems.

In all cases, evaluation of the effectiveness of dust control equipment should be done at least once a month by the sampling and analysis of air samples.

 

3. Pneumatic borers should have special devices for drilling with flushing:

a) under axial flushing – water conveyance pipe;

6) at the side of the washing – a special clutch.

 

4. Water from the water supply to the washing machine for drilling holes and wells must be used as pressure hose internal diameter not less than 13 mm. Quantity of water supplied must be controlled with a crane situated not more 0.3 m from the drilling machine. The water pressure must be at least 0.2 MPa lower than the pressure of the compressed air.

 

5. Running Water tube should be straight with no distortions and imbalances. Plot water conducting tube, part of the shank of the drill must have a minimum length of 25 mm. Control over the length of the tube and the tube free entry should be made using a template.

 

6. Clutch side for washing must be firmly pushed onto the drill, when the maximum pressure is not leaking water between the drill and the sealing cuff and not create resistance to rotation of the drill rod.

 

7. Water consumption during the drilling of holes must be made depending on the speed of drilling in the range of 4 to 15 l / min. In the case of drilling holes in rocks containing more than 15% clay (viscous substances), water consumption for washing shall be increased by 50%, while drilling holes downward angle greater than 30 ° to the horizon – 30%.

 

8. Water consumption for washing when drilling holes and wells must be specified in PPR and checked at least once a month using a water meter. The water pressure should be 0.3-0.5 MPa and established empirically based provide the required flow of water.

Allowed to produce dust control while drilling through the mouth hole irrigation water using a circular sprinklers, as well as the use of special additives.

 

9. Cutters and crowns rods should have two holes aimed at culling hole diameter 4-4.5 mm at a flow rate of water for washing up to 15 l / min and 6.8 mm – with its high expense.

Profile and cross-section rods should provide maximum stiffness buckling, while the area of the gap between the walls of the hole and the drill rod should be at least 6.5 cm .

Prohibited drilling blunt drill bits, if the width of the working area of ​​a rectangular plate is greater than 2.5 mm and a wedge – 2 mm.

 

10. When starting to work with the drill axis washing first turned on the air and then water. When the water is turned off, first stopped and then the air.

 

11. When applying dry dedusting drilling tool must meet the following requirements: incisors and crown should have two suction holes located at a minimum distance from the bottom of the hole, with a total area of openings not less than 3 cm - in the incisors and 1.5 cm - in crowns; drilling rod shall be made ​​of seamless steel pipe inner diameter of 18-24 mm.

Air flow rate (m / min), sucked from the bottom of the hole, should be as given below.

 

 

Direction of drilling holes

Drilling speed, mm / min

less than 300

300

400

500

600

700

Horizontal

0.35

0.45

0.50

0.60

0.65

0.70

Revolting

0.60

0.60

0.65

0.70

0.70

0.70

 

 

For dust removal from the mouth of the hole (well) the amount of exhausted air should be increased by 2 times.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX 6

INSTRUCTION

MANUFACTURING welding and other hot work

Underground mine and pithead

 

1. Production in underground welding and hot work, and the use blowtorches allowed with the permission of the chief or the mechanics of the site. These works must be carried out in the presence of persons of technical supervision and subject to safeguards.

 

Note. If autogenous welding and work are part of the process and implemented in time bolting device, the construction of the metal cladding of the tunnel, installation of metal structures and equipment, the special permit for their implementation does not require the constant presence of a person and technical supervision at the venue for these works is optional.

 

The order of such works must be defined special instruction approved by the chief engineer of the organization, and issued attire shall include the necessary security measures.

 

2. Each permit for production welding and hot work, as well as the use blowtorches in underground mines is written in the book of orders and made an act-dress.

 

3. Welders and welders should be entitled to the production of works in the underground workings.

 

4. All flammable materials (oil, hemp, cotton waste, wood chips, etc.) must be removed to a distance of not less than 20 m from the welding area.

 

5. When welding, wood or other combustible parts of the building, located on the weld area at a distance of up to 2 m, must be protected with asbestos or steel sheets.

 

6. When changing the electrodes during welding electrodes residues should be disposed of in a special metal box installed at the weld.

 

7. The place of production welding should be Extinguishing Media: two fire extinguishers or hose with a fire hose attached to the fire water line, or trolley (barrel) with a supply of water for at least 1 m 3 and a sand box.

 

8. If welding work is performed in the horizontal development of fixed tree, it prior to welding and after them moisturized for 10 m on both sides of the place of production welding.

 

9. When welding in the vertical and inclined workings resurfacing enshrined fireproof crepe, but with wood paneling ladder compartment or a reinforcement of wood (conductors or shootings), additional measures should be taken to exclude sparks on the wooden parts of reinforcement or trim ladder compartment.

In vertical and inclined shafts with wooden bolting welding work can be done only with the special permission of the chief engineer of the organization.

 

10. After finishing welding face technical supervision writes in the book orders the start and end of welding, inspection of the result of production of welding after his preventive treatment, names of the persons performing the work.

 

11. Before welding on copra at the mouth of the barrel, as well as at a distance of 5 m from the trunk it should be blocked by fire lyadami. Before starting work, pile driver should be cleaned of grease and dust at a distance of not less than 5 m from the place of work.

When it is impossible to ensure the establishment of normal ventilation mode when closed Lyady people from the underground workings must be withdrawn.

 

12. When welding in the backrooms on the surface of the weld metal sheets is necessary to protect a minimum height of 1.5 m, posed butt.

 

 

 

ANNEX 7

INSTRUCTION

FIRE PROTECTION UNDERGROUND OPENINGS

 

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1. Each object underground construction shall be provided with fire equipment and fire extinguishing agents.

 

1.2. To determine the types and amounts necessary firefighting equipment and fire-fighting equipment for underground construction of each object must be drawn design for fire protection (PFP).

 

1.3. In HAG should provide for the use of existing fire roads and drainage pipelines.

 

1.4. Firefighters pipelines must be protected from freezing.

 

 

 

 

 

2. FIRE PROTECTION construction site

2.1. Construction sites should have fire water pipe with a pressure therein of not less than 0.4 and not more than 1.0 MPa.

 

2.2. Fire safety of buildings and structures provided dolzhka development in the project:

- A system of measures to prevent fire;

- Measures of fire protection systems.

 

2.3. As a reserve supply of water for fire water can be used headers dewatering plants and other generation, filled with water.

 

2.4. For fire safety headgears, trunk racks (where there is space heating) on ​​each of the mark must be installed fire hydrants 70 mm in diameter in the amount – for the project.

To protect headgears shafts, not secured heated on fire pipeline construction site fire hydrants shall be installed at a distance of not more than 50 m from the trunk.

 

2.5. The mouth of the vertical shafts depth of 120 m shall be equipped with metal fire lyadami. Manage closing Ladi should be double of pithead copra and beyond.

 

2.6. The mouth of the vertical shafts depth of 120 m or more shall be fitted with a ring conduits Water-spraying nozzles.

Valves for water supply to the annular conduit trunk should be kept out of copra and be prevented from freezing in winter.

 

2.7. On vertical trunks are laid in accordance with the project batsmen fire technological aqueducts.

 

2.8. On overpasses, galleries adjacent to headgears, should be run with fire suhotruboprovody Water-spraying nozzles.

 

2.9. Priportalnye building during construction of tunnels, transport and drainage tunnels, usually should be constructed of non-combustible materials.

 

 

 

3. FIRE PROTECTION UNDERGROUND OPENINGS

3.1. In underground mines shall be provided fire laying pipe diameter 50-100 mm, a minimum bandwidth of 60 m 3 / h This pipeline during construction can be used for technological needs.

 

3.2. If there are two parallel horizontal workings downed between a Breakthrough in no less than 100 m, fire and water technology can be routed to one of them, and fire hydrants on sboyka imposed in the second generation.

 

3.3. Camera main drainage, electric battery charging, electrical substations, tool must have bends with fire cocks.

 

3.4. Lagging all fire-technological plumbing from the bottom no more than 30 m length or technological complex. At the end of the conduit installed fire hydrants. Boxes with fire hoses and nozzles are transferred as face advance.

 

3.5. On fire-water pipe technology must be installed fire hydrants in the following locations:

- In the pit bottom, in chambers or at the entrance to them, in other underground mines, depending on the type of lining, and other conditions, but not less than 100 m;

- Everyone in the warehouse Walker explosive materials (VM) on both sides at a distance of 10 m;

- At intersections and junctions of roadways;

- In the approach roadways, tunnels and station distillation, the main tunnels, transport and drainage tunnels without intersections and branch – every 100 m;

- In inclined workings – over 50 m;

- In the bottom zone – within 50 m from the face or tunnel complexes.

 

3.6. To disable individual sections of fire-technological or plumbing supply the entire mass of water on one portion of pipeline valves are installed in the following locations:

- In all branches of water lines, having at least three fire hydrants;

- At water lines having no branches – every 400 m

 

3.7. Fire and water pipes must be fitted with technology distribution and pressure regulating devices.

 

3.8. The cells or where Administers oils, as well as the equipment is installed with oil-filled, floor (sole) must be made of non-combustible, non-sparking materials, sand, replaceable when dirty.

 

3.9. Designated sludge, repair and maintenance. Machinery and equipment must be equipped with means of primary fire (fire extinguishers, sand boxes, etc.).

 

 

 

 

 

4. ACCOMMODATION primary means of fire

4.1. Primary means of fire (fire extinguisher, sand, etc.) should be located:

a) in the cells permanently manned at workplace duty personnel;

b) in the cells with a non-manned service personnel – at the entrance to the chamber;

c) in the faces workings – not farther than 30 m from the working face (two hand fire extinguisher and a sand box with a capacity of 0.2 m 3 );

g) in horizontal workings (the approach, tunnels, transport tunnels, drainage and transport tunnels) having a flame-retardant lining – every 300 m (two hand fire extinguisher and a sand box with a capacity of 0.2 m 3 ). In addition, in one of the mines equipped place (check with locomotive haulage) for parking mobile powder fire extinguisher.

In the workings of transport with internal combustion engines on one construction site should be dry powder extinguishing installation. In mines with flammable bolting – every 200 m (two hand fire extinguisher and a sand box with a capacity of 0.2 m 3 ).

 

4.2. Before enrolling in the required amount of manual powder extinguishers may temporarily replace their manual foam fire extinguishers.

 

4.3. Accommodation extinguishers and other fire-fighting equipment in the surface buildings and structures shall be in accordance with the Model Rules of fire safety for industrial enterprises.

 

4.4. In all places of storage firefighting equipment posted signs reading “Fire Extinguishers”, “sand”, “Fire Shield”. Colouring fire boards, boxes with sand and other fire-fighting equipment must be carried out according to GOST “Colors signaling and safety signs.”

 

4.5. Do gornoprohodcheskih complexes with hydraulic having refueling capacities for oil, fire extinguishers and sand boxes placed at a distance with the design of the complex, and in agreement with the commander VGSO serving the construction project.

 

 

 

5. FIRE DOORS

5.1. Underground chamber fixed installations, central electrical substations, converter and charging facilities for electric garages, repair shops should have fire doors that open outward with a locking device on each output and metal Lyady in ventilation ducts. Fire doors should be installed in salable camera at a distance of not more than 3 m from the interface with the adjacent elaboration or niche.

 

 

6. WAREHOUSE FIRE EQUIPMENT

AND MATERIALS

 

6.1. Organizations created warehouse fire fighting equipment and materials.

 

6.2. In underground mines creates an emergency stock of materials, tools, equipment, and other fire protection in accordance with the PLA.

 

 

 

7. CAMERA-SEEKERS AND EXCHANGE POINTS selfrescuers

 

7.1. During the construction of long (longer than 3 thousand meters) transport and other tunnels without sboek other workings or surface should get asylum (camera) to shelter workers, self-rescuers replace used or waiting until the arrival of mine rescue aid offices.

 

7.2. Camera-seekers must meet the following requirements:

- In working order must be sealed against the ingress of external mine air;

- The area of the chamber is determined by the rate of 0.8-1 m per person and cover all workers in the area of the camera-seekers;

- Height of the chamber is not less than 2.3 m, width of not less than 2.5 m;

- Term protection of working at least 24 hours

 

7.3. The method of ventilation chambers shelters:

- In boreholes with surface;

- Compressed air from the duct;

- Using filtered ventilation systems, cleaning the air of poisonous gases before entering the chamber;

- Bottles of compressed air or oxygen.

 

7.4. Camera-seekers should be provided:

- Electricity for lighting self-commissioning, if the camera does not provide rechargeable lamps;

- Telephone;

- Self-rescuers (the maximum number of employees in the change) is not less than 15 pc.;

- Fire extinguishers in an amount not less than 5 pcs.;

- Medical stretcher 2 pcs.;

- Compartment with a capacity of 0.2 m clay ;

- Bench (by sheltering people);

- First aid kit with medicines.

 

 

 

8. DRAFT fire protection facilities

Fire protection project construction of the underground facility is part of the construction project (PIC) developed and design organizations.

 

8.1. Fire protection project construction of the underground facility shall contain the following sections:

- Brief description of the construction project;

- Fire protection facilities located within the construction site;

- Fire protection headgears, overpasses, trunks, portals;

- Underground fire water.

 

8.2. The content of sections of the project fire protection.

 

8.2.1. Brief description of the facility construction.

In the section “Brief description of the construction project” shall be given the following information:

- Name of the facility underground construction;

- Location of the facility;

- Discharge limits and dimensions (land and mining) under construction;

- Characteristic of underground construction;

- The location of the mouths of the workings within the retraction;

- The presence of natural and artificial water bodies within the building site;

- Ways and methods of construction of an underground facility;

- Ventilation system of mine workings and characteristics of fans;

- Characteristics of mine water.

 

8.2.2. Fire protection facilities on site.

This section should be given information about the actual condition and design decisions:

- For fire protection facilities located at the construction site;

- On water mains, reservoirs, tanks, designed to fire;

- Of pumping stations (number, type of fire pumps, performance, pressure, electricity, etc.) used for fire water supply;

- Independent sources of fire water underground workings, fire reservoirs on the surface, the fire water;

- On the surface fire water supply (water pipe diameter, placing it on the hydraulic fittings – hydrants, fire hydrants, valves);

- Of special devices and sequence of their use for the water supply to the drainage, the air guide thoroughfares of the fire in the mine workings;

- On the location of the warehouse and completeness of fire fighting equipment and materials.

 

8.2.3. Fire sewn headgears, racks, shafts, portals.

In this section, shall be given the necessary calculations on fire water protection headgears (installation locations and the number of sprinklers, valves, fire hydrants).

Data on special measures for protection mouths vertical shafts (fire water curtains, fire Lyady) of fire protection far away from the construction site of vertical openings (fire pumps, tanks with a reserve of water for fire fighting, water curtains, fire water supply), the use and inclusion in order suhotruboprovodnyh networks work on tracks, scat, portals and other areas near the mouths of the workings, the mine feed clean air.

 

8.2.4. Fire protection of underground workings.

In “Fire protection of underground workings” should be developed following questions:

- The alignment of the primary means of fire (type, number and location);

- Fire protection of underground chambers: the central power substation, main drainage, storage VM, etc.;

- The place of installation of fire doors, portable, stationary, mobile and automatic fire-fighting equipment;

- Location of emergency stocks of materials, tools, equipment, and other fire protection;

- The place of installation of fire shields, fire hoses and other remedies.

By this section must also be accompanied by the necessary calculations and graphics.

 

8.2.5. Underground fire water.

This section should be developed following questions:

- Equipment shafts pipelines used to supply water to the fire (diameter pipeline, the installation location of stop, distribution and control water pressure valves, quantity and characteristics);

- Installation of switching devices for supplying water from the drainage line composition in fire-technological plumbing and water supply pipeline for compressed air and other types of pipelines adapted to the needs of the fire;

- Fire-wiring process piping in mine workings showing the locations of placement of fire hydrants, valves and pumping stations, fire characteristics of the process pipe (diameter, water consumption and pressure in the most remote points of water consumption);

- Placement of stationary devices for fire extinguishing and fire creating water curtain.

In this section, shall be given graphic documentation (layout fire process piping, drainage and other pipelines in mines, pumping stations, switching nodes), calculate water supply schemes of individual sections of the workings of the object (depending on need).

 

8.3. Mandatory graphic documentation.

 

8.3.1. To characterize the actual situation of the project fire protection facility underground construction should contain the following basic graphical documentation:

- Site plan with the application circuit water system, used in order to fire, and placements indicating fire reservoirs, pumping stations, warehouses, fire materials and driveways;

- Fire protection scheme mouths trunks headgears, trestles and other surface structures;

- Circuit devices pump fire station and fire pond;

- Plan of underground workings (the approach roadway, distillation, station tunnels), pit bottom, indicating placement of fire equipment and fire-circuit application process line designation actual and projected values ​​of flow and pressure of water at the end points, stop and control hydraulic devices, fire doors, hand placements, stationary and mobile fire extinguishers and their number.

 

8.3.2. If the construction project is a complex network of underground workings, be the display of the individual elements of fire protection in part to the copy on the circuit or in the form of special circuits (drainage scheme, the scheme of the air pipe, etc.).

 

8.3.3. When drafting fire protection should be used signs given in the legend of Annex 1 (PLA) of this Regulation.

 

ANNEX 8

 

INSTRUCTION

ON TESTING OF MINE parachutes lifting equipment

 

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1. The test must be conducted with parachutes each installation of new parachutes, after repair and operation at least once every six months.

 

2. Parachute device must be replaced together with the cage, and parachutes with grippers for brake cables – not less than 5 years. Allowed to use parachute devices only prefabricated prohibited to make them interchangeable parts that do not meet the design requirements and specifications.

 

3. For maintenance and repair should be guided by: instructions for operation and maintenance of parachute device description principle and adjustment method, type, size and method of attachment of conductors, conductors wear tolerance and individual parts of parachutes.

At the kinematic scheme of the parachute device to be controlled shows the main dimensions of the elements of the transmission mechanism in the transport position and the braking torque, including the length of the spring in a free condition of the parachute, and the transport position at the moment of capture catcher wire (rope brake).

 

4. Parachute test devices of all types (PTC, PCL, DP, etc.) are allowed to carry out over the mouth of the trunk or in the pit bottom. For testing over the mouth of the barrel at the zero of the area shall be blocked solid flooring, designed for dynamic load of free fall from the height of the laden stand 1.5 m when tested in the pit bottom must be provided to safeguard workers from possible falling objects from above.

 

5. Before the test, the parachute installation (catcher, dampers, couplings, force limiters), hangers, brake cables and conductors must be inspected.

Inspection catcher parachute installation must be carried out in the process of dismantling and cleaning after installation stand on stem overlap, they must also be assessed the degree of wear and integrity of the individual components and structural elements. Information must be cleaned of dirt, grease and old, if necessary, replaced with new ones.

 

6. After assembly and adjustment of the safety gear must be made at least three trial hoisting rope tension before the start of the lift cage overlapping trunk with consequent reduction of tension. At the same time, depending on the design catchers should be checked:

a) the possibility of free movement of all parts of the mechanism, including the stem, levers, wedges and traverse (mortise seizures);

b) stroke catcher for filling rope (not to exceed 3/4 of its maximum length);

c) clearance between the upper plate and the base plate of the drive spring in the transport position (should be 10 mm);

d) the gap between the brake lining and wall surfaces of the wedge and the catcher inoperative (transport) position (should be 5-8 mm);

d) the axis of the guide sleeve should coincide with the axis of the brake cable. Wear on the side of the sleeves should not exceed 3 mm and 5 mm, the catcher in the bottom of the cage;

e) the gap between the grips catcher mortise construction and conductor in the transport position, the gaps between the rails and legs stand conductors.

 

7. When testing requirements should be considered parachutes factory instructions. Parachutes lifting equipment with a pulley friction and lifting equipment with the lower balancing rope shall be tested after being detached from the cage lifting and lower the counterweight ropes. In these cases, the crate should be further placed a load equal to the weight of the equilibration Detached bottom rope.

TEST parachute catcher

Mortise DESIGN

8. Tests are carried out in two stages: preliminary and final. For preliminary tests laden maximum load crate floor decking is installed on the mine shaft, the hoisting rope was admitted to full-expanding drive spring parachute central rod (or chain) associated with the drive spring and shell, disconnected. Crate remains connected to the hoisting rope through the safety chain.

Crate when liberated parachute device rises above the bottom winding machine for the first time to a height of not more than 300 mm, and the second time – to a height of not more than 600 mm and after each lift is lowered slowly to a halt, and the lapping of the rope.

If such a test at each cage stops as a result of catchers in the area of ​​not more than 200 mm, you can proceed to the ultimate test.

 

9. For the final test cage laden maximum load, floor decking is installed on the mine shaft, safety chains detach from the shell and between the shell and the pivot rod (or chain) is set to disconnect the device from the mill shell.

Thereafter cage winding machine rises above the bottom to a height of 1 m, and stops by pushing the lever device is disconnected from the rope and falls freely. Such a test is carried out twice. Parachutes deemed satisfactory if the path of falling stand at each of the tests does not exceed 400 mm.

 

 


TEST Parachute with wedge clamps

 

10. Tests are carried out in two stages: preliminary and final. At the first stage of the test shall be carried out without removing the hoisting rope from the trailer hitch stand. Crate rises above the bottom of the barrel on the overlap height of 0.6 m and is suspended on a wireline through rassoedinitelnoe link to the beam, temporarily installed and fastened to the copra specifically for testing purposes. Auxiliary line rectangles attached to the sling stand, while it shall remain possible free thimble lowering the hitch and move the lever-spring system catcher.

By admitting the hoisting rope up to 1 m must be actuated mechanism and the catcher made a mark on the conductors at points of contact with them wedges.

Upon release mechanism catcher remotely using rassoedinitelnogo link, cage detaches from wireline. Slippage catcher over conductors shall not exceed 300 mm. The test is performed at least twice.

 

11. With the positive results of preliminary tests Deadeye disconnected from the suspension unit and connects directly to the cage using rassoedinitelnogo hook and bars, cage rises to a height of 1.5 m above the bottom of the barrel ceilings, long arm rassoedinitelnogo hook tied to copra.

When lowering the cage is detached from the hoisting rope and verified the effectiveness of the mechanism catchers, fixed value portion slip them on leads, which should not exceed 300 mm. The test is repeated twice.

 

 

REGISTRATION TEST RESULTS

12. The test results are drawn parachute devices act which should be the committee on the results of the tests.

 

13. When conducting a monthly check the status of parachute and trailer units shall be tested is mounted on all threaded connections, the integrity of the spring catcher, reliability and availability of its mounting gap between the housing and the spring. In addition, at least once a day should be verified the possibility of free movement of all parts of the mechanism for filling rope catcher. Test results are recorded in the “Book of the inspection of the elevator installation.”

ANNEX 9

ACP-ADMISSION

 

for the production of joint work

on construction ____________________________________________________________

 

____________________________________________________________________________

(Name of the object, structure)

 

“” ___________________ ’19

We, the undersigned authorized representatives:

 

General contractor ______________________________________________________________

(Name, title, company name)

and subcontractor ____________________________________________________________

(F. and. About., Title, name of organization)

made this act as follows:

 

1. Work performance project (project name, № drawings), approved by the chief

 

engineer _________________________________________________________________

(Name of organization)

ie _________________________________________________________________________

(Full name)

 

“” ________________ ’19 Assume (consistent, inconsistent).

 

2. General contractor leases and subcontractor receives plot (object) coordinates limited

____________________________________________________________________________

(Name

____________________________________________________________________________

pickets, marks, axes, № drawings)

 

to produce it ______________________________________________________

(Name of work)

 

for construction in the next _______________________________

(Name of the object, structure)

 

terms: a “” ______________; ending “” _______________

 

Manual labor is exercised by representatives ________________________________

(Name

____________________________________________________________________________

organization)

Subcontractor accepts responsibility for: compliance in the specified bounds of order, cleanliness, safe working conditions, safety equipment, etc.

 

3. Before starting work, both sides must perform the following actions to ensure the safety of the work ______________________________________

 

 

Number p / p

Name of event

Date of performance

Performer

 

4. The procedure for using electricity subcontractor (specify the place of connection of current collectors, families of those persons. Personnel general contractor and subcontractor obliged to clarify the procedure and to provide supervision over the observance of PTE and TB)

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

5. The procedure for using subcontractor transport:

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

6. Same lifting machines (machinery):

 

6.1. Responsible for supervision of lifting machines: _________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

(Name, title, organization)

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

6.2. Responsible for the content of hoisting machines in good condition ________________________________________________________________________________

(Name, title, organization)

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

6.3. Responsible for the safe operation of materials handling cranes ________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

(Name, title, organization)

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

7. Delineation of responsibility for the safety, fire safety, and to provide compressed air, water, ventilation, sanitary and household devices, etc. _____________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

7.1. General contractor is obliged to start work: ______________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

7.2. Subcontractor agrees to start work: ______________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

8. Or other special conditions: _____________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

9. Of all the problems you are facing, mutual problem, and accidents immediately to notify the next higher ranking officers and general contractor ________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

10. Additions and changes according to the protocol from “” _______________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

 

 

Authorized representative

general contractor

 

Authorized representative

subcontractor

 

“” _____________ ’19

 

Notes.

 

1. If necessary, carry out work after expiration of this act, it is necessary to make the act of admission, admission to the new term.

 

2. More, not accounted for when signing this act, event or changes by mutual consent in the protocol and are included in paragraph 10 of this act.

 

3. This certificate-tolerance is mandatory for all employees of organizations involved in co-production work on __________________________________________________

(Name

________________________________________________________________________________

object)

and valid for the entire period of its construction.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANNEX 10

BOOK KEEPING WORK AND INSPECTION RESULTS

 MAIN FAN INSTALLATION

Number p / p

Date

Time (hour, min.)

Readings

Accounting for changes in the fans

Mark about detected violations and deviations

Surname, initials, title and signature made an entry in the book

Individual supervisory guidance on the implementation of measures to eliminate violations, change the fan mode

depression (compression) millimeter of water

air flow rate, m 3 / s

nature of the change

duration (hour, minute)

reason

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Notes to conduct “Ledger work and exam

main fan installation “

(Printed on the back of the title page)

1. The book should write every shift machinists fan installation or duty (if the remote control and monitoring devices of the fans displayed in place on duty), noting in columns 1-10 controlled parameters.

 

2. Column 3 indicates the time change shape fan mode and readings, start changing the operating mode of the fan, in column 7 – the duration of the stop or the fan in the other, with respect to normal operation. In column 6 of the symbols indicates the nature of the changed mode of the main fan: “O” – stop: “B” – absorption; “H” – injection.

 

3. In Count 9 comments on forms made of the fan bearings, motor, reversing devices, etc., found on-duty personnel. All entries in the book make the signature in box 10 of the form.

 

4. In the column 11 instructions and orders made individual technical supervision mode change ventilation, indicating performers. Here painted performers in getting jobs and carrying out these tasks.

 

5. The book is filled for each main fan installation should be strung together, numbered and stamped organization.

 

 

MODEL LABEL

____________________

organization

____________________

plot

___________________

mine

BOOK

accounting work and exam main fan installation

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 11

BOOK OSMTORA crepes and WORKING CONDITION

 

Number p / p

Date of inspection

Name generation (production area)

Character disorders and defects lining (lining), seat detection

Measures to eliminate violations, due date, responsible for carrying out the work

Surname, initials, title and signature of the technical supervision

Mark about addressing the noted violations

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Notes to conduct “Books lining inspection and condition

workings “

(Printed on the back of the title page)

1. Column 3 lists the forms consistently produce (or specific portions thereof), proven face technical supervision during the survey, and against each name in columns 4-7, respectively, are recorded and discovered violations and defects lining, measures to eliminate these violations, etc. .

 

2. Column 5 forms must sign artists for the action to fulfill the task to eliminate detected during the inspection and lining workings violations in column 6 – the face of technical supervision, to inspect and identify measures to eliminate violations.

 

 

MODEL LABEL

____________________

(Organization)

____________________

(Site)

___________________

(Mine)

BOOK

inspection and condition of the lining workings

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 12

BOOK RECORD INSPECTION RESULTS BARREL

Time fault detection

Nature of damage

Cause of Damage

Signature of the inspection and the person responsible for the condition of the barrel

Measures to address the damage

Downtime lifting h (min)

Signature of Chief Engineer

Number p / p

And month

Change and Watches

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Key to maintaining Books

 

The book is written all conductors and damage the lining of the trunk and the measures taken to eliminate them. Column 4 indicates damage irrespective of their nature and consequences. Column 5 – Causes of damage found on the site should be ascertained chief engineer organization. Column 7 lists the specific measures, such as a change of conductors, their number, etc.

Column 8 indicates the time (in hours and minutes) lift stop to eliminate damage. In the case where the liquidated damage clock stops lifting schedule and there was no downtime recovery, the column must be specified: “It was not.”

Column 9 shall be signed by the chief engineer of the organization after the liquidation of the damage with the date.

Book dolzhka be numbered, bound and stamped construction organization.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site, mine)

BOOK

record inspection results stem

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 13

INSPECTION BOOK elevator installation

 

Serial number of the record in the book

Date and time (hours) of technical inspection and repair

Type of inspection (repair)

Indication of technical inspection and detected violations

Gig

Drum (drive pulley)

Brakes

Depth Indicator

Coupling

Bearings

Electric motor

Start-up apparatus

Reduced. velocities

Signaling

Blocking

Limit switches

Lifting vessels

Suspension devices

Pulleys

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Continued application 13

Indication of technical inspection and detected violations

Surname, initials of the persons who conducted the inspection (repair)

Nature of the damage and a short description of the failure mechanism or parts, the signature of the person conducting inspection

Measures to address the damage and deterioration due date, and the name artist signed mechanical or technical supervision of the responsible person

Indication of the repair, the date and duration of downtime recovery, artist signature and the person in charge of technical supervision

Note

Trunk, Koper

Catcher parachutes

Guide shoe

Stoppers, planting his fists

Unloaders

Fenced.Lattice

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

Notes to conduct “Books inspection hoist”

1. The book is in chronological order entries are made daily on the results of daily, weekly and other types of inspection of the elevator installation, as well as in case of defects and irregularities in the operation of lift. Notes of your observations at acceptance and delivery shifts machinists lifting machine, inspection of ropes and reinforcement are made in other books under the Rules.

 

2. The book is filled with plot mechanic or a person designated pursuant to Regulation responsible for the condition and inspection of the elevator installation, and chief mechanic organization.

 

3. In columns 4-22 symbols annotation satisfactory results verification (“P”), the detection of a fault (“H”) or put a dash if one or the other object is not scanned.

 

4. Column 3 indicate the type inspection: Daily (TS-1), weekly (TS-2), etc.

 

Note. List the types and composition of specific maintenance, regulated by these Rules and the legal and technical documentation of manufacturers should be defined in the instructions organizations developed in relation to specific used the elevator installation.

 

5. In column 23, the names of persons engaged in inspection, written on a single line with a legend the tested these individuals objects.

Column 24 shows all detected defects and damage as marked symbols in columns 4-22, and any others.

 

6. In column 27, the chief mechanic or chief engineer organization confirms simple hoist, introduces additional guidance on the safe operation of the elevator installation. Chief Engineer of the organization should at least once a month to view records in the book.

 

7. The book should be numbered, bound and stamped organization. Persons entrusted with making entries in the book, should be familiar with the notes to the conduct of a receipt book.

 

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

Mine number __________________

BOOK

inspection of the elevator installation

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 14

INSPECTION BOOK hoisting ropes and spending

Number p / p

Date of inspection

Rope left

Rope right

Signature mine mechanic and chief mechanic organization

Note

Total number of wire breaks

The number of wire breaks in step-lay rope

Distance most damaged section of rope at the end of the cage, m

Signature of inspection

Total number of wire breaks

The number of wire breaks in step-lay rope

Distance most damaged section of rope at the end of the cage, m

Signature of inspection

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Notes to conduct “inspection of the hoisting ropes Books

and consumption “

1. Column 4 indicates the highest number of broken wires in step-lay in the most damaged areas of the rope.

2. In the column section 12 mechanic made information on the ropes: The date of manufacture and produce; manufacturer, serial number, GOST, design and rope lay; rope diameter (for factory data), certificate number and date of testing of the rope; static load on the rope and reserve his strength, date and reason for removing the rope.

In addition, the cell 12 entries are about the length of the rope sample for testing; rope lubrication; movement “critical” area with multilayer coiling rope and other normalized work of the ropes.

3. The book should be strung together, numbered and stamped organization.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

inspection of the hoisting ropes and their flow

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

 

ANNEX 15

ACCEPTANCE AND BOOK DONATION Change Machinist

LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Number p / p

Date and time (hours) delivery change

Surname, initials driver accepting change

Mark of inspection and serviceability of the main objects of the winding machine

Receipt acceptance of change

Remarks

Fire-fighting equipment

Clean room

Brake

Drums (drive pulley) and lining

Depth Indicator, speedometers

Grease

Remote control, alarm

Lock protection equipment

Working

Safety

Bearings

Gear

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

                           

 

Notes to conduct “Books acceptance and delivery shifts machinists

hoist “

1. The book recorded results every shift inspection winder, while in columns 4-13 form symbols driver makes a mark on satisfactory results of the audit (“P”) and is obliged to column 15 decipher their comments on the results of the external examination, inspection and lifting vessels ferrying ” idle “. Column 15 machinists can make notes on the state of the elements of a lifting machine, which is not reflected in columns 4-13. In the same column painted faces Technical Supervision (plot and organization) for inspection of its finding.

 

2. The book should be strung together, numbered and stamped organization. Persons entrusted with making entries in the book, should be familiar with these explanations under the painting.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

acceptance and delivery shifts machinists hoist

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 16

Fitting Position pump unit __________________________

 

Type (brand) of the pump motor _______________ _________________

 

Serial number of the pump motor ___________ _________________

 

 

INSPECTION BOOK drainage installations

Number p / p

Date of inspection (repair)

Any faults, the nature of their display

Mark on the implementation of the elimination of faults

Surname, initials, title, and signature

Note

pumping unit

drainage pipe

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes to conduct “inspection Books drainage installations”

1. ”The book …” filled in chronological order for each pump unit. Allowed accounting for individual units on different pages in one “book …”. In the latter case, on the first page is a list of pumping units and page numbers.

2. In column 6 of the Form “Books …” signature of the person entered the details of the inspection or repair led the pumping unit or pipeline.

3. In graph form 7 “Books …” entries are made to change the placement of the pump unit in mines, on the appointment of the unit (standby), etc.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

inspection of drainage installations

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

 

ANNEX 17

BOOK based on the analysis of air samples

 ON gassed and dust

_________________________________________________

(Name of production (state number of the car and engine)

Number p / p

Date and time of sampling or measurement of gases

Sampling of air or gas metering Express

method

Appointment of samples taken (gas metering)

Result analysis of air samples (gas metering)

Signature of the person who made the recording and justification

Notes section head of a construction company

Signatures of persons who have received instructions

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Explanations for completing the “Books …”

1. Book kept by the section chief of a construction company and filled on the basis of notifications about the results of air samples coming from the gas analytical laboratories. Results of the analysis of gases, some express method, are recorded in the “Book of …” based on reports of persons who carried out the analysis.

For each generation in the “Book …” assigned to several pages. ”The book …” should be tied together and numbered and stamped construction organization.

2. Column 4 form “Books …” stated in connection with what was sampled, tested gas content: people prior to admission to the face after blasting, when doing welding work, planned tests, etc.

3. Column 12 shaped face, designating entry points for his signature notice number of gas analytical laboratory or persons who reported test result express method.

4. In case of detection of harmful gases or dust above the TLV foreman gives the graph form 13 “Books …” guidance to improve ventilation, etc.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, company)

BOOK

based on the analysis of air samples for dust and fumes in

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

PRIDOZHENIE 18

BOOK KEEPING CONTROL DEVICE OPERATION CHECKS

 ELECTRICAL INSULATION AND ELECTRIC

 

Number p / p

Check Date

Machine type isolation control, serial and inventory numbers

The total length of the protected cable network, m

Indications kilo ohmmeter ohms

Triggering the action button “control”

(Yes, no)

Position, name, initials. Signature checking

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

           

 

Notes to conduct “Ledger check the functioning of devices

control of electrical insulation and electricity “

 

Column 3 shows the location of the insulation monitoring device in mines or in surface facilities.

 

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization)

_____________________________

(Site)

_____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

excluding test if the insulation of electrical control devices and power grids

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

 

ANNEX 19

BOOK KEEPING insulation resistance test

 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRIC

Number p / p

Check Date

Name of the electrical

Type, model, serial and inventory numbers

Insulation resistance value

The type and number of the measuring instrument. Surname, initials, title and signature

Between phases and zamli

Between phases

AZ

OT

NW

AB

Sun

AU

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

                 

 

 

Notes to conduct “Ledger resistance test

electrical insulation and electricity “

1. Column 3 indicates the type of electrical form, its location in the mines or in surface facilities.

 

2. In Count 11 forms introduced signature details of the person effecting the measurement type and number of the measuring device.

 

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

_____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

excluding test the insulation of electrical equipment and power grids

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 20

BOOK KEEPING ELECTRICAL GROUND CHECKS

Number p / p

Check Date

Name of the electrical

Construction ground, its dimensions and the material

Location grounding, the depth of excavation and soil condition

Material of the main earthing

The results of the inspection and measurement

Section of the earth conductor

Condition clamping bolts, couplings, connect.wire and cable armor

Resistance grounding conductors (in ohms)

Resistance to earth

(In ohms)

Type and number of measure.instrument.Surname, initials, title and signature

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes to conduct “Ledger checking electrical grounding”

1. In column 3 of the form shall indicate the type of electrical equipment, its location in underground or in surface facilities.

2. In Count 11 forms introduced signature details of the person effecting the measurement type and number of the measuring device.

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization)

_____________________________

(Site)

_____________________________

(Mine)

BOOK

excluding test electrical grounding

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

ANNEX 21

BOOK KEEPING freezes STATION

Date

Watch

Number of compressor

Refrigerant pressure, kgf / cm 2

Temperature, ° C

Discharge

Suction

condensation

vapor

Refrigerant

Brine

Water

Air

Discharge

Suction

adjustable front. valve

network

from the network

coming

outgoing

outdoor

in station

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Continuation of table

Indications rassolomera

Water meter readings

The level of brine in the evaporator,

Electric power

Simple aggregates

Signature duty driver

Notes (orders, comments on the work, etc.)

amperage

voltage

kWh

downtime

Causes

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes to conduct “Ledger of freezing station”

Technical characteristics of the freezing station:

Compressors: type, quantity. Capacitors: type, quantity.

Vaporizers: type, quantity. Brine pumps: type, quantity.

Water pumps: type, quantity.

1. Record readings of instrumentation at the station made every 2 hours.

2. Column 19 – the level of the brine should be measured not earlier than 10 minutes after stopping brine pumps and rassolomeshalok to the evaporator.

3. The book should be numbered, bound and stamped organization. Persons entrusted with making entries in the book, should be familiar with the notes under the painting.

4. In column 26 are produced by recording and instructions shift mechanic every shift; mechanic area – every day, chief engineer and chief mechanic – monthly.

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

BOOK

integrate the work of freezing stations

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

 

ANNEX 22

BOOK observation of changes in groundwater levels

WATERS IN dewatering

Plot ________________ object __________________________________________

 

Observing Table ______________________ Month ’19

 

_________________________________________________________________________

Non wells

_________________________________________________________________________

Metering point height above the ground

 

_________________________________________________________________________

The altitude of the metering point

 

_________________________________________________________________________

 

 

Date of measurement

Depth level

The altitude

Depth level

The altitude

Depth level

The altitude

Depth level

The altitude

Depth level

The altitude

Depth level

The altitude

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

 

 

 

MODEL LABEL

_____________________________

(Organization, site)

_____________________________

(Object)

BOOK

Observing changes in the level of groundwater in dewatering

Started ________________

 

Over _______________

 

 


ANNEX 23

REQUIREMENTS FOR STORAGE BUILDING

Materials, design,

Number p / p

Name of building materials, structures and equipment

Procedure for warehousing and storage conditions

1

2

3

1

Wall panels and concrete blocks lobbies and station tunnels and open pit operations In one series of cassette vertically or pyramids

2

Tubes In stacks up to 2.5 m, but not more than six rows with pads and linings

3

Concrete blocks lining deep tunnels, chute and foundation blocks In stacks up to 2.5 m, but not more than four rows with pads and linings

4

Slabs In stacks up to 2.5 m with pads and linings

5

Columns, beams and reinforced concrete beams up to 6 m In stacks up to 2 m, but not more than two rows with pads and linings

6

Long length concrete beams up to 12 m In one series with pads

7

Concrete and metal piles and sheet piling In stacks up to 1.5 m, but not more than four rows with linings and pads, pile heads to one side

8

T-section reinforced concrete beams In stacks up to 2 m, but not more than two rows

9

Bulky and heavy equipment and building structures, including tselnosektsionnaya lining In one series with pads

10

Roundwood In stacks up to 1.5 m with spacers between the rows and stops against rolling, width of the stack – not less than its height

11

Timber:
Terraced when laying In stacks up no more than half the width of the stack
when stacking cells In stacks up no more than the width of the stack

12

Brick:
delivered in bags on pallets

No more than two layersdelivered in containersIn one seriesdelivered in bulkIn stacks of height not exceeding 1.7 m

13

Architectural details, cornicesIn one series to the flat side with pads

14

Facing with marble and other platesIn the boxes in a row

15

Tile materials (corrugated and plain asbestos cement plates, etc.)In stacks up no more than 1 m, with pads

16

GlassIn the boxes in a row with pads

17

Thermal insulation materialsIn stacks up to 1.2 m in a dry place

18

Plumbing and ventilation unitsIn stacks up to 2.5 m with pads and linings

19

Melkosortnyj metalIn the racks up to 1.5 m

20

Bitumen at positive temperatureIn special pits with a reliable device fencing or dense boxes precluding its spreading 

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Term

Definition
1. Calotte The upper part of the tunnel (production), designed for the erection of the crest of the lining
2. Experienced workers Person properly trained, worked in underground or other construction work at least three years, including the profession, which includes the specified work – at least six months
3. Lining Capital excavation lining, designed for the life of the underground structure
4. Especially dangerous conditions The presence of hazardous factors (abandoned workings, karsts, Quicksand rock emission of harmful gases, mining and geological complications, etc.), location and boundaries of which are not precisely defined
5. Construction site Land temporarily allotted in accordance with the project for the construction and installation works
6. Technical inspection Designated by order of the officials with appropriate education for mining, blasting and other work and asking for management of these works
7. Tyrant Crossbeam, stacked at the bottom of her generation in the curvilinear outline for laying railway tracks, human passages, etc.
8. Furnel Vertical excavation, connecting the lower to the upper tunnel during tunnel construction or mining method serves to output to the upper horizon
9. Strauss The lower part of the tunnel (output), which erected the walls and tray lining

 

 

 

PB 06-227-98

26 Jan 2014 Comments
Off

PB 06-227-98 – 영문번역판 

 

PB 06-227-98

SAFETY

PLANTS FOR SUBSIDIARY

MINING COMPANIES

 

 

Safety rules for mining subsidiary plants – the first edition developed Gostgortechnadzor Russia (1998) on the basis of provisions of the Federal Mining and Industrial Inspectorate of Russia, approved by Presidential Decree of 18.02.93 N 234, in accordance with the medium-term development program (revision) standard documents Gosgortechnadzor Russia for the period 1997 – 2000 years.

Sets out the requirements of safe production and operation of machines and equipment in mining enterprises auxiliary shops.

These Rules are considered regional bodies Gosgortechnadzor Russia, a number of leading Russian mining enterprises, the Ministry of Labor and Social Development of the Russian Federation. Comments and suggestions on the Rules included in the final version.

Editorial Board: Ilyin AM (Chairman), Antipov VN Bilyukin AB, Saburov VS Skornjakov YG, GA Chumatchenko

 

1. General requirements

 

1.1. These Regulations apply to security designed, constructed, reconstructed and existing mining enterprises auxiliary workshops, regardless of their subordination and forms of ownership.

1.2. The auxiliary workshops (production) in the mines include repair – operational base road and rail transport, mechanical, electro-thermal and woodworking shops, garages machines public warehouses for various purposes, power supply facilities, water and sanitation, administrative – home and other buildings, ensure the functioning of primary production.

1.3. Commissioning is prohibited shops and facilities which are not provided with safe working conditions, and without the devices to prevent air pollution, water treatment facilities and disposal of hazardous waste.

1.4. Not allowed the commissioning of new and renovated facilities without coordination with the bodies exercising state sanitary and technical supervision for their safe operation.

1.5. Each enterprise carrying hazardous activities must have a license (permit) issued by the federal executive body specifically authorized in the field of industrial safety (Gostgortechnadzor Russia, etc.) to perform commissioning, repairs mountain – mine and electrical equipment, control systems and alarm, lifting facilities, boilers, pressure vessels and piping, working under pressure, in auxiliary shops under Regulation [78].

1.6. Workers in mining enterprises must pass a preliminary (at entry), and then periodic medical examinations under the Order of Ministry of Health of Russia from March 14, 1996 N 90.

1.7. All workers and specialists at employment must pass an introductory briefing on safety in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.0.004-90 1.7 [33].

All new and transferred to another company employees work prior to admission to the work must pass primary instruction in the workplace in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.0.004-90 7.2 [33]. The results are recorded in a special briefing card or magazine.

All operating companies but had previously worked with the relevant profession and should be trained in the profession in the educational establishments of the undertaking or individually, through the establishment of experienced workers in the terms and amounts under the relevant training programs.

During training, they can perform certain operations under the supervision of an experienced worker. To work independently in the profession, workers may be admitted only after the end of training and examinations in the Qualification Commission.

1.8. With working industrial shops, offices, plots associated with increased risk of work should be carried out repeated instruction once every three months, with the rest of the workers – every six months.

A review, the program is approved by the head (deputy head) of the plant (production), performed in a volume of primary instruction in the workplace.

Unscheduled briefing shall be held in the following cases:

- After the accident;

- Introduction of new regulations, technologies and equipment;

- Violations of work safety rules as well as at the request of government supervision or higher economic bodies;

- During work breaks – for 30 days for works which are subject to additional (higher) safety requirements; 60 calendar days – for the remaining work.

1.9. Senior officials and experts should be tested periodically knowledge of rules regulations and instructions, as well as other regulations, knowledge of which is necessary for a specialist in accordance with the position occupied.

Dates of examination should be carried out once every three years according to the approved Gostgortechnadzor Russia from 19.05.93 N 11 of the order of examination rules, regulations and safety instructions for managers, workers and specialists of enterprises, organizations and facilities controlled Gosgortechnadzor Russia, as well as Model Regulations on the training and testing for the protection of labor leaders and specialists of enterprises, institutions and organizations, approved by the Ministry of Labour of Russia 12.10.94 N 65 and GOST 12.0.004-90 [33].

1.10. In existing facilities should be following instructions approved by the technical director of the enterprise: 

- Technical and fire safety, industrial hygiene each production unit;

- Officers for Engineering;

- Labor protection for workers in every profession or type of work;

- Operational and technological instructions for equipment and devices.

1.11. Instructions for Occupational Safety and technology should be reviewed at least once every five years, and for explosive industries – at least once every three years, as well as changes in the rules and work procedures.

1.12. Each enterprise must be approved list of occupations and hazardous work, the personnel performing such work must be trained and tested knowledge of safety. Training is provided for programs approved by the head of the company and agreed with the service of occupational safety.

After training shall be verified knowledge workers safety commission structure affirms the director. Test results in the protocol (Annex 1 to GOST 12.0.004-90 [33]). Test your knowledge of workers on safety should be carried out once a year.

1.13. The enterprise must be approved list of works at particular risk for the execution of which shall be issued outfit – tolerance.

In costume – admission should be given the necessary measures to ensure the safe conduct of work in specific conditions.

1.14. Increased danger, as well as work in tanks, vehicles, hogs, flues should be performed at least three crew members, leader of the wizard. Work must be carried on along – admission containing the necessary measures to ensure the safe conduct of work in specific conditions. These requirements apply to the work carried out by specialized organizations for installation and commissioning of equipment.

To perform such operations should be designed instruction, approved by the technical director.

1.15. The management must ensure that workers and employees of clothing, footwear and personal protective equipment in accordance with GOST 12.4.011-89 [2] and industry norms free issue overalls.

1.16. All employees of the enterprise service shops bound by the rules, rules and regulations on labor protection.

Access to work and stay on the premises and in the shops of persons in a state of intoxication is prohibited.

1.17. Investigation and registration of accidents in shops must be performed in accordance with the Regulations approved by the Government of the Russian Federation of July 3, 1995 N 558.

 

 

2. Territory businesses, industrial buildings and structures

 

2.1. Territory businesses.

2.1.1. Promploshchadka enterprise must be located within the land allotment, made an act and comply with the applicable legal acts on the protection of nature, building regulations and sanitary design standards of industrial enterprises. Outline plans for industrial enterprises must comply with the requirements of SNIP 11-89-80 [45].

2.1.2. The layout and placement of buildings, while respecting density and lock (combination) must meet the sanitary and fire protection requirements, rational linking auxiliary and main shops considering laying transport links and communications. Area and production facilities for motor vehicles must comply with the regulations in force in road transport POT PO-210-01-95 [63].

2.1.3. Development of the territory of enterprises should be carried out according to the approved project. Construction documents, including acts by the covert operation should be retained for a period of operation of the facilities.

2.1.4. Auxiliary facilities potentially Pozharovzryvoopasnost (warehouses of toxic substances, fuels – Lube, timber) is necessary to have a safe distance from vozduhopadayuschih shafts on the leeward side (at an annual wind rose).

2.1.5. Facilities for maintenance work should be placed on the basis of their approach to employment (paragraph 7.4).

2.1.6. Categories of premises and buildings for explosion hazard should be taken according to SNIP 2.09.08.85 [43] Industrial buildings, SNIP 2.01.02.85 [44] Fire norms and rules of fire safety in the Russian Federation (PPB 01.93) [59].

2.1.7. Distances between buildings depending on the degree of fire resistance category and production should be taken in accordance with SNIP 11-89-80 master plans for industrial enterprises [45].

2.1.8. For buildings more than 18 m in width shall be fitted with two driveways longitudinal sides, with a width of more than 100 m of buildings – from all sides.

Distance from the edge of the roadway to the walls of buildings shall not exceed 25 m

2.1.9. Roads, driveways, walkways and entrances to buildings and structures, approaches to fire escapes and hydrants are to be free from winter to clear snow and ice.

2.1.10. In the production of excavation pits at the sites, pits, trenches, ditches should be protected shields with a minimum height of 1 m on the fence be installed warning signs and labels, visible in daytime and nighttime. Crossing points through the trenches, pits, ditches should be installed catwalks width of not less than 1 m, fenced on both sides railing with a minimum height of 1 m with a solid skin on the bottom of the railing to a height of 0.15 m

2.1.11. When forest clearing and logging requirements must be met GOST 12.3.015-78 [28].

2.1.12. Arrangement of the piping with flammable and combustible liquids and gases under buildings and structures are not allowed. In the channels and tunnels in the presence of ventilation and lighting can be accommodated combustible gas (natural, free of oil, artificial mixed and liquefied petroleum) gas pressure up to 0.6 MPa together with other pipelines and communication cables.

2.1.13. Allowed co-location in the common channels and tunnels pipelines flammable and combustible liquids with pressure pipelines networks (except fire) and pressure sewer. Canals and tunnels, designed to accommodate piping flammable, explosive liquids, must have exits to the surface not less than 60 m and at its ends.

2.1.14. When placing aboveground pipelines and cables should be placed on poles, piers, in galleries or on the walls of buildings. With the exception of overhead accommodation:

- Intra-transit pipelines with flammable and combustible liquids and gases on overpasses, detached columns and pillars made of flammable materials, as well as the walls and roofs of buildings, except buildings I, II and III degrees of fire resistance categories B, D and E;

- Piping with flammable and combustible liquids and gases are burned on the walls and coatings, as well as coatings and walls of buildings, in which are placed explosive materials;

- Gas flammable gas storage areas for flammable and combustible liquids and materials; cable lines on roofs of buildings and structures; transit cable lines for roofs, walls burn down buildings, walls and roofs of buildings, which house explosive and flammable materials .

2.1.15. Aboveground piping for flammable and combustible liquids, to lay on separate poles, piers, etc., should be placed at least 3 m from the walls with openings, from walls without openings, this distance may be reduced to 0.5 m At low supports should be placed pressure pipelines for liquids and gases, as well as power cables and communications, located in specially designated for this purpose technical grounds bands enterprises.

2.1.16. The distance from the ground to the bottom mark pipes or surfaces to isolate them, to lay on high poles, taken in impassable part of the site (site), where people pass – 2.2 m at intersections with roads (from the top cover of the carriageway) 5 m at the intersection of the railroad tracks, 7.1 m (from the rail).

2.2. Industrial buildings and structures.

2.2.1. Industrial buildings and premises, their space – planning and design decisions must comply with the current standards, building codes, engineering standards, fire regulations and sanitary standards for design industries.

2.2.2. Volume production facilities per worker must be at least 15 cubic meters. m, the area of ​​the premises – not less than 4.5 m. m

Height production area from floor to ceiling should be at least 3.2 m, space and energy and transport – warehousing – not less than 3 m, and the height of the rooms from floor to the bottom mark protruding structural elements overlap should not be less than 2.2 m .

2.2.3. Openings for entry into the building of vehicles shall be equipped with gates. When using heavy vehicles and wider openings opening and closing of the door must be mechanized. Lifting gates shall be equipped with locks that exclude them from falling. Hinged gates shall open outwards and have locks against arbitrary closure.

In areas with average temperature in the coldest month of the year -15 deg. C and below, the door must be equipped with curtains.

2.2.4. The width of the gate to enter the building of the railway transport standard gauge should provide passage for people at least 0.8 m on each side.

2.2.5. Bits intrashop railways rails must be flush with the floor surface of the room.

2.2.6. Scheme of movement of vehicles and pedestrians on platforms sections must be linked together and hung in front of the entrance to the site and shop. Speed ​​in the room should not exceed 5 km / h.

2.2.7. The width of the gate to enter the building of road transport exceed the greatest width used cars is not less than 1 m, and the height of the gate to exceed the maximum height of vehicles used by no less than 0.2 m

2.2.8. Outdoor pools and tanks located in the premises shall have perimeter fencing board height of at least 1 m

2.2.9. Open manholes, pits, bunkers, loading holes or openings in floors, in floor slabs or sites must be fenced railing with a minimum height of 1 m with a continuous lining on the bottom not less than 0.15 m

2.2.10. Stationary metal ladders should have an inclination angle of 45 – 60 deg., Step width of not less than 0.2 m, the distance between the steps vertically 0.2 – 0.3 m, width of aisles not less than 0.8 m on both sides of the fence height of not less than 1 m with a continuous lining on the bottom not less than 0.15 m

2.2.11. Industrial buildings should have a passport indicating the arrangement of the equipment. Workspaces for the maintenance of the equipment should have perimeter fencing with a minimum height of 1 m with a solid skin on the bottom of not less than 0.15 m

The requirements of this paragraph shall also apply to the premises located in the open galleries, bridges and platforms designed to move people through the equipment or communication.

2.2.12. The floors in the rooms must be resistant to permitted in the production process works mechanical, thermal or chemical effects.

Material must prevent sparking and not be slippery.

2.2.13. In areas with occasional or constant flow of liquids (water, acids, alkalis, solvents, oils, emulsions) floors should be impervious to liquids and these deviations have to drain the trays or channels. Trays or ducts should be closed by covers or grates. Waste trays must be set aside from walkways and driveways and, if possible, do not cross them.

2.2.14. Floor coatings should provide ease of cleaning of harmful substances, industrial pollution and dust.

2.2.15. Jobs, walkways and driveways in buildings must be kept clean and not cluttered.

2.2.16. All companies should be organized supervision of the state and operation of buildings and structures.

All manufacturing building at least twice a year (spring and fall) should be subjected to technical inspections which are conducted commission appointed director. Results of the examination should be made out acts that specify measures and timetables to correct defects found. Emergency nature of the damage, endangering operating personnel must be repaired immediately. Until the emergency damage production processes must be stopped, and the wait staff removed to a safe place.

Each enterprise should be prepared to oversee instruction operation of buildings, floors, indicating the limit loads on separate zones and areas of floors and defined periodicity survey bearing structures. Instruction approved by the technical director.

The persons responsible for the condition of the buildings are appointed by order.

2.2.17. In buildings and structures shall be prohibited:

- Exceed the maximum loads on floors, ceilings and grounds;

- Establish or strengthen suspend production equipment, vehicles, pipelines and devices, including temporary and for repairing and construction works not covered by the project. If necessary, additional load may be admitted only after verification calculation of building structures and strengthening these structures;

- Punch holes in ceilings, beams, columns and walls without the written permission of the persons responsible for the proper operation, safety and maintenance of buildings and structures.

 

3. Vnutripromyshlenny trucks

 

3.1. Road transport.

3.1.1. Technical condition and maintenance of equipment and vehicles at the enterprises must comply with the Traffic Regulations of the Russian Federation, Regulations on occupational safety in road transport (POT PO-200-01-95) [63] and SNIP 2.05.07.91 [46].

3.1.2. Car-industrial sites is allowed only with the permission of the responsible persons of these facilities in compliance with established routes.

Speed ​​and traffic regulations and train cars on the premises established taking into account local conditions and are regulated by traffic signs and traffic regulations.

Speeds do not exceed 20 km / h, and near the working places and pedestrian crossings – more than 10 km / h

Pedestrian crossings and driveways across railroad tracks shall comply with paragraph 3.23 of this Regulation.

Dimensions approximations buildings and roads must comply with
SNIP 11-89-80 [45] ONTP Rosavtotransporta 01-91 [73], and GOST 12.3.020-80 [19].

3.1.3. Do not run the process equipment and road equipment (dump trucks, bulldozers, loaders, graders, scrapers motorized) on the premises (roads, dumps, warehouses and transhipment, etc.) without wear – job work performance.

Earthmovers working near power lines should have a device (switch) to lock lifting body, exclusive touch the wires.

3.1.4. Repair shops in enterprises must meet union norms of technological design of automotive enterprises (ONTP-ARP-82, Giproavtotrans), premises maintenance vehicles – Departmental building codes Minavtotransa RSFSR BCH-01-89 [77] and engineering standards repair farm-ferrous metallurgy [ 75].

3.1.5. Driveways, driveways for vehicles passages for people should have a solid surface.

Roads must comply with the requirements of SNIP 2.05.02-85
(with amendments 1, 2, 3 BLS N 5-87, N 11-90).

Width of the carriageway roads should be at least:

temporary roads:

- At unilateral move – 4.5 m;

- With two-way traffic – 8.0 m;

paved roads (asphalt paving)

- At unilateral move – 3.0 m;

- With two-way traffic – 6.0 m

The radius of curvature of roads from 10 to 15 m

Width of driveways and walkways not less than:

- For working without load – 1 m;

- For working with manual load or wheelbarrows when moving in one direction – 2 m;

- For trolleys in one track – 2.5 m;

- For trolleys in two tracks – 3.6 m;

- For wheelbarrows when moving in two directions – 2.5 m;

Width crossings and crossing trenches and ditches:

- Pedestrian – 1.0 m;

- For vehicles – from 2 to 5 m

Crossing width conveyors, roller conveyors, lesotaski – 0.8 m

The height of handrails on catwalks – 1 m, height of side board on the bottom of the railing – 0.15 m

Passes for employees located on ledges, slopes and hillsides with a slope of more than 20 degrees. Shall be equipped with ladders or stairs railing with one-sided.

3.1.6. Open areas for parking should have a solid surface with a slope for drainage.

Open air parking is prohibited:

- Carrying out repairs;

- Fill the fuel and drain the oil;

- Charge the batteries;

- Preheat engines open fire.

Garages and outdoor parking facilities should be staffed by regular stops the wheels and emergency tugs (the rate of 1 lift for 10 pieces of equipment). Entrances and driveways (gate) in garages and parking lots closed should allow evacuation vehicles. When the number of machines is more than 25 units must be a plan of arrangement with the description of the sequence of evacuation in case of fire.

Open parking in areas with an average monthly temperature (winter) below -15 deg. C must be equipped with means for heating the engine at startup.

3.1.7. Different types of repairs: press – forging, rechargeable, body, tire mounting, curing, etc. must be carried out in designated positions in compliance with the requirements of the production routings for repairs.

3.1.8. With coachwork edit parts without prior cleaning and fixing prohibited. Repair stations must have established stands for the type of machines. Using random coasters are not allowed.

3.1.9. Soldering, tin and parts should be cleaned at the workplace exhaust ventilation. Soldering radiators, fuel tanks and other items must be in the stands equipped with drip trays solder.

Before repairs and soldering its container of flammable liquids should be washed, steam thoroughly, dry hot air or neutral gas fill.

3.1.10. Repair stations should have supply – exhaust ventilation and vapor exhaust device when the engine warms up.

3.1.11. Painting, location and operation of the equipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.3.035-84 [4], anti-corrosion work – GOST 12.3.016-87 [5], the relevant sections of the Fire Safety Regulations MBP-01-93 [59] and regulations on labor protection in road transport POT PO-200-01-95 [63].

3.1.12. When maintenance or repair of the car should slow down the parking (hand) brake, stop the engine and the wheels enclose stops.

3.1.13. Venues maintenance razborochno-assembly and repairs of rolling stock shall be equipped osmotrovye ditches, ramps, lifts. The length, width and depth of inspection channels and ramps are determined depending on the design of the rolling stock and the process equipment. Payload lifts must meet a host of equipment.

3.1.14. Single deadlock osmotrovye ditch should have stepped entrance on the opposite side – staples embedded in the wall of the ditch, to the emergency exit. The floors in the ditches should be sloped at least 2% towards gryazesbornika to drain fluids and portable wooden lattice. To go through osmotrovye ditches shall be provided removable catwalks width not less than 0.8 m

Lighting osmotrovye ditch lights, supply voltage 127 – 220 V, subject to the following conditions:

- Wiring must be internal (hidden) having reliable electricity and waterproofing;

- Lighting fixtures and switches should also have electricity and waterproofing (lamps should be closed glass or protective fencing lattice). Design fixtures should exclude access to the lamp without tools;

- Metal body of the fitting must be earthed (vanish);

- In particularly hazardous areas should apply standard portable lights voltage 42 or 12 V

3.1.15. On osmotrovyh ditches and overpasses should be installed rails, safety flange (-rails) to prevent falling into the ditch cars while traveling. Osmotrovyh on racks along the entire length on both sides must be arranged repair sites with railing height of not less than 0.9 m

3.1.16. Work related to the sink, cleaning, maintenance and repair of machinery and equipment should be carried out with the engine off.

3.1.17. The distance between the cars at checkpoints disassembly, as well as between them and the elements of buildings or stationary process equipment should provide easy access to any part of the mechanism. Walkways and driveways shall conform to the dimensions moved manually or forklifts – vehicles parts and assemblies and have a width of not less than 1 m

3.1.18. When disassembling machinery and equipment to remove, transport and install heavy and bulky components and spare parts (engine, transmission, rear and front axles, wheels, body, frame, etc.) should be using the lift – transport equipment, devices and accessories ( trolleys – lifts, supports, chains, fights), ensuring complete safety.

3.1.19. Lifting equipment, units and components follows specially designed for this purpose and place devices according to the instructions and diagrams on safe methods of slinging, strapping and tilting cargo specifying those with attachments. Diagrams and instructions must be posted in the workplace.

Lifting a load that is not a scheme slinging, should be made in the presence and under the supervision of the person responsible for the safe operation of materials handling cranes.

3.1.20. Lowered mass on an inclined plane is necessary to apply the delay device to prevent tipping load.

3.1.21. Before removing components and assemblies to the presence of grease, water and other liquids must first be drained into a special container.

3.1.22. For maintenance and repair of lifting equipment, located at an altitude of more than 1.5 m from the ground, maintenance workers have to work in overalls, helmet and safety belt. Weaken hoist rope, retaining unit or element of design, pinning him to complete the installation site is not permitted.

3.1.23. Components and parts, the dismantling of which is associated with the inconvenience and danger (brakes, depreciation and valve springs, etc.), you must perform special pullers and fittings. The dimensions and design pullers must fit the parts removed.

3.1.24. When removing and setting springs for cars, you must first unload them by raising the body (frame) lifting mechanism and then installing a frame or body posted strong metal supports (trestles) or cells of the boards of not less than 1 m when lifting one end of the car opposite extreme wheels must be podklineny their shoes on both sides. Used as supports wheels, barrels, bricks and other objects are not permitted.

3.1.25. Or be doing any work on the equipment, the posted only one hoisting (jacks, the tackle, winches, cranes, etc.) is not permitted.

3.1.26. When servicing the lift equipment (hydraulic, mechanical, electro-mechanical) for lift control mechanism should be posted prohibiting a banner reading “Do not include – working people.”

3.1.27. Stationary and mobile lifts shall be capable of providing cargo fixing in cases of malfunction or damage to the lifting mechanism, as well as limit switches.

3.1.28. Carrying out works (even short-term) under the raised body, shield, arrows and other technological equipment half allowed only after strengthening their robust metal abutments (bars), excluding spontaneous lowering elevated equipment.

3.1.29. Phase-out machines and equipment parts must be placed in designated areas on the shelves without taking passages and driveways. Previous axis, springs, drive shafts and other long items shall be placed on special supports only horizontally.

3.1.30. Disassembly and assembly of small units must be made on benches, and large (engines, transmissions, rear axles and wheels, etc.) – only on special stands.

3.1.31. Pressed out and embed hub, axle shafts, bearings, gears and other items must be removers and presses. In some cases, allowed to use a punch and hammer tipped with non-ferrous metal.

3.1.32. Gas cutting during dismantling of machinery and equipment shall be permitted only in cases where a machine, equipment removed fuel tanks, parts supply system, lubricants and batteries.

3.1.33. Before repairing tanks out poisonous, toxic and flammable liquids, as well as prior to disassembly spray guns, pistols and other dispensing equipment should be carried out of their steaming, thorough cleaning and airing.

3.1.34. Vulcanization of tire mounting and

3.1.34.1. In the shops on sites offering tire mounting and curing work should be ensured compliance with applicable safety regulations for tire service enterprises [72].

3.1.34.2. Tire work on the production must be developed and approved by the technical management of the company instructions. Withdrawal, staging and moving wheels and tires weighing more than 20 kg should be mechanized. Tire wheels of heavy vehicles should be carried out on a specially equipped area. Mount and dismount tires should be on the bench or using special tools and fixtures. Mount the tire on the rim, a damaged prohibited.

3.1.34.3. Prior to removing the tire pressure should be lifted. Inflate tires after assembly using safety guards or devices to prevent fly lock ring. Correct tire position tap, hit the lock ring hammer prohibited.

Inflating the tires should be conducted in two stages: first to a pressure of 0.05 MPa (0.5 kg / sq. Cm) test position lock ring, and then to the pressure prescribed instructions.

3.1.34.4. Compressor equipment must meet the safety requirements of GOST 12.2.016-81 [6].

3.1.34.5. Space for the production of vulcanizing works should be isolated, spacious, bright and equipped with forced ventilation and local exhausts. The room in which vulcanization machines installed with self-furnace must be isolated from the premises where petrol is used or rubber cement.

3.1.34.6. Vulcanization apparatus and instrumentation must periodically (1 per year) checked and tested. The test results are recorded in a special register.

3.1.35. To work with hazardous materials (leaded gasoline, antifreeze, antifreeze, brake fluid) Only persons 18 years of age, passed medical examination and instruction in safe use of these materials.

3.1.35.1. Prohibited:

- Use leaded gasoline engines operating indoors and in the absence of ventilation;

- Decontaminate places filled with leaded petrol, dry bleach;

- Produce polluted with leaded petrol in fecal sewage drains.

3.1.35.2. The enterprise must be assigned to the person responsible for the storage, transport and use of antifreeze. On the container that stores the antifreeze must be indelible inscription in large letters, “poison”, as well as sign installed for toxic substances.

Never allow to work with antifreeze drivers and others that have not been specifically instructed on safety measures in its use.

3.2. Trains.

3.2.1. Railroad tracks and facilities, rolling stock, bond, security lock and administered by the enterprise, as well as the organization and production of train handling operations must comply with the building regulations, SNIP 2.09.07-91 [46] Industrial vehicles, Technical Regulation operation of rail transport enterprise and Uniform Rules safety in the development of mineral deposits open method [69].

3.2.2. Dimensions approximations buildings and rolling stock must comply with GOST 9238-83 [7], narrow gauge railways – GOST 9720-76. [8]

3.2.3. At the intersections of roads to the railway line should get moving, the relevant requirements of SNIP 2.05.07-91 [46], SNIP 32-01-85 [55]. Moving and transitions over the railroad tracks should have decking at the rail heads. Go through the path in undesignated areas is prohibited.

3.2.4. Prohibited lumbering rail dimensions different subjects. Materials and products shall be located not less than 2.0 m from the rail head at the height of the stack to 1.2 m higher altitude stacks its distance from the rail head should be at least 2.5 m

3.2.5. Equipment and facilities devices mechanization feeding and cleaning cars at sites loading – unloading shall be guarded and overlapping moving or rotating parts or areas of operation to ensure the safe conduct of work.

3.2.6. Dumpers located at worksites receiving devices must be protected with strong railing bars. Manage vagonooprokidyvatelja carried out specially equipped for this purpose room with a good view of the site of discharge.

3.2.7. Upon delivery of the ore in the ground contact electric discharge is necessary to hang posters of the danger of electric shock.

3.2.8. Contact wires railways included in the room over the receiving hopper shall be equipped with earthing switch disconnect knives.

3.2.9. Never load faulty cars and repairing cars at the unloading site receptors.

3.2.10. Reconstruction and equipping items must comply with the technological design and repair economy outfit devices railways industry (PromtransNIIproekt, 1980).

3.2.11. Before staging maintenance and repair locomotives and carriages must be cleaned of dirt, dust, ice, and electrical machinery and apparatus to blow compressed air.

3.2.12. Cars and locomotives in the depot should be established with the following distances:

- The gap between the gate and the extreme bumper cars, locomotives must not be less than 2 m;

- Interval honey bumper neighboring cars (diesel) for the repair of rolling stock without rollout wheelsets or bogies must be at least 3 m;

- The value of the gap on each side of the trolley shall be not less than 1 m in the repair of cars with four-wheel trolleys rolling out into the spaces between adjacent cars (locomotives).

3.2.13. Electric AC and DC input (output) in the depot building and maintenance items locomotives (PTOL) when powered by an external source of DC voltage up to 250 V, intended for moving locomotives and carriages in the repair process. Input (output) AC electric, diesel – trains and locomotives with hydromechanical transmission repair position on maintenance and repair necessary to carry out another locomotive with flatcars guise of not allowing the locomotive to go into the building. Input (output) DC electric repair positions TO-2, TO-3, TO-4 and TR-1 can be carried out at a food from the trolley wire or special operating voltage (shunting) locomotive.

3.2.14. Each depot and PTOL should have instructions on feeding and de-energisation of the contact network, as well as locomotives from the DC power supply voltage up to 250 V.

3.2.15. Work on lifting (lowering) car bodies should supervise master or foreman. During lifting (lowering) on ​​each side of the body should be a dedicated worker, overseeing the work of jacks and horizontal position of the body. When lifting (lowering) of the body and roll out (sub skating) trolleys finding people in the back, on the lid and under the body is not allowed.

3.2.16. Testing of electrical machinery, apparatus and electricity meters for insulation after repair prior to installation on the locomotive must be performed on a specially equipped station (site stand) having the necessary fencing, alarm, lock, and soundproofing. Before and during the test station (site) must not be bystanders.

3.2.17. Proceed to the inspection and repair of diesel units permitted only after it stops, open the hatches in the crankcase – 10 minutes after stopping the diesel engine. When working with a diesel engine in the room should provide cooling air from a special installation. Filmed with a diesel locomotive repair allowed on special stationary or mobile platforms.

3.2.18. Disassembly and reassembly of diesel units must be performed on the stands, technological platforms using tilters, shelving, pullers, bushings, special wrenches and other devices that provide mechanized heavy and time-consuming operations and provided technological maps or instructions.

3.2.19. When equipped traction rolling stock must comply with the following safety requirements: sand in the sandbox set of locomotives and motor-car rolling stock should be carried out with fixed or rotary platforms with ladders or portable ladders with handrails. Stationary platforms shall have a height of 1.0 m railing, the lower part of which the height of 0.15 m should be carried out solid. Ladders shall be of steel with a slope no greater than 1:1 and a minimum width of 0.8 m

3.2.20. On open depot ways to exit from the stairs to the stationary platform, designed for a set of sand in the sandbox locomotives, as well as to enter the electric roof must install special passages, closed gates with locking bars.

3.2.21. On receiving-ways working platforms must perform pivoting. In the inoperative position of these platforms and stairs should be located outside the envelope approximation.

3.2.22. Gates and repeated constipation mechanisms sites should have a lock can not be opened gate and turn playgrounds into working position in the presence of voltage in the contact network and the power supply in the contact network before closing gates and installation sites in the off position.

3.2.23. When placing devices for electric equipment to open the depot station tracks portion of the trolley wire over the place of equipment must be partitioned, an alarm system for removing and applying a voltage and a lock. When de-energized with a partitioned area of ​​contact network should be lit green light when voltage is present – a red signal.

3.2.24. Outfitting devices for depot ways must additionally have a two-color light signaling, resolution (green light) or prohibiting the entry of electric equipment in place (red light).

3.2.25. In the presence of voltage in the contact network access to the roof of an electric, is under the contact wire is prohibited. Luke should have to exit the lock.

3.2.26. Draining and refilling of water for cooling diesel locomotives and diesel – train must be made by means of hoses, pipes and other devices, excluding the strait of water and water into contact with workers.

3.2.27. Submission of liquid petroleum products for locomotives and diesel – the trains must be made through pipelines laid in closed conduits. This should be ensured control tightness.

3.2.28. Dispensers in the off position shall be outside the envelope approximation. To transfer diesel Lube spent in small amounts should be used special containers with tight-fitting lids.

3.2.29. In equipping positions and repair must be closed vessel for collecting the spent diesel oil, diesel fuel and the defective cooling water and sludge from the fire foaming installation. Drain fuel and oil mining techniques in buckets and trays prohibited.

3.3. Conveying

3.3.1. Construction and arrangement of conveyors in industrial buildings, galleries, tunnels and ramps must meet the safety requirements in accordance with GOST 12.2.022-80 [9] and the Common safety rules [60].

3.3.2. The height from the floor to the bottom of galleries and flyovers should be at least 2 m width of galleries and flyovers should provide passage for people to at least 800 mm between the wall and the conveyor is not less than 700 mm. When the width of the belt more than 1400 mm – not less than 800 mm on both sides.

3.3.3. Emergency exits from the galleries and catwalks and ramps over pipelines should be located not less than 100 m

In the aisles with a slope of more than 7 degrees. ladders shall be arranged.

3.3.4. Conveyors shall be capable of providing:

- Emergency stop drive from any point from the main passage;

- Turn off the drive at breakage and slippage of the tape, as well as clogging discharge hoppers and chutes.

3.3.5. At an inclination of more than 6 degrees. conveyor shall be equipped with locking devices to prevent movement of the laden branches in the opposite direction when stopped.

3.3.6. When the location of pipelines and equipment passes over the lower branch and shall be enclosed by a solid skin, eliminating drop transported materials.

3.4. Transport technological purpose (lifter, avtotelezhki, cars and electric)

3.4.1. Do not operate electric platforms at fault susceptor controller, brakes and signals as well as the absence of protection from the effects of electric current.

3.4.2. Electric platforms running wheels at 10 – 12 cm from the floor, the rails must be closed with solid metal covers.

3.4.3. Lifter must be equipped with an automatic device (stoppers, locks, etc.), warning their spontaneous movement.

3.4.4. Piece goods must meet the dimensions of the cargo platforms trucks. Small piece goods should be transported in containers. Move cylinders with compressed gases, as well as barrels, drums and boxes of corrosive substances should be carried out in special containers or trucks fitted with devices that eliminates drop rollover of such goods and their damage.

3.4.5. The presence of the driver on the truck during loading and unloading her cock prohibited.

3.4.6. Stack loads on forklift should be so as to prevent the fall of the load during the loading, lifting, transportation and unloading.

3.4.7. In operation, Auto and electric must observe the rules of labor protection in road transport [63], in particular, it is prohibited:

- Exploit technically faulty loader (no signal, brakes, lighting);

- Lifting loads weighing up fixed-duty vehicles;

- Capture cargo truck with acceleration by plunging;

- To raise the frame with a load on the forks when tilted away from you;

- Raise, lower and tilt the load when traveling;

- Capture lying on pallets cargo tilt lift myself;

- Transport goods raised to a height of 1.0 m;

- Raise primerzshy goods;

- Transported on the forks cylinders (oxygen, acetylene, etc.);

- Georgia faces a stack and to drag it;

- Used trucks for transportation and lifting.

3.5. Handling (lifting and moving loads)

3.5.1. All work associated with the loading, unloading and transportation of goods, must be carried out in accordance with GOST 12.3.009-76 [10] Rules of safety and industrial hygiene in the production of loading and unloading of railway transport, and Rules for the safe operation of hoisting cranes [PB 10-14-92], approved by the Decree of Russian Gosgortechnadzor 30.12.92 N 41, Rules on occupational safety in road transport [63].

3.5.2. Handling should be done, as a rule, mechanized method using cranes, forklifts and other machinery, and at low volumes – with the use of small tools. Mechanized loading and unloading is required for cargo weighing more than 50 kg, as well as lifting loads to a height of 1.5 m Heavy loads (weighing more than 500 kg) load and unload permitted only cranes.

3.5.3. Allowed the following norm manual carrying goods: one man – weighing not more than 50 kg for a distance not exceeding 25 m and a height of not more than 1.5 m; woman – weighing less than 10 kg <*>. For moving loads on trucks or in containers applied force should not exceed 10 kg; adolescents aged 16 to 18 years are permitted to ship bulk, lightweight and piece goods weighing up to 16 kg.

_______________

* Council of Ministers – Government of the Russian Federation from 06.11.93 N 105.

 

Moving goods over a distance of 25 meters should be done on two-wheeled carts or other devices rigging.

3.5.4. Loading platforms must have a height of 1.1 m from the rail head, and from the entrance of vehicles – at the height of the floor of a car.

Platforms and warehouses should be equipped with ramps, the width of which on the part of the railway track should be at least 3.0 m, and from the entrance of a car – not less than 1.5 m

3.5.5. Gangway, serving for lifting and lowering of loads carried by hand, should churn out several boards of a thickness not less than 60 mm. The width of the gangway to pass without load shall be not less than 0.25 m, and for the passage of a load – not less than 1 m to stop upside gangway plank required to fill at 0.5 m

3.5.6. Came down to lower or lift the load should produce of oak or other healthy roundwood diameter of 150 mm and a length of 4 to 6 m without cracks or knots. The upper end shall be equipped with a flat-iron hooks of section 75 x 16 mm, the lower end – ironclad protection for splitting. Heavy duty slug should be strengthened by calculation, according to their weight.

3.5.7. Stacking of materials and equipment shall be subject to the requirements of work safety and their safety.

Ways of arranging the materials listed in Appendix 11.3.

3.5.8. Props (prop up) the materials and items of equipment to walls and fences is prohibited.

3.5.9. When work on a pile height of 1.5 meters should be used portable stairs inventory.

3.5.10. When using Nakatami angle of inclination should not exceed 30 deg., And the distance between Nakatami selected so that the goods have not played for them for more than 1 m When unloading is not permitted rolling several pipes, logs simultaneously.

3.5.11. By loading – unloading of dangerous and especially dangerous goods allowed workers specially trained in educational establishments of the undertaking or individually through the establishment of skilled workers and after the exams Commission appointed by the leadership of the company. Instruction for these individuals should be carried out every 3 months.

3.5.12. Hoisting equipment used for loading – unloading operations shall conform to and be in good condition. During operation, handling devices and removable container owner should periodically inspect them in the following terms:

- Traverse, mites and other grips and containers – each month;

- Slings (except rarely used) – every 10 days;

- Rarely used removable lifting devices – before issuing them to work.

Slings and container inspection must be carried out according to the instructions, developed a specialized organization.

3.5.13. When rigging – stropalnyh work is forbidden:

- Lifting loads whose weight exceeds the limit load slings and lifting devices;

- Stand on the moving cargo or be under him;

- Pull use faulty devices, as well as devices, the probation period which has expired;

- Correct (push) sledgehammer blows, scrap, etc. branch lines, which tied with the goods;

- Route cargo hands;

- Hold hands or tongs slips when lifting cargo slings;

- Open hook primerzshie covered with earth or goods;

- Lay loads on electric cables, hoses and pipes.

3.5.14. Ropes harnesses, safety belts, slings cargo rope, manual hoists and cats and construction helmets must meet the technical requirements.

 

 

4. Mechanical repair shops and manufacturing

 

4.1. Production equipment and organization of workplaces

4.1.1. The equipment is located in the auxiliary shops keeping with the order of steps (operations) of the process, providing friendly and safe working conditions, and in accordance with the union norms of technological design machining and assembly departments of engineering, instrument-making and metalworking (ONTP 07-83 [74]), union norms of technological design of road transport enterprises (ONTP-01-91 [73]), departmental construction norms BCH-01-89 Minavtotransa RSFSR [77], as well as repair NTP farms ferrous metallurgy enterprises [75].

4.1.2. Take into operation equipment should commission, appointed by the company management. Production equipment shall meet the requirements of GOST 12.2.003-91 [36].

4.1.3. Safe operation of production equipment shall be ensured:

- Stable and safe technological mode of structural elements;

- The use of design patterns automation and remote control;

- Application design remedies;

- Compliance with the technical documentation referred to in the safety requirements for installation, operation and maintenance.

4.1.4. Technological processes to meet the requirements of GOST 12.3.002-75 [3], GOST 12.3.025-80 [29], machine equipment – GOST 12.2.009-80 [13].

4.1.5. Width of aisles in the shops should not be less than, m:

for main aisles 1.5;

for passages between the equipment 1.2;

for passages between the walls of industrial buildings and equipment 1.0;

for a pass intended for the maintenance and repair of equipment 0.7.

4.1.6. Width of aisles in jobs should be increased by at least 0.75 m at its sole location jobs from walkways and driveways and not less than 1.5 m at the location of jobs on both sides of the aisles and driveways.

4.1.7. When operating in the shops set of hoisting machines, boilers, pressure vessels and piping for liquids and gases should be guided by the Rules for design and safe operation of cranes (PB 10-14-92), Rules of the device and the safe operation of steam boilers [62], Regulation design and safe operation of vessels working under pressure (PB-10-115-96), Rules of the device and the safe operation of steam and hot water
(PB 03-75-94), approved by the Resolution Gosgortechnadzor Russia (30.12.92 N 41, respectively; 28.05.93 N 12; 18.04.95 N 11; 18.07.94 N 45).

4.1.8. Operation of gas facilities must be conducted in accordance with the safety rules in the gas sector. [61]

4.1.9. Operation of compressor stations shall be in accordance with the Rules of the device and the safe operation of stationary compressor units, air ducts and pipelines approved Gostgortechnadzor Russia 12.07.71 and
GOST 12.2.016-81 [6].

4.1.10. Dangerous elements intrashop production equipment and transport equipment and fire-fighting equipment to ensure safety should be a bright color, and color marks.

4.1.11. Repair shops should have emergency exits, Internal telephone and meet the requirements of the Ministry of Health Sanitary Rules for Russian machine shops N 5160-89.

4.2. Metal cutting.

4.2.1. Work on turning, drilling, machine and other machines with rotating and moving the working bodies should be kept in overalls, excluding incidental capture tissue. Never work with the sleeves rolled up or unbuttoned dress and bareheaded, Warning grip hair.

In metal cutting shall follow the rules of labor protection during cold working of metals, approved by Russian Ministry of Labor.

4.2.2. Grinding machines must have stops (podruchnik) for sharpened tools and parts, guards or shields with automatic engine shut-off when not in use. Before installing the machine sanding circles must pass the relevant tests. Do not operate the sharpener with unbalanced sanding disc and sanding wheels having a cracked or chipped.

When working on grinding machines are prohibited:

- Dressing of circles with a tool or chisel;

- Use leverage to increase the pressure on the circle;

- Use coolants which may detrimentally impact on the skin of workers;

- To do the work side (end) surfaces circles are not intended for this type of work.

4.2.3. Working tools (cutters, mills, drills, threaded and grooving, etc.) before starting work shall be verified working. Periodic inspection shall master. This should be carried safety rules when working with tools and devices [64], approved by the USSR Ministry of 30/04/85. Job faulty instruments is prohibited.

4.2.4. The equipment on which the process of allocated fragments, chips, sparks, spray cooling – lubricating fluid must be equipped with protective shields, screens located between the working tool on the machine and the person working. When you need to monitor the treatment process to set screens viewing window made of transparent and durable material.

If it is impossible for structural and other circumstances the device shielding workers should be issued personal protective equipment.

4.2.5. When you change the working tool installation and removal from the machine the workpiece, as well as cleaning the chip, the machine must be switched off.

4.2.6. For machining of long (more than 10 – 12 diameters) should be applied lunettes (fixed or mobile).

4.2.7. All items to be processed on a drill press, with the exception of particularly heavy, must be installed on a table or plate drilling machine still using clutches, conductors and other reliable devices.

When working on the drills are prohibited:

- Use a drill with a clogged or worn liners;

- Use gloves when working;

- Keep the product during processing directly hands.

4.2.8. Design teams must include cutters reliable fastening teeth, precluding their loss during operation. These cutters and cutters with carbide plates or high speed steel should be carefully technical control. Apply disc cutter cracked, burned or broken teeth are not allowed.

4.2.9. Slotting and planing machines, depending on the progress of the table should have a special sliding fence painted in bright – red. Between the wall and the table should be extended passage width not less than 0.7 m

4.2.10. Bandsaw machines must be equipped with devices, catch the saw blade in case of breakage.

4.2.11. Materials under the tape and disk saws must be made by special devices to enable stable position of the cut material and eliminates the possibility of injury to the worker.

4.2.12. Guillotine, roller, combined shears material should be equipped with:

- Arrangements for laying and maintaining the material being cut (tables, roller conveyors, etc.), established at the level of the fixed blade;

- Directing and safety rulers constructed to allow you to work clearly visible line (place) cut;

- A device for adjusting the clearance, depending on the thickness of the metal being cut and stops to limit the cut sheet feeder;

- Mechanical and hydraulic clamps to secure the material to be cut;

- Safety devices, interlocked with the trigger, excluding the possibility of injury to workers. Scissors must have a sign indicating the maximum allowable thickness of the material being cut.

4.2.13. Hand lever shears should be securely fastened on special racks, benches, tables, etc.

4.2.14. Hand shears primaries must be equipped with clamps on the upper movable knife, shock absorber to cushion cutter bar and the counterweight that keeps the upper movable knife in a safe position.

4.2.15. Metalworking machine tools (lathes, milling, grinding, drilling, etc.) must be equipped with devices pylestruzhkopriemnikami and feed coolant.

4.2.16. Before starting the production equipment necessary to check the correct position of the arms and the control buttons. This should be provided full security staff.

4.2.17. It is forbidden to start the equipment after installation or repair without installing fences, audible and visual alarms, locks, and designed into providing security services, as well as without the permission of the person responsible for installation or repair.

4.2.18. For personal safety equipment remote start should be made after a warning sound or light signal and receiving a signal from the responsible service places equipment on the possibility of starting.

4.2.19. Signal elements (bells, sirens, lamps) must be protected from mechanical damage and positioned so as to ensure reliable signal audibility and visibility of the work area.

4.2.20. In the shops and workplaces should be posted signal table and instructions on how to start and stop equipment.

4.2.21. When a power interruption or suspension of production for another reason all electric drive equipment, which is unacceptable self-starting must have devices to prevent inadvertent switching.

4.2.22. Workplaces must be out of the movement of goods transported by lifting gear, and be fitted with shelves or cabinets for storage devices and tools.

4.2.23. On the equipment, machines and mechanisms should not be an obstruction. All parts and materials should be placed on special shelves, tables, stands.

4.3. Guards and protective devices.

4.3.1. All moving and rotating parts of industrial equipment and machinery, transmission and drive components must be securely fastened solid or mesh metal fencing to exclude access to them during operation. It is forbidden to maintain and repair fencing and moving parts when the equipment.

4.3.2. Fencing should not restrict the technological capabilities of the equipment and its maintenance, and should not be a source of danger. Fences made of mesh should be designed to provide constancy of form and set rigidity.

4.3.3. When applying a mesh fence should be observed following distance from a dangerous place fencing.

 

Data

Grid opening dimensions and distance from a dangerous place to her, mm

Dimensions of the hole lattice

10

16

25

40

50

Distance from a dangerous place to square lattice

27

90

104

110

620

Distance from a dangerous place to lattice-ring

13

85

108

110

530

 

4.3.4. Design and mount fencing must be sustainable and to exclude the possibility of accidental contact and fencing working with moving elements.

4.3.5. The strength of the fence should be set taking into account the load, as determined by the efforts of the impact on the fence working or crumbling pieces of equipment.

4.3.6. Protective fence function not decrease under the influence of factors of production (e.g., vibration, temperature, etc.).

4.3.7. Application removable cover and enclosure devices are permitted only if for structural or technological reasons it is not possible to establish steady.

4.3.8. For the production of repairs and adjustments, as well as to monitor the process and work arrangements include fences allowed sealed windows or hatches. Construction observation windows and hatches should provide convenience and security surveillance staff.

4.3.9. Removable, folding and sliding fence, as well as opening doors, covers, guards in these enclosures or equipment cabinets shall be capable of their inadvertent removal or opening (locks, removal using the tool lock).

4.3.10. Counterweights, which are not placed inside the equipment, must be omitted in the holes made in the floor or protected.

4.3.11. Fencing that need to manually open, remove, move or install a few times during the shift should have appropriate devices (pens, staples, etc.).

4.3.12. Must be developed and approved by the head of department order of reception and delivery shift inspection units of machines, as well as defined inspection frequency administration department observance of the order of their production.

4.3.13. Operation of all equipment in compliance with the technical conditions specified passports, including maps or special instructions.

4.3.14. Inspection, periodic inspection and test equipment, tools and equipment shall be in accordance with the guidelines and rules of operation. Prohibited work on malfunctioning equipment, use of defective parts and tools.

4.4. Cleaning, lubrication and repair of industrial equipment.

4.4.1. Cleaning production equipment and cleaning should be performed chips specifically designed for this work tool (brushes, scrapers, hooks).

4.4.2. Shavings, dust and dirt from the equipment and the zone near should promptly leave. Cleaning products should be carried out on special sections equipped with aspiration.

4.4.3. Lubrication system equipment must have devices (plates, collections, boxes, pallets, trays), warning splashing and pouring oil.

4.4.4. Lubricate moving parts manually mechanisms during operation of the equipment is prohibited.

4.4.5. To care for the equipment workers must be provided with cleaning materials. Storage in shops and industrial premises clean and cleaning material used must be done separately in locked metal boxes lids.

4.4.6. Lubricants and other flammable materials should be stored in metal containers closing (drums, cans, boxes). Supply of flammable materials in the shops (including repair work) shall not exceed the daily requirement. Do not leave such materials on the premises shop after work, as well as during production work near hot objects, electrical and heating devices.

4.4.7. Organization and carrying out repair work equipment must meet the requirements of the Provisional Regulations on the maintenance and repair of mechanical equipment and provisions on campaign – preventive maintenance of equipment and vehicles in the workplace.

4.4.8. Preventive inspections and repairs must be carried out in terms of schedule planning – preventive maintenance (CPD).

4.4.9. Capital and current repairs of main equipment is carried out by the developed and approved draft organization of work (ERP) and routing. In the ERP shall include persons responsible for compliance with safety requirements and safety measures during the repairs, and the order and sequence of repairs.

4.4.10. Stop equipment, units, devices for inspection, cleaning and repair, as well as their start should be made in accordance with the regulations approved by the head of department.

4.4.11. Before starting any repair work is necessary:

- Disconnected from the motors available on the power of the equipment in the network;

- Disassemble the drive circuit diagrams;

- The trigger to hang posters prohibiting “Do not include! Working people”, and to take measures to avoid erroneous or spontaneous switching devices.

4.4.12. Stopped for an internal inspection, cleaning or repairing equipment, units, devices and communication must be disconnected from steam, water and process piping, flues and sources of electricity supply, all pipelines should set caps; communications equipment and exempt from process materials.

4.4.13. Zone repair work must be protected from the existing equipment and communications. Zone on post safety signs, posters, signal means.

4.4.14. When repairing industrial equipment, do not clutter up the aisles and exits in the shops and indoor materials, parts, attachments, etc.

4.4.15. All work on the movement of goods should be performed at the direction and with the approval of persons responsible for the safe conduct of operations and the movement of goods.

Lift, move and drop the large and heavy loads is necessary in the presence of the person responsible for carrying out repairs.

4.4.16. Forests, bridges, stairs to carry out repair work at height must meet the requirements of SNIP 111-4-80 “Safety in Construction” [47], as well as safety regulations when working with tools and devices [64].

4.4.17. At impossibility device decking and scaffolding when working from ladders at a height of 1.5 m workers should use safety belts with safety ropes. Secure place of safety belts when working at height must be indicated on the structures.

4.4.18. Portable ladders mounted on smooth surfaces, should have reason studded tires.

Tested ladders mounted on the ground, on the grounds must have ferrules. It is forbidden to use bound ladders.

4.4.19. In the production of repair contractor work should be carried out according to the organization of work on the project along – admission or by an act of transfer of land for repairs.

4.5. Gas-flame and electric welding.

Flame work

4.5.1. Flame work should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
GOST 12.3.036-84 [14] Rules of fire safety in the Russian Federation (FSP-01-93) [59], approved by the Russian Interior Ministry 16.10.93 and Instruction approved the technical director.

When operating the acetylene and oxygen cylinders must comply with the requirements of the Rules for design and safe operation of vessels under pressure, approved by the Decree of Russian Gosgortechnadzor 28.05.93 N 12, as well as safety regulations and hygiene in the production of acetylene flame and metal processing, approved Mintyazhmashem USSR 1985

4.5.2. Tool for gas-flame operations (cutters, burners, etc.) must be registered in a special register with the application of the relevant number.

4.5.3. The place of permanent welding and gas-flame operations should a fire extinguisher, fire barrel with a sleeve attached to the nearest fire pipeline or tank of water with a margin of at least 0.2 cc. m and a sand box. Welding stations must be located in non-combustible enclosures, measuring at least 3 m. m gap between a wall of the cab and the floor should be within 50 – 100 mm.

4.5.4. All flammable materials (oil, cleaning materials, etc.) shall be located at least 10 meters from the place of production of welding and hot work.

4.5.5. When welding, all wood and other combustible parts facilities located at a distance of 2 m from the weld area must be protected with asbestos or steel sheets.

4.5.6. Premises welding areas shall be fire resistant and equipped with forced ventilation. Ceiling height should be at least 3.2 m

4.5.7. During gas welding, gas cutting and soldering is prohibited:

- Allow people to work, not certified in the prescribed manner as welders;

- Perform welding, cutting or soldering freshly painted designs;

- To carry out work on vehicles and communications filled with flammable and toxic substances as well as pressurized flammable liquids, gases, vapors, or air under pressure;

- Use of fire works with clothing with traces of oil, grease, gasoline, kerosene and other flammable liquids, as well as clothing made of synthetic materials;

- Warming up frozen acetylene generators, piping, valves, motors and other parts of open flames or red-hot objects;

- Let the oxygen tanks and equipment to the existence of oxygen plant, animal and mineral oils and oily clothes;

- To carry out the work, smoke or use open fire closer than 10 m from the cylinders with acetylene and oxygen closer than 3 m from atsetilenoprovodov and closer than 1.5 m from the oxygen supply;

- Work from one water trap two welders working on the carbide dust, push the generator large pieces of calcium carbide;

- Download carbide in wet charging baskets or in the presence of water in the gas collector, and also fill more than half of the basket;

- Use copper tools for opening drums with calcium carbide and copper solder for soldering acetylene equipment;

- Store together oxygen and acetylene cylinders.

4.5.8. Acetylene generator must be the place of welding (cutting) of the metal, as well as any other open flames and strongly heated products at a distance not less than 10 m is not permitted to operate from a portable generator, located on one trolley with an oxygen cylinder.

4.5.9. Acetylene generator shall be equipped with a water trap on the number of simultaneously used torches (torches). The water level in the gate should be checked before use and at least 2 times per shift, as well as after each kick-back and top up if necessary.

4.5.10. Acetylene generators should be periodically (but not less than 1 time per year) be inspected and tested. Business Administration should ensure testing of generators and make a note in their passports.

4.5.11. Oxygen and acetylene gear at least 1 time per quarter shall be subject to the inspection and test and instrumentation (pressure gauges, gas flow meters, etc.) – periodic inspections: its less than 1 time in
12 months from sealing and stamping them in specialized laboratories and at least 1 time in 6 months testing equipment technical service company with a record of results in the journal control checks.

4.5.12. Hoses for gas-flame operations must have the appropriate color-coded (blue – for oxygen). Hoses for gas welding shall not exceed 20 m minimum length segments abutting hoses should be at least 3 m and the number of joints no more than two.

Acetylene is not allowed to connect hoses copper tube, and use oxygen acetylene hoses and vice versa.

Fasten hoses fittings should Collar. Nipples on water gates hoses must be worn tightly without additional fastening.

4.5.13. When powered by acetylene gas welding positions and oxygen cylinders from the past must be installed vertically in special racks and firmly attached to them collars or chains. Cylinders must be over awnings that protect them from sunlight.

4.5.14. When using liquefied gas in the cold season may be heated to 30 degrees cylinders. C hot water or steam. Open fires for heating cylinders or gear is not allowed.

4.5.15. Stationary acetylene generator must be installed in a separate room. Generator room should be constructed of non-combustible material, covered with a fireproof roof light and a separate fire-resistant walls of the adjacent buildings. It should be dry, with general ventilation. To prevent water from freezing in the room temperature should be maintained below 5 degrees. C. Space heating can be water or steam, and the artificial electric lighting outside (through the window), if internal, the explosion-proof.

4.5.16. When the temporary work shall be permitted in the workplace is not more than one portable acetylene gas generator capacity of not more than
3 cubic meters. m / h under the following conditions: maximum loading lump of calcium carbide in the hopper should not exceed 4 kg, the number of simultaneously used torches (torches) – not more than two and installing water seal for each post, the total power burners (rezaktov) is not greater than 2000 liters of gas per hour, the room must have a capacity of not less than 300 cubic meters. m and ventilation.

Do not install acetylene generators and acetylene cylinders, even temporarily:

- Boilers, and blacksmith shops;

- The air intakes, fans and compressors;

- In areas where there are substances which form explosive compounds with acetylene (chlorine, oxygen, copper, zinc and their alloys);

- In the aisles, passages, stairways and in crowded places.

4.5.17. When conducting a benzo, kerosinoreznyh work is forbidden:

- Cutting to produce air at a pressure in a fuel tank, the working pressure of oxygen in the torch;

- Evaporator superheat torch to cherry color, and hang up the cutter head;

- Pinch and twist the hoses for supplying gasoline or kerosene to the cutter;

- Use oxygen hoses for supply of kerosene or gasoline to the cutter.

Electric welding

4.5.18. Electric welding work allowed to persons at least 18 years that have passed a medical examination, safety training and certified according to the Rules of certification of welders and welding engineers approved GAN Russia [81].

4.5.19. Electric welding must be performed in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.3.003-86 [22] and SNIP 111-4-80. Constant electric welding operations must be performed in buildings in specially designated ventilated, equipped fire extinguishing agents. In areas for welding Never store flammable items and materials.

4.5.20. Connect electric welding installation indoors and shops can only to special switching devices, which should always be closed and locked. They should be an inscription indicating their purpose. Connecting other devices to the current collectors are prohibited.

4.5.21. In the workshops, booths, workplaces need of Electric posting warning signs. Designated electric welding should protect opaque shields or curtains of non-combustible material.

4.5.22. Over the welding unit located outdoors, shall be constructed of non-combustible materials sheds excluding precipitation hit the workplace welder and welding equipment.

4.5.23. Each electric welding unit must be provided with a passport and operating instructions. The enterprise must be defined system maintenance, repair and responsibility for the operation and repair of welding equipment. Verification is performed annually.

4.5.24. Body electric welding installation and clamp welding transformer secondary winding, which is connected to the wire going to the product (Return) must be grounded on a common ground loop. In this serial connection to be welded together and use common grounding wire for a group of products is not allowed.

4.5.25. Welders must have a device to limit or automatic shut-off circuit voltage at break of the welding circuit.

4.5.26. Welding in enclosed or confined spaces, hazardous conditions (altitude), in tanks, wet areas, etc. must carry along by – using the admission usually DC. Repair work must be carried out in silos subject to the requirements of the Uniform safety rules during crushing, screening, mineral processing and agglomeration of ores and concentrates, § 63 [60].

4.5.27. Welding in closed containers must be performed by a special addition – the admission of at least three workers, certified for electrical safety.

Person working inside the tank shall be provided with a proven life-belt with a rope attached to it, a second end of the second must be a person who is outside the container.

Third person oversees safe operation and, if necessary, assists in running capacity.

5.4.28. Do not carry out any repairs welding systems under stress.

4.5.29. The design of the welding electrode holders must comply with the EMP and the state standard. Electrode must be convenient to use, provide a reliable grip and quick change of electrodes without contact with live parts, to have a reliable connection to the welding wire. Arms should be of a thermally insulating and dielectric material.

4.5.30. Upon completion of work, the power supply must be disconnected from the power supply and cable Electrode disconnected from the power supply and cleaned lockable room (box).

5.4.31. Workers welding jobs should be provided with personal protective shields, goggles, protective helmets, gloves dielectric, galoshes, rugs, etc. in accordance with the maintenance and PTB.

4.6. Press – forging operation

4.6.1. When forging works must comply with the requirements
of GOST 12.0.017-93 [16], these Rules and Regulations for the protection of labor in the production of press – forging works approved Russian Ministry of Labor.

4.6.2. Hog and flues flame furnaces should be cleaned periodically from the combustion products, with a full stop operation of the furnaces and air temperature inside hog no higher than 40 degrees. C.

Before operating inside the hog must disable and silence, using standard plugs, pipelines supplying liquid or gaseous fuel, ventilate the interior space, an analysis of air pollution inside the hog. Inside the hog operation must be carried along by – admission and supervised by a responsible person with breaks to stay out of the hog.

To carry out works within the hog enterprise should be designed instruction endorsed by the technical head of the company, establishing a procedure for the organization, design of safe work performance. Safety requirements should be not be less than the Model Directions for secure carrying gas hazardous work approved Gostgortechnadzor USSR 20/02/85.

4.6.3. Work on cleaning and repairing furnaces hogs must be performed by qualified workers in addition to – tolerance. Women and adolescents in these works are not permitted.

4.6.4. Boot windows furnaces fired with liquid or gaseous fuels shall be closed lids firmly attached to the openings and have hoods. Lifting caps working windows should be mechanized.

Counterweight to balance the cover furnaces should be encased in a height equal to move the counterweight from the lower position to the upper.

4.6.5. Furnaces heated workpiece extending beyond the loading gate shall be equipped with an air curtain.

4.6.6. Loading, unloading heavy and long billets from the furnace and feed them to the hammer, anvil and the press should be mechanized (cranes with special grippers, gripping tongs for monorails, special supports – roller conveyors, trough triggers, etc.).

4.6.7. Forges should have hoods that do not allow knocking them out of gas.

4.6.8. Hand forged anvils must be installed horizontally (by level) and firmly secured on a wooden chair, dug into the ground to a depth of at least 0.5 m as chairs should be used under the anvil part of a healthy butt hardwoods. Chair on top should be swift one or two steel hoops.

4.6.9. The distance between the forge and anvil must be at least 1.5 m, and between adjacent anvils at least 3 – 4 m Passes and races should be placed on the anvil is not closer than 2 meters

4.6.10. Industrial premises press – forging plant should be one story. Clearance shop equipped with forging – forging equipment and overhead cranes, must be free to allow disassembly and reassembly of the highest equipment placed in the shop.

The walls and floors of the aisle should be of durable fire-resistant materials that can withstand vibration exposure when working hammers.

4.6.11. Industrial premises repair of stamps, machined parts, etc. must be isolated from the premises by harmful factors of production.

4.6.12. For storage of stamps, blanks, forging materials and spare parts shop should have special facilities (playgrounds), equipped with devices that prevent a fall or collapse of stored goods (racks, cages for packaging, molded parts, etc.) and lifting – vehicles.

Between the racks and equipment or building wall distance should be at least 1 m

4.6.13. Location heating furnaces should eliminate the need for the heated metal on the passage or transit.

4.6.14. The shop should be equipped with general exchange of supply – exhaust and local exhaust ventilation. Ventilation unit must ensure normal sanitary zone Shop – hygienic conditions and meet the requirements of SNIP 2.04.05.-91 [52].

4.6.15. Electric induction furnaces and resistance should be equipped – free contact, switch off when you open the windows boot covers. High-temperature electric heating elements furnaces and heating furnaces magnesium alloys must be shielded and positioned so as to avoid local overheating workpieces in ovens.

4.6.16. When the blacksmith work is forbidden:

- Ferrous metal forging, chilled below 800 deg. C, as well as on wet or greasy anvil;

- Use unheated tools (pliers, mandrel);

- Touch hands to the workpieces, the striker hitting the edges and avoid idle blows top striker with the lower;

- Stand against lopping end forgings.

4.7. Thermal work

4.7.1. When the thermal and chemical – heat treatment of metals is necessary to fulfill the requirements of safety, GOST 12.3.004-75 [15] and GOST 12.2.007.9-93.

4.7.2. Production facilities for heat treatment of metals, which are in buildings with other shops should be located at the outer wall, to be isolated from other premises capital baffles and meet the requirements of Sections 4, 8, 9 of these Rules.

4.7.3. Chemicals and quenching oils used in heat treatment, must be stored in compliance with the requirements of section 6 of this Regulation.

4.7.4. Heat treatment furnaces shall be equipped with alarms that are triggered when the temperature drops, pressure and flow.

4.7.5. In flameless heating furnaces with gas loading should apply veil of non-flammable gas, preventing the formation of a combustible mixture.

4.7.6. In reheating furnaces over windows boot device must be installed local exhaust ventilation (umbrellas, shelters, etc.).

4.7.7. In quench fire departments means to be carbon dioxide or dry chemical extinguishers. Application of foam fire extinguishers and water is not allowed.

4.8. Foundry

4.8.1. Organization and conduct of the work in the foundry industry must meet the requirements of GOST 12.3.027-92. ”Works foundry, safety requirements” and GOST 12.2.099-84 “Units for steelmaking. General safety requirements.”

4.8.2. Foundries should be located downwind (wind rose) away from other industrial buildings of not less than:

 

When performance management tons of castings per year

10

20

50

Distance m

20

25

30

 

4.8.3. Building workshops must meet fire protection requirements:

the fire resistance of I and II;

class PUE-PAP.

4.8.4. Height production area from floor to ceiling should be at least
3.2 m, and the area per employee – 4.5 m. m

4.8.5. Floors in foundries must be strong: in the melting and molding departments of reinforced concrete slabs or steel corrugated material.

4.8.6. Width of aisles and passages between the equipment using small self-propelled trucks (width 500 – 700 mm) must be – 1100 – 1300 mm, electric cars – 2000 mm.

4.8.7. Drying and heat treatment furnaces shall be located on the columns and walls at a distance of respectively 1000 and 1200 mm, other equipment – at a distance of 700 – 800 mm.

4.8.8. The width of the pads (made of corrugated steel) around the furnace should be at least 0.8 m

4.8.9. Working platform furnace bay along the perimeter fence should have a solid skin on the bottom.

4.8.10. Land floors in offices melting shops where possible accumulation of water shall be equipped with devices for its removal. When pouring the liquid metal into contact with the water should be excluded.

4.8.11. On the job site must be near furnaces device to blow jobs.

4.8.12. Foundries must be equipped with supply – exhaust ventilation, the amount of air is determined by the rate of 1 ton of castings (thousand cubic m. / Hr):

Material

Mass castings kg

<100

100 – 1000

> 1000

cast iron

300

260

230

steel

330

300

280

 

4.8.13. Melting units must be equipped with devices to purify the waste gases: spark arrestor, cyclones, bag filters.

4.8.14. Crushing and grinding machines must be equipped with dust extraction or aspiration devices.

4.8.15. The concentration of pollutants in the air of the working area foundries should be monitored according to the schedule approved by the technical manager of the shop.

The content of harmful substances in the air of the working area must not exceed the maximum permissible concentration (MPC) set GOST 12.1.005-88 General sanitary – hygienic requirements to the working area.

4.8.16. Charged into the smelting furnace materials should be pre-dried.

Feed raw materials in melting bath is prohibited.

4.8.17. During filling materials and podvalki charge all work on the stove should be suspended, and the people removed to a safe distance.

8.4.18. Finding people under the stove after straightening charge prohibited.

8.4.19. Prior to the casting of the metal should be checked for cracks notch and moisture in the lining to prevent leakage or ejection of metal.

Overflow metal and slag into molds in shlakovnitsy not allowed.

4.8.20. Shihtovochnye materials should be stored in covered areas, in bins, silos, pits.

8.4.21. Unloading and feed materials shihtovochnyh to melting furnaces and their load shall be mechanized.

4.8.22. Slag yard should be located in an area remote from the residential and office premises and drive ways.

8.4.23. Slag pit wall must be made of heat-resistant concrete and lined with metal plates. Drain liquid slag should be made uniform jet.

4.8.24. Extinguishing media should be:

- Smelters – dry powder fire extinguishers, dry sand, fluxes;

- In molding and core departments – chemical foam, carbon dioxide.

8.4.25. For work in foundries (production areas) allowed persons at least 18 years have passed medical examination and safety training, workplace training and validation of knowledge.

4.8.26. Melting department staff should be provided with personal protective equipment: insulating costumes, footwear, safety glasses, respirators.

4.9. Woodworking

4.9.1. General requirements

4.9.1.1. Technological processes (work) wood should be organized and conducted in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.3.042-88 [17] and safety requirements for equipment to GOST 12.2.026.0-93 [34].

4.9.1.2. On all work must be developed and approved the technical lead instructions, which includes measures to prevent impact on operating dangerous and harmful factors.

4.9.1.3. For fire and explosion hazards of woodworking processes are categorized in, land grinding – the category B.

4.9.2. Requirements for jobs

4.9.2.1. Accommodation production equipment and business jobs in woodworking shops must comply with the requirements of GOST 12.3.042-88 [17].

4.9.2.2. Equipment when working where there is a risk ejection cutting tool material being processed or trimmings workplace should be located outside the potential release or protected by screens.

4.9.2.3. All jobs must be provided with devices and equipment for cleaning of machinery and equipment, cleaning jobs. In the working area must be specified storage device inventory. Use compressed air to blast equipment, jobs, overalls prohibited. Allowed for these purposes apply the cleaner installation.

4.9.2.4. Storage of the processed material in the passages, on the equipment or on the railing prohibited. Materials must be packed in stable stacks around equipment in designated areas to a height of not more than 1.7 m from the floor.

4.9.2.5. Workbenches, shelving, stands, cabinets, tables and other equipment must be strong, stable, securely fastened to the floor, height, suitable for work.

4.9.2.6. Do not operate the log frames, disk, chipper and other machines and units at:

- Touch the fence;

- Divorced uneven teeth and the presence of burrs;

- Damaged lubrication systems and cooling and are not blocked;

- Distortions and loosening the structures;

- Heating of bearings for more than 70 deg. C.

4.9.2.7. At various stages of wood must be installed iron catcher. Over bunkers and presses shredded wood chips must be installed aspiration system (hoods).

4.9.3. Lumber production and procurement

4.9.3.1. Storage area from the sawmilling logs frame must be equipped with guards, excluding loss from the storage timber to the side frame sawing.

4.9.3.2. Workers at the sawmill frames must be provided with special support tool for moving logs and amendments, boards, planks, slabs on okoloramnyh mechanisms to remove the obstruction of overhang as for sending logs or sawn timber in the guide blades in case utykaniya and for cleaning of the workplace.

4.9.3.3. To remove the gap between the floor and the lower feed roller accumulated near the frame sawing sawdust should only be fitted for this auxiliary tool. Clearance between floor and lower front feed roller frame sawing height greater than 100 mm shall be stopped lattice through which removes sawdust, bark and other small wood particles.

4.9.3.4. To be manually processed material to the machine workers should be provided with special steel hooks with insulated handle.

4.9.3.5. Length of workpiece materials on circular machines with motorized exceed the distance between the front and rear feed rollers not less than 100 mm.

4.9.3.6. Material handling 400 mm shorter and has 30 mm circular saws with manual submission must be equipped with a special device, interlocked with the starter or a carriage for holding and reliable clamping material eliminates the emission of the workpiece. With a length of 1.5 meters of material around the machine must be installed ladders roller bearings.

4.9.4. Treatment of lumber and blanks.

4.9.4.1. Planing to planing with manual feed Korce 400 mm and is 30 mm should be done with the use of special pads – pushers.

4.9.4.2. Simultaneous planing two or more blanks must be done in special templates provided with reliable clamping devices.

4.9.4.3. For cutting billets of 400 mm length, section 40 x 40 mm or less should be used special tools (carriage templates tsulagi).

4.9.4.4. For processing drilling and slotting machines items must be firmly anchored to a desk or a support machine by means of clips.

4.9.4.5. To limit the trolley shpaloreznogo machine at both ends of the path should be set a limit stop with shock-absorbing devices.

4.9.4.6. We supply machines shpaloopravochnyh sleeper carriage to and from the machine should be mechanized.

4.10. Construction and repair works.

4.10.1. Construction and repair work must be performed in compliance with the requirements of SNIP 111-4-80 [47]. Lifting devices, lifting body and fittings shall meet the requirements of the Rules for design and safe operation of cranes.

4.10.2. Prohibited lifting precast without mounting tabs and labels or markings to ensure their proper slinging and installation (the word “Top”).

Slinging elements and structures should be tested to make inventory slings, and where necessary, – specially designed means of handling the schemes drawn up taking into account the strength and stability of raised structures under construction loads.

4.10.3. Elements and structure during movement restrained from rotation and rocking back lines of hemp rope or a thin, flexible cable.

4.10.4. All persons on the construction site must wear protective helmets. Do not allow unauthorized persons in the area where works are carried out.

4.10.5. Do not carry out construction and installation work associated with finding people in one section (-bay, site) on the floors (tiers), over which the transfer is made, the installation of temporary fastening elements or prefabricated buildings and structures, as well as moving equipment hoisting means. Moving and installation of components and structures above ceilings, under which are working and people are allowed in the presence of between reliable (sound effect corresponding expectation shock) intermediate floors a written order by the technical manager of the installation company after the development and implementation of measures to ensure the safe the work.

4.10.6. The boundary of the danger zone is defined by the horizontal distance from a possible crash site when moving cargo crane. This distance is at a maximum lifting height of 20 m must be at least 7 m, with a height of up to 100 m – not less than 10 m at a higher altitude is adopted in accordance with the project work.

4.10.7. Roofing.

4.10.7.1. Roofing work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of
GOST 12.3.040-86 [18] and SNIP 111-4-80 [47].

4.10.7.2. Admission workers on the roof rafters are permitted after inspection, crates (formwork), parapet and determine if appropriate places and ways to provide secure lifeline roofers. When working on the roof of the workers should receive special instruction and be provided with safety belts, clothing and non-slip footwear.

4.10.7.3. Working on a roof with a slope of more than 20 degrees. must be equipped with safety belts tested, portable ladders width not less than 30 cm with cross bars for resting feet. Ladders during operation should fasten securely. Designated secure ladders and safety belts are specified master or foreman.

4.10.7.4. For the passage of workers to asbestos-cement roofing and coatings of armopenobetonnyh slabs should be laid traps width not less than 30 cm

4.10.7.5. Install eaves slopes, gutters, chimneys, parapets and downspouts need to hang with scaffolding, graduation forests or suspended platforms.

4.10.7.6. Placed on the roof materials, tools and containers are allowed in places of production provided by the project works, subject only to take action against them fall (slip) on the slope or the wind blowing.

4.10.7.7. Fall from top area of ​​materials, tools, containers from the building, which produced roofing should be bounded by a perimeter of the building.

4.10.7.8. Prohibited from discharging from the roofing materials and tools.

4.10.7.9. Not allowed perform roofing work during ice, fog, thunderstorms and wind speed of 15 m / sec and visibility less than 50 m

4.10.7.10. Work on clearing the roofs and eaves of snow and ice must be carried along by – and tolerance under the direction of the responsible person. Zone Fall snow (ice) should be fenced, and the workers on the roof fitted with safety belts fastened and tested lifeline.

4.10.8. Painting and painting works.

4.10.8.1. Painting and painting work must comply with the requirements of GOST 12.3.035-84 [4] and industrial sanitation and PTB for paint shops [71].

4.10.8.2. Exterior painting and painting work should be done with scaffolding or cradles. Application hanging ladders are not allowed.

Internal painting and painting work should be done with the inventory scaffolding ladders – ladders. Use ladders must be authorized by the master with a small amount and duration of the work, at a height of not more than
3.5 m from the ground or floor. Ladders should be at the lower ends ferrules with sharp tips or rubber shoes at least two metal tie rods and steps cut in the string (for wooden stairs).

4.10.8.3. Internal painting and painting works using compositions emit harmful volatile couples should be carried with the windows open and the presence of ventilation performance, breathable, wherein the content of harmful substances do not exceed the MPC. Produce work with broken ventilation prohibited.

Painting work using nitrokrasok allowed outdoors only. When coloring products indoor device is required ventilation, local ventotsosov, fume cupboards.

4.10.8.4. Not allowed to use white lead as part paints and leaded gasoline and benzene as a solvent.

4.10.8.5. In the area of ​​application nitrokrasok and other compounds forming hazardous volatile couples forbidden to smoke and produce work related to the use of open flames. At the same time used electrical and electrical products must be explosion-proof or disabled.

In areas where the paint is made with water compositions, wiring time on painting works must be disconnected from the mains supply.

4.10.8.6. In the paint shop supply coating materials should be stored in closed containers and not exceed the replacement needs.

4.10.9. Outdoor plumbing

4.10.9.1. To meet the operational and emergency work on water supply and sewerage networks should create brigades due to the volume of work done, but not less than 2 persons.

4.10.9.2. Work on water and sewer manholes and chambers of pumping stations and sewage treatment plants should be performed only along – admission.

4.10.9.3. To work associated with the descent into the well (the water or sewer), allowed a team consisting of at least 3 people.: One for work in the pit, the second – to work on the surface and the third – for the technical supervision and, if necessary, to assist working in the well.

4.10.9.4. Before conducting works in the pit should be provided for monitoring the atmosphere using gas analyzers.

4.10.9.5. Brigade to work in wells, reservoirs and chambers must have the following safety and protective equipment:

- Lifebelt with rope, proven strength (cable length should be 2 m greater than the depth of the well);

- Apparatus with hose 2 m greater than the depth of the well, but the total length of no more than 12 m (not exchange Apparatus filter);

- Gas analyzer;

- Low-voltage electrical lamps (prohibited use of light sources with an open fire);

- Hand-held fan;

- Portable ladder;

- Barrier portable signs form;

- Hooks and crowbars for opening covers wells.

Employment wells, chambers, reservoirs without posing barriers and road signs, and no lighting at night is not permitted.

4.10.9.6. Of thermal insulation of equipment and pipelines must comply with the safety requirements in accordance with GOST 12.3.038-85 [20], anti-corrosion work – according to GOST 12.3.016-87 [5].

 

 

5. Power supply, water supply and sewerage

 

5.1. Heating.

5.1.1. Design and operation of boiler installations must comply with the Regulations for the Safe operation of steam and hot water boilers [62], as well as the Rules of the device and the safe operation of steam and hot water, approved Gostgortechnadzor Russia 18.07.94 (as amended in 1991, 1994.).

5.1.2. Placement, construction and operation of heating systems and points at industrial sites must meet the requirements of SNIP 2.04.07-86 [48].

5.1.3. Indoor air temperature should not be less than specified in
SNIP 2.04.05-91 [52].

5.1.4. For heating and domestic heating should be used as a coolant, usually water, other fluids may be used at appropriate justification in the project.

5.1.5. Space heating warehouses allowed limit technological requirements.

The premises for filling and storage tanks of compressed and liquefied gases, storerooms and combustible materials in areas designated in the shops for storage of combustible materials, heaters must protect the screens of non-combustible materials, providing access to them.

In warehouses, storerooms and other areas to which access is restricted, permitted to place equipment air and air – air curtains with water as a coolant or steam.

In unheated buildings to maintain the air temperature on the technological requirements in certain areas, areas in temporary jobs during commissioning and maintenance of the equipment should be provided house or local heating.

5.1.6. Heating pipes must be laid open; hidden gasket must be justified in the project, and should include hatches locations gasketed joints and valves.

In heating device should be provided to disable them.

Slopes pipeline of water, steam and condensate should be no less than 0,002.

Distance (light) from the surface of pipelines, heating appliances to construction of combustible materials should be at least 1.0 m, with a smaller distance should provide thermal insulation of these constructions of non-combustible materials.

Pipelines at the intersection of overlap, internal walls and partitions should be installed in the sleeves of noncombustible materials, sealing gaps and holes in the ground pads should also be of non-combustible materials.

5.2. Electrical.

5.2.1. Electrical substation and switchgear.

5.2.1.1. Electricity production and auxiliary facilities shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations for Electrical (PUE) [66] and safety regulations for the operation of electrical consumers (PTBEP) [67] and the Rules of Operation of Electrical – consumers (PEEP) [68]. Electrical installations in auxiliary shops must comply with Regulations for Electrical approved Gosenergonadzor 31.03.92.

5.2.1.2. All transformer stations and space RU adjacent to other spaces, must be isolated from them and be separate lockable output with an internal lock.

Procedure for access to these areas and storage keys are determined by a person responsible for the electric company.

5.2.1.3. Live parts ballasts protection should be protected from accidental contact. In special areas (electric machine, panel, control stations) allowed outdoor installation devices without protective covers, to the exclusion of access by unauthorized persons.

5.2.1.4. On examination of electrical voltages above 1000 volts one person never do what whatever works, as well as to penetrate the fence and enter the chamber switchgear. Inspection equipment, apparatus and jumper allowed the threshold camera or standing in front of the barrier.

5.2.1.5. Electrical equipment of all types and RU stresses must satisfy the conditions of work both at nominal operating conditions, and when the overvoltage and overload (§ 5.4.7). When short-circuit protection shall operate for their shutdown.

Insulation class electrical appliances as well as cables and wires must match the network or electrical, environmental conditions and requirements of the relevant chapters of the EMP.

5.2.1.6. Indoor air temperature, Uzbekistan closed in the summer should be no more than 40 degrees. C. In case of its increase should be taken to reduce the temperature of air or cooling equipment.

5.2.1.7. Cable channels and terrestrial cable trays must be covered RU fireproof plates, trays and output location and transitions honey compartments must be sealed with a refractory material.

5.2.1.8. All keys, buttons and arms control should be an inscription indicating the operation that are intended (“Enable”, “Disable”, “Reduce”, “Add”).

On signal lamps and signaling devices must be inscriptions indicating the nature of the signal (“Enabled”, “Disabled”, “Overheating”).

5.2.1.9. Drives disconnectors, earthing switches, separators, and other equipment for short, separated from the wall of the apparatus should be disconnected and pointers included provisions.

5.2.1.10. We duty personnel must be calibrated reserve fuse inserts. Never use a fuse links uncalibrated.

5.2.1.11. Indoor RU must be portable earthing devices, fire protection and aids (sand, carbon dioxide fire extinguishers) and means for providing first aid to the victims of accidents.

5.2.1.12. RU inspection should be carried out without shutting down:

- On objects permanently manned staff – at least 1 time in 3 days;

- At the sites without permanent duty personnel – at least 1 time per month, and in transformers and distribution points – at least one every 6 months.

Seen all faults must be made in writing an operating log or journal of defects and faults on electrical equipment. Information about them should be communicated to the person responsible for the electrical equipment.

5.2.1.13. When viewed RU special attention should be paid to:

- The state of the premises, damage to doors and windows, leaks in the roof, the availability and serviceability of locks;

- Condition of the heating, ventilation, lighting and ground network;

- Availability of remedies;

- The level and temperature of the oil and leaks in the apparatus;

- Condition of the contacts, chipping shield low voltage;

- Integrity of seals in counters;

- Condition of the insulation (dust, cracks, bits);

- Work the alarm system;

- The condition and correct reading of the position indication switches;

- Tightness of control cabinets.

5.2.1.14. Upon detection of a fault current-carrying part of the installation on the ground is prohibited to disable it closer to a place of such damage at a distance of less than 5 m in closed RU and 8 – 10 m in open substations.

Approximation to a close distance is only allowed to perform operations with switching equipment that allows to eliminate ground fault, as well as providing the necessary assistance to the victims. In these cases, be sure to protect yourself from the action of the voltage step: put dielectric bots podstelit insulating mats or other reliable means of isolation. All operations must be performed in the dielectric gloves or by insulating rods.

5.3. Electrical equipment and installations.

5.3.1. Operation of power plants must carry electrical appropriately qualified staff, trained knowledge test in accordance with the requirements of PEEP. Equipment maintenance organization may carry out specialized electrical personnel or another entity under the contract.

5.3.2. Selection and installation of electrical equipment, electrical wiring and cable lines for explosive fire zones and auxiliary facilities shall be made in accordance with the EMP (Chapter 7.3, 7.4) based on the classification of hazardous areas and explosive mixtures, as well as the classification of flammable materials (liquids, dusts and fibers).

5.3.3. Buildings and facilities should be provided with lightning protection in accordance with the Regulations on the design and lightning protection of buildings and structures. Inspection and condition of lightning and resistance grounding device should be performed before each stormy season with the corresponding registration results in the journal.

5.3.4. In auxiliary workshops should be power supply circuit showing all energy consumers, fuse links and currents of protective devices.

For each installation shall be made operational schemes normal and emergency modes. Match electrical circuits actually exploited should be checked at least once every two years with a mark on their face verification in the terms established by the responsible person for the electric company.

5.3.5. In electrical circuits should be made to protect consumers against overload and short circuits. For the direct performance of functions by the operation of electrical plant manager must designate a person responsible for the electrical shop, as well as his deputy.

5.3.6. Responsible for the electrical equipment can be assigned to a specialist with appropriate education, after checking the knowledge of this Regulation, the safety rules stated in § 5.3.1, and assigning the qualifying group for electrical: V – in electrical voltage above 1000 V, IV – in electrical voltage up to 1000 V.

Upon the presentation of the person responsible for the electrical Manager assigns responsible for the electrical business units.

5.3.7. Responsible for the proper operation of electrical equipment on the person responsible for the electrical plant, and subordinate staff in the amounts stipulated job descriptions.

Responsible for it to stop electrical repair according to schedule maintenance and disruption of normal operation mode is the head of the shop, for the quality of repairs – responsible for the electrical shop.

Service work on the electrical allowed persons at least 18 years that have passed a medical examination, are trained to safely work Authenticated knowledge PTE and PTB and having qualification group (II-V), depending on the nature of the work.

5.3.8. When a fault or electrical grids persons associated with their operation, shall immediately disable these settings and report the fault to your supervisor.

Troubleshooting should be done under the supervision of the second person in compliance with the measures to ensure the safe performance of work in accordance with the requirements PTBEP and PEEP.

5.3.9. The protection against electric shock must undergo regular inspection and cleaning. Need to check on them external damage, compliance with the voltage of the installation, as well as compliance of their periodic test. Upon detection of a faulty protective equipment or expired checks should be immediately withdrawn from use.

Nomenclature of protective equipment, where it is stored and the frequency of inspection establishes the person responsible for the electrical equipment.

5.3.10. The trigger machines and mechanisms for their trip should appear forbidding poster: “Do not include! Working people.”

5.3.11. Before starting the equipment temporarily disabled should be examined, to ensure readiness to receive the voltage and prevent it working on the staff of the impending inclusion. Temporary fences must be posted warning signs: “Stop! Danger.”

5.3.12. On switching devices must be specified provisions to enable or disable, and inscriptions indicating their installation included.

5.4. Electric motors and machines.

5.4.1. On switches, contactors, magnetic starters, operational control devices or in close proximity to them, on the front side panels, boards, panels are inscriptions indicating include equipment, machinery and equipment.

On electric motors and they drive mechanisms shall be marked arrows indicating the direction of rotation of the engine and the motor shaft. The ballast must be marked with the provisions of the “Start” and “Stop”.

5.4.2. After stopping the motor for repair with the power cable on a board or assembly must be de-energized and the actuator switch hung a poster: “Do not include! Working people”.

Remove poster and turn the engine can only be after the person who performs the work, make a journal entry about the completion of the work, and the person who has taken a job, make a note of the resolution on the inclusion of the motor.

5.4.3. Conclusions of the stator and rotor windings must be closed or protected. Rotating parts of machines – pulleys, couplings, fans, open portions of the shafts must be enclosed by fencing, the removal of which during operation is prohibited.

5.4.4. When the winding insulation resistance below 0.1 MW drying motor should be made ​​to external heating or blowing hot dry air (70 deg. -
80 deg. C). As the heater can be used incandescent lamps, electric heaters, air heater installation.

5.4.5. State motor bearings should be checked during operation, with periodic inspections and repairs. Bearings should not be heated above the temperature set by the – by the manufacturer.

5.4.6. Motors shall be immediately disconnected from the network when:

- Accident (or the threat of it);

- The appearance of smoke or fire, or a motor control apparatus;

- Vibration beyond acceptable norms, threatening the integrity of the motor heating bearings beyond the limits;

- Damage to the drive mechanism, the appearance of abnormal knocking.

5.4.7. In group assemblies and electric shields shall be provided voltmeters or signal lamp control voltage presence. Ammeters shall be marked (the line) the maximum permissible load.

Voltage switchgear on boards shall be maintained within 100 – 105% of the nominal, consumers should be turned off when the voltage drops to 95% of nominal.

5.4.8. Electric machinery prone technological overload, must be equipped with an ammeter installed in the starting board or panel.

5.5. Portable power tools.

5.5.1. Power tools (electric, Electro, elektroshpilkoverty, grinders, electric soldering irons, rezbonarezateli, vibrators, etc.) must meet the requirements of GOST 12.2.013.0-91 [30] and safety when working with tools and devices [64], in particular:

- Rapidly turned on and off from the mains, not activated and remain spontaneously;

- Be safe to use and have inaccessible accidentally touching live parts.

5.5.2. Portable electro-voltage should be:

- Not more than 220 smokers without high risk;

- Not more than 42 in areas with high risk.

5.5.3. When it is impossible to ensure the work of the power at a voltage 42 V allowed the use of the power voltage of 220 V, but with mandatory use of protective equipment (gloves, dielectric) and reliable chassis ground tool.

5.5.4. Sockets intended for connection of the power should be inaccessible to touch live parts and third grounding prong.

Sockets (sockets, plugs), applicable to voltage 12 and 42 should be different from compounds 127 and 220, and exclude the possibility of inclusion of forks 12 and 42 in the sockets 127 and 220 V.

5.5.5. Before issuing the operating power must be checked for damage wire insulation, earthing and the cliff-grounding conductor (wire). To work with power tools allowed a person having a group of electrical safety not less than 11.

5.5.6. To join a network tool should be used sheathed cable. Allowed to use multicore flexible cables (type PWG) with insulated voltage below 500 enclosed in a flexible rubber hose.

5.5.7. Upon the termination of the current supply during power must be disconnected from the mains.

5.6. Protection against electric shock.

5.6.1. According to the degree of danger of electric shock premises differ:

- With increased risk of having a damp, conductive structures, as well as dust and high temperature (casting, forging – forging, vulcanizing and other sites);

- Particularly hazardous areas with extreme moisture and chemically active environment (battery compartment, car washing stations, etc.).

Electrical design shall be provided in accordance with GOST 12.1.019-79 electrical [21] and circuit-breakers according to GOST 12.4.155-85.

5.6.2. Power electrical substations, electrical grids and shall be protected against short circuits and violations of normal modes of relay protection devices, circuit breakers or fuses in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical (PUE) [66].

5.6.3. To protect people from electric shock, damage to the insulation in electrical installations should be provided for grounding and vanishing in accordance with the requirements of the SAE [66] and GOST 12.1.030-81 [80].

5.6.4. Electrical grounding devices must comply with the EMP and ensure the conditions of human security and protection of electrical and operating modes. Part of the apparatus to be grounded, must have a trusted connection to the grounding pin device or with grounded structure on which they are installed.

5.6.5. Use as earthing of metal structures of buildings permitted in cases of finding them in the ground and at a sufficient electrical conductivity.

Contact resistance and earthing device in the low ground (rocks) must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of SAE with the specific conditions of the ground.

5.6.6. Joining grounding protective conductors to earth electrodes, earthing and grounding network structures must be made by welding, and the housings, machines – welding or bolting reliable.

Each part of an installation, subject to ground, must be connected to the network using a separate grounding conductor. Series connection of the protective conductor to the grounding of grounded electrical parts is prohibited.

5.6.7. Grounding network must be available for inspection and control. Conductors must have a coating protects against corrosion, as well as a distinctive bright coloring.

5.6.8. To determine the technical condition of the grounding device shall be conducted ground resistance measurement of each machine, machinery, apparatus at least 1 time per year with the preparation of the protocol, and after installation, reconstruction and overhaul of grounding devices.

Grounding resistance of each of the power plant to be ground should be no more than 4 ohms.

5.6.9. Per in service grounding device must have a passport that contains a schematic diagram basic technical data, results of checking his condition, about the nature of repairs and modifications made to this device.

5.6.10. For electrical installations shall be prohibited:

- Use cables with damaged or lost the protective properties of the insulation;

- Used for heating and drying substandard (home) heating apparatus;

- Leave energized bare ends of electrical wires and cables;

- Avoid contact with electrical wires metallic structures;

- Use stationary lights as portable lamps;

- Use faulty sockets, lighting boxes, circuit breakers and other wiring products;

- Tie and twist the electric wire and wire delay and fixtures, lamps hung on electric wires;

- Use rollers, switches, sockets for hanging clothes and other items;

- Electric lamps wrap paper, cloth, and other combustible materials;

- Use of electric conductors for not complying with the operating conditions in the cross section and insulation;

- Use as an electrical protection uncalibrated fuses;

- Roughened or disable devices Electrical.

5.7. Maintenance and repair of equipment

5.7.1. All kinds of repairs should be drawn graphics, approved person responsible for the electrical equipment.

Frequency and duration of all types of repairs for certain types of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with the Rules of Operation of Electrical Equipment (PEEP), applicable industry standards and guidelines factories – manufacturers.

5.7.2. Changing electrical circuits when performing repairs should be carried out according to the approved technical documentation.

5.7.3. When accepting the repair of equipment should be checked according to the quality of work reporting the technical documentation.

5.7.4. Entered after repair equipment shall be tested in accordance with the Standards of electrical tests.

5.7.5. All work performed during overhaul of the main electrical accepted to act, to which should be attached to the technical repair manuals. Acts with all attachments are stored in passports equipment.

On the work carried out in the rest of the overhaul of electrical equipment and apparatus, is detailed in the passport entry equipment or special journal.

List of main equipment received after repair under the act, set director.

5.8. Technical documentation.

5.8.1. Each enterprise must have the following technical documentation for electrical equipment (according to PEEP Ch. 1.8) [68]:

- Approval of project documentation with all subsequent amendments;

- Acts of acceptance of works, testing and commissioning of electrical equipment;

- Executive workloads primary and secondary electrical connections;

- Technical passport main electrical electrical maintenance instructions, as well as job descriptions and instructions on labor protection;

- Drawings of cable routes and grounding devices with bindings to buildings and structures, as well as showing the mounting of couplings and intersections with other communications;

- Common power supply circuit;

- Maintenance schedules and repair of electrical equipment, electrical installations;

- Magazine test knowledge of PTB;

- Lists of persons entitled to issue orders (orders) of the work in electrical installations;

- List of persons nominated by the order of the responsible managers, producers work on dresses and orders, watching;

- Lists of persons entitled to the sole inspection of electrical installations;

- Online call log – faults (if any duty electricians);

- Orders for the production of works in electrical;

- Journal of Accounting and maintenance of protective equipment;

- Inspection log stationary electrical grounding;

- Approved list of maintenance and repair of electrical installations performed by outfit – tolerance.

Storage documentation determined by the person responsible for the electric company.

5.8.2. For auxiliary facilities shall be drawn up and approved by the Chief Engineer lists of instructions and diagrams, which must be reviewed at least once every three years. The list should include:

- Passport (magazines) with a list of equipment;

- Drawings of electrical equipment;

- Circuit cable routes and grounding devices;

- Common power supply circuit;

- Set of maintenance and job descriptions.

5.8.3. When an alarm is detected in the auxiliary shops workers are obliged to immediately inform the staff on duty and take measures to control the consequences.

5.9. Repair and charging batteries.

5.9.1. Battery plant (site) must have two isolated from each other premises, equipped with forced ventilation – one for repair, another – for charging batteries.

Allowed to charge the battery pack indoors for repair only in a fume hood. Must vents in the general ventilation system of the building is prohibited.

5.9.2. Walls, ceiling, doors, window frames and shelving in battery rooms should be painted with paint, acid, and glass windows – white paint to prevent the penetration of sunlight.

5.9.3. Facilities for maintenance and repair of batteries and prepare the electrolyte must be equipped with shelves, cabinets, storage and preparation of electrolyte (in a separate compartment).

5.9.4. In areas immediately adjacent to the battery shop (area) should be wash with cold water, soap, candy package, towel and a closed vessel with 5 – 10% of a neutralizing solution of baking soda (when working with acid batteries). When working with alkaline batteries as a neutralizing solution to be applied of 5 – 10% solution of boric acid.

Eyewash should be applied 2 – 3% above neutralizing solutions. If acid, alkali or electrolyte on the exposed parts of the body, rinse immediately with this first part of the body neutralizing solution, then with soap and water.

Vessels obmyvochnoy water and neutralized with a solution must be installed on the cranes and special stands on the available height. Vessels must have distinctive coloring and explanatory inscriptions.

5.9.5. Transport Removing the battery is needed on special carts with nests and move them using special devices.

5.9.6. Benches, tables and workstations designed to remove sulphate from the lead plates, stacking them in block halves, install separators etc. must be equipped with local exhaust ventilation.

5.9.7. In the room where the battery is charging, it is prohibited:

- Use open flames for heating mastics;

- Use electric heaters;

- Be strangers;

- Store food and eating;

- Smoking.

5.9.8. Preparation of the acidic electrolyte (sulfuric acid mixing with distilled water) should be carried out in specially designed vessels of acid resistant material (ceramic, plastic, etc.) other than glass. In preparing the electrolyte sulfuric acid should pouring a thin stream into distilled water while continuously stirring the solution.

5.9.7. Vessels with acid, alkali and electrolyte shall be hermetically sealed and have the appropriate label. With a total capacity of more than 5 liters containers should be placed in the device that allows emptying without considerable effort and excluding accidental damage and rollover.

5.9.10. Joint storage and charging of acid and alkaline batteries in the same room is prohibited.

5.9.11. Working while charging batteries must use an acid-alkali-resistant gloves and goggles.

5.9.12. Monitoring the progress of charging should be done with special devices. Check the battery short-circuit is prohibited.

5.10. Water.

5.10.1. Economic – drinking water should ensure the water supply, the quality of which must meet the requirements of GOST 2874-82 and SanPin N 4630-88.

5.10.2. The availability of water for 1 person per shift must be in the range of 25 – 40 liters, depending on the heat release in the shop. In office buildings 10 – 15 liters per man-shift. Consumption for irrigation coatings sites and green spaces – 0.4 – 0.5 l / day for 1 m. m

5.10.3. Water production should ensure the water supply, the quality of which must satisfy the requirements of the enterprise and technology Sanitary standards CH-245-71 [58].

5.10.4. Sources of water supply schemes and water supply systems, water intake structures, methods of treatment, water pumping stations for water supply network in the fire or combined plumbing, water lines, water supply networks and facilities for them, water storage tanks, automation and control system of pump stations shall meet the requirements SNIP 2.04.02-84 [49].

Operation of water and sewer facilities and networks should be implemented in compliance with GOST 12.3.006-75 [37].

5.10.5. Zone of sanitary protection of water sources and locations of intake structures shall consist of three zones: the first – a strict regime, second and third – regimes limiting economic activity.

The first zone (zone of strict regime) includes the territory intakes locations, sites of all water facilities and water conveyance channels.

The first zone is set at a distance of not less than 30 m from the water intake – by using the protected groundwater and not less than 50 m – insufficiently protected.

The second and third zones include areas designated for the protection of water sources from pollution.

5.10.6. To determine the boundaries of the first, second and third zones of sanitary protection zones should be guided by the requirements of SNIP 2.04.02-84 [49] and the Regulation on the protection of groundwater [79], as well as GOST 17.1.3.05-82, GOST 17.1.13-86 [ 38, 39].

5.10.7. On platforms waterworks shall be provided sanitary measures for improvement, creating watchdog protection blind fence height
of 2.5 m is allowed to provide deaf fence 2 m high and 0.5 m of barbed wire or metal mesh.

5.10.8. Location drinking water tanks must be included in the zone of strict regime. It is strictly forbidden access to unauthorized persons tanks. All hatches and manholes cameras switching valves should be closed and sealed.

5.10.9. In operation, water towers, the following rules apply:

- Area near the tower within at least 50 meters to keep clean;

- The area should be fenced and landscaped;

- All outputs and manholes in the water tower should be closed and sealed.

5.10.10. Requirements for design, lighting, heating and ventilation, and placement of fencing equipment and its maintenance, water and sewage pumping stations are determined in accordance with GOST 12.3.006-75 [37]. Developed on the basis of the said Regulation, taking into account local conditions Safety Instructions shall be posted in a conspicuous place.

5.10.11. Device internal plumbing in the production and auxiliary buildings for supplying water for industrial, household and drinking purposes and sewer sewage must comply SNIP 2.04.01-85 [50].

5.10.12. The workshops should be drinking water that meets health requirements. Drinking water temperature should be 8 – 20 deg. C. Distribute water should be of the closed lock on tanks with taps and spouting nozzles. Water should be changed daily.

Distance from jobs to drinking facilities shall be not more than 75 m in areas where toxic substances are used, the installation of drinking devices are not allowed.

5.10.13. Water basins, showers, cooling in air conditioners and dust control must meet the requirements for drinking water.

05/10/14. Staff hot shops and sites must be provided soda salted drinking water (containing up to 5 grams of salt per 1 liter of water) at the rate of
3 – 5 liters per one working shift.

5.10.15. Connecting networks economically – potable water networks of water pipes, non-potable water quality feed is not allowed. It is forbidden to include water recycling system for washing vehicles and objects containing toxic and infectious substances.

10/05/16. Industrial water supply systems shall meet the technological requirements and does not cause corrosion of equipment, pipelines and salt deposits.

10/05/17. In buildings, depending on their purpose should include the following internal plumbing system:

- Household and drinking;

- Production;

- Fire.

05/10/18. Depending on the requirements of production technology to reduce water consumption is necessary to provide running water recycling systems and water reuse.

10/05/19. The design of the water intake and valves must ensure a smooth closing and opening the water flow.

05/10/20. When the location of the plumbing fixture at a height of more than 1.5 m above the floor should include fixed platforms or bridges to its service.

5.11. Sewerage

5.11.1. Sewer services shall meet the requirements of SNIP 2.4.01-85 [50] and SNIP 2.04.03-85. Under the technical supervision of the construction and repair of sewer systems should be guided by SNIP 3.05.04-85.

5.11.2. In operation, water and sewer facilities and networks workers should use personal protective equipment.

5.11.3. Depending on the purpose of the building shall be provided following internal drainage system:

- Home – for wastewater from toilets, sinks, bathtubs, shower, etc.;

- Manufacturing – for removing industrial wastewater.

On the premises should be organized storm sewer.

5.11.4. All toilets should be equipped with individual flushing cisterns and flushing valves.

5.11.5. Sewage disposal should be provided on the closed gravity pipelines. Wastewater treatment, as well as their choice of descent should take into account the requirements of Regulation [65] and Sanitary Norms SanPin 4630-88/82 /.

5.11.6. Intrashop treatment plants should be placed with the possibility of inspection, cleaning and repair, if this is necessary to provide the mechanization of labor-intensive processes.

5.11.7. If there is a large floating sewage, fiber and other contaminants should include the installation of grilles. Removing sludge from sewage treatment plants capacity of more than 1.5 l / s should be mechanized.

5.11.8. Above and below ground laying sewer pipes on platforms shops prohibited.

5.11.9. Improvement and reconstruction of water supply and sanitation in industrial plants is prohibited without the consent of the state sanitary supervision.

5.11.10. Sewage treatment plants must be removed at the distances specified in the table.

 

Sanitary – protective zone for sewage

treatment facilities

Name of structures

Sanitary – protective zone, m, at the design performance facilities, thous. m / day.

Structures and mechanical biological treatment sludge fermented sites for precipitation and sludge beds in separate locations

0.2

more than 0.2 w0, 5

Facilities mechanical and biological treatment with thermomechanical treatment indoors

150

200

Filtration fields

100

150

Sewage farm

200

300

Biological ponds

150

200

Buildings with circulation channels oxidizing

150

-

Pumping stations

15

20

 

5.11.11. The design, construction and operation of water and sewage systems must be met the requirements for the protection of surface and groundwater pollution, regulated by GOST and GOST 17.1.3.05-82 17.1.3.13-86 [38, 39].

 

6. Warehouses

 

6.1. General requirements.

6.1.1. Storage buildings must meet the requirements of SNIP 2.11.01-85 [57] union norms and technological design of warehouse complexes ONTP 6-85 [76].

When storing the substances and materials in warehouses must comply with the order of their shared storage (Appendix 11.2).

Buildings and warehouses premises must meet the fire safety requirements relevant categories A, B, C and D (depending on the stored substances, materials, products, raw materials and packaging). Distance from open storage to buildings and structures and between warehouses must not be less than specified in Appendix 11.6.

6.2. Warehouses marketable products.

6.2.1. Warehouses marketable products for the industrial site shall be located at least 50 meters from the main shops and buildings at least 100 m from the administrative – commercial buildings.

6.2.2. Loading – unloading at warehouses should be mechanized.

6.3. Fuel depots – Lube.

6.3.1. Facilities for the storage of flammable liquids shall meet the requirements
of SNIP 2.11.03-93 [54], Regulation PPB-01-93 [59] and this Regulation.

6.3.2. Territory fuel depots – lubricants (POL) and petrol stations should have a minimum height of fences 2 m

6.3.3. At fuel depots should be stock extinguishing agents, sufficient to extinguish a fire in the largest tank.

6.3.4. Stationary refueling points (TZP) and special areas for tank, designed for 2 – 3 types of fuel with a margin of at least 5 days should be located at least 36 meters from buildings and structures BCH-01-89 [77].

6.3.5. Warehouses for flammable liquids in tanks and containers should not exceed 4,000 cubic meters. m for underground storage and 200 cc. m in ground storage.

Allowed storage of petroleum products in industrial buildings I and II degree of fire resistance at 30 cu. HIL m and not more than 150 cubic meters. m combustible. The warehouse should have walls with fire 0.75 hour. and exit directly to the outside.

6.3.6. With an area of ​​closed warehouses of flammable liquids and combustible liquids more than 500 m. m warehouses shall be equipped with automatic fire extinguishing, with a smaller area – automatic fire alarm.

6.3.7. The dispensers must be in good condition and comply with the technical conditions of operation.

6.3.8. Minimum distance warehouses oil and petroleum products from buildings, m:

Name

Category and the total capacity of warehouses

IIIb (2000 -10000 cubic m.)

IIIB (2,000 cu m.)

Buildings and Structures

36

30

Warehouses forest

42

36

Railways

40

30

Highways

45

45

Garages, open structures

40

40

Waterworks

75

75

Residential and public buildings

100

100

 

Mobile fueling depots should be installed no closer than 12 m from buildings and structures.

6.3.9. Distance from ground tanks of flammable (HIL) and combustible liquids (GJ) to buildings.

 

 

Buildings and facilities, which are taken to the distance

The distance m

from ground tanks for flammable liquids and combustible

1. Buildings and sites of pumping stations, filling, Filling and dispensing

HIL

GJ

2. Storage buildings and storage areas for flammable liquids and combustible in the receptacle; Slivno loading devices for rail and road tankers tion, weight, other buildings and structures warehouse

10

8

3. Overhead power lines

15

10

 

 

 

Notes.

1. The distances referred to in page 1 and 2, from underground reservoirs is allowed to decrease by 50%.

2. Space control centers and control of underground tanks have allowed near the quiet pools.

 

6.4. Warehouses for industrial purposes.

6.4.1. For all production – storage space must be defined categories explosive and fire hazards, as well as the type of zone on PUE, which should be marked on the doors of premises.

6.4.2. Buildings must be single-storey warehouses coated light type 1 and 2 degree of fire and not have attics.

Ventilation warehouses must comply with sanitary norms CH 245-71 [58].

6.4.3. In a warehouse storage method besstellazhnom materials should be stacked. Opposite doorways must remain passes on the door width, but not less than 1 m, every 6 m is necessary to arrange the longitudinal passages with a minimum width of 0.8 m

6.4.4. Parking and repair of cargo vehicles in warehouses and on the landing stage is not allowed.

6.4.5. Through warehouses, manufacturing facilities and pedestrian gallery should not be laid stopovers mains and pipes and flammable and combustible liquids.

6.4.6. Quicklime should be stored in separate rooms with a floor height above ground level at least 0.2 m pits for slaking allowed to have at least 5 m from the warehouse.

6.4.7. Keep calcium carbide should be in a special container in a dry, ventilated, fireproof room with roof easily discharged. Maximum number of calcium carbide in the same room should be not more than 3000 kg. Keep calcium carbide together with paints and oils prohibited.

6.4.8. Acetylene and oxygen cylinders in an amount more than 10 pieces should be placed at a distance of:

- Not less than 20 m from the industrial buildings;

- Not less than 25 m from the administrative – domestic premises;

- Not less than 100 meters from residential and public buildings in accordance with SNIP 11-89-80 [45].

6.4.9. Cylinders with the combustible gases (hydrogen, acetylene, propane, ethylene, etc.) should be stored separately from oxygen cylinders, compressed air, chlorine, fluorine and other oxidants.

6.4.10. Gas cylinders must be at least 1 m from heaters and at least 5 m from open flames. They must be stored in an upright position with Screw caps and plugs for valves fittings. Room height should be at least 3.2 m

6.4.11. Storage of metal waste is allowed away from buildings at least 15 m

6.4.12. Secure and small hazardous materials (not when burning hazardous products) can be stored in warehouses all degrees of fire resistance (except 5). Particularly dangerous and hazardous materials may be stored in warehouses 1 and 2 degree of fire resistance, mostly in separate buildings.

The order for the storage of substances and materials listed in Appendix 11.2.

6.5. Warehouses chemicals.

6.5.1. Chemicals should be stored according to the principle of uniformity in accordance with their physical – chemical and flammable properties. For this purpose, divided into separate storage compartments fireproof partitions.

6.5.2. Chemicals in small containers must be stored on racks or open-in closets, and large container – stacks.

6.5.3. Bottles, casks, drums with the reagents should be deployed in groups, with breaks in between 1 m in one layer with each clearly marked bottles, drums.

Acid spill from barrels, bottles should be made using siphons and pumps, excluding spatter.

6.5.4. In warehouses and sheds, where acid is stored, you must have water with cranes, as well as ready solutions chalk, lime or soda to neutralize the acid accidentally spilled.

6.5.5. Accommodation on the shelves (the second tier above) chemical materials in beating bowl (banks, bottles), as well as acids and flammable liquids is prohibited.

6.5.6. Wooden racks should be designed for strength and flame retardant and metal – are protected against corrosion and possible sparking in contact with metal packagings.

6.5.7. Chemicals should be stored in closed warehouses or sheds in accordance with special instructions.

6.5.8. Prohibited stored together in one warehouse chemicals interact.

6.5.9. Do not store chemicals in damaged containers. Acid should be stored in a special container: nitrogen – in aluminum barrels, sulfuric – in steel, salt – a rubberized steel or glass bottles, placed in wooden boxes.

6.5.10. Repackaging, acceptance and delivery of chemicals should be carried out in separate rooms.

6.5.11. The premises for warehouses chemicals should be maintained temperature no higher than 25 degrees. C.

6.5.12. Strong acting toxic chemicals should be stored in a special separate rooms equipped with forced ventilation.

6.5.13. Storage of toxic chemicals and quicklime with other chemical substances is prohibited. For storage of quicklime should be given fireproof room, precluding contact with lime water.

6.5.14. The premises for the storage of chemicals that produce explosive vapors and gases with toxic effects or unpleasant odor, ventilation should be carried out from the top and bottom areas of the room to avoid the formation of dead zones.

6.5.15. Floors, walls and supporting constructions or chemicals and all premises used for repackaging, acceptance, issuance and use of chemicals, should a suitable chemical protection.

6.5.16. Walls and ceilings should be trimmed so as not to accumulate and sorbed by dust and fumes and can be cleaned and washed their surface. Floors should have grooves and sufficient slope for drainage and diversion of water into the drain sump with a supply of the latest neutralizing solutions.

6.5.17. In warehouse chemicals allowed to enter only after prior uptime retractable ventilation for 10 minutes. Work in closed warehouses chemicals when the fan stops prohibited. Starter fan should be at the outer door of the warehouse.

6.5.18. In the case of fan failure repair it conducted in at least two workers, equipped with filter masks, respirators (RPG-67A, etc.).

6.5.19. Warehouses chemicals must have:

- Direct telephone communication through the dispatcher or the enterprise management, fire protection and medical care unit;

- Level measurement in stationary storage tanks of liquid chemicals.

Storekeepers and unskilled workers in warehouses should be provided, acid aprons, boots, gloves and goggles.

6.6. Warehouses lesomateralov

6.6.1. Stacking and storage of stock lumber must be in accordance with the requirements of GOST 7319-80.

6.6.2. When storing wood outdoors, they should be placed in stacks area not exceeding 100 square meters. The distance between the stacks and buildings should not be less than 25 m at a height of stacks up to 5 m, 40 m – stacking height of 5 – 10 m, 50 m – at the height of the stacks 10 – 12 m

6.6.3. When storing containers outdoors area occupied by a group of containers shall not exceed 300 square meters. m If the area occupied by the containers exceeds 300 m. m, should provide fire break of at least 6 m

6.6.4. Height of the stack of round timber should be no more than 1/4 of its length, but must not exceed the length of the logs stacked in this stack. Height of the stack at hand piling shall not exceed 1.5 m intervals between piles shall not be less than 1.5 m

6.6.5. Lumber should be stacked, the height of which at ordinary laying should not exceed half the width of the stack, and when laying in cells not greater than the width of the stack.

6.6.6. When stacking round timber must meet the following requirements:

- Separate logs must not protrude beyond it by more than 0.5 m;

- The gasket must be placed at a distance from the ends of the logs is not greater than 1 m on each side;

- Interrow napkin stack height must be placed in the same vertical plane;

- Pads must be placed in a single line, and their ends at the joints should overlap by a length of not less than 1 m;

- Ends (head and tail) ordinary pile should be sloped for what each new row is shorter than the previous log diameter on each side. Recent logs each row are placed in carved jack pads on the ends. Depth of the nest should be no more than half the thickness of the pads;

- Intervals between groups of stacks must comply with fire design standards millyard;

- Devices preventing any rolling logs, should be at the end of the dense, pachkovyh stacks. In the absence of such devices the ends of the stack must have an angle equal to the angle of the natural rolling logs (less than 35 deg.).

6.6.7. Foundations under stacks of lumber should be strong and fit weight stack, not to rainfall, slope and skew stacks. Stacking timber in stacks, not to rainfall, tilt and skew stacks. Stacking timber in the stack must be done so as to prevent their destruction by its own weight and wind.

6.6.8. Neobvyazannye dense stacking packages should have the same transverse thickness of the gasket located on the adjustment at 300 – 400 mm (depending on the width of the boards).

6.6.9. Simultaneous work on a pile of more than two working prohibited. Weight of each are stacked manually boards must comply with the requirements of paragraph 3.5.3 of this Regulation.

6.7. Warehouses coal.

6.7.1. Site for storage of coal should be planned so as to avoid their reheating flood or groundwater.

6.7.2. Coal of different brands should contain separate piles. The state of the coal piles should be conducted regular monitoring (depending on the brand of 2 to
4 – 5 times per month). Stack height should not exceed 10 m

6.7.3. If signs of spontaneous combustion of coal must be sealed and its use in the first place.

6.7.4. Distance from warehouses coal to the fire resistance of 3 buildings must be at least 6 m, and 4 – 5 degree of fire resistance – 12 m

6.7.5. Have stacks of coal near heat sources (parovodoprovodov, hot air ducts, etc.), as well as tunnels over electrical cables is prohibited.

6.7.6. The distance from the stack to the fence or crane ways must be at least 3 m from the head rail and road edge at least 2 m

 

 

7. Administrative – domestic buildings

 

7.1. Administrative and sanitary – domestic premises, equipment must meet the requirements of SNIP 11-92-76 [51] and SNIP 2.09.02-85 [43].

7.2. Sanitary – hygienic requirements for industrial premises must comply with sanitary regulations CH 245-71 [59].

7.3. Auxiliary plant mining enterprises must have sanitary – domestic premises in accordance with the requirements of SNIP 11-92-76 [51], as well as the Uniform Rules § 622 security [70].

Sanitary – domestic premises for employees of motor sections must comply with the Regulations on Occupational Safety in road transport [63].

7.4. Administrative – utility rooms, dining rooms, a health center must be located on the windward side at a distance of not less than 50 m from the open storage of coal, ore crushing – sorting factories, trestles and other dusty areas, but not more than 500 m from the main production buildings. All of these buildings should be surrounded by a strip of tree plantations. (The requirement does not apply to the Far North).

7.5. Have allowed administrative – domestic premises at a greater distance from the place of work, provided delivery workers to the work by special transport.

7.6. In small auxiliary shops permitted by agreement with the State Sanitary Inspectorate arrange sanitary – domestic premises simplified type in justifying the project.

7.7. Locker rooms and showers must have the capacity to operate in the most populous change spent on washing and dressing up no more than
45 minutes.

7.8. Showers or baths should be provided with hot and cold water at the rate of
500 liters per hour to reach the shower and have a mixing device with regulating valves.

Regulating valves must have pointers hot and cold water. Pipes that lead the hot water must be insulated or guarded to a height of 2 m above the floor.

Quality of water used for washing, necessarily consistent with the state sanitary inspection.

7.9. In the shower rooms and dressing area with compartments for storing clothes floors should be water-resistant and non-slip surface, walls and partitions – lined to a height of not less than 2.5 m water-resistant materials that allow for easy cleaning and washing with hot water. In this area, one must have taps and hoses for washing the floor and walls.

7.10. Wardrobes in office container should be standard metal and sanitary.

7.11. With a population of workers from 200 to 500 should provide other health centers, while the number of more than 500 people – health centers.

When the number of employees less than 200 people. should include medical rooms, an area of ​​12 – 18 m. m The room should be equipped with a washbasin with mixer tap hot and cold water.

Composition and floor space and paramedical health centers normalized Russian Ministry of Health.

7.12. When the number of employees per shift more than 200 people. should include the dining room, while the number of less than 30 people. - Room for meals at the rate of 1 m. meters per person, but not less than 12 m. m

8. Industrial sanitation

 

8.1. Ventilation requirements.

8.1.1. Production and auxiliary facilities must be equipped with supply – exhaust ventilation in accordance with the requirements of sanitary norms CH 245-71 [58]. For ventilation can be used as natural ventilation. The use of one or other ventilation must be justified by calculation and defined in the project.

Ventilation systems must be periodically tested and passports.

8.1.2. Workplace air must meet the sanitary – hygienic requirements of GOST 12.1.005-88 [23].

Ultimately – permissible concentration (MPC) of certain hazardous substances in workplace air (GOST 12.1.005.88):

 

Harmful gases and substances

MPC

% By volume

mg / cc. m

1

2

3

GASES

NOx (converted into NO)

0.00026

5

Carbon Monoxide

0.0017

20

hydrogen sulfide

0.00071

10

sulfur dioxide

0.00038

10

acrolein

0.000009

0.2

formaldehyde

0.00004

0.5

acetylene

 -

0.1

ammonia

-

20

acetone

-

200

gasoline

-

100

boric anhydride

-

5

kerosene (based on C)

-

300

alcohols technical

-

10

sulfuric acid

-

1.0

white – spirit

-

300

chlorine

-

1.0

caustic alkalis

-

0.5

phenol

-

5

methane (carbon equivalent)

-

300

DUST:

silicon dioxide content of more than 70%

-

1

with a content of 10 – 70%

-

2

with a content of 2 – 10%

-

4

asbestos-cement

-

6

limestone

-

6

coal with a silica content of less than 2%

-

10

 

 

8.1.3. The air intake for the ventilation system should be carried out from an area where the air content of radioactive and toxic substances as well as dust is not more than 0.1 MAC and 0.3 MAC for work premises.

8.1.4. Exhaust air and local exhausts containing dust or toxic substances, before being discharged to the atmosphere must be cleaned.

8.1.5. Calculation of the required amount of air for ventilation obshcheobmennoj industrial premises should be made for each of harmful factors: moisture, heat, dust, gas, number of employees and take the greatest value.

The air of the working areas should comprise at least 20 volume% oxygen and 0.5% carbon dioxide.

8.1.6. Ventilation systems mounted after reconstruction or overhaul, should be tested to determine their effectiveness and reliability.

For each ventilation system Dolen be drawn passport specifying the technical parameters and the procedure for its operation and maintenance.

8.1.7. During operation, all major process equipment supply and exhaust ventilation systems must operate continuously. When faulty ventilation operation of process equipment, whose work is accompanied by the release of dust and gas is prohibited.

When you stop the air handling unit or increasing the concentration of harmful substances above health standards work indoors should immediately suspend and bring people out of the room.

8.1.8. Air sampling to determine the content in the dust, harmful gases, as well as checking the temperature, humidity and air velocity in the workplace should be carried out systematically as in normal operation, and cases of technological regime change after the reconstruction and repair of ventilation systems.

8.1.9. The air temperature in the working area of ​​industrial premises must comply with the requirements of GOST 12.1.005-88 [23].

In the field of dust, gas and vapor should be arranged local pumps to ensure their removal.

8.1.10. By finishing ventilation and paint shops following additional requirements:

- Ventilation systems and starting equipment must be explosion-proof, the type and level of protection is selected according to the category and group explosive mixture;

- In areas of production, regardless of category A system adopted should provide ventilation exhaust air from the upper zone (directly under the roof) in the amount of not less than once per hour exchange;

- In case of ventilation in the finishing shop (on site), only one permanent local or general dilution one installation is necessary to provide backup fan interlocked with working and automatically turns on when the fan stop working;

- Local pumps air from paint cameras and other technological equipment to unite by a common exhaust system is prohibited.

8.1.11. It is forbidden to combine the venting system from grinding machines with the venting of woodworking equipment.

8.1.12. Entries and entering the production area to prevent drafts should be arranged air curtains or other devices.

8.1.13. Emergency ventilation should be provided to the requirements of engineering design for industrial premises, if possible sudden arrival of large quantities of flammable or hazardous gases, vapors or aerosols.

8.1.14. Airflow for emergency ventilation should be taken according to the requirements of technology. Emergency ventilation should be provided on the basis of providing indoor height of 6 m is not less than 8 times the air changes per hour, and indoor height of more than 6 m – removal of at least 50 cubic meters. m / h at 1 m. m floor area of ​​premises.

8.1.15. The limits of concentration of explosive in the air in some of the most common auxiliary substances industries% by volume are given in the table below:

 

 

Name

Lower

Top

Petrol

0.7

6.0

Kerosene

1.4

7.5

Acetylene

2.2

81.0

Methane

4.0

15.0

Hydrogen

3.3

81.5

Propane

2.2

9.5

Butane

1.5

8.4

 

 

In emergency situations when sudden entry of large amounts of hazardous substances and when the concentration is equal to or more than 20% of the lower explosive limit of the gas environment control system should provide emergency ventilation switch and supplying the sound and light signals.

8.1.16. In areas of pump and compressor stations in categories A and B should provide emergency ventilation specified in paragraph 8.1.14 breathability in addition to air exchange, create basic systems.

8.2. Requirements for light jobs.

8.2.1. Natural and artificial lighting of workplaces enterprise must satisfy the requirements of SNIP 4.11.79 [53].

8.2.2. In all production and ancillary buildings and facilities should be used with maximum efficiency natural light (side, top, or a combination).

8.2.3. Artificial lighting in the production and auxiliary premises should be arranged with incandescent or fluorescent lamps in the form of general lighting with a uniform or localized placement of fixtures and combined (general and local). Application of a local lighting is prohibited.

8.2.4. The workshops should be provided for working artificial lighting. Or the need for emergency evacuation lighting for each plant is determined by the project.

Task lighting should be provided for all premises, buildings and areas of public spaces, designed to work, the passage of people and traffic.

To illuminate the premises of industrial and warehouse buildings tend to be applied discharge lamps low and high pressure (fluorescent, HID, metal halide, xenon). If it is impossible or inappropriate use of gas-discharge light sources not use incandescent lamps.

In categorical premises (with explosive zones) lighting device shall meet the requirements of the SAE in the part relating to explosive installations.

8.2.5. Incandescent and fluorescent lamps used for general and local lighting, must be enclosed in fixtures. Fluorescent lamp without reinforcement is prohibited. Fixtures must meet specifications in accordance with GOST 17677-82E [35].

8.2.6. General lighting enterprise territory, raw material storage, chopping bridges, conveyors, timber yards, warehouses, lumber should be arc, quartz, and other advanced xenon lamps.

8.2.7. When installing fixtures on the towers should have last between sections (stairs) solid flooring, fenced railing around the perimeter. The slope of the stairs between sections should not exceed 60 degrees.

8.2.8. In boilers, substations, workshops and other areas where there may be a work stoppage in case of power work lights emergency lighting must be provided by an independent source of supply in accordance with the requirements of the SAE [66].

Emergency lighting for escape routes from the premises must provide illumination floor main passage and stair treads not less than 0.5 lux.

8.2.9. Voltage to power portable hand lamps should not exceed
42 V. Under adverse conditions, in places with high humidity, with large metal well grounded surfaces (eg, boilers, tanks, etc.) for voltage supply portable and hand lamps should not exceed 12 V.

8.2.10. Illumination of passageways and areas where work is performed, shall be not less than 25% illumination produced lamps for general lighting in the workplace, but not less than 75 lux at discharge lamps and at least 30 lux at filament.

8.2.11. Illumination work surfaces working places located outside of buildings shall be not less than 10 lux.

8.2.12. Illumination sites shops at ground level or pavements should be taken:

- Drives a car – 1 lux;

- Walks – 1 lux;

- Ladders and bridges to navigate – 3 lux;

- Predtsehovye areas (playgrounds, driveways, walkways, parking vehicles) – 2 lux;

- Railroad tracks – 0.5 lux;

- Moving – from 2 to 5 lux, depending on the category;

- Individual turnouts – 1 lux.

Illumination of some rooms and production areas in buildings for various purposes is given in Appendix 11.4.

8.2.13. Outdoor lighting must be independent from the internal network including buildings.

8.2.14. Emergency lighting (indoor and outdoor work places of production) should be provided if off task lighting can cause:

- Fire, poisoning people;

- Violation of the process;

- Disruption of facilities such as power plants, communications centers, control towers and pumps water, sewerage and heat supply, ventilation systems for industrial premises in which the cessation of work is unacceptable.

8.2.15. The smallest work surface lighting premises and territories shops in emergency mode shall be 5% light, normalized for task lighting, but not less than 2 lux inside buildings and not less than 1 lux for area shops.

8.2.16. Evacuation lighting shall be equipped with:

- In places that are dangerous to people’s passage;

- Stairways serving to evacuate people in the premises where the exit of people from the premises on tripping working lighting associated with the risk of injury due to the continuation of production equipment.

8.2.17. Smallest illumination evacuation lighting should be:

- Indoor – 0.5 lux;

- In open areas – 0.2 lux.

Emergency luminaries smokers can be used for evacuation lighting.

8.2.18. For emergency and evacuation lighting should be used incandescent and fluorescent lamps (in areas with minimum air temperature of not less than
5 deg. C).

Xenon lamps, HID, metal halide, sodium lamps for emergency and evacuation lighting use is prohibited.

8.2.19. For maintenance of lamps and skylights natural light smokers should be provided special tools (mobile towers, ladders, platforms, ladders, cradles the suspension device, etc.).

Installation and cleaning fixtures, changing blown bulbs and repair lighting circuits must be performed only electricians and de-energized.

8.3. Measures to combat industrial dust

8.3.1. Industrial site, its layout and landscaping must comply with sanitary standards and requirements of SNIP 11.89-80 [45].

8.3.2. The mouth of the mines (tunnels) with the casting must be outside the territories of the main shops and administrative – domestic premises and downwind by the prevailing wind patterns.

8.3.3. To reduce the dust on the roads and loading operations the ore stockpile should apply measures binding (suppression) dust using water or chemicals.

8.3.4. Dust-place in the transshipment nodes, crushing and screening plants must be equipped with insulated covers and suctions air handling units with air cleaning before being discharged into the atmosphere.

8.3.5. Clean the dust on the premises and shops should be using pneumatic suction devices or gidrosmyva. In this latter case must have a watertight floor covering and the slope of at least 0.02 (1.8 deg.).

8.4. Permissible levels of noise and vibration

8.4.1. The noise level in the workplace premises shall not exceed the permissible quantities of regulated Sanitary Norms CH 245-71 [58] and GOST 12.1.003-83 [24].

8.4.2. (Zones) in excess of 85 dBA noise level should be marked with safety signs and busy working on such sites are provided with appropriate personal hearing protection.

8.4.3. Level of vibration in the workplace and working with local vibration machines and must meet the requirements of GOST 12.1.012-90 [12] and health norms
CH 245-71 [58].

8.4.4. Sound pressure levels in the workplace should not exceed the values ​​specified by GOST 12.1.001-89 [27].

8.5. Requirements for electromagnetic, radiation and laser safety.

8.5.1. When working in the area of ​​electromagnetic fields (EMF) must comply with the requirements of GOST 12.1.006-84 [25].

8.5.2. Work in the area of ​​ionizing radiation (IR) and radiation (RI) is subject to the Sanitary Rules OSP-72/87 and hygiene regulations GN 2.6.1.054-96.

8.5.3. At mines classified as dangerous radiation production shall be carried out radiation monitoring in the workplace and in the areas of residence of people agreed with the sanitary control bodies, with the registration results in a special journal. Workers and officials (professionals) have to undergo additional training in an approved program and knowledge tests.

8.5.4. Maximum permissible levels of ionizing radiation must comply with the Radiation Safety Standards NRB-96.

8.5.5. Laser radiation does not exceed the values ​​GOST 12.1040-83 [26].

 

 

9. Fire protection and facilities

 

9.1. Fire protection of buildings and structures on the surface mines, pits and their categories on the fire hazard shall comply with building regulations SNIP 2.01.02-85 [44] Rules of fire safety in the Russian Federation [59] and GOST 12.1.004-91 [ 1].

Each facility should be instructions on fire safety measures for each explosive and fire-hazardous area (shop, shop) approved the technical head of the company in consultation with a legally.

Each enterprise must have data about fire danger used in technological processes of substances and materials in accordance with GOST 12.1.004-89 [32]. Category premises and buildings on fire and explosion hazards must comply with NPB-105 95.M. 1996

9.2. In industrial buildings, businesses need to organize internal fire water.

Internal fire water is not provided: in buildings and premises in which the use of water can cause fire, explosion or fire propagation (warehouses calcium carbide, sodium, potassium, etc.) in buildings and areas of less than 5000 cubic meters. m in maslopodvalah, maslotunnelyah, warehouses flammable liquids and combustible; production buildings I and II degree of fire resistance of non-combustible materials categories D and E, irrespective of their size and in industrial buildings III – V degree of fire resistance of not more than 5000 cubic meters. m categories D, E (in the buildings category D or D facilities in categories A, B and C, of ​​enclosed firebreak type 1, 500 cc. meters or more shall be equipped with fire-fighting water supply) in the production and auxiliary buildings for which provides fire fighting from tanks (tanks, reservoirs).

9.3. Fire water supply should be combined with economic – drinking or industrial water supply. External networks of water pipes, providing fire needs to be circular. For detached buildings allowed gasket deadlock lines totaling not more than 200 m, irrespective of water for fire fighting. When the number of internal fire hydrants in the building until 12 allowed spur lines longer than 200 m in the unit fire tanks or reservoirs, water tower or tank at the end of a cul de sac. Length of repair parts culverts in two lines should be: when laying water pipes in two lines or more, and in the absence of switching – no more than 5 km, in the presence of switching – equal to the length between switching stations, but not more than 5 km, when laying water pipes in one line – not more than 3 km.

9.4. Fire hydrants should have along highways at a distance of not more than 2.5 m from the edge of the roadway, but no closer than 5 m from the walls, in order to set fire truck, have allowed hydrants on the roadway.

However, the installation of hydrants on the spur of the water line is not allowed.

Placement of fire hydrants in the water supply network should provide firefighting any served by the network building, structure or part thereof from at least two hydrants – at the rate of water on external firefighting 15 l / s or more, and one – at a flow rate of less than 15 l / s considering laying hose lines no longer than
200 m on paved roads.

9.5. Fire stations should be placed on areas adjacent to the roads. Location of fire stations selected from calculating the radius of service enterprises. Radii fire service depot should be taken: 2 km – for businesses with buildings of category A, B and C, over 50% of the site area, 4 km – for businesses with buildings of category A, B and C that are up to 50% of the land, and enterprises with buildings categories D and E. In the case of exceeding a specified radius at the site enterprises must provide additional fire stations. Radii fire service posts made the same as that for fire stations.

9.6. In the presence of on-site buildings and facilities of enterprises III, IIIb, IV, IVa, V degrees of fire resistance with a built-up area is more than 50% of the total development of the enterprise, the radii of fire service depots and posts should be reduced by 40%.

9.7. Fire stations allowed to build in production and auxiliary building categories B, D and E. Departure from fire stations and posts should be located so that fire trucks leaving never crossed the main streams of traffic and pedestrians.

9.8. Water towers have to be adapted for the selection of water fire appliances at any time of year.

9.9. Fire breaks between open warehouses, buildings (structures) on the construction site must meet the requirements of SNIP 11-89-80 [45] and Appendix 11.6.

9.10. In fire breaks prohibited store combustible construction materials and equipment in the combustible packaging after hours, as well as larger than the daily requirement of working hours; noncombustible construction materials are allowed to store within these gaps while providing free entrances to the buildings.

9.11. Area under open storage of flammable materials, as well as industrial, warehouse and ancillary buildings of flammable and nonflammable materials shall be free from dry grass, weeds, bark and wood chips.

9.12. Warehouses timber must be equipped with fire-fighting water supply high-pressure ring network. In winter, it should be emptied.

Latches on the water mains must be installed so that in case of failure on any part of the aqueduct was turned off at the same time no more than two fire monitors.

9.13. Distance from the stacks of timber to fire hydrants must be at least 8 m, and a water intake covers fire reservoirs within 8 – 30 m

9.14. Warehouses timber must be equipped with an electric fire alarm related to the placement of fire protection or control room. They must meet the requirements of SNIP 2.11.06-91.

9.15. Warehouses and container wood products in enclosed spaces shall be fitted with automatic fire alarm, and at the warehouse area of ​​1500 sq. m and more – automatic fire extinguishing in accordance with the requirements of GOST 12.3.046-91.

9.16. Combustible building materials (Lesopilomaterialy, roofing, roofing material, etc.), product design from combustible materials, and equipment and supplies in a combustible packaging when stored in open areas should be placed in piles or groups of an area not exceeding 100 square meters. m gap between stacks (groups) and from them to the buildings and structures should be in accordance with Appendix 11.6.

9.17. Temporary structures have from other buildings under construction and at least 18 m or deaf fire walls.

9.18. Minimum cost for internal firefighting water for industrial and warehouse buildings should be:

 

-

-

5 to 50

50 to 200

200

400

400

800

I and II

A, B, C

2 x 2,5

2 x 5

2 x 5

3 x 5

4 x 5

III

In

2 x 2,5

2 x 5

2 x 5

-

-

III

D, E

-

2 x 2,5

2 x 2,5

-

-

IV and V

In

2 x 2,5

2 x 5

-

-

-

IV and V

D, E

-

2 x 2,5

-

-

-

 

Norms primary means of fire on buildings and outbuildings are given in Appendix 11.5.

 

 

10. Responsibility for violation of safety rules

 

10.1. Officials (professionals) subsidiary plants of mining enterprises, as well as officials (experts), performs design, engineering and scientific – research work, guilty of violating the requirements of this Regulation, shall be liable in accordance with the law.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Appendix 11.1

 

COMMON ABBREVIATIONS

 

PB - safety rules

PTE - the technical operation

MPC - maximum permissible concentration

NRB - radiation safety standards

RB - Electrical Code

TZP - fuel – petrol station

HIL - flammable liquids

Combustible - flammable liquids

SDYAV - highly toxic substances acting

Engineering - engineering – technical workers

SNIP - building regulations

SSBT - system safety standards

GOST - public-Union standard

POL - fuels – Lubricants

NTP, ONTP - norm of technological design

TO-2, 3,4 - maintenance

TR-1 - current repair

PTOL - paragraph maintenance and locomotives

ERP - Project Works

PPR - Planning – Preventative Maintenance

RU - switchgear

PEEP - the rules of operation of electrical installations

PTBEP - safety regulations for the operation of electrical consumers

EMF - Electromagnetic fields

VSN - departmental building codes

AI - ionizing radiation

RI - Radiation Incident

 


Appendix 11.2

 

ORDER

JOINT STORAGE MATERIAL

 

Group

Substances

Substances in this group are not permitted to storage compatibility with the following groups of substances

1

2

3

I

Substances liable to form explosive mixtures such as potassium nitrate, sodium nitrate, barium nitrate, potassium perchlorate, bertoletova salt, calcium nitrate, etc.

IIa, IIb, IIc, III, IVa, IVb, V, VI

II

Compressed and liquefied gases:

 

a) flammable and explosive:acetylene, hydrogen, methane, ammonia, hydrogen sulfide, chloromethyl, ethylene oxide, butylene, butane, propane, etc.

I, IIa, III, IVa, IVb, V, VI

b) inert and non-combustible gases:argon, helium, neon, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, etc.

III, IVa, IVb, V, VI

c) gases comburent:oxygen and air are compressed and liquefied

I, IIb, III, IVa, IVb, V, VI

III

Spontaneously combustible and pyrophoric from air and water substance

 

a) the potassium, sodium, calcium, calcium carbide, calcium phosphide, sodiumphosphorous, zinc dust, sodium peroxide, barium peroxide, aluminum dust, powder, Raney-type nickel catalyst, etc., white or yellow phosphorus

I, IIa, IIb, IIc, IVa, IVb, V, VI

b) triethylaluminum, diethylaluminum chloride, triisobutylaluminum, etc.

I, IIa, IIb IIb, IIIa, IVa, IVb, V, VI

IV

Flammable and combustible materials

 

a) a liquid – petrol, benzene, carbon disulfide, acetone, turpentine, toluene, xylene, amyl acetate, light crude oil, naphtha, kerosene, alcohols, diethyl ether, organic oils

I, IIa, IIb, IIc, III, IVb, V, VI

b) Solids – celluloid, red phosphorus, naphthalene

I, IIa, IIb, III, IVa, V, VI

V

Substances which may causeinflammation: bromine, nitric acid and sulfuric acid, chromic anhydride, potassium permanganate

I, IIa, IIb, III, IVa, V, VI

VI

Easily flammable materials: cotton, wool, jute, hemp, sulfur, peat, nesvezheobozhzhenny charcoal, carbon black plant and animal

I, IIa, IIb, IIc, III, IVa, IVb, V

 

 

Note.

If you must store fire – and explosive substances not listed in the table, the question of their shared custody can be resolved after revealing the extent of their fire and explosion hazard, and in agreement with the Supervision Authority.

 

 

 


Appendix 11.3

 

Method of laying MATERIALS

 

N p / p

Material, product, equipment

Required method of laying

Limiting the height of the stack cells rack

Additional instructions for installation

1

2

3

4

5

1 Roundwood

In the stack

1.5 m

With gaskets and installation stops against rolling
2 Lumber

In the stack

ordinary styling

0.5 width of the stack

stacking cells

The width of the stack

3 Pipe diameter mm
300

In the stack

3.0 m

On pads and strips with end stops
more than 300

In the stack

3.0 m

In the saddle without pads
4 Brick packaged on pallets

In the stack

2 tiers

5 Brick in containers

In one series

1 tier

6 Brick without containers

In a cell or a stack

1.7 m

7 Foundation blocks and blocks of basement walls

In the stack

2.6 m

With pads and spacers between rows
8 Slabs

In the stack

2.5 m

With pads and spacers between rows
9 Girders and columns

In the stack

2.0 m

With pads and spacers between rows
10 Building blocks

In the stack

2 tiers

With pads and spacers between rows
11 Panel:
wall In a tape or pyramid
partition In the cassette vertically
12 Blocks chutes

In the stack

2.5 m

13 Glass in boxes and web material

Vertically in
one row

-

On supports
14 Sanitation, ventilation units

In the stack

2.5 m

With pads and spacers between rows
15 Heating devices (radiators), etc.) in the form of individual sections in the assembled form or

In the stack

1.0 m

16 Bulky and heavy equipment and parts of it

In one series

Height of equipment

On supports
17 Tile materials (asbesttsementnye plates, sheets and plates asbesttsementnye fiber asbesttsementnye flat)

At the foot

1.0 m

18 Plates asbesttsementnye hollow

In stack 15 rows

19 Tile cement – sand and clay

In a pile on the edge

1.0 m

With gaskets
20 Black rolling metals (steel sheet, channels, I-beams, profiled steel)

In the stack

1.5 m

With pads and linings
21 Melkosortnyj metal

In rack

1.5 m

 

 

 


Appendix 11.4

 

Coverage of some facilities and industrial

Land in various buildings

 

N p / p

Facilities and industrial sites

Rationing light plane and its height from the floor, m

Discharge of visual work

Illuminance lux

when combined light

at a total light

1

2

3

4

5

6

Enterprise car service

1.

Washing and cleaning vehicles

Paul

VI

-

150

2.

Car Maintenance

Paul

Va

300

200

3.

Daily maintenance vehicles

In – by car

VIIIa

-

75

4.

Osmotrovye ditches

D – down machine

VI

-

150

5.

Engine, aggregate, mechanical, electrical department and power devices

D – 0.8

IVa

750

300

6.

Blacksmithing, welding – sheet metal and separating mednichnoe

D – 0.8

IVb

500

200

7.

Joinery and wallpaper department

D – 0.8

Va

300

200

8.

Repair and installation of tires

D – 0.8

Va

300

200

9.

Storage space for cars

Paul

VIIIb

-

20

10.

Open storage areas for vehicles

Paul

XII

-

5

Warehouses

11.

Warehouses bulky items and bulk materials (sand, wood, cement, etc.)

Paul

-

-

20

12.

Material, tools and the like warehouses

Paul

VIIIa

-

75

13.

Warehouses and containers of chemical (acids, alkalis, lacquers, paints and flammable liquids, etc.):a) filling in stockb) without filling in stock

Paul

Paul

VIIIa

VIIIb

-

-

30

20

Boilers

14.

Boiler room:
a) service platforms boilersb) platforms and stairs boilers and economizers, passes for boilers

In – on furnaces, zatvorkah, feeders

Paul

VI

-

100

-

100

10

15.

Dymososov premises, fans, bunker office

D – 0.8

VI

-

100

16.

Condensation, chemical water treatment, deafratornaya, boiler

Paul

VI

-

100

17.

Space fuel

D – 0.8

VI

-

100

18.

Nadbunkernoe room

D – 0.8

VIIIb

-

20

Electrical rooms

19.

Camera transformers and reactors

B – 1.5

VI

-

50

20.

Switchgear room
a) on the front panel with continuous service (on the panel)

B – 1.5

IVd

-

200

b) the same, but with periodic maintenance (on the panel)

B – 1.5

IVd

-

150

c) the back side panel (panel)

B – 1.5

VI

-

100

21.

Premises capacitors

In – the capacitors

IVd

-

100

22.

Space for batteries

D – 0.5

VI

-

50

23.

Shop for repairs battery

D – 0.8

IVb

500

200

24.

Switchboard in residential and public buildings

B – 1.5

VI

-

50

Facilities for electric vehicles and electric

25.

Space for parking and charging

Paul

VI

-

50

26.

Room for repair of electric and electric

Paul

IVb

500

200

27.

Electrolyte and distillyatornaya

D – 0.8

VI

-

150

Space utilities and other |

 technological facilities

28.

Space for ventilation equipment (except for air conditioners)

D – 0.8

VIIIb

-

20

29.

Space for air conditioners and pumps, heat points

D – 0.8

VIIIa

-

75

30.

Machine rooms-tion pump, compressor, blowera) permanently manned staffb) no permanent staff on duty

D – 0.8

D – 0.8

VI

VI

-

-

150

100

31.

Premises for utility networks

Paul

-

-

20

Index path

32.

Bright large scale and medium-sized

In – on devices

IVd

300

150

33.

The same dark

In – on devices

IVb

400

200

34.

Scales small sizes

In – on devices

IIIc

750

300

Galleries and tunnels

35.

Busbars and conveyors

Paul

VIIIv

-

20

36.

Кабельные,теплофикации-онные,масляные,пульпопроводов, water

Paul

VIIIv

-

10

 

 

Note.

Legend in the third column: In – vertical, T – horizontal.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Appendix 11.5

 

STANDARDS

Primary fire extinguishing equipment for new building

And renovated buildings, structures

And outbuildings

 

 

 

Buildings, premises, warehouses and facilities

U edited

By primary means of fire

fire extinguishers

boxes with 0.5 cu. m with sand and shovel

water barrels emkostyu250 l and 2 buckets

felt, asbestos blanket or felts

2 x 2 m

1

2

3

4

5

6

Constructed and reconstructed buildings

200 m. m of floor area

1 <1>

1

1

-

Scaffolding

For every 20 m length of forests (on the floors)

1 <1>

-

-

-

For every 100 m length of forests (on the floors)

-

-

1 <2>

-

Space offices

200 m. m of floor area

1 <1>

-

-

-

Premises carpentry and woodworking shops, workshops

Per 100 sq.m.

1 <3>

1

1

-

Enclosed storage timber and fuel (hemp, hemp, etc.)

100 m. m

1 <2>

-

1

-

Household storage in the presence of combustible materials

100 m. m

1 <2>

-

1

-

Outdoor storage timber

HA3 00 m. m

1 <4>

-

1

-

Cover with burns combustible insulation or roofing

200 m. m

1

1

1

-

Outdoor storage of roundwood

500 m. m area of ​​the warehouse

1 <4>

-

1

-

Enclosed storage noncombustible materials

400 m. m square

1 <3>

-

-

-

Tare storage of flammable and combustible liquids

50 m. m of floor area

1 <4>

1 <4>

-

-

Warehouse calcium carbide

100 m. m of floor area

-

1

-

-

Warehouse cylinders with compressed, liquefied and dissolved gases

200 m. m of floor area

1

-

-

-

Working platform for concrete stem tall concrete pipes

-

3

1

1

-

Overlap in building a protective structures

-

2

-

1

-

Cradle assembly for the construction of cooling towers (each cradle 2 pcs.)

-

8

-

-

-

Storage and preparation of working compositions anticorrosive and waterproofing materials

-

3

1

-

3

Installation location of heat generators heaters

Unit

3

1

-

-

Open car parks

100 sq.m.

1

1

-

1

Gas welding and electric welding shops

200 sq.m.

1

1

-

-

Machine shops

100 sq.m.

1

1

-

-

Roundhouse

200 sq.m.

1

1

-

1

Battery room

Per room

1

-

-

-

Warehouses flammable liquids and combustible

200 sq.m.

2

1

-

1

Warehouses hard rock materials (peat, coal)

500 sq.m.

2

-

2

-

Warehouses chemical reagents

300 sq.m.

2

1

-

1

Electric Power

200 sq.m.

1

1

-

1

 

 

_______________________________

<1> But at least two fire extinguishers on the floor.

<2> But at least two barrels on the floor.

<3> But at least two fire extinguishers on each workshop or

separate warehouse.

<4> But at least two fire extinguishers on each warehouse.

<5> But at least two fire extinguishers and a sandbox. In

sand box should be one felted size 1,5 x 1,5 m

 

 

 

 

Appendix 11.6

 

Distance from the open warehouse to BUILDINGS

And structures, and between warehouses, M

 

Warehouses

Buildings and structures in the fire resistance

Warehouses

I, II, IIIa

III

IIIb, IVa V, VI

coal

milled peat

sod peat

wood products (sawn wood and round)

wood chips and sawdust

HIL

GJ

capacity, kt

capacity, thousand cubic meters. m

1 -

<1

1 -

<1

1 -

<1

1 – |

<1

1 -

<1

1 -

0.6

5 -

3 -

<3

100

 

100

 

10

 

10

 

5

2

-1

0.6

 

10

5

 

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

1. Coal capacity, tons:  
1 to 100

6

6

12

x

x

12

12

6

6

24

18

24

18

18

12

6

18

12

6

<1

not standardized

6

12

x

x

12

12

6

6

24

18

24

18

18

12

6

12

6

6

2. Milled peat capacity, tons:
1 to 10

24

30

36

12

12

x

x

x

x

42

36

42

36

42

36

30

42

36

30

<1

18

24

30

12

12

x

x

x

x

42

36

42

36

42

36

30

42

36

30

3. Sod peat capacity, tons:
1 to 10

18

18

24

6

6

x

x

x

x

42

36

42

36

36

30

24

36

30

24

<1

12

15

15

6

6

x

x

x

x

42

36

42

36

36

30

24

36

30

24

4. Lesomateria-fishing (round and sawn) of firewood and container, thous. m:
1 to 10

15

24

30

24

24

42

42

42

42

x

x

36

30

42

36

30

42

36

30

<1

12

15

18

18

18

36

36

36

36

x

x

36

30

36

30

24

36

30

24

5. Chips and sawdust capacity, thousand cubic meters. m:
1 to 5

18

30

36

24

24

42

42

42

42

36

36

x

x

42

36

30

42

36

30

<1

15

18

24

18

18

36

36

36

36

30

24

x

x

36

30

24

36

30

24

6. Flammable liquid capacity, thousand cubic meters. m:
1 to 2

30

30

36

18

18

42

42

36

36

42

36

42

36

x

x

x

x

x

x

0.6 to 1

24

24

30

12

12

36

36

30

30

36

30

36

30

x

x

x

x

x

x

<0.6

18

18

24

6

6

30

30

24

24

30

24

30

24

x

x

x

x

x

x

7. Flammable liquids capacity, thousand cubic meters. m:
5 to 10

30

30

36

18

18

42

42

36

36

42

36

42

36

x

x

x

x

x

x

3 to 5

24

24

30

12

12

36

36

30

30

36

30

36

30

x

x

x

x

x

x

<3

18

18

24

6

6

30

30

24

24

30

24

30

24

x

x

x

x

x

x

 

 

Note.

Sign x means that the placement of the same materials (including milled and sod peat or flammable and combustible liquids) in two or more warehouses are not allowed.

 

 

 

 

Appendix 11.7

 

LIST

GOST, SNIP, regulations and instructions,

Used in compiling RULES

 

1. GOST 12.1.004-91 SSLS Fire safety. General requirements.

2. GOST 12.4.001-89 SSLS Remedies working. General requirements and classification.

3. GOST 12.3.002-75 SSLS manufacturing processes. General safety requirements (with rev. 1980, 1991.).

4. GOST 12.3.035-84 SSLS Building. Paint work. Safety requirements.

5. GOST 12.3.016-87 SSLS Building. Anticorrosion work. Safety requirements.

6. GOST 12.2.016-81 SSLS Compressor equipment. General safety requirements (with rev. 1987).

7. GOST 9238-83 Dimensions approximation buildings and rolling stock 1520 (1524) mm.

8. GOST 9720-76 Dimensions approximation buildings and rolling stock gauge 750 mm.

9. GOST 12.2.022-80 Conveyors. General safety requirements (with rev. 1986, 1990.).

10. GOST 12.3.009-76 SSLS Works cargo – handling. General safety requirements (with rev. 1982).

11. GOST 12.4.107-82 SSLS ropes harnesses.

12. GOST 12.1.012-90 Vibration safety. General requirements.

13. GOST 12.2.009-80 Metal-working machines. General safety requirements (with rev. 1988, 1992.).

14. GOST 12.3.036-84 SSLS Flame metalworking. Safety Requirements (rev. 1990).

15. GOST 12.3.004-75 SSLS Heat treatment of metals. General safety requirements (with rev. 1982).

16. GOST 12.2.017-93 SSLS Equipment forging – forging. General requirements for safety.

17. GOST 12.3.042-88 SSLS Woodworking. General requirements for safety.

18. GOST 12.3.040-86 SSLS Building. Roofing and waterproofing work. Safety requirements.

19. GOST 12.3.020-80 SSLS the movement of goods in the factories. Safety Requirements (rev. 1988).

20. GOST 12.3.038-85 SSLS Building. Of thermal insulation of equipment and pipelines. Safety requirements.

21. GOST 12.1.019-79 SSLS Electrical. General requirements and range of types of protection (with rev. 1986).

22. GOST 12.3.003-86 SSLS electric welding works. Safety Requirements (rev. 1989).

23. GOST 12.1.005-88 SSLS General sanitary – hygienic requirements to the working area (with rev. 1989).

24. GOST 12.1.003-83 SSLS noise. General safety requirements (with rev. 1989).

25. GOST 12.1.006-84 SSLS radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Permissible levels in the workplace and requirements for monitoring (with rev. 1988).

26. GOST 12.1.040-83 SSBT. Laser safety. General (with rev. 1986).

27. GOST 12.1.001-89 SSLS Ultrasound. General requirements for safety.

28. GOST 12.3.015-78 SSLS Works timber. Safety Requirements (rev. 1982, 1984, 1988.).

29. GOST 12.3.025-80 SSLS metal cutting. Safety Requirements (rev. 1988).

30. GOST 12.2.013.0-91 SSLS Machinery Electric hand. General safety requirements and test methods.

31. GOST 12.2.007.9-93 electrothermal equipment. Safety requirements.

32. GOST 12.1.004-89 Fire hazard substances and materials used in manufacturing processes.

33. GOST 12.0.004-90 SSLS training on safety. General Provisions.

34. GOST 12.2.026.093 Woodworking equipment. General safety requirements for the design.

35. GOST 17677-82E Fixtures. General specifications.

36. GOST 12.2.003-91 Industrial equipment. General requirements for safety.

37. GOST 12.3.006-75 Operation of water and sewer facilities and networks. General requirements for safety.

38. GOST 17.1.3.05-82 Conservancy. Hydrosphere. General requirements for the protection of surface and groundwater from pollution by oil and oil products.

39. GOST 17.1.3.13-86 Conservancy. Hydrosphere. General requirements for the protection of surface waters from pollution.

40. GOST 12.4.087-84 construction helmets. Specifications.

41. GOST 12.4.089-86 Safety belts. General specifications.

42. SNIP 3.01.04.87 Commissioning of completed construction projects. Basic Provisions (rev. 1988).

43. SNIP 2.09.02.85 Industrial buildings industrial enterprises (with rev. 1989, 1991.).

44. SNIP 2.01.02.85 Fire norm.

45. SNIP 11-89-80 master plans for industrial enterprises (with rev. N 1, 2 and 3, the BLS N 4-85, N 3 – ’87, N 11 – ’90).

46. SNIP 2.05.07-91 Industrial vehicles (No. 1996).

47. SNIP 111-4-80 Safety in construction.

48. SNIP 2.04.07-86 thermal network.

49. SNIP 2.04.02-84 Water. External networks and facilities (with rev. N 1 and N 2 BLS 9, 11 – ’85, N 9 – ’86, N 12 – ’87).

50. SNIP 2.04.01-85 Internal water supply and sewerage of buildings (with rev. 1992).

51. SNIP 11-92-76 Ancillary buildings and industrial facilities. Design standards.

52. SNIP 2.04.05-91 Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (with rev. 1994).

53. SNIP 4.11.79 Natural and artificial lighting (with rev. 1986).

54. SNIP 2.11.03-93 Warehouses oil and petroleum products. Fire regulations.

55. SNIP 32-01-85 Railways 1520 mm (with rev. NN 1, 2 and 3 BLS N 11 – ’90).

56. SNIP 2.09.04-87 Administrative and domestic buildings (with rev. 1995).

57. SNIP 2.11.01-85 Storage buildings (with rev. 1991).

58. CH 245-71. Sanitary norms of industrial design (rev. 1978 N 61 and N 222).

59. Fire safety regulations in the Russian Federation. PPB-01-93, Moscow, 1997, approved by the Russian Ministry of Internal Affairs 16/10/93.

60. Common safety rules for splitting: sorting mineral processing and agglomeration of ores and concentrates. M., NGOs, MBT 1992.

61. Safety rules for the gas industry. Edition 3 rev. N 1 and 2 approved Gostgortechnadzor Russia 02.11.92 and 14.12.92, 17.07.90 agreed with the Trade Unions.

62. Rules for design and safe operation of steam and hot water boilers. M., NGOs, MBT, 1994, approved by the Russian State Technical Supervision 28.05.93 N 12.

63. Regulations on labor protection in road transport. POT PO-200-01-95, approved by Order of the Ministry of Transport of Russia 13.12.95 N 106.

64. Safety rules when working with tools and devices. M. Energoatomizdat, 1986, approved by the USSR Ministry of 04/30/85.

65. Rules for protection of surface waters against pollution of wastewater, approved. State Committee of the USSR, 1991

66. Electrical Code (PUE), approved. USSR Ministry of 05/10/79 (as amended. 1982, 1984.).

67. Safety rules for the operation of electrical consumers (PTBEP), approved. Glavgosenergonadzorom Russia 21.12.84.

68. Rules of Operation of Electrical Equipment (PEEP), approved. Glavgosenergonadzorom Russia 31.03.92.

69. EPO in the development of mineral deposits open method. M., NGOs MBT, 1992.

70. EPO during the mining of ore, non-metallic and placer mineral deposits underground mining. M., NGOs MBT, 1996.

71. PTB and Health Standards for paint shops and railway stations enterprises transport. Approved. IPU and the Central Trade Union 28.11.88 N TSTVR/4665.

72. PTB for shinomontazhnyh companies Minavtotrans RSFSR, 10/18/77.

73. ONTP-01-91. Union norms of technological design of road transport enterprises, approved. Minavtotransporta RSFSR 08/07/91.

74. ONTP-07-83. Union norms of technological design machining and assembly departments of engineering, instrument-making and metalworking.

75. NTP repair economy non-ferrous metallurgy, approved. MCM USSR 18.12.85 N 553.

76. ONTP 6-85. Union norms of technological design of warehouses and repair – mechanical workshops mines, mines and concentrators mining.

77. BCH-01-89. Departmental building codes Minavtotransa RSFSR VA N 15/10.

78. Position on the issuance of special permits (licenses) for the activities associated with increased risk of industrial production (s) and work, as well as security for subsoil use. Approved. Gostgortechnadzor Russia 03.07.93 N 20.

79. Regulation on the protection of groundwater. M. VSEGINGEO, 1984.

80. GOST 12.1.030-81. Electrical. Protective grounding and vanishing (with rev. 1987.).

81. Rules of certification of welders and welding engineers, Moscow, 1998 (Regulation Instead welder qualification, approved. Gostgortechnadzor Russia 18.03.93 N 7 and Regulation welder qualification of equipment and pipelines of nuclear power plants
PNAEG-7-003-87, approved. Gosatomenergonadzora USSR 02.04. 84).

82. Sanitary rules and norms for the protection of surface waters against pollution SanPin 4630-88.